Metal-enclosed gas-insulated switchgear 8DQ1

for rated voltage up to 550 kV

Operating instructions
Standard
923 00650 174 C

Pos : 1.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /Dec kbl att/Module/1 Bild D eck bl att @ 38\mod_1543575894704_0.docx @ 763109 @ @ 1
Pos : 1.2 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /Dec kbl att/Module/2 C opyright 2021 @ 45\m od_1603438784892_18.docx @ 896516 @ @ 1

© Siemens Energy, 2021

All rights reserved.
Pos : 1.3 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1
Pos : 1.4 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /Dec kbl att/Module/3 H ersteller nac hw eis 2021 @ 45\m od_1603438890071_18.docx @ 896540 @ @ 1

The manufacturer of this switchgear

Siemens Energy Global GmbH & Co. KG

has introduced and applies an environmental management system in accordance with ISO 14001 and a quality
management system in accordance with DIN ISO 9001.
The environmental management system was certified by DQS GmbH (German society for the certification of
management systems) for the first time in 1996 and the quality management system for the first time in 1989.

The manufacturer's electrical testing facilities have been accredited by the German Accreditation Council in
accordance with DIN EN ISO/IEC 17025 since 1992.

Reproduction of this document or any part thereof in any form, as well as transmission to third parties is not
permitted without prior written approval from Siemens Energy Global GmbH & Co. KG. Should you require
further copies of these operating instructions, please order them through the responsible Siemens Energy
representative by specifying the order number and the title that appear on the title page.

Published by:

Siemens Energy Global GmbH & Co. KG

Transmission
Nonnendammallee 104
D-13629 Berlin

Subject to change without prior notice.

Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany.
08.2021
Legal provisions

Warning concept
This manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety, as well as to
protect the product and connected equipment. Notices for the safety of operating personnel and to prevent
property damage are indicated by a warning triangle.
In cases where two or more hazard levels apply, it is always the warning notice for the most severe level that
is used. A warning notice with a warning triangle warning of personal injury may also contain a warning of
damage to property.

Safety instructions in the operating instructions [ 0.2.3]

Qualified personnel
The product/system associated with this documentation shall only be handled by personnel qualified under
consideration of the associated documentation for the respective task, especially the safety and warning
notices contained therein. Qualified personnel are able due to their training and experience to recognize the
risks in working with these products/systems and to prevent possible hazards.

Intended use of products from Siemens Energy Global GmbH & Co. KG

Warning!
Products from Siemens Energy Global GmbH & Co. KG may only be used
for the applications specified in the associated technical documentation.
Any third-party products and components used must be approved or
recommended by Siemens.
Proper transport, storage, erection, assembly, installation, commissioning,
operation and maintenance are essential for safe and trouble-free operation
of the products. The specified environmental requirements must be
complied with. Notices in the associated documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
Unless specified otherwise, the name and the brand Siemens stand for
Siemens Energy Global GmbH & Co. KG or the Siemens Energy brand.
All designations marked with the trademark symbol ® are registered trademarks of
Siemens Energy Global GmbH & Co. KG. The other designations in this document can be trademarks, the
use of which by third parties for their own purposes may infringe upon the rights of the owners.
Siemens Energy is a trademark licensed by Siemens AG.

Exemption from liability

The contents of this document have been checked for consistency with the described hardware and software.
However, since deviations cannot be entirely precluded, complete consistency cannot be guaranteed. The
information contained in this document is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections incorporated into
subsequent editions.
Pos : 1.5 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1
Pos : 1.6 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /Dec kbl att/Module/4 Inhal tsv erzeic hnis - 01 Übersc hrift @ 1\mod_1332937910136_18.docx @ 12310 @ @ 1

Table of Contents
Pos : 1.7 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /Dec kbl att/Module/5 Inhal tsv erzeic hnis - 02 Aufbau @ 4\m od_1339585540705_0.docx @ 19100 @ @ 1

0 Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 0-15

0.1 Structure of the operating instructions ..................................................................................... 0-17
0.1.1 Structure ....................................................................................................................... 0-17
0.1.2 Cross references .......................................................................................................... 0-18
0.1.3 Numbering of sub-parts................................................................................................ 0-18
0.1.4 Communication by means of the operating instructions .............................................. 0-18
0.2 Safety notices ........................................................................................................................... 0-19
0.2.1 Intended use ................................................................................................................ 0-19
0.2.2 Operator responsibility ................................................................................................. 0-20
0.2.3 Safety instructions in the operating instructions .......................................................... 0-21
0.2.4 Residual hazards ......................................................................................................... 0-22
0.2.5 Safe handling ............................................................................................................... 0-25
0.2.5.1 Qualified personnel ................................................................................................... 0-25
0.2.5.2 The 5 safety rules ...................................................................................................... 0-25
1 Technical Data ................................................................................................................ 1-27
1.1 Electrical and mechanical parameters ..................................................................................... 1-29
1.1.1 Main identification data ................................................................................................ 1-29
1.1.2 Nominal insulation level ............................................................................................... 1-30
1.1.3 Operating times ............................................................................................................ 1-31
1.1.3.1 Circuit-breaker ........................................................................................................... 1-31
1.1.3.2 Disconnector and work-in-progress earthing switch ................................................. 1-33
1.1.3.3 High-speed earthing switch ....................................................................................... 1-33
1.1.4 Current transformers and voltage transformers ........................................................... 1-33
1.1.5 Local control cabinet .................................................................................................... 1-33
1.1.6 Anti-condensation heating units ................................................................................... 1-33
1.2 Motor drives.............................................................................................................................. 1-35
1.2.1 Motor drive for circuit-breaker ...................................................................................... 1-36
1.2.1.1 Technical data for the operating mechanism ............................................................ 1-36
1.2.1.2 Technical data for the auxiliary switch ...................................................................... 1-37
1.2.1.3 Opening and closing releases ................................................................................... 1-38
1.2.2 Motor drive for work-in-progress earthing switch, high-speed earthing
switch and disconnector switch .................................................................................... 1-39
1.2.2.1 Technical data for the operating mechanism ............................................................ 1-39
1.2.2.2 Technical data for the auxiliary switch ...................................................................... 1-39
1.3 Gas monitoring ......................................................................................................................... 1-41
1.3.1 Terms ........................................................................................................................... 1-42
1.3.2 Gas pressures and operating values ........................................................................... 1-43
1.3.2.1 Gas pressures and the operating values of the circuit-breaker ................................ 1-43
1.3.2.2 Gas pressures and the operating values of the switchgear
(including voltage transformer) .................................................................................. 1-44
1.3.2.3 Gas pressures and the operating values of the switchgear
(including voltage transformer) .................................................................................. 1-45
1.4 Nameplates .............................................................................................................................. 1-47
1.5 Dimensions and weights of switchgear modules ..................................................................... 1-51
2 Description ...................................................................................................................... 2-59
2.1 General features of switchgear 8DQ1 ...................................................................................... 2-61
2.1.1 Switchgear modules ..................................................................................................... 2-61
2.1.2 Gas, gas compartments, gas monitoring ..................................................................... 2-62
 2.1.3 Circuit-breaker .............................................................................................................. 2-62
2.1.4 Busbar modules ........................................................................................................... 2-62
2.1.5 Disconnectors, work-in-progress earthing switches and
high-speed-earthing switches ...................................................................................... 2-63
2.1.6 Current transformer ...................................................................................................... 2-63
2.1.7 Voltage transformer ...................................................................................................... 2-64
2.1.8 Arresters ....................................................................................................................... 2-64
2.1.9 Cable connection module ............................................................................................ 2-64
2.1.10 Transformer connection module ................................................................................ 2-64
2.2 Electrical control ....................................................................................................................... 2-65
2.2.1 Use ............................................................................................................................... 2-65
2.2.2 Design .......................................................................................................................... 2-66
2.2.3 Installation .................................................................................................................... 2-67
2.3 Gas monitoring ......................................................................................................................... 2-69
2.3.1 Use ............................................................................................................................... 2-69
2.3.2 Construction ................................................................................................................. 2-70
2.3.3 Density monitor with test connection ........................................................................... 2-70
2.4 Monitoring, testing and detection ............................................................................................. 2-71
2.4.1 Viewport ....................................................................................................................... 2-71
2.4.2 Camera set ................................................................................................................... 2-72
2.4.3 Arc detection ................................................................................................................ 2-73
2.4.4 Sensors ........................................................................................................................ 2-74
2.4.4.1 Coupler type 1.1 ........................................................................................................ 2-74
2.4.4.2 Partial discharge sensor type 1.2 .............................................................................. 2-78
2.4.5 Sensgear™ Connectivity Device ................................................................................. 2-79
2.5 Circuit-breaker .......................................................................................................................... 2-81
2.5.1 Use ............................................................................................................................... 2-81
2.5.2 External design ............................................................................................................ 2-81
2.5.3 Internal design .............................................................................................................. 2-82
2.5.3.1 Design of conducting path ........................................................................................ 2-82
2.5.3.2 Switching system design and method of operation .................................................. 2-84
2.5.3.3 Design and function of the closing resistor ............................................................... 2-87
2.5.4 Design and function of the drive system ...................................................................... 2-90
2.6 Disconnectors........................................................................................................................... 2-93
2.6.1 Use ............................................................................................................................... 2-93
2.6.2 External design ............................................................................................................ 2-94
2.6.3 Internal design .............................................................................................................. 2-95
2.6.3.1 Conducting path ........................................................................................................ 2-95
2.6.3.2 Contact system ......................................................................................................... 2-98
2.6.4 Operating mechanism ................................................................................................ 2-104
2.7 High-speed earthing switches ................................................................................................ 2-105
2.7.1 Use ............................................................................................................................. 2-105
2.7.2 External design .......................................................................................................... 2-105
2.7.3 Internal design ............................................................................................................ 2-106
2.7.3.1 Insulated version ..................................................................................................... 2-107
2.7.4 Drive ........................................................................................................................... 2-108
2.8 Work-in-progress earthing switch .......................................................................................... 2-111
2.8.1 Use ............................................................................................................................. 2-111
2.8.2 External design .......................................................................................................... 2-111
2.8.3 Internal design ............................................................................................................ 2-112
 2.8.4 Drive ........................................................................................................................... 2-114
2.9 Motor drive ............................................................................................................................. 2-115
2.9.1 Use ............................................................................................................................. 2-115
2.9.2 Design and function of the motor Drives .................................................................... 2-115
2.9.2.1 Motor drive for disconnectors and work-in-progress earthing switches .................. 2-116
2.9.2.2 Motor drive for high-speed earthing switch ............................................................. 2-117
2.10 Current transformer ............................................................................................................... 2-119
2.10.1 Use ........................................................................................................................... 2-119
2.10.2 Current transformer with internal cores.................................................................... 2-120
2.10.3 External design ........................................................................................................ 2-120
2.10.4 Internal design .......................................................................................................... 2-122
2.10.5 Current transformer with external cores................................................................... 2-124
2.10.5.1 External design ..................................................................................................... 2-124
2.10.5.2 Internal design ....................................................................................................... 2-125
2.10.6 Terminal designations .............................................................................................. 2-127
2.11 Voltage transformer .............................................................................................................. 2-129
2.11.1 Use ........................................................................................................................... 2-129
2.11.2 External design ........................................................................................................ 2-130
2.11.3 Internal design .......................................................................................................... 2-132
2.11.4 Terminal box ............................................................................................................ 2-133
2.11.5 Terminal designations .............................................................................................. 2-134
2.12 RC divider ............................................................................................................................. 2-135
2.12.1 Use ........................................................................................................................... 2-135
2.12.2 External design ........................................................................................................ 2-136
2.12.3 Internal design .......................................................................................................... 2-137
2.12.4 Connection ............................................................................................................... 2-137
2.13 Expansion joints .................................................................................................................... 2-139
2.13.1 Use ........................................................................................................................... 2-139
2.13.2 Design and function of the expansion joints ............................................................ 2-140
2.14 Busbar ................................................................................................................................... 2-143
2.14.1 Use ........................................................................................................................... 2-143
2.14.2 Construction ............................................................................................................. 2-144
2.15 Overhead line connection module ........................................................................................ 2-149
2.15.1 Use ........................................................................................................................... 2-149
2.15.2 External design ........................................................................................................ 2-149
2.15.3 Internal design .......................................................................................................... 2-150
2.16 Cable connection module ..................................................................................................... 2-151
2.16.1 Use ........................................................................................................................... 2-151
2.16.2 Construction ............................................................................................................. 2-152
2.17 Transformer termination module ........................................................................................... 2-153
2.17.1 Range of application ................................................................................................ 2-153
2.17.2 Construction ............................................................................................................. 2-153
2.18 Covers, filter mounts, rupture disk assemblies ..................................................................... 2-155
2.18.1 Use ........................................................................................................................... 2-155
2.18.2 Design of covers and filter mounts ........................................................................... 2-156
2.19 Housing and conductor connections ..................................................................................... 2-157
2.19.1 Housing and housing connections ........................................................................... 2-157
2.19.1.1 Housing manufacture and testing ......................................................................... 2-157
2.19.1.2 Flanges.................................................................................................................. 2-157
2.19.1.3 Bushings ............................................................................................................... 2-158
 2.19.2 Conductor connections ............................................................................................ 2-158
2.19.2.1 Solid conductor connections ................................................................................. 2-158
2.19.2.2 Flexible conductor connections ............................................................................. 2-159
2.19.2.3 Flexible connectors ............................................................................................... 2-161
3 Shipment and storage .................................................................................................. 3-163
3.1 Packaging............................................................................................................................... 3-165
3.1.1 Use and packaging type............................................................................................. 3-165
3.1.2 Design and manufacture ............................................................................................ 3-167
3.2 Markings ................................................................................................................................. 3-169
3.2.1 Signs on packages ..................................................................................................... 3-170
3.2.2 Marking of shipping assemblies ................................................................................. 3-172
3.3 Receiving and handling of shipments .................................................................................... 3-173
3.3.1 Transport .................................................................................................................... 3-173
3.3.1.1 Transport to project site .......................................................................................... 3-175
3.3.1.2 Transport on the project site ................................................................................... 3-176
3.3.1.3 Crane work .............................................................................................................. 3-178
3.3.1.4 Schematic diagrams for lifting shipping assemblies ............................................... 3-179
3.3.2 Receipt of goods ........................................................................................................ 3-181
3.3.2.1 Make sure the delivery is complete ......................................................................... 3-181
3.3.2.2 Checking the shipment for external damage .......................................................... 3-182
3.3.2.3 Checking sealed packaging .................................................................................... 3-183
3.3.3 Unpacking shipments and inspecting them for damage in transit ............................. 3-183
3.3.4 Storage of shipments ................................................................................................. 3-184
3.3.4.1 Limited-time storage of shipments .......................................................................... 3-185
3.3.4.2 Storage of spare parts............................................................................................. 3-187
3.3.5 Procedure in the event of damage or loss ................................................................. 3-188
3.4 Working with sealed packaging.............................................................................................. 3-189
3.4.1 Properties of sealed packaging .................................................................................. 3-189
3.4.2 Recognizing sealed packaging .................................................................................. 3-189
3.4.3 Unpacking .................................................................................................................. 3-190
3.4.4 Refitting sealed packaging ......................................................................................... 3-190
3.4.4.1 Opening sealed packaging ..................................................................................... 3-190
3.4.4.2 Replacing desiccant ................................................................................................ 3-190
3.4.4.3 Adapting the amount of desiccant to the remaining storage period ....................... 3-191
3.4.4.4 Reclosing the film .................................................................................................... 3-192
4 Assembly and Commissioning .................................................................................... 4-193
4.1 Prerequisites .......................................................................................................................... 4-195
4.1.1 Documentations ......................................................................................................... 4-195
4.1.1.1 Operating instructions ............................................................................................. 4-195
4.1.1.2 Drawings ................................................................................................................. 4-196
4.1.1.3 Wiring manuals ....................................................................................................... 4-196
4.1.1.4 Further documentation ............................................................................................ 4-196
4.1.2 Personnel prerequisites ............................................................................................. 4-197
4.1.2.1 Responsibility .......................................................................................................... 4-197
4.1.2.2 Erection and maintenance personnel ..................................................................... 4-197
4.1.3 Transportation routes, lifting equipment, transportation equipment .......................... 4-197
4.1.4 Tools, devices, expendable materials, gantries ......................................................... 4-198
4.1.5 Requirements with regard to the building site and its equipments ............................ 4-198
4.1.5.1 Location of the switchgear ...................................................................................... 4-198
4.1.5.2 Storage areas .......................................................................................................... 4-198
 4.1.5.3 Office and recreation rooms, sanitary facilities ....................................................... 4-198
4.1.5.4 Lighting, ventilation, electricity and water supplies ................................................. 4-199
4.1.6 Clean work requirements ........................................................................................... 4-199
4.1.7 Fire and accident prevention ...................................................................................... 4-199
4.1.8 Documentation of erection and commissioning ......................................................... 4-199
4.1.9 Climbing and standing on the gas-insulated switchgear system ............................... 4-200
4.2 Preparatory work .................................................................................................................... 4-201
4.2.1 Structural and spatial prerequisites (Test Report 3001) ............................................ 4-202
4.2.2 Instruction of third-party personnel (Test Reports 3002a/b) ...................................... 4-202
4.2.3 Drawings .................................................................................................................... 4-202
4.2.4 Circuit diagrams ......................................................................................................... 4-202
4.2.5 Delivery documents .................................................................................................... 4-202
4.2.6 Check of delivery units ............................................................................................... 4-203
4.2.7 Tools / Instruments ..................................................................................................... 4-203
4.2.8 Check dimensions of penetrations in floor, ceiling and walls..................................... 4-203
4.2.9 Check cable ducts in floors ........................................................................................ 4-203
4.2.10 Measurement of system support points ................................................................... 4-203
4.3 Assembling the switchgear .................................................................................................... 4-205
4.3.1 Installation of switchgear according to main drawing ................................................ 4-206
4.3.2 Positioning of bays ..................................................................................................... 4-206
4.3.3 Check for visible damage to assemblies.................................................................... 4-208
4.3.4 External cleaning of the assemblies .......................................................................... 4-208
4.3.5 Internal inspection of design groups for cleanliness and damage ............................. 4-208
4.3.6 Treatment of flanges and O-rings .............................................................................. 4-208
4.3.7 Gas-tight and gas-permeable bushings ..................................................................... 4-209
4.3.8 Installation of tie-rods and measurement of bay width .............................................. 4-209
4.3.9 Insert filter in switchgear gas compartments.............................................................. 4-209
4.3.10 In case of extension: check primary conductor allocation ....................................... 4-209
4.3.11 Switchgear earthing according to earthing plan ....................................................... 4-210
4.3.12 Installing control cables ............................................................................................ 4-210
4.3.13 Check unused cable glands for tightness ................................................................ 4-210
4.3.14 Earth the transformer and control cables shielding at both ends ............................ 4-210
4.3.15 Check, apply and/or repair paintwork ...................................................................... 4-210
4.3.16 Application of signs and lettering ............................................................................. 4-210
4.3.17 Installing the voltage transformer ............................................................................. 4-211
4.3.18 Installation of RC-divider .......................................................................................... 4-212
4.3.19 Apply corrosion protection to attachments located outdoors ................................... 4-212
4.3.20 HV terminals on Air bushings ................................................................................... 4-212
4.4 Commissioning of switchgear ................................................................................................ 4-213
4.4.1 Check the accordance with the circuit diagram. ........................................................ 4-213
4.4.2 Resistance measurement of main current path ......................................................... 4-213
4.4.3 SF6 gas filling and pressure measurement ................................................................ 4-213
4.4.4 Function test disconnector and earthing switches ..................................................... 4-214
4.4.5 Check operation of circuit-breakers ........................................................................... 4-214
4.4.6 Check alarms ............................................................................................................. 4-214
4.4.7 Check that MCB’s are free of reverse voltage ........................................................... 4-214
4.4.8 Removing the stickers and/or plastic stopper at ventilation tubes ............................. 4-214
4.4.9 Check anti-condensation heating units ...................................................................... 4-214
4.4.10 Check operation of control system........................................................................... 4-214
4.4.11 Customer informed of pending high-voltage tests ................................................... 4-214
4.4.12 Check the condition of the cable end closing bush .................................................. 4-214
 4.4.13 High-voltage test ...................................................................................................... 4-215
4.4.14 Check current transformer ....................................................................................... 4-215
4.4.15 Check voltage transformer ....................................................................................... 4-215
4.4.16 Check the RC-divider ............................................................................................... 4-215
4.4.17 Weather-protection cover, check central bolt .......................................................... 4-215
4.5 Miscellaneous......................................................................................................................... 4-217
5 Operation....................................................................................................................... 5-219
5.1 Prerequisites .......................................................................................................................... 5-221
5.1.1 Basic requirements .................................................................................................... 5-221
5.1.2 Specific measures to prevent fires and accidents ..................................................... 5-222
5.1.3 Procedure if ambient temperatures are too high or too low ....................................... 5-223
5.2 Manual operation ................................................................................................................... 5-225
5.2.1 Manual operation in local control with the switchgear interlock deactivated ............. 5-225
5.2.2 Manual operation of the motor drive .......................................................................... 5-226
5.2.3 Manually switching circuit breaker ............................................................................. 5-229
5.3 Checks, alarms, causes, measures ....................................................................................... 5-233
5.3.1 Checks during operation ............................................................................................ 5-233
5.3.2 Alarms for the circuit-breaker ..................................................................................... 5-234
5.3.2.1 Circuit breaker: SF6 loss .......................................................................................... 5-234
5.3.2.2 Circuit breaker: SF6 function block .......................................................................... 5-235
5.3.2.3 Circuit Breaker: On-spring unloaded ....................................................................... 5-236
5.3.2.4 Motor protection ...................................................................................................... 5-237
5.3.2.5 Motor run time monitoring ....................................................................................... 5-237
5.3.2.6 Interlock blocking of brief interruption ..................................................................... 5-238
5.3.2.7 Pole discrepancy alarm ........................................................................................... 5-238
5.3.3 Signals from switchgear modules .............................................................................. 5-239
5.3.3.1 SF6 loss ................................................................................................................... 5-239
5.3.3.2 Minimum operating pressure .................................................................................. 5-240
5.3.3.3 SF6 pressure rising .................................................................................................. 5-241
5.3.4 Fault position .............................................................................................................. 5-241
6 Maintenance .................................................................................................................. 6-243
6.1 Prerequisites .......................................................................................................................... 6-245
6.1.1 Basic safety measures ............................................................................................... 6-245
6.1.2 Secure drive against operation .................................................................................. 6-247
6.1.2.1 Electromechanically interlocking drives .................................................................. 6-247
6.1.2.2 Mechanical blocking of the disconnector and earthing switch motor drive ............ 6-248
6.1.2.3 Securing locking and/or blocking with a padlock .................................................... 6-249
6.1.3 Assignment of personnel............................................................................................ 6-249
6.1.4 Maintenance packages .............................................................................................. 6-249
6.1.5 Responding to malfunctions ....................................................................................... 6-250
6.2 Cycles and maintenance service ........................................................................................... 6-251
6.2.1 Influences on the maintenance interval ..................................................................... 6-251
6.2.1.1 Influences through mechanical wear and/or switching operations ......................... 6-251
6.2.1.2 Harmful environmental influences ........................................................................... 6-252
6.2.2 Starting date ............................................................................................................... 6-253
6.2.3 Maintenance measures .............................................................................................. 6-254
6.2.4 Inspection of the contact system ................................................................................ 6-254
6.2.4.1 Contact system check as a function of the breaking current .................................. 6-254
6.2.4.2 Inspection of the high-speed earthing switch contact system................................. 6-256
6.3 Maintenance work .................................................................................................................. 6-257
7 General considerations and instructions.................................................................... 7-259
7.1 Condition check of facility and switchgear ............................................................................. 7-261
7.2 Evacuating, filling and emptying the gas compartments ........................................................ 7-263
7.2.1 Evacuating and filling gas compartments .................................................................. 7-264
7.2.2 Emptying and venting of gas compartments. ............................................................. 7-266
7.3 Checking the gas monitoring system ..................................................................................... 7-267
7.3.1 Removing and reinstalling density monitor ................................................................ 7-267
7.3.2 Density monitor testing............................................................................................... 7-268
7.3.2.1 Density monitor without test connection ................................................................. 7-268
7.3.2.2 Checking density monitor without test connection .................................................. 7-269
7.3.2.3 Testing density monitor with test connection .......................................................... 7-269
7.3.3 Replacing the density monitors .................................................................................. 7-270
7.4 Check leak-tightness of gas compartments ........................................................................... 7-271
7.4.1 Checking gas fill pressure with precision pressure gauge ......................................... 7-272
7.4.2 Leakage detection ...................................................................................................... 7-272
7.5 Measuring gas moisture content and SF6 percentage ........................................................... 7-273
7.5.1 Measuring the moisture content of the gas (dew point) ............................................. 7-274
7.5.2 Measuring the SF6 percentage or air content ............................................................ 7-274
7.6 Laying cables ......................................................................................................................... 7-275
7.6.1 Basic requirements for the laying and joining of cables ............................................. 7-275
7.6.2 Measures for electromagnetic compatibility ............................................................... 7-276
7.7 Preparing and assembling conductor and flange connections .............................................. 7-277
7.7.1 Spare parts, expendable materials and tools ............................................................ 7-277
7.7.2 Preparing and connecting flanges ............................................................................. 7-278
7.7.3 Prepare and establish conductor connections ........................................................... 7-280
7.8 Testing the disconnectors, earthing and high-speed earthing switches ................................ 7-281
7.8.1 Visual inspection and checking of the heater for the motor drive .............................. 7-281
7.8.2 Function test ............................................................................................................... 7-282
7.9 Check stored-energy spring mechanism drive for circuit breaker .......................................... 7-283
7.9.1 Check auxiliary switches ............................................................................................ 7-284
7.9.2 Check of dampers for leaks ....................................................................................... 7-285
7.9.3 Checking that the releases and latching blocks are affixed tightly ............................ 7-285
7.10 Checking the electronic circuit-breaker control ..................................................................... 7-287
7.10.1 Check anti-pumping device ...................................................................................... 7-287
7.10.2 Check trip releases .................................................................................................. 7-288
7.10.3 Checking the double excitation ................................................................................ 7-288
7.10.4 Test closing spring motor ......................................................................................... 7-288
7.11 Check electrical equipment ................................................................................................... 7-289
7.11.1 Checking the control and alarm circuits ................................................................... 7-289
7.11.2 Checking measuring, display and counting devices ................................................ 7-290
7.11.3 Checking the electric interlock ................................................................................. 7-290
7.11.4 Check of anti-condensation heaters ........................................................................ 7-290
7.12 Check current transformers .................................................................................................. 7-291
7.12.1 Inspection ................................................................................................................. 7-291
7.12.2 Polarity check ........................................................................................................... 7-291
7.12.3 Testing the secondary circuits. ................................................................................ 7-292
7.13 Check voltage transformer .................................................................................................... 7-293
7.13.1 Inspection ................................................................................................................. 7-293
7.13.2 Insulation test ........................................................................................................... 7-293
7.13.3 Checking the secondary circuits .............................................................................. 7-294
7.14 Check RC divider .................................................................................................................. 7-295
7.14.1 Inspection ................................................................................................................. 7-295
7.14.2 Preparation of the RC divider for high voltage test of the switchgear ...................... 7-295
7.14.3 Check secondary current circuits ............................................................................. 7-295
7.15 Check cable terminator ......................................................................................................... 7-297
7.16 Check primary section .......................................................................................................... 7-299
7.16.1 Measure voltage drop .............................................................................................. 7-299
7.16.2 High-voltage testing ................................................................................................. 7-300
7.17 Install/replace filter material .................................................................................................. 7-303
7.17.1 Preparatory work ...................................................................................................... 7-304
7.17.2 Inserting filter material .............................................................................................. 7-305
7.17.3 Replacement of filter material .................................................................................. 7-306
7.18 Install rupture discs ............................................................................................................... 7-307
7.18.1 Unpack rupture discs ............................................................................................... 7-307
7.18.2 Fitting the rupture disc.............................................................................................. 7-308
7.19 Cleaning ................................................................................................................................ 7-309
7.19.1 Cleaning agents ....................................................................................................... 7-309
7.19.2 Cleaning equipment ................................................................................................. 7-310
7.19.3 Cleaning tasks .......................................................................................................... 7-311
7.19.4 Disposal ................................................................................................................... 7-312
7.20 Corrosion protection, greases and oils ................................................................................. 7-313
7.20.1 Corrosion protection ................................................................................................. 7-313
7.20.2 Corrosion protection and sealants ........................................................................... 7-314
7.20.3 Specified paints ........................................................................................................ 7-315
7.20.4 Greases and oils ...................................................................................................... 7-319
7.21 Timing charts......................................................................................................................... 7-321
7.22 Pressure-temperature diagram for SF6 ................................................................................. 7-325
7.23 Bolted connections, tightening torques, SL retaining clips ................................................... 7-327
7.23.1 Assembling a bolted joint ......................................................................................... 7-327
7.23.2 Identifying the strength class ................................................................................... 7-329
7.23.3 Tightening torques for cable glands ......................................................................... 7-330
7.23.3.1 Tightening torques for cable glands and metal EMC cable glands ...................... 7-330
7.23.3.2 Tightening torques for plastic cable glands........................................................... 7-334
7.23.4 Locking tabs ............................................................................................................. 7-335
7.23.5 Check bolted connections ........................................................................................ 7-336
7.24 Instructions for handling SF6 ................................................................................................. 7-337
7.24.1 Health hazards and general occupational hygiene requirements ............................ 7-337
7.24.2 Environmental effects of sulfur hexafluoride (SF6)................................................... 7-338
7.24.3 Physical and chemical properties ............................................................................ 7-339
7.24.4 Equipment for handling SF6 ..................................................................................... 7-339
7.24.4.1 Carrying out gas-related work outside the gas compartment ............................... 7-339
7.24.4.2 Working inside gas compartments without SF6 decomposition products ............. 7-340
7.24.4.3 Working inside gas compartments with SF6 decomposition products .................. 7-340
7.24.5 Work in gas compartments ...................................................................................... 7-341
7.24.5.1 Basic requirements ............................................................................................... 7-341
7.24.5.2 Additional requirements following severe short-circuit disconnections ................. 7-342
7.24.6 Cleaning and disposing of used materials and equipment ...................................... 7-342
7.25 Cleanliness on the project site .............................................................................................. 7-343
7.25.1 Completing work on the building .............................................................................. 7-343
7.25.2 Packing material ....................................................................................................... 7-343
 7.25.3 Cleaning the switchgear room ................................................................................. 7-344
7.25.4 Cleanliness and tidiness when working on open modules ...................................... 7-344
7.25.5 Cleanliness of tools .................................................................................................. 7-345
7.25.6 Preventive measures for work likely to create dirt ................................................... 7-346
7.25.7 Person responsible for cleanliness and tidiness ...................................................... 7-346
7.26 Disposing of high-voltage switching devices and systems ................................................... 7-347

Pos : 1.8 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1
Pos : 1.9 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-----------Abschnittsw ec hs el---------- @ 7\m od_1345787958892_0.docx @ 52960 @ @ 1
Introduction
0 Introduction

0-15
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Introduction
Pos : 2.2 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

0-16
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Introduction
Pos : 2.3 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /0 Ei nleitung/Modul e/0.1 Aufbau der Betriebsanlei tung @ 42\m od_1579271482952_18.docx @ 834764 @ 2 @ 1

0.1 Structure of the operating instructions

These operating instructions apply for the type and the design of the metal-enclosed gas-insulated switchgear
shown on the title page. Their purpose is to familiarize operating personnel with the design and method of
operation of the switchgear. They also provide information about operation, assembly and maintenance.
We recommend that the operating personnel familiarize themselves with the operating instructions and other
supplied documents at an early stage so that they are informed about the switchgear system they are operating
and other operational specifics.
These instructions contain safety notices and handling-related warning notices. Observe and comply with
these instructions in all activities. Always keep these instructions in the plant for your own safety and to protect
others and to prevent damage to property and the environment.

 Notice
The operating instructions contain information about proper operation of
the switchgear. Safety notices point out existing hazards and appropriate
measures for hazard mitigation.

Should you require any further information or should any problems arise that have not been discussed in
sufficient detail in the operating instructions, please contact your local Siemens office for assistance.
We would also like to draw your attention to the fact that the content of these operating instructions is neither
part of any former or existing agreement, commitment or legal relationship, nor is it intended to amend same.
All obligations on the part of Siemens are defined in the applicable sales contract, which also contains the
complete and exclusively valid warranty regulations. The latter are neither extended nor restricted by the
information in these operating instructions.

Pos : 2.4 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /0 Ei nleitung/Modul e/0.1.1 Gli ederung @ 42\m od_1582115197991_18.docx @ 838254 @ 3 @ 1

0.1.1 Structure
The operating instructions are structured as follows:

Section 0: Introduction
Section 1: Technical specifications:
Section 2: Description
Section 3: Transport and storage
Section 4: Assembly and commissioning
Section 5: Operation
Section 6: Maintenance
Section 7: General information and instructions

 Notice
Individual subjects/parts are described in individual subsections. Section 7
contains general information.

This further general information is referenced in various subsections of the assembly and commissioning,
operation and maintenance sections. Section 7 should therefore always be read in connection with the specific
applicable Section.

Pos : 2.5 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

0-17
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Introduction
Pos : 2.6 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /0 Ei nleitung/Modul e/0.1.2 Querverw eise @ 15\m od_1366107591819_18.docx @ 111401 @ 3 @ 1

0.1.2 Cross references

Cross-references will be distinguished using the following pictogram:

- References to sections that are part of the operating instructions (e.g. for the section Electrical and
mechanical parameters in the chapter Technical data):

Electrical and mechanical parameters [ 1.1]

- References to documents that are not part of the operating instructions but are, however, part of the order
documentation:

Order documentation

Cross-references to designation of parts in illustrations are made in continuous text, stating the item number,
e.g. Lever [1].

The figures entered and annotations with *), 1), 2), 3) ... apply only to the section concerned or to a illustration
or table.

Pos : 2.7 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /0 Ei nleitung/Modul e/0.1.3 N ummerier ung der Teil e @ 24\mod_1383835961538_18.docx @ 204603 @ 3 @ 1

0.1.3 Numbering of sub-parts

The parts are numbered in ascending order. The numbering always applies to the corresponding section in
the operating instructions only.

Pos : 2.8 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /0 Ei nleitung/Modul e/0.1.4 Verständigung mit Hilfe der Betri ebs anleitung @ 15\mod_1366111516821_18.docx @ 111451 @ 3 @ 1

0.1.4 Communication by means of the operating instructions

In written or verbal communications, please provide a complete designation from the operating instructions
and use only designations and numbers for sub-parts as indicated in the chapter, the series number of the
section and the page number of the instructions (if applicable).

For clear identification of modules, modular assemblies or individual components, details of the switchgear
structure are required; these are given in the circuit diagram for the switchgear installed.
This will serve to avoid any misunderstandings.

Pos : 2.9 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

0-18
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Introduction
Pos : 2.10 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/0 Einl eitung/M odule/0.2 Sic herheits hinw eise @ 42\m od_1579271547340_18.docx @ 834787 @ 2 @ 1

0.2 Safety notices

The switchgear and the devices and special tools supplied with it comply with the laws, regulations and
standards that were in force at the time of delivery, especially the safety and health requirements.
If the equipment is used as intended and if adherence to the requirements and conditions specified in these
operating instructions and to the safety notices specified in the operating instructions and/or on the product is
ensured, the switchgear poses no risks to persons, property or the environment. This applies throughout the
entire service life, from delivery, assembly and operation through to dismantling and disposal.
The company’s quality management system ensures a consistently high quality standard, particularly in
respect of compliance with safety and health requirements.
Pos : 2.11 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/0 Einl eitung/M odule/0.2.1 Bestimm ungsgem äß e Verw endung @ 44\m od_1596622279417_18.docx @ 881675 @ 3 @ 1

0.2.1 Intended use

Use is considered to be as intended if

- the switchgear is operated in accordance with the agreed terms of delivery and technical data, and
- The devices and special tools that are supplied with it are used only for the intended purpose and in
accordance with the specifications of these and supplemental operating instructions.

Any other form of use is prohibited, unless express permission for this use has been obtained from Siemens.

Warning!
Failure to comply with the above requirements and conditions or the safety
notices can result in hazards due to:

• Electrical voltage
• Pressurized gas systems
• Tensioned springs
• Insulating gas and its decomposition products
• Falling and/or tipping parts, as well as dangerous confined spaces
resulting due to moving parts.

Death, severe personal injury, substantial damage to property or the

environment can result.

Pos : 2.12 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

0-19
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Introduction
Pos : 2.13 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/0 Einl eitung/M odule/0.2.2 Verantw ortung des Betr eibers @ 42\mod_1579271884978_18.docx @ 834833 @ 3 @ 1

0.2.2 Operator responsibility

In order to avoid accidents, faults, damage or inadmissible environmental impact, the persons responsible for
transport and assembly, operation and maintenance, as well as for disposal of the switchgear or its parts must
ensure that

- The local and industry-specific safety and assembly procedures are complied with,

- Planning and configuration work and all work on and with the plant are performed only by qualified
and instructed personnel,

- The operating instructions are always available for all work activities,

- The technical data as well as the permissible conditions for installation, connection and operation
are consistently observed,

- Only qualified and authorized personnel are assigned.

- Personnel are informed about possible hazards and the safety measures required to safeguard
against them prior to commencing work and at regular intervals after that as well as in the wake of
unusual events.

- The regulations and operating instructions for safe work and the relevant instructions on how to
proceed in the event of accidents and fires are available for reference by personnel at all times and
are displayed in the operating areas if appropriate.

- The devices and equipment necessary for safe work and the personal protective equipment required
for certain activities are available and are used.

- The prescribed maintenance cycles are observed and only spare parts, lubricants and auxiliary
materials approved by the manufacturer are used.

- Should any change or damage to the coating systems or corrosion protection measures on the GIS
or its components occur in the course of commissioning, maintenance or other work, or as a result
of environmental conditions, the coating systems or corrosion protection must be properly restored
as per the descriptions in Sections 4 to 7. Should the coating systems or corrosion protection not be
restored, this can result in damage to the switchgear or its components and to malfunctioning of the
equipment.

Pos : 2.14 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

0-20
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Introduction
Pos : 2.15 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/0 Einl eitung/M odule/0.2.3 Sic her hei tshi nw eise in der Betri ebs anleitung @ 35\mod_1523440134491_18.docx @ 721255 @ 3 @ 1

0.2.3 Safety instructions in the operating instructions

These safety instructions shall form a part of these operating instructions, wherever this is necessary for
warding off any residual risks. These safety instructions are appended before the sections on installation,
operation and maintenance respectively. In these sections any necessary safety instructions are also given
prior to descriptions of the relevant actions / procedures.
With regard to the possible consequences of non-compliance with these safety instructions, the following shall
apply:

Danger!
indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.

Warning!
indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could
result in death or serious injury.

Caution!
indicates a hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in minor
or moderate injury.

 Notice
is used to address practices not related to physical injury.

Pos : 2.16 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

0-21
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Introduction
Pos : 2.17 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/0 Einl eitung/M odule/0.2.4 Res tgefährdung en @ 42\mod_1579271757209_18.docx @ 834810 @ 3 @ 1

0.2.4 Residual hazards

Hazard due to live parts!

Live parts represent a hazard. If covers are removed, contact protection
from live parts is no longer ensured. The minimum air gap and creepage
distances may be violated when approaching live parts. Touching or
approaching these parts can cause death, serious injury or property
damage.
● Ensure that live parts are reliably covered.
● If you have to remove covers, first lock out and tag out the plant
area.
● Observe the 5 safety rules.

Hazard due to rotating parts!

Rotating parts represent a hazard. If covers are removed, contact protection
for rotating parts is no longer ensured. Touching rotating parts can cause
death, serious injury or property damage.
● Ensure that rotating parts are reliably covered.
● Do not remove covers until the rotating parts have come to a
complete standstill.

Warning!
Electromagnetic fields in operation of electric power installations!
Electric power installations generate electromagnetic fields in operation.
Exposure in the immediate vicinity of the system can result in potentially
fatal malfunctions in medical implants such as pacemakers. Data loss can
occur in magnetic or electronic data carriers.
● Protect personnel working on the system with suitable measures
such as markings, barriers, safety instructions and warnings.
● Observe the national protection and safety regulations.
● Persons with pacemakers are not permitted to be in the area of the
system during operation.

0-22
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Introduction

Caution!
Burn hazard due to hot surfaces!
Individual system parts can become hot during operation. Burns can result
from contact.
Check the temperature of the parts before touching. Use suitable protection
equipment if necessary.

Caution!
Noise emissions!
The system can have sound emission levels during operation that are not
permissible for workplaces. This can result in hearing damage. Use noise
reduction measures to ensure safe operation of the plant.
The following measures can reduce noise:
● Sound insulation
● Hearing protection.

Caution!
Falling of persons!
Work at hazardous heights is sometimes necessary for system assembly,
commissioning and maintenance. This entails a falling hazard.
If you have to perform work at a height of more than one meter, take
appropriate measures to prevent the hazard of persons falling.
Examples of appropriate measures:
● Installation of scaffolding, work platforms or elevating work
platforms.
● Wearing of personal protective equipment.

Caution!
Risk of tripping and injury
The system has projecting parts such as pipes, terminal boxes and cables.
These points represent a tripping and injury hazard.
Use barriers such as barrier tapes.
Always pay greater attention when working near the system.

0-23
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Introduction

Caution!
Falling objects!
Work at hazardous heights is sometimes necessary for system assembly,
commissioning and maintenance. Objects such as parts or tools can fall.
If you have to perform work at such a height, take appropriate measures to
ensure compliance with the following conditions.
● No objects can fall.
● Falling objects cannot injure persons.

Examples of appropriate measures:

● Installation of false ceilings
● Securing loose parts and tools to prevent falling.
● Wearing of personal protective equipment.
● Prevent persons from accessing the hazard area.

Pos : 2.18 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

0-24
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Introduction
Pos : 2.19 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/0 Einl eitung/M odule/0.2.5 Sic her e H andhabung @ 42\mod_1579271995161_18.doc x @ 834856 @ 344 @ 1

0.2.5 Safe handling

Safety at the workplace requires the attention, care and common sense of all persons who install, operate and
maintain the system. In addition to observing the listed safety precautions, caution must always be used when
near the system.
Observe the following in particular to prevent accidents:

- General safety regulations in the respective country of deployment

- Specific regulations from the operator and for the work area
- Specific agreements with the operator
- Separate safety instructions supplied with the system
- Safety symbols and instructions on the system and its packaging

 Notice
Use the support and services of the responsible manufacturer for planning,
installation, commissioning and service activities.

0.2.5.1 Qualified personnel

All work on the system shall only be performed by qualified personnel. Qualified personnel in the sense of this
documentation are persons who fulfill the following requirements:
- Due to their training and experience, they are able to recognize the risks and to prevent possible
hazards in their respective work area.
- They are charged by the responsible person with performing work on the system.

0.2.5.2 The 5 safety rules

Always comply with the safety instructions in all work for your personal safety as well as to prevent property
damage. Also follow the 5 safety rules in accordance with EN 50110-1, Work on system in the deenergized
state, in the specified sequence.

 5 Safety rules

1. Lock out and tag out;

2. Secure to prevent (inadvertent/unauthorized) reactivation;
3. Verify deenergized state;
4. Ground and short-circuit;
5. Cover or barricade off any adjacent items that are energized.

After completion of the work, reverse the measures taken in reverse sequence.
Pos : 2.20 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

0-25
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Introduction
Pos : 2.21 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

0-26
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Technical Data
Pos : 3.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnisc he Daten/M odule/1 Technisc he Daten/1 T ec hnisc he D aten @ 15\m od_1366112870073_18.docx @ 111676 @ 1 @ 1

1 Technical Data

1-27
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Technical Data

 Notice
The representations in the following illustrations can differ, in total or in
part, from the delivered version. This applies particularly to the current track
guiding, the location and execution of the bushings and the ancillary
equipment.

Pos : 3.2 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1

1-28
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Technical Data
Pos : 3.3.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.1 El ektrisc he Param eter/1.1 El ektrisc he und m echanisc he Param eter/1.1 El ektrisc he und mechanische Par ameter - Übersc hrift @ 15\mod_1366113024932_18.docx @ 111701 @ 2 @ 1

1.1 Electrical and mechanical parameters

Pos : 3.3.2 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.1 El ektrisc he Param eter/1.1 El ektrisc he und m echanisc he Param eter/1.1 El ektrisc he und mechanische Par ameter 00 - T ext @ 24\m od_1391413023392_18.docx @ 227560 @ @ 1

This section contains information about

- The main identification data
- Rated insulation level
- Operating times of the circuit-breaker
- Operating times of the disconnector and work-in-progress earthing switch as well as the high-speed
earthing switch
- Notes on the identification data for current transformers and voltage transformers
- Data concerning the local control cabinet.
Basic information:

Motor drives [ 1.2]

Gas monitoring [ 1.3]
Nameplates [ 1.4]
Dimensions and weights of switchgear modules [ 1.5]
The figures entered and annotations with *) apply only to the table concerned.
Pos : 3.3.4 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.1 El ektrisc he Param eter/1.1.1 Hauptk enndaten/1.1.1 H auptk enndaten - Standard Tabelle ( 1 Bm-Spannung/Spalte) 8D Q1 1 550kV @ 39\mod_1543934819750_18.docx @ 764425 @ 3 @ 1

1.1.1 Main identification data

Rated voltage kV 550

Rated frequency Hz 50 / 60
Rated normal current
- Busbar A ≤ 4000
- Feeder (bay) A ≤ 4000
- Coupling A ≤ 4000
Rated short-time withstand current kA ≤ 63
Rated duration of short-circuit s ≤3
Rated peak withstand current (IEC/ANSI)
50 Hz kA 2.5 x 63 = 158
60 Hz kA 2.6 x 63 = 163.8
Ambient temperature (range)
- Indoor °C – 25 ... + 40
- Outdoor °C – 30 ... + 40
Circuit-breakers: *)
Rated short-circuit breaking current kA ≤ 63
Rated short-circuit making current (IEC/ANSI)
50 Hz kA 2.7 x 63 = 170
60 Hz kA
Pole factor (*)Pole factor according to IEC
62271.100)
- for effectively earthed mains p.u. 1.3
- for non-effectively earthed mains p.u. 1.5
Operating sequence (IEC/ANSI) O – 0.3s – CO – 3min – CO
Pos : 3.3.6 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.1 El ektrisc he Param eter/1.1.2 Bemessungs-Is olationspegel /1.1.2 Bemes sungs-Isol ati onspegel 01 @ 0\mod_1330501111128_18.doc x @ 2446 @ 3 @ 1

1-29
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Technical Data
1.1.2 Nominal insulation level
The nominal insulation level in accordance with IEC / VDE is ascertained by

- the clearance between high-voltage and earth potential,

- the mechanical rating and design of the high-voltage parts within the metal enclosure and by
- the pressure or the density of the insulating gas (SF6) inside the metal enclosure.

The figures in the table apply for +20°C and “minimum operating density of SF6” values.

Pos : 3.3.7 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.1 El ektrisc he Param eter/1.1.2 Bemessungs-Is olationspegel /1.1.2 Bemes sungs-Isol ati onspegel 02 - Standar d T abelle ( 1 Bm- Spannung/Spalte) 8DQ1 1 550k V @ 25\m od_1395933965581_18.docx @ 235978 @ @ 1

Rated voltage kV 550

Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage
(1,2 / 50 µs), Peak value (max):
- Phase to earth kV 1550
- Across the isolating distance kV 1550 + 315
- Across the isolating distance at power kV 1550 + 315
frequency voltage
- Across the open circuit-breaker kV 1550 + 315

Rated power frequency withstand voltage (1 min),

rms value:
- Phase to earth kV 710
- Across the isolating distance kV 925
- Across the open circuit-breaker kV 1060
Rated switching impulse withstand voltage
(250 / 2500 μs), Peak value (max):
- Phase to earth kV 1175
- Across the isolating distance at kV 1175+450
power frequency voltage
- Across the open circuit-breaker at kV 1175
power frequency voltage
- Across the open circuit-breaker kV 1175+450

Pos : 3.3.8 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1

1-30
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Technical Data
Pos : 3.3.9 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.1 El ektrisc he Param eter/1.1.3 Sc haltz eiten/1.1.3 Sc haltzeiten @ 0\mod_1330501112721_18.doc x @ 2451 @ 3 @ 1

1.1.3 Operating times

Pos : 3.3.10 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.1 Elek trische Par ameter/1.1.3 Sc haltzeiten/1.1.3.1 Leistungsschalter 010 @ 0\m od_1330501114925_18.docx @ 2456 @ 4 @ 1

1.1.3.1 Circuit-breaker
The terms used in the diagrams are used to describe the switching process.
Pos : 3.3.11 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.1 Elek trische Par ameter/1.1.3 Sc haltzeiten/1.1.3.1 Leistungsschalter 020 - Sc haltzeiten Grafik mit Bildu @ 25\m od_1392888828361_18.docx @ 230205 @ @ 1
Supply of auxiliary power to

in current path (pre-arcing)

(electrical isolation) -

Start of current flow

Contact separation

Initiator of closure
excite the release
Breaker closed -

Initial contacting
Extinction of arc

Breaker open -
start of arc

Opening time Arcing time Make time

Break time Dead time

Re-make time

Closing time

Fig. 1-1 Break-Make operation with automatic reclosing (to IEC / VDE / ANSI)

Pos : 3.3.12 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

1-31
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Technical Data
Pos : 3.3.13 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.1 Elek trische Par ameter/1.1.3 Sc haltzeiten/1.1.3.1 Leistungsschalter 030 - Einführung Schaltz eiten @ 0\m od_1330501120315_18.docx @ 2471 @ @ 1

All values for these times (see table) refer to an ambient temperature of +20 °C, nominal supply voltage and
SF6 pressure. Data for the opening times apply to max. arcing time in the event of a triple-pole terminal short
circuit, measured at nominal values for SF6 pressure.

Pos : 3.3.14 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.1 Elek trische Par ameter/1.1.3 Sc haltzeiten/1.1.3.1 Leistungsschalter 040 - 8DQ1 1/3 550k V -mit- Standard T abell e Schaltz eiten @ 47\m od_1624627339430_18.docx @ 919892 @ @ 1

Circuit breaker 8DQ1 1/3 P2/3 - 550 kV - 5000 A - 63 kA - 50/60 Hz

Releases for closing
operation

Operating times Unit Instantaneous release (type A) Normal release (type A)

Closing time ms 54 ± 5 63 ± 6

Releases for opening

operation

Operating times Unit Instantaneous release (type B) Normal release (type B)

Frequency Hz 50 60 50 60

Polfaktor kpp p.u. 1,3 1,5 1,3 1,5 1,3 1,5 1,3 1,5

Opening time ms 18 ± 2 18 ± 2 18 ± 2 18 ± 2 20 ± 2 20 ± 2 20 ± 2 20 ± 2

Arcing time ms 18,0 16,3 15,3 13,9 18,0 16,3 15,3 13,9

Break time ms 37,9 36,2 35,2 33,8 39,9 38,2 37,2 35,8

Pos : 3.3.15 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

1-32
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Technical Data
Pos : 3.3.16 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.1 Elek trische Par ameter/1.1.3 Sc haltzeiten/1.1.3.2 Trenn- und Ar beitser dungssc halter sowi e Schnellerdungssc halter - 8DQ1 1/3 mit ST Tabelle @ 26\mod_1399361001271_18.docx @ 238800 @ 44 @ 1

1.1.3.2 Disconnector and work-in-progress earthing switch

Motor rated voltage V 60 … 125 220 … 250

Maximum motor current at CLOSE/OPEN A ≤6 ≤2

Movement time CLOSE s ≤5

Movement time OPEN s ≤5

1.1.3.3 High-speed earthing switch

Motor rated voltage V 60 … 125 220 … 250

Maximum motor current at CLOSE/OPEN A ≤8 ≤5

Closing time ms ≤ 110

Total opening time s ≤9
(charging time + opening time)

Pos : 3.3.17 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.1 Elek trische Par ameter/1.1.4 Str omwandl er/1.1.4 Stromw andl er - 8D Q1 1/3 @ 40\m od_1561028532843_18.docx @ 805901 @ 3 @ 1

1.1.4 Current transformers and voltage transformers

The weights of transformers are extremely dependent on the number and type of cores. Refer to drawings for
gas pressure / gas filling of the voltage transformer and special technical data.

The maximum load capacitance of the voltage transformer (discharge strength) is:

5 µF at Um · √2 / √3

Two consecutive discharges, with a pause of five hours before the next discharge, are permissible for the
voltage transformer.

Pos : 3.3.18 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.1 Elek trische Par ameter/1.1.5 Ortss teuers chr ank /1.1.5 Ortss teuerschr ank - 8DQ1, 8DN 9 6 @ 1\mod_1333370146754_18.docx @ 13341 @ 3 @ 1

1.1.5 Local control cabinet

In the local control cabinet which is separated from the bay the equipment for protected actuation of the
switching devices of a bay and also the optical indications and signals/alarm for the bay are accomodated.

Pos : 3.3.19 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.1 Elek trische Par ameter/1.1.6 Antikondens atheiz ungen/1.1.6 Antik ondensatheiz ungen @ 0\m od_1330501137159_18.docx @ 2516 @ 3 @ 1

1.1.6 Anti-condensation heating units

For information on the anti-condensation heating units, refer to the Technical Data and the Order
Documentation.

Motor drives [ 1.2]

Order documentation

Pos : 3.3.20 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

1-33
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Technical Data
Pos : 3.4 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1

1-34
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Technical Data
Pos : 3.5.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.2 Motorantri ebe/1.2 M otorantriebe/1.2 Motor antriebe @ 0\m od_1329829091110_18.docx @ 1719 @ 2 @ 1

1.2 Motor drives

This section contains information about

- the identification data for the motor drives and

- the identification data for the auxiliary switches.

Basic information:

Electrical and mechanical parameters [ 1.1]

Dimensions and weights of switchgear modules [ 1.5]

The identification data for the auxiliary switches are completed by the timing charts which show the switching
position of the individual auxiliary contacts in the course of switching the main interrupter on or off. This does
not contain time data. The time data are provided in the routine test records.

Timing charts [ 7.21]

Order documentation

Pos : 3.5.2 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1

1-35
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Technical Data
Pos : 3.5.3 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.2 Motorantri ebe/1.2.1 M otorantrieb für Leistungssc halter/1.2.1 M otor für LS 010 @ 0\m od_1329829093376_18.docx @ 1724 @ 3 @ 1

1.2.1 Motor drive for circuit-breaker

The motor drive for the circuit-breaker is an AC or DC motor excited via field winding. It drives the gear to
tension the closing spring. The motor drive can be operated by hand if its supply fails (manual operation).

Pos : 3.5.4 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.2 Motorantri ebe/1.2.1 M otorantrieb für Leistungssc halter/1.2.1.1 M otor für LS 070 - 8D Q1 1, 8DN9 Gl eichs trom Tabell e @ 5\mod_1343809364392_18.docx @ 36444 @ 4 @ 1

1.2.1.1 Technical data for the operating mechanism

DC motor
Rated motor voltage V (DC) 60 110 125 220 250
Permissible voltage % -15 ... +10
deviation IEC
Max. load current A 65 16.8 17,1 6.3 6,3
Starting current (±10%) A 37 46 51 24 27

Pos : 3.5.5 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.2 Motorantri ebe/1.2.1 M otorantrieb für Leistungssc halter/1.2.1.1 M otor für LS 080 - 8D Q1, 8DN9 6 Wec hs elstr om 50 H z T abelle @ 4\m od_1340022723463_18.docx @ 19160 @ @ 1

AC motor 50 Hz
Rated motor voltage V (DC) 120 127 133 220 230 240
Permissible voltage % -15 ... +10
deviation IEC
Max. normal current A 23.2 23.1 23.1 11.5 11.5 11.9
Starting current (±10%) A 37 32 33 35 35 35

Pos : 3.5.6 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.2 Motorantri ebe/1.2.1 M otorantrieb für Leistungssc halter/1.2.1.1 M otor für LS 080 - 8D Q1, 8DN9 6 Wec hs elstr om 60 H z T abelle @ 24\mod_1385111070287_18.docx @ 210971 @ @ 1

AC motor 60 Hz
Rated motor voltage V (DC) 120 127 139 220 230 240 254
Permissible voltage % -15 ... +10
deviation IEC
Max. normal current A 21,3 21,3 21,8 11,3 11,2 11,0 12,4
Starting current (±10%) A 34 35 37 24 25 27 26

Pos : 3.5.7 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1

1-36
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Technical Data
Pos : 3.5.8 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.2 Motorantri ebe/1.2.1 M otorantrieb für Leistungssc halter/1.2.1.2 M otor für LS - 01 T ec hn Daten des Hilfssc halters - 8D Q1 1 T abelle @ 26\mod_1399536929825_18.docx @ 239110 @ 4 @ 1

1.2.1.2 Technical data for the auxiliary switch

One auxiliary switch per drive, mechanically driven. The available contacts are routed out; they are available
for the operator of the switchgear. See the circuit diagram / circuit documentation for details of the
connections and design.

Auxiliary switch type

Rated voltage
- DC V 250
- AC V 240
Rated current A 10
Contacts (freely assignable)
- NC contact 8
- NO contact 8
- Wipe contact 1
Switching capacity for control voltage and V (DC) 60 110 125 220 250
time constant T = 20 ms
- Inductive load A 7 4 2.5 2 2
- Ohmic load A 9 5 5 2.5 2.5
Alternating current 40 to 60 HZ / 250 V W 2200

Pos : 3.5.9 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1

1-37
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Technical Data
Pos : 3.5.10 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.2 M otorantriebe/1.2.1 Motor antrieb für Leis tungssc halter/1.2.1.2 Motor für LS - T ec hn Daten Auslös er 010 - 8DQ1 1/3 @ 0\m od_1329829106844_18.docx @ 1754 @ 4 @ 1

1.2.1.3 Opening and closing releases

The spring-stored-energy mechanism is fitted with one CLOSE release and two OPEN releases.

Pos : 3.5.11 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.2 M otorantriebe/1.2.1 Motor antrieb für Leis tungssc halter/1.2.1.2 Motor für LS - T ec hn Daten Auslös er 020 - 8DQ1 1/3 T abell e @ 25\m od_1396012335309_18.docx @ 236060 @ @ 1

Design type Rated voltage (V) Coil rating (W)

Normal release CLOSE 60 252
(design A) 110 242
125 312
220 225
250 291
Instantaneous release CLOSE 60 2255
(design A) 110 1533
125 1488
220 1274
250 1645
Normal release OPEN 60 252
(design A) 110 242
125 312
220 225
250 291
Instantaneous release OPEN 60 1364
(design B) 110 1300
125 1260
220 1219
250 1299

Pos : 3.5.12 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.2 M otorantriebe/1.2.1 Motor antrieb für Leis tungssc halter/1.2.1.2 Motor für LS - T ec hn Daten Auslös er 040 - T OLER ANZEN @ 15\m od_1364976417883_18.docx @ 109940 @ @ 1

Tolerance control voltage: -15 ... +10

Functioning range of releases acc. to IEC/ANSI:

CLOSE release: -15 ... +10
OPEN release: -30 ... +10

Pos : 3.5.13 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

1-38
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Technical Data
Pos : 3.5.14 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.2 M otorantriebe/1.2.2 Motor antrieb für Ar beitser dungssc halter, Trenn und Erdungss /1.2.2 M otor für Tr enn- und Erdungss chalter 8DN 9 2 / 8DQ1 1/3/8 (8D-M OT)/1.2.2 Tex t für Tr enn- und Erdungss chalter - 8DN 9 2, 8DN 9 6, 8DQ1 1/3/8 @ 5\mod_1343814228188_18.docx @ 36542 @ 3 @ 1

1.2.2 Motor drive for work-in-progress earthing switch, high-speed earthing switch and
disconnector switch
The motor drive for the work-in-progress switches, high-speed earthing switches and disconnector switches is
an electrically operated drive for two rotational directions. It is self-locking in every direction.
The motor drive can be operated by hand if its supply fails (manual operation).

Pos : 3.5.15 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.2 M otorantriebe/1.2.2 Motor antrieb für Ar beitser dungssc halter, Trenn und Erdungss /1.2.2 M otor für Tr enn- und Erdungss chalter 8DN 9 2 / 8DQ1 1/3/8 (8D-M OT)/1.2.2.1 Tabell e für Tr enn- und Erdungss ch. -Tec hn D aten des Antriebes - 8D Q1 1/3/8 @ 4\m od_1340027850624_18.docx @ 19180 @ 4 @ 1

1.2.2.1 Technical data for the operating mechanism

Motor rated voltage V (DC) 220

Permissible deviation % -15 ... +10
Max. normal current A 3
Starting current A ≤9
Rated motor output W 200
Short-circuit protection: Nm
See Order Documentation
Heater rating anti-condensation heating W 24 ... 30
Internal supply cables (multi-cable) mm² 1.5
Degree of protection indoor / outdoor IP 33
Weight approx. kg kg 22

Pos : 3.5.16 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.2 M otorantriebe/1.2.2 Motor antrieb für Ar beitser dungssc halter, Trenn und Erdungss /1.2.2 M otor für Tr enn- und Erdungss chalter 8DN 9 2 / 8DQ1 1/3/8 (8D-M OT)/1.2.2.2 Tabell e für Tr enn- und Erdungss ch. - T ec hn. Daten des Hilfs schalters 8DQ1 1/3/8 @ 25\m od_1396012832296_18.docx @ 236080 @ 4 @ 1

1.2.2.2 Technical data for the auxiliary switch

Auxiliary switch type

Rated voltage
- DC V ≤ 250
Rated current A 10
Contacts (freely assignable)
- NC contact 7
- NO contact 7
- NC contact, extended 1
- NO contact, extended 1
Switching capacity for control voltage and time V 60 110 125 220 250
constant T = 20 ms (DC)
- Inductive load
- Ohmic load A 7 4 2.5 2 2
A 9 5 5 2.5 2.5
Alternating current 40 to 60 HZ / 250 V W 2200

Pos : 3.5.17 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

1-39
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Technical Data
Pos : 3.6 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1

1-40
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Technical Data
Pos : 3.7.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.3 Gasüberwac hung/1.3 Gas überw ac hung - Übersc hrift @ 0\m od_1329829122516_18.docx @ 1789 @ 2 @ 1

1.3 Gas monitoring

Pos : 3.7.2 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.3 Gasüberwac hung/1.3 Gas überw ac hung 00 - T ex t @ 24\m od_1391417456849_18.docx @ 227581 @ @ 1

In this section

- the terms used are explained in the context in which they are used and
- the gas pressures and the operating values for the gas monitoring system are illustrated.

Basic information:

Electrical and mechanical parameters [ 1.1]

Nameplates [ 1.4]

All pressure values stated in this section and elsewhere are gauge values, unless special reference to
absolute pressure is made.

Special gas monitoring drawings are produced for every switchgear installation supplied. These contain details
(for each gas compartment) on

- the volume of the gas compartment,

- the gas filling pressure referred to an ambient temperature of + 20 °C,
- the gas weight (in kg),
- the operating pressure of the rupture disk,
- the operating values for the gas monitoring system.

Pos : 3.7.3 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.3 Gasüberwac hung/1.3.1 Begriffe @ 0\mod_1329829124688_18.docx @ 1794 @ 3 @ 1

1-41
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Technical Data
1.3.1 Terms
The pressure-temperature diagram shows in context the gas pressure values used in the following tables.

Pos : 3.7.4 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.3 Gasüberwac hung/1.3.1 Begriffe - Bild @ 5\m od_1343796740902_0.docx @ 35408 @ @ 1

Pos : 3.7.5 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.3 Gasüberwac hung/1.3.1 Begriffe - Bildu @ 5\mod_1343796699700_18.doc x @ 35384 @ @ 1

1 max. service density (= filling density)

2 min. service density
A filling pressure at +20°C
B min. operating pressure at +20°C
(Dielectric test pressure)
C max. operating pressure
D Operating pressure range at +20°C
E Service pressure range at permissible ambient temperature range
P Pressure
T Temperature
T min min. permissible ambient temperature
T max max. permissible ambient temperature
ΔT max temperature increase in operation (increased temperature added to existing ambient
temperature)

Fig. 1-2 SF6 Data – terms

Pos : 3.7.6 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1

1-42
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Technical Data
Pos : 3.7.7 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.3 Gasüberwac hung/1.3.2 Gas drücke und Ans prec hw erte @ 0\m od_1329829132204_18.docx @ 1809 @ 3 @ 1

1.3.2 Gas pressures and operating values

Pos : 3.7.8 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.3 Gasüberwac hung/1.3.2.1 Gas drüc ke und Ans prec hw. Leistungsschalter - Standar dtabelle 8D Q1 1/3, 550k V @ 39\m od_1548164786168_18.docx @ 774105 @ 4 @ 1

1.3.2.1 Gas pressures and the operating values of the circuit-breaker

Rated voltage kV 550

Rated filling pressure at 20 °C without Iprim kPa 560
Rated operating density in the entire temperature kg/m³ 43.0
range
Min. operating pressure at 20 °C without Iprim kPa 500
Min. operating density in the entire temperature kg/m³ 38.8
range
Max. service pressure kPa 720
at 40 °C + 40 K current temperature increase
(Iprim = max.; T = 80 °C) and rated operating
density
Operating pressure range at 20 °C: kPa 500 ... 670
from min. operating density and Iprim= 0 A
to rated filling density and + 40 K current
temperature increase (Iprim = max.; T = 60 °C)
Operating pressure range at permissible ambient
temperature range:

from -5°C* to +40°C** kPa 440 ... 720

from -25°C* to +40°C** kPa 390 ... 720
from -30°C* to +40°C** kPa 380 ... 720

*at min. operating density and Iprim = 0 A

**at Rated filling density and + 40 K current
heating
(Iprim = max.; T = 80°C)
Alarms / Danger alarms
"SF6 loss" kPa 520 kPa 520
"General lockout SF6" kPa 500
Structural pressure kPa 800
Rupture disk operating pressure kPa 1050...1150

Pos : 3.7.9 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1

1-43
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Technical Data
Pos : 3.7.10 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.3 Gas überw ac hung/1.3.2.2 Gas drück e und Anspr ec hw. Anlage - Standardtabelle 8DQ1 1/3, 550 k V @ 40\m od_1548335879041_18.docx @ 775101 @ 4 @ 1

1.3.2.2 Gas pressures and the operating values of the switchgear (including voltage transformer)

Rated voltage kV 550

Rated filling pressure at 20 °C without Iprim kPa 430
Rated operating density in the entire kg/m³ 33.9
temperature range
Min. operating pressure at 20 °C without Iprim kPa 350
Min. operating density in the entire temperature kg/m³ 28.5
range
Max. service pressure kPa 550
at 40 °C + 40 K current temperature increase
(Iprim = max.; T = 80 °C)
and rated operating density
Operating pressure range at +20 °C: kPa 350 ... 520
from min. operating density and Iprim= 0 A
to rated filling density and + 40 K current
temperature increase (Iprim = max.; T = 60 °C)
Operating pressure range at permissible
ambient temperature range:

from -5°C* to +40°C** kPa 300 ... 550

from -25°C* to +40°C** kPa 270 ... 550
from -30°C* to +40°C** kPa 260 ... 550

* at min. operating density and Iprim = 0 A

** at Rated filling density and + 40 K current
heating (Iprim = max.; T = 80°C)
Alarms / Danger alarms
„SF6 pressure rising“ *)
"SF6 loss" kPa 470
"General lockout SF6" kPa 370
kPa 350
Structural pressure kPa 630
Rupture disk operating pressure kPa 900 ... 1000

Pos : 3.7.11 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

1-44
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Technical Data
Pos : 3.7.12 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.3 Gas überw ac hung/1.3.2.3 Gas drück e und Anspr ec hw. Spannungswandl er - Standar dtabelle 8D Q1 1/3, 550 k V @ 40\mod_1548424802074_18.doc x @ 775702 @ 4 @ 1

1.3.2.3 Gas pressures and the operating values of the switchgear (including voltage transformer)

Rated voltage kV 550

Rated filling pressure at 20 °C without Iprim kPa 430
Rated operating density in the entire kg/m³ 33.9
temperature range
Min. operating pressure at 20 °C without Iprim kPa 350
Min. operating density in the entire temperature kg/m³ 28.5
range
Max. service pressure kPa 550
at 40 °C + 40 K current temperature increase
(Iprim = max.; T = 80 °C)
and rated operating density
Operating pressure range at +20 °C: kPa 350 ... 515
from min. operating density and Iprim= 0 A
to rated filling density and + 40 K current
temperature increase (Iprim = max.; T = 60 °C)
Operating pressure range at permissible
ambient temperature range:

from -5°C* to +40°C** kPa 300 ... 550

from -25°C* to +40°C** kPa 270 ... 550
from -30°C* to +40°C** kPa 260 ... 550

* at min. operating density and Iprim = 0 A

** at Rated filling density and + 40 K current
heating (Iprim = max.; T = 80°C)
Alarms / Danger alarms
„SF6 pressure rising“ *)
"SF6 loss" kPa 370
"General lockout SF6" kPa 350

Structural pressure kPa 630

Rupture disk operating pressure kPa 900 ... 1000

Pos : 3.7.13 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

1-45
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Technical Data
Pos : 3.8 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1

1-46
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Technical Data
Pos : 3.9.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.4 Leistungss chil der/1.4 Leis tungssc hilder 010 @ 0\mod_1329829185189_18.docx @ 1929 @ 2 @ 1

1.4 Nameplates

Basic information:

Electrical and mechanical parameters [ 1.1]

Motor drives [ 1.2]
Gas monitoring [ 1.3]
Dimensions and weights of switchgear modules [ 1.5]

Pos : 3.9.2 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.4 Leistungss chil der/1.4 Leis tungssc hilder 015 - 8DQ1, 8DN 9 @ 0\mod_1329990763300_18.docx @ 2250 @ @ 1

Each bay of the switchgear has its own rating plate. This rating plate is attached to the outside of the control
unit of the respective bay and applies to all switchgear modules comprised in the bay, including the switching
devices – from the relevant busbar up to and including the termination module (e.g. cable, overhead-line or
transformer termination). Other rating plates are attached to the outside of the housings of current and voltage
transformers.
The works serial number and the year of manufacture, the weight of the gas filling and the weight with gas
filling given on the rating plate apply to the entire bay (triple-pole).
A plate with details about gas monitoring can be found inside the control cabinet.

Pos : 3.9.3 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.4 Leistungss chil der/1.4 Leis tungssc hilder 020 - Bild1 Leis tungssc hild eines Fel des @ 5\mod_1343737511239_0.docx @ 35260 @ @ 1

1-47
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Technical Data

Pos : 3.9.4 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.4 Leistungss chil der/1.4 Leis tungssc hilder 020 - Bildu Leis tungssc hild eines Fel des @ 0\mod_1329835484392_18.doc x @ 2065 @ @ 1

Fig. 1-3 Nameplate of a bay with circuit-breaker (example)

1-48
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Technical Data
Pos : 3.9.5 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.4 Leistungss chil der/1.4 Leis tungssc hilder 030 - Bild Leistungssc hild ei nes Stromw andl ers @ 5\mod_1343798027484_0.docx @ 35432 @ @ 1

Pos : 3.9.6 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.4 Leistungss chil der/1.4 Leis tungssc hilder 030 - Bildu Leis tungssc hild eines Str omwandlers @ 0\m od_1329829193907_18.docx @ 1944 @ @ 1

1 Manufacturer
2 Year of manufacture 20. . / Serial No.
3 Rated thermal short-time current
4 Rated dynamic short-time current
5 Type designation
6 Insulation level
7 Rated frequency
8 Measuring range (additional details for special orders)
9 Secondary terminal markings
10 Accuracy class and overcurrent factor
11 Rated power
12 Transformation ratio
13 (Data for) Core No. 1
14 IEC regulations for current transformers
15 Module No.

Fig. 1-4 Nameplate of a current transformer (example)

Pos : 3.9.7 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.4 Leistungss chil der/1.4 Leis tungssc hilder 040 - Bild Leistungssc hild ei nes Spannungsw andlers @ 5\m od_1343798099515_0.docx @ 35456 @ @ 1

1-49
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Technical Data

Pos : 3.9.8 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.4 Leistungss chil der/1.4 Leis tungssc hilder 040 - Bildu Leis tungssc hild eines Spannungswandlers @ 0\m od_1329829197986_18.docx @ 1954 @ @ 1

1 after weighting
2 Serial no.
3 Year of manufacture

Fig. 1-5 Nameplate of a voltage transformer (example)

Pos : 3.9.9 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /1 Tec hnische D aten/M odule/1.4 Leistungss chil der/1.4 Leis tungssc hilder 050 - Bild Leistungssc hild ei nes RC-Teil ers @ 5\mod_1343798154390_0.docx @ 35480 @ @ 1

Pos : 3.9.10 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.4 Leis tungssc hilder/1.4 Leistungsschil der 050 - Bil du Leistungsschil d eines RC-T eilers @ 1\m od_1333538095261_18.docx @ 13504 @ @ 1

1 Serial no.
2 Year of manufacture
3 after weighting

Fig. 1-6 Nameplate for a RC divider (example)

Pos : 3.10 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

1-50
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Technical Data
Pos : 3.11.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte v on Anl agenbaus tei nen/1.5 Ü berschrift: M aß e + Gewic hte @ 0\mod_1329829199798_18.docx @ 1959 @ 2 @ 1

1.5 Dimensions and weights of switchgear modules

During the assembly of the switchgear as well as in the context of the maintenance modules must be
transported, put down and/or placed on supports. This section contains the required dimensions and weights.
The weight information applies to the 3-pole version (as long as a single-pole version has not been specified
in the legend) and without SF6 filling.
Model-related deviations are possible.
For the measurements and weights of the shipping units, see the consignment notes.

Basic information:

Safety notices [ 0.2]

Receiving and handling of shipments [ 3.3]

Pos : 3.11.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte v on Anl agenbaus tei nen/1.5 M aß e und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Archiv /1.5 Maß e + Gewichte 040 - 8D Q1 1 550 k V Bild Leists. P2 - I @ 14\m od_1359558830215_0.doc x @ 92239 @ @ 1

5240

804
2440

Pos : 3.11.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte v on Anl agenbaus tei nen/1.5 M aß e und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Archiv /1.5 Maß e + Gewichte 040 - 8D Q1 1 550 k V Bildu @ 14\m od_1359557600190_18.docx @ 92065 @ @ 1

Fig. 1-7 GIS circuit breaker P2 I variant, total weight 10150 kg

Pos : 3.11.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte v on Anl agenbaus tei nen/1.5 M aß e und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Archiv /1.5 Maß e + Gewichte 050 - 8D Q1 1 550 k V Bild Leists. P2 - L @ 14\mod_1359558917725_0.docx @ 92264 @ @ 1

1-51
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Technical Data
5270

4270

804
3100

2440

900 3180

Pos : 3.11.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte v on Anl agenbaus tei nen/1.5 M aß e und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Archiv /1.5 Maß e + Gewichte 050 - 8D Q1 1 550 k V Bildu @ 14\m od_1359557666441_18.docx @ 92090 @ @ 1

Fig. 1-8 GIS circuit breaker P2 L variant, total weight 10450 kg

Pos : 3.11.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte v on Anl agenbaus tei nen/1.5 M aß e und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Archiv /1.5 Maß e + Gewichte 060 - 8D Q1 1 550 k V Bild Leists. P2 - U @ 14\m od_1359559053385_0.docx @ 92289 @ @ 1

5300

804 3300
3100

Pos : 3.11.7 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte v on Anl agenbaus tei nen/1.5 M aß e und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Archiv /1.5 Maß e + Gewichte 060 - 8D Q1 1 550 k V Bildu @ 14\m od_1359557702064_18.docx @ 92115 @ @ 1

Fig. 1-9 GIS ciruit breaker P2 U variant, total weight 10750 kg

Pos : 3.11.8 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte v on Anl agenbaus tei nen/1.5 M aß e und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Archiv /1.5 Maß e + Gewichte 070 - 8D Q1 1 420 k V Bild Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter @ 14\m od_1359559154795_0.doc x @ 92314 @ @ 1

1-52
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Technical Data
565 636

636

1130
1012

730

580
400 400

Pos : 3.11.9 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/1 T ec hnisc he D aten/Modul e/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte v on Anl agenbaus tei nen/1.5 M aß e und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Archiv /1.5 Maß e + Gewichte 070 - 8D Q1 1 420kV Bil du @ 0\m od_1329830315479_18.docx @ 1989 @ @ 1

Fig. 1-10 Disconnector and earthing switch modules, each with one bushing, one disconnector
and one or two earthing switches, approx. 960 kg (without motor, without linkage)

Pos : 3.11.10 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte v on Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Arc hiv/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 080a - 8DQ1 1 420 k V Bild Str omwandler @ 14\mod_1359559292220_0.docx @ 92339 @ @ 1

636 636
270

730

1060
800

636

Pos : 3.11.11 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte v on Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Arc hiv/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 080a - 8DQ1 1 420 k V Bildu @ 0\mod_1329831572870_18.docx @ 2005 @ @ 1

Fig. 1-11 Current transformer with reducer casing 390 kg, without reducer casing 280 kg

Pos : 3.11.12 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte v on Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Arc hiv/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 080b - 8DQ1 1 Bild Str omwandl er Auß enker n @ 29\m od_1426748265335_0.docx @ 275203 @ @ 1

Pos : 3.11.13 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte v on Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Arc hiv/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 080b - 8DQ1 1 Bildu @ 29\m od_1426748196061_18.docx @ 275181 @ @ 1

Fig. 1-12 Current transformer, with external core, single-pole, 150 – 700kg

Pos : 3.11.14 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte v on Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Arc hiv/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 090 - 8D Q1 1 420 kV Bil d Spannungsw andler @ 14\m od_1359559379854_0.docx @ 92364 @ @ 1
1175

636

700

Pos : 3.11.15 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte v on Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Arc hiv/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 090 - 8D Q1 1 420 kV Bil du @ 0\m od_1329831748121_18.docx @ 2015 @ @ 1

Fig. 1-13 Voltage transformer, 460 kg

Pos : 3.11.16 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte v on Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Arc hiv/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 095 - 8D Q1 1 420 kV Bil d RC-Spannungsteiler @ 14\mod_1359561011061_0.docx @ 92789 @ @ 1

1-53
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Technical Data

1522
636

Pos : 3.11.17 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte v on Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Arc hiv/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 095 - 8D Q1 1 420 kV Bil du @ 14\mod_1359444642962_18.docx @ 92010 @ @ 1

Fig. 1-14 RC-voltage divider, 260 kg

Pos : 3.11.18 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte v on Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Arc hiv/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 100 - 8D Q1 1 420 kV Bil d Kabel anschl uss- Baustein @ 14\m od_1359559471924_0.docx @ 92389 @ @ 1

636

636

2340

Pos : 3.11.19 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte v on Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Arc hiv/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 100 - 8D Q1 1 420 kV Bil du @ 0\m od_1329834803241_18.docx @ 2050 @ @ 1

Fig. 1-15 Cable connection module, without bushing 190 kg

Pos : 3.11.20 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte v on Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Arc hiv/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 110 - 8D Q1 1 420 kV Bil d H aube ohne Durc hführ ung @ 14\mod_1359559563073_0.doc x @ 92414 @ @ 1
509

636

Pos : 3.11.21 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte v on Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Arc hiv/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 110 - 8D Q1 1 420 kV Bil du @ 0\m od_1330000676755_18.docx @ 2338 @ @ 1

Fig. 1-16 Cowl without bushing, 60 kg

Pos : 3.11.22 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte v on Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Arc hiv/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 120 - 8D Q1 1 420 kV Bil d Verlänger ungs baus tei n mit 1 DF @ 14\m od_1359559653159_0.doc x @ 92439 @ @ 1
636

Pos : 3.11.23 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte v on Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Arc hiv/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 120 - 8D Q1 1 420 kV Bil du @ 0\m od_1330001014771_18.docx @ 2368 @ @ 1

Fig. 1-17 Extension module with 1 bushing

L = 500 ... 5,000 mm
G = 105 ... 315 kg

Pos : 3.11.24 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte v on Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Arc hiv/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 130 - 8D Q1 1 420 kV Bil d Ver bindungsbaustein @ 14\mod_1359559741668_0.docx @ 92464 @ @ 1

1-54
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Technical Data

636
400
L

Pos : 3.11.25 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte v on Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Arc hiv/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 130 - 8D Q1 1 420 kV Bil du @ 0\m od_1331635062771_18.docx @ 4557 @ @ 1

Fig. 1-18 Connection module T/L module with one bushing

L = 730 mm, 210 kg
L = 800 mm, 215 kg
L = 1.600 mm, 250 kg

Pos : 3.11.26 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte v on Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Arc hiv/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 140 - 8D Q1 1 420 kV Bil d T/L-Baustein @ 14\mod_1359559891229_0.docx @ 92489 @ @ 1

870

720

Pos : 3.11.27 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte v on Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Arc hiv/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 140 - 8D Q1 1 420 kV Bil du @ 0\m od_1331635268505_18.docx @ 4567 @ @ 1

Fig. 1-19 Connection module T/L module with one bushing, 200 kg

Pos : 3.11.28 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte v on Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Arc hiv/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 150 - 8D Q1 1 420 kV Bil d Samm elschi enen-Leerfel d @ 14\m od_1359559993107_0.doc x @ 92514 @ @ 1

3600 636

Pos : 3.11.29 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte v on Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Arc hiv/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 150 - 8D Q1 1 420 kV Bil du @ 0\m od_1331635284786_18.docx @ 4577 @ @ 1

Fig. 1-20 Busbar vacant bay without bushing, 360 kg

Pos : 3.11.30 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte v on Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Arc hiv/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 160 - 8D Q1 1 420 kV Bil d Samm elschi enen-Mittelfel d @ 14\mod_1359560077838_0.doc x @ 92539 @ @ 1
804

3600

Pos : 3.11.31 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte v on Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Arc hiv/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 160 - 8D Q1 1 420 kV Bil du @ 0\m od_1331635723979_18.docx @ 4667 @ @ 1

Fig. 1-21 Busbar inner bay without bushing, 360 kg

L = 3,600 mm, 470 kg
L = 4,500 mm, 515 kg
Pos : 3.11.32 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte v on Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Arc hiv/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 170 - 8D Q1 1 420 kV Bil d Samm elschi enen-Endfel d k urz @ 14\mod_1359560148412_0.doc x @ 92564 @ @ 1
804

800

Pos : 3.11.33 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte v on Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Arc hiv/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 170 - 8D Q1 1 420 kV Bil du @ 0\m od_1331635826464_18.docx @ 4677 @ @ 1

Fig. 1-22 Busbar end bay without bushing, without tie-rod compensation, 265 kg

1-55
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Technical Data
Pos : 3.11.34 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte v on Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Arc hiv/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 180 - 8D Q1 1 420 kV Bil d Samm elschi enen-Endfel d mit Kom @ 14\m od_1359560315472_0.docx @ 92589 @ @ 1

1238

804
Pos : 3.11.35 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte v on Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Arc hiv/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 180 - 8D Q1 1 420 kV Bil du @ 0\m od_1331635837917_18.docx @ 4687 @ @ 1

Fig. 1-23 Busbar end bay without bushing, with tie-rod compensation, 370 kg

Pos : 3.11.36 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte v on Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Arc hiv/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 190 - 8D Q1 1 420 kV Bil d Drehfl ansch @ 14\m od_1359560380068_0.docx @ 92614 @ @ 1

710 70

Pos : 3.11.37 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte v on Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Arc hiv/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 190 - 8D Q1 1 420 kV Bil du @ 0\m od_1331635878292_18.docx @ 4697 @ @ 1

Fig. 1-24 Rotary flange, 120 kg (single-pole)

Pos : 3.11.38 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte v on Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Arc hiv/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 200 - 8D Q1 1 420 kV Bil d R eduzier baus tei n @ 14\m od_1359560441471_0.docx @ 92639 @ @ 1

800 70

Pos : 3.11.39 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte v on Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Arc hiv/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 200 - 8D Q1 1 420 kV Bil du @ 0\m od_1331635917605_18.docx @ 4707 @ @ 1

Fig. 1-25 Reducer module, 110 kg

Pos : 3.11.40 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte v on Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Arc hiv/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 210 - 8D Q1 1 420 kV Bil d Kom pens ator ohne Durc hführ ung @ 14\mod_1359560508786_0.docx @ 92664 @ @ 1

1940
756

Pos : 3.11.41 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte v on Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Arc hiv/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 210 - 8D Q1 1 420 kV Bil du @ 0\m od_1331635946901_18.docx @ 4717 @ @ 1

Fig. 1-26 Expansion joint without bushing

L = 1,060 mm, 260 kg
L = 1,130 mm, 270 kg
L = 1,475 mm, 290 kg
Pos : 3.11.42 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte v on Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Arc hiv/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 220 - 8D Q1 1 420 kV Bil d Kom pens ator v ariabel @ 14\mod_1359560660478_0.docx @ 92689 @ @ 1

1940
756

Pos : 3.11.43 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte v on Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Arc hiv/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 220 - 8D Q1 1 420 kV Bil du @ 0\m od_1331635297193_18.docx @ 4587 @ @ 1

Fig. 1-27 Expansion joint without bushing

L = 1,940 mm, 360 kg

1-56
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Technical Data
Pos : 3.11.44 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte v on Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Arc hiv/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 231 - 8D Q1 1 420 kV Bil d Freil eitungs pol J @ 14\m od_1359560749601_0.doc x @ 92714 @ @ 1

891
636

Pos : 3.11.45 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte v on Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Arc hiv/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 231 - 8D Q1 1 420 kV Bil du @ 0\m od_1331635311990_18.docx @ 4597 @ @ 1

Fig. 1-28 Overhead line termination module (adapter housing without outdoor bushing), 190 kg

Pos : 3.11.46 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte v on Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Arc hiv/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 240 - 8D Q1 1 420 kV Bil d Freil eitungs pol I @ 14\m od_1359560826253_0.docx @ 92739 @ @ 1

636

1060

Pos : 3.11.47 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte v on Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Arc hiv/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 240 - 8D Q1 1 420 kV Bil du @ 0\m od_1331635323990_18.docx @ 4607 @ @ 1

Fig. 1-29 Overhead line termination module (adapter housing without outdoor bushing), 190 kg
(single-pole)

Pos : 3.11.48 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte v on Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Arc hiv/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 250 - 8D Q1 1 420 kV Bil d Freil eitungs pol L @ 14\mod_1359560910203_0.docx @ 92764 @ @ 1

636
660

Pos : 3.11.49 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte v on Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Arc hiv/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 250 - 8D Q1 1 420 kV Bil du @ 0\m od_1331635339240_18.docx @ 4617 @ @ 1

Fig. 1-30 Overhead line termination module (adapter housing without outdoor bushing), 200 kg
(single-pole)

Pos : 3.11.50 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte v on Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Arc hiv/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 270 - 8D Q1 1 420 kV Bil d Trafoansc hluss- Baus tei n @ 14\m od_1359561088830_0.doc x @ 92814 @ @ 1

1940
400

Pos : 3.11.51 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte v on Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Arc hiv/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 270 - 8D Q1 1 420 kV Bil du @ 0\m od_1331635356022_18.docx @ 4627 @ @ 1

Fig. 1-31 Transformer connection module without bushing, 340 kg

Pos : 3.11.52 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte v on Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Arc hiv/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 440 - 8D Q1 1 550 kV Bil d Abl eiter @ 27\mod_1409650444441_0.docx @ 253441 @ @ 1

1-57
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Technical Data

Pos : 3.11.53 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/1 Technisc he Daten/M odul e/1.5 Maß e und Gewichte v on Anlagenbaustei nen/1.5 M aße und Gewic hte 8DQ1 1/3/8/Arc hiv/1.5 M aß e + Gewic hte 440 - 8D Q1 1 550 kV Bil du @ 27\mod_1409223551020_18.docx @ 251398 @ @ 1

Fig. 1-32 Surge Arrester

Pos : 4.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2 Besc hreibung/2 Besc hrei bung (mit Hi nweis) @ 0\m od_1330597799972_18.docx @ 2637 @ 1 @ 1

1-58
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description
2 Description

2-59
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description

 Note
The illustrations shown in the figures below may deviate in whole or in part
from the supplied design. This is especially true in the case of current path
routing, the position and design of bushings, and any
attachments/assemblies.

Pos : 4.2.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.1 Allgemei ne Merkm ale der Schaltanlage/2.1 Allgem eine M erkmal e der Sc hal tanlag e 8DQ1 @ 4\mod_1340109248080_18.doc x @ 19250 @ 2 @ 1

2-60
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description
2.1 General features of switchgear 8DQ1
This section provides information about the general features of type 8DQ1 switchgear.
Information regarding the specific implementation of a customer order should be shown in the order
documentation.

Order documentation

Switchgears of type 8DQ1 are metal-enclosed, gas-insulated switchgears for operating voltages up to 420 kV.
They consist of individual switchgear bays. They are set up free-standing, either outdoors or indoors.

The modular system makes it possible to set up all the usual switchgear circuit configurations. Switchgears of
type 8DQ1 are also suitable for adding on to existing installations of type 8D. The supply range includes
transition and busbar adapter modules for switchgear types on the same voltage level.

Pos : 4.2.2 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.1 Allgemei ne Merkm ale der Schaltanlage/2.1. 1 Anlag enbaus tei ne - 8DQ1 1/3 @ 11\m od_1350893625739_18.docx @ 69803 @ 3 @ 1

2.1.1 Switchgear modules

- Space requirements are clearly reduced, due to the compact configuration from single-pole system
modules and extremely small component dimensions.

- The equipment is assembled on a single-pole basis and pre-tested at the place of manufacture, with a
central terminal transfer point for the connection of a separate local control cabinet. This minimises the
erection effort on site.

- Depending on their shape and size, the housings are made of cast aluminium or of welded aluminium or
steel constructions.

- Housings and expansion joints of high-grade steel together form the pressure-resistant enclosure for the
switchgear. The housings are manufactured and tested according to the latest state of the art. Each housing
is subjected to pressure testing with air and leakage testing with helium gas.

- After the tests, the housings are painted on the inside and outside.

- Housings made of steel for outdoor use receive in addition an external metallic protective coat, e.g. of
sprayed zinc or zinc powder paint, and then the final coat of paint.

- The conductors are connected by means of coupling or sliding contacts. The connection points are
accessible, as far as necessary, by means of manway openings in the enclosures of the system modules.

Pos : 4.2.3 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

2-61
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description
Pos : 4.2.4 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.1 Allgemei ne Merkm ale der Schaltanlage/2.1. 2 Gas, Gasräum e, Gasüberw ac hung - 8DQ1 1/3 (ei npolig) @ 27\m od_1409227008773_18.docx @ 251538 @ 3 @ 1

2.1.2 Gas, gas compartments, gas monitoring

- SF6 as a gaseous insulating and quenching medium is present inside the enclosure in mutually independent
gas compartments.

- Filters in the gas compartments absorb moisture and decomposition products.

- The switch motor operating shafts are supported and provided with lip seals against overpressure and
vacuum loss, so that no air can penetrate during evacuation – before commissioning – and no SF6 gas can
escape during operation (the leakage rate for the switchgear is ≤ 0.1% per year and gas compartment).

- All gas compartments are fitted with rupture discs and, where necessary, diverters. The diverters are
arranged in such a way that the flow of gas is directed away from personnel and machinery if a rupture disk
fails.

- Decentralised monitoring of the gas compartments.

The monitoring of the all gas compartments is on a single-pole basis.

Monitoring is carried out by means of density monitors.

In addition, the indicator of the pressure gauge monitor display allows a precise assessment of the filling
status of the gas compartments.

Pos : 4.2.5 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.1 Allgemei ne Merkm ale der Schaltanlage/2.1. 3 Leistungsschalter - 8DQ1 1/3/6/8, 8DN 9 2/6 @ 0\mod_1331902599186_18.docx @ 9492 @ 3 @ 1

2.1.3 Circuit-breaker
The circuit-breaker consists of three single poles arranged horizontally. It also forms the basis for the bay
structure. It is switched by separate spring-stored-energy mechanisms. Single or three-pole autoreclosure.

- The gas flow required for arc-quenching is produced in the switching system by means of self-compression.
The mechanical energies released are only slight due to the low level of drive forces required. This
minimises the load on the circuit-breaker, the enclosure and the foundations.

- The contactor equipment is located in the CB control cabinet

- The auxiliary switch and the position indicator are connected directly and securely to the operating drive
rod.

Pos : 4.2.6 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.1 Allgemei ne Merkm ale der Schaltanlage/2.1. 4 Samm elschi enenbausteine - 8DQ1, 8DN 9 6 @ 0\m od_1331904018321_18.docx @ 9525 @ 3 @ 1

2.1.4 Busbar modules

- Single-pole enclosed busbars. A continuous gas compartment can be subdivided by gas-tight bushings.

- Busbar modules conductors are linked by coupling contacts or flexible connectors which take up the
horizontal thermal expansion.

Pos : 4.2.7 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

2-62
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description
Pos : 4.2.8 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.1 Allgemei ne Merkm ale der Schaltanlage/2.1. 5 Trenn- Ar beits- und Schnellerdungssch. - mit Drehmom, dr eipol. Antrieb 8DN9, 8DQ1 1/3/8 8D-Mo @ 0\m od_1331904372520_18.docx @ 9547 @ 3 @ 1

2.1.5 Disconnectors, work-in-progress earthing switches and high-speed-earthing switches

- The disconnector is single-phase encapsulated.

- Disconnectors can be used as outgoing modules, busbar modules or as sectionalizers. They can also be
fitted with additional work-in-progress earthing switches or high-speed earthing switches.

- Motor drives of the same design are used for disconnectors and earthing switches.

- Disconnector and work-in-progress earthing switch are fitted with a torque limiter.

- In the case of the high-speed earthing switch, the motor drive charges the spring stored-energy mechanism.

- The three poles of the disconnector or work-in-progress earthing switch of a bay are coupled mechanically
by drive rods outside the enclosure.

- The auxiliary switch and the position indicator are connected securely to the operating mechanism shaft.

- All disconnectors, work-in-progress earthing switches and high-speed earthing switches can be operated
manually.

- Optional view ports allow monitoring of the switching position of disconnectors and earthing switches.

- Electromechanical contactors facilitate control and monitoring.

Pos : 4.2.9 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.1 Allgemei ne Merkm ale der Schaltanlage/2.1. 6 Stromw andler 8D Q1 @ 0\m od_1332232359192_18.docx @ 9570 @ 3 @ 1

2.1.6 Current transformer

- The current transformer is designed as an inductive current transformer. The secondary windings are fixed
on toroidal cores. Secondary windings may have several taps for adaptation to various primary currents.
All secondary leads are provided in the terminal box.

- There are various cores for instrument duty, metering or protection purposes.

- The current transformer is single-pole encapsulated.

- The current transformer forms a common SF6 gas compartment for itself or with several adjacent modules.

- Can be installed in any location on the bay, and in any position.

Pos : 4.2.10 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1

2-63
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description
Pos : 4.2.11 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.1 Allgemei ne Merkm ale der Sc haltanl age/2.1. 7 Spannungswandler - 8DQ1, 8DN 9 @ 4\m od_1340109897655_18.docx @ 19261 @ 3 @ 1

2.1.7 Voltage transformer

- The voltage transformer is an inductive voltage transformer. It consists of an iron core, the single-step
primary winding with the relevant HV electrode and the HV terminal. Switchover to the various transmission
ratios of the voltage transformer takes place in the terminal box.

- The voltage transformer is in single-pole design.

- It has its own enclosure sealed by a sealed bushing.

- Electrical disconnection from live parts of the switchgear can be achieved in the isolated state by removing
a conductor connection and then inserting shielding components. Disconnection can also be achieved
using an isolator with a manual or motor drive.

Pos : 4.2.12 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.1 Allgemei ne Merkm ale der Sc haltanl age/2.1. 9 Ableiter - 8DQ1, 8DN 9 @ 4\mod_1340110131343_18.docx @ 19272 @ 3 @ 1

2.1.8 Arresters
- To limit the occurring of overvoltages, a surge arrester can be connected upon request to limit the
occurrence of overvoltages.

- The active part of the encapsulated surge arrester is made of metal oxide discharge resistors. Upon
occurrence of a surge, they become conducting and thus limit the surge voltage to a value that does not
endanger the insulation of the switchgear.

- The surge arrester is in single-pole design.

- It has its own enclosure sealed by a sealed bushing.

- Connections for equipment to monitor the arrester.

Pos : 4.2.13 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.1 Allgemei ne Merkm ale der Sc haltanl age/2.1.10 Kabel anschl uss-Baustein - 8D Q1, 8DN9 @ 4\mod_1340110273171_18.docx @ 19282 @ 3 @ 1

2.1.9 Cable connection module

- The cable connection module allows the connection of all common types of high-voltage cable with
conventional cable fasteners. For high-voltage testing, the primary conductor connection between the cable
sealing end and the adjacent module can be removed.

The cable connection module is in single-pole design.

A double cable can be connected if the cable connection modules are arranged accordingly.

Pos : 4.2.14 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.1 Allgemei ne Merkm ale der Sc haltanl age/2.1.13 Transformator anschl uss-Baustein - 8D Q1, 8DN9 @ 4\mod_1340110508562_18.docx @ 19292 @ 3 @ 1

2.1.10 Transformer connection module

- The transformer termination module allows direct connection to pressure-resistant, gastight and oil-proof
transformer bushings as well as reactors.

Expansion joints compensate for thermally-induced movements and differing settling of the foundations of the
switchgear and the transformer.

Pos : 4.2.15 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1

2-64
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description
Pos : 4.3.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.2 Elektrische Steuer ung/2.2 Elek trische Steuerung - Ü bersc hrift @ 0\m od_1332236153251_18.docx @ 9658 @ 2 @ 1

2.2 Electrical control

Pos : 4.3.2 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.2 Elektrische Steuer ung/2.2 Elek trische Steuerung 000 - T ext @ 24\m od_1391420747384_18.docx @ 227602 @ @ 1

Electrical control is achieved by the use of an electromechanical control system. This section describes

- the use of this control

- the design of the control
- the design of the installation.

Basic information:

Motor drives [ 1.2]

Order documentation

Pos : 4.3.3 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.2 Elektrische Steuer ung/2.2.1 Verw endung 010 @ 4\m od_1340111383312_18.docx @ 19322 @ 3 @ 1

2.2.1 Use
The components of the electromechanical control used at the bay level, together with the devices of the bay
substation control centre, carry out all control and monitoring tasks.

Pos : 4.3.4 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

2-65
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description
Pos : 4.3.5 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.2 Elektrische Steuer ung/2.2.2 Aufbau 010 - 8DQ1, 8DN 9 6 @ 4\mod_1340111659530_18.docx @ 19333 @ 3 @ 1

2.2.2 Design
The electromechanical control consists of contactors, time-delay relays and operations counters.
The contactors switch high-power loads (motors).
The operating cycle counters record each switching operation of the circuit breaker.

Pos : 4.3.6 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.2 Elektrische Steuer ung/2.2.2 Aufbau 020 - 8DN9 6, 8DQ1 Bild1 @ 11\m od_1350899250477_0.doc x @ 69894 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.3.7 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.2 Elektrische Steuer ung/2.2.2 Aufbau 020 - 8DN9 6, 8DQ1 Bildu @ 11\m od_1350899289461_18.docx @ 69916 @ @ 1

1 Electrical control

Fig. 2-1 Circuit-breaker control cabinet with electrical control

Pos : 4.3.8 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.2 Elektrische Steuer ung/2.2.2 Aufbau 025 - 8DN9 6, 8DQ1 @ 11\m od_1350899590846_18.docx @ 69939 @ @ 1

Circuit-breaker [ 2.5]

The exact design of the control as well as the motor protection can be found in the schematics.

Order documentation

Pos : 4.3.9 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

2-66
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description
Pos : 4.3.10 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.2 Elektrisc he Steuerung/2.2.3 Installati on 010 - GIS @ 0\mod_1332240524449_18.docx @ 9730 @ 3 @ 1

2.2.3 Installation
The wiring to the drives of the high-voltage switching devices, to the density monitors and to the current and
voltage transformers is via flexible, screened control cables.
The control cables are clamped and routed out of the cubicles and housings via cable conduits or using plug-
in connections.
The shielding of the control cables is earthed to the cable conduits at both ends.

Pos : 4.3.11 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.2 Elektrisc he Steuerung/2.2.3 Installati on 020 - 8DQ1 1 Bild2 @ 14\m od_1360938458425_0.docx @ 96615 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.3.12 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.2 Elektrisc he Steuerung/2.2.3 Installati on 020 - 8DQ1 1 Bild2u @ 14\m od_1360939287850_18.docx @ 96639 @ @ 1

Fig. 2-2 Plug connectors in the CB control cabinet at the local control cabinet

Pos : 4.3.13 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.2 Elektrisc he Steuerung/2.2.3 Installati on 030 - 8DQ1 1 Bild3 @ 14\m od_1360939586367_0.docx @ 96663 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.3.14 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.2 Elektrisc he Steuerung/2.2.3 Installati on 030 - 8DQ1 1 Bild3u @ 14\m od_1360939587507_18.docx @ 96688 @ @ 1

Fig. 2-3 Plug connectors on the rear of the CB control cabinet at the CB drive cabinets

Pos : 4.3.15 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.2 Elektrisc he Steuerung/2.2.3 Installati on 040 @ 11\m od_1348559005299_18.docx @ 67110 @ @ 1

Details regarding installation, particularly the design of the local control cabinet, can be found in the order
documentation.

Order documentation

Pos : 4.3.16 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1

2-67
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description
Pos : 4.4.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.3 Gasüberwac hung/2.3 Gas überwachung @ 41\mod_1576661937237_18.docx @ 828226 @ 2 @ 1

2-68
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description
2.3 Gas monitoring
This Section

- defines the use of gas monitoring

- describes the structure

Basic information:

Gas monitoring [ 1.3]

Checking the gas monitoring system [ 7.3]

Order documentation

Pos : 4.4.2 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.3 Gasüberwac hung/2.3.1 Verwendung - einpolig 8DN9 6, 8DQ1 @ 41\m od_1576660696890_18.docx @ 828157 @ 3 @ 1

2.3.1 Use
The task of the gas monitoring system is to ensure that gas compartments maintain the specified density and
to signal any impermissible deviations.
The gas compartments are separated from each other by gastight bushings. If a gas compartment consists of
several modules, these are connected using gas-permeable bushings.

The bushings are labelled as follows:

- gastight bushings with a black plate bearing the legend "gastight"

- gas-permeable bushings with a white plate bearing the legend “gas-permeable“.

The monitoring of the gas compartments is decentralised, this means, directly at each gas compartment.
The density of the gas is determined by a density monitor.

The individual gas compartments and their gas pressure are described on the HP drawing.

Pos : 4.4.3 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

2-69
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description
Pos : 4.4.4 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.3 Gasüberwac hung/2.3.2 Aufbau 010 @ 0\m od_1332251824879_18.docx @ 10052 @ 3 @ 1

2.3.2 Construction
The density monitor shows the trend of the filling status of the gas chamber.

Pos : 4.4.5 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.3 Gasüberwac hung/2.3.2 Aufbau 011 - Standar d Dic htewäc hter Ü bersic ht Bil d1 @ 35\mod_1525428213136_0.docx @ 722975 @ @ 1

1 2 3

Pos : 4.4.6 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.3 Gasüberwac hung/2.3.2 Aufbau 011 - Standar d Dic htewäc hter Ü bersic ht Bil d1u @ 35\m od_1525428257374_18.docx @ 722997 @ @ 1

Fig. 2-4 Density monitor

1) with trend indicator red/green
2) with scaled trend indicator red/yellow/green
3) with scaled trend indicator red/yellow/green and atmospheric pressure indicator

Pos : 4.4.7 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.3 Gasüberwac hung/2.3.2 Aufbau 030 - T ext - mi t Pr üfanschl uss @ 35\mod_1525428593657_18.docx @ 723019 @ 3 @ 1

The density monitor compares the density of the monitored gas compartment with a reference gas enclosed
in the density monitor. Both gases are exposed to the same ambient temperature. Thus, the density
comparison is implemented by a pressure comparison in both systems (gas compartment - reference room).
The density monitor only responds to pressure changes as a result of a leak; pressure changes due to
temperature fluctuations remain unaccounted for.
The density switch is set to the required density limit at the factory. The density limit is defined by defining the
pressure at a certain temperature. Subsequent adjustment is not necessary and not possible.
The alarms and their response values are given in the technical data.

Gas pressures and operating values [ 1.3.2]

No: 4.4.8 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi ervorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18854 @ @ 1

2.3.3 Density monitor with test connection

The test connection enables an examination of the density monitor in the installed state, without changing the
pressure in the gas compartment.
In normal operation, the test connection is closed off with the plug and a coupling nut. A pin on the plug holds
the check valve open and establishes the connection between density monitor and gas compartment.
The alarms and their response values are given in the technical data.

Gas pressures and operating values [ 1.3.2]

Pos : 4.4.8 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

2-70
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description
Pos : 4.5.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.4 Ü berwac hung, Prüfung und D etekti on/2.4 Überwac hung, Pr üfung und D etekti on - Ü bersc hrift @ 35\mod_1530078065563_18.docx @ 741815 @ 2 @ 1

2.4 Monitoring, testing and detection

This section describes types and installation locations for the monitoring, test and diagnosis modules.

Basic information:

Electrical and mechanical parameters [1.1]

Electrical control [ 2.2]

Pos : 4.5.2 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.4 Ü berwac hung, Prüfung und D etekti on/2.4.1 Sic htfenster @ 35\m od_1530080223034_18.docx @ 741838 @ 3 @ 1

2.4.1 Viewport

The viewport enables checking

- of the switch position in addition to the mechanical switch position indicators and
- the condition of the switching and earthing switch pins

The cover presses the viewport against a round seal ring and closes off the connecting nozzle gas-tight and
pressure-tight.
Viewports in the outdoor area are also provided with a cover. This is sealed against the cover with a flat gasket.

1 Housing flange
2 Cover
3 Viewport
4 Ring
5 Round gasket
6 Cover
7 Flat gasket

Fig. 2-5 Viewport without/with cover

Pos : 4.5.3 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1

2-71
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description
Pos : 4.5.4 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.4 Ü berwac hung, Prüfung und D etekti on/2.4.2 Kamer a-Set @ 35\mod_1530081980209_18.doc x @ 741861 @ 3 @ 1

2.4.2 Camera set

The camera set is a portable, software-supported system for improving visual inspection of the gas spaces,
especially the switch position of the disconnector, earthing and high-speed earthing switches.
The switch position can be unambiguously determined and documented by comparison of the indicated
positions with reference photographs.

The camera set comprises a camera with a 10-m cable, an adapter, a USB cable for computer connection as
well as a signal converter. The adapter and fastening hardware and tools enable mounting of the camera set.
A laptop with the camera manufacturer's software is also necessary for used.

Mounting and removing camera set

1 Remove viewport cover (for outdoor installation).

2 Screw adapter [3] to the compression ring [5] with the supplied hex socket screws.
3 Insert camera [1] in adapter [3] and snap in place with slight pressure. The camera can still
be rotated in the installation position.
4 Three pressing elements [2] integrated in the adapter [3] serve to fix the camera [1] and
position it optimally on the viewport [4].
5 The camera [1] can be disconnected from the adapter [3] by pulling slightly. Unscrew the
adapter [3] from the compression ring [5] if necessary.

1 Camera
2 Pressing element
3 Adapter
4 Viewport
5 Compression ring
6 Housing flange

Fig. 2-6 Viewport with camera set

Caution!
Do not loosen the threaded connection of the compression ring [5] with the
housing flange [6] under any circumstances. Disconnecting the threaded
connection results in a loss of gas in the affected gas space.

Details on the structure, function and use of the camera set are documented in the manufacturer's
operating instructions.

Pos : 4.5.5 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.5.6 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.4 Ü berwac hung, Prüfung und D etekti on/2.4.3 Lic htbog enerfass ung @ 43\mod_1588841979337_18.docx @ 858255 @ 3 @ 1

2-72
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description
2.4.3 Arc detection

Optoelectronic light detection enables the localization of arcing within a gas space. Light sensors are mounted
on module connection supports.

The arcing detection system comprises:

- A light sensor
- A fiber-optic cable and
- A central detection unit.

In the event of arcing, the light sensor [3] transmits the light from the interior of the gas compartment via the
fiber-optic cable [1]. This is connected to the end of the light sensor [3].
The signal is transmitted via the fiber-optic cable to the detection unit.
The central detection unit is deactivated during a switching operation to prevent error messages.

1 Fiber-optic cable
2 Sleeve
3 Light sensor
4 O-ring

Figure 2-7 Arcing detection system

Pos : 4.5.7 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1

2-73
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description
Pos : 4.5.8 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.4 Ü berwac hung, Prüfung und D etekti on/2.4.4 Sens or en - Übersc hrift @ 44\mod_1593594532741_18.docx @ 868185 @ 3 @ 1

2.4.4 Sensors

Couplers are used in combination with adapters as sensors for the following different detection and
measurement purposes:

- Detection and localization of partial discharges

- Detection of voltages
- Measurement of transient voltages over the frequency range from 50 Hz to 50 MHz
- Measurement of residual DC charges

Each type of adapter is designed for an individual measurement application.

Pos : 4.5.9 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.4 Ü berwac hung, Prüfung und D etekti on/2.4.4.1 Sonde Ty p 1.1 - Aufbau @ 38\m od_1536652027775_18.docx @ 753418 @ 4 @ 1

2.4.4.1 Coupler type 1.1

Structure of a coupler without connected adapter:

5 9 8 7 6

4 3 2

1 Tank cover 5 Housing

2 Control ring 6 Cover
(also for filter material) 7 Contact spring
3 Electrode 8 Pressure pin
4 Pin with insulating bushes and gaskets 9 Surge arrester

Fig. 2-8 Coupler assembly type 1.1

The coupler pin [4] is grounded through the two contact springs [7] without the adapter connected.
When an adapter is placed on the cover [6], lowering the knurled screws actuates the pressure pins [8] through
the shoulders onto the adapter connection plate. The pressure pins [8] lift off the contact springs [7],
disconnecting the grounding of the pin [4].
An adapter can be positioned or exchanged with high voltage applied, i.e. without lockout and tagout of the
switchgear.

Pos : 4.5.10 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

2-74
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description
Pos : 4.5.11 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.4 Ü berw achung, Prüfung und Detektion/2.4.4.1.1 Sonde Typ 1.1 - Teil entladungsadapter (T E/PD) @ 38\m od_1536652209391_18.docx @ 753441 @ 5 @ 1

2.4.4.1.1 Partial discharge adapter

The coupler can be used in combination with a partial discharge adapter for the detection and localization of
partial discharges within the switchgear.

1 Connecting plate
2 Knurled screw
1 3 N jack
4 Resistor
4
5 Capacitor
A Shoulders

3
A

Fig. 2-9 Partial discharge adapter for coupler type 1.1

Pos : 4.5.12 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.5.13 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.4 Ü berw achung, Prüfung und Detektion/2.4.4.2.1 Sonde Typ 1/2 - Detek tion v on T eilentladung en @ 38\mod_1536652541278_18.docx @ 753464 @ 5 @ 1

2.4.4.1.2 Detection of partial discharges

Partial discharges (PD) in metal-enclosed SF6-insulated switchgear can be caused by:

- Coronas on edges or burrs on electrodes

- Loose shielding
- Contamination, particles
- Defective insulation parts

The partial discharges have impulse rise times of less than 1 ns and generate ultra-high frequency oscillations
(UHF) that propagate at the speed of light through transient waves or fiber-optic waves in the switchgear. UHF
propagation also proceeds via open disconnector switches or circuit breakers as well as through closed
earthing switches.
Damping of 2 – 2.5 dB/m is indicated. Damping also occurs due to refraction and reflection at branch points
within the switchgear.
The UHF signals can be detected with the coupler and a partial discharge adapter. 50-Ω coaxial cables are
suitable as instrument leads. A device such as a spectral analyzer can be used as the measuring device
(potentially with a preamplifier to improve the signal-to-noise ratio).
The PD detector acts as an antenna to receive the UHF oscillations from any partial discharges. The signals
to be measured develop from resonance in the switchgear and internal resonance in the coupler. Each partial
discharge pulse generates a pulse-shaped damped oscillation in the PD detector.
The intensity of the signals to be measured depends on the strength of the partial discharges but primarily on
their pulse gradient. It is not possible to draw any conclusions regarding the magnitude pC (apparent charge)
of the partial discharges based on the UHF measurements.
2-75
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description
Frequency components above 300 MHz are determining for the detection of partial discharges within the
switchgear. External partial discharges (in air, from connected overhead lines or test equipment) are
characterized by lower frequency components and can therefore be distinguished from partial discharges
within the switchgear.
A representation of the common pulses as a function of the phase angle of the applied high voltage provides
information on the type of the partial discharges.

Fig. 2-10 Identifying partial discharges

a) Particles
b) Shielding at free potential
c) Corona

Strong UHF transmitters (radar, directional radio, telecommunications) can also penetrate via openings in the
switchgear (e. g. outdoor connection) and be received by the coupler.
These signals can differ from the partial discharges, as they have no relation to the phase angle of the applied
high voltage.
Pos : 4.5.14 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.5.15 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.4 Ü berw achung, Prüfung und Detektion/2.4.4.1.2 Sonde Typ 1.1 - Spannungspr üfadapter (VD S/D PD) @ 47\m od_1624513079093_18.docx @ 918845 @ 5 @ 1

2.4.4.1.1 Voltage test adapter

The voltage test adapter is attached to the sensor to establish a de-energized state in a bay section. Voltage
can only be detected and not measured with this adapter.
This adapter is only suitable for tests with DC voltage.

1 Connecting plate
5
2 Knurled screw
1
6 3 N jack
4 Low-voltage capacitor
(2nF)
3 5 Damping resistor (5Ω)
A
6 Terminating resistor (50Ω)
A Setdown surface

Figure 2-11 Voltage test adapter for type 1.1 sensor

Pos : 4.5.16 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.4 Ü berw achung, Prüfung und Detektion/2.4.4.1.3 Sonde Typ 1.1 - Mes sung v on hoc hfreq uenten Spannungen ( VFT) @ 38\m od_1536652846128_18.docx @ 753510 @ 5 @ 1

2.4.4.1.1 Measurement of very fast transients (VFT)

The coupler and the VFT adapter can be used to measure high-frequency voltages (very fast transients (VFT))
in the inside conductor over the frequency range of 50 Hz to 50 MHz.

2-76
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description
The coupler acts in combination with a VFT adapter as a capacitive voltage divider with a low-voltage
capacitance of 6 nF
1 Connecting plate
5
2 Knurled screw
1
3 N jack
6
4 Low-voltage capacitor (6
nF)
5 Damping resistor (5 Ω)
3 6 Terminating resistor (50 Ω)
A
A Setdown surface

Fig. 2-12 VFT adapter

Pos : 4.5.17 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.5.18 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.4 Ü berw achung, Prüfung und Detektion/2.4.4.1.4 Sonde Typ 1.1 - Mes sung v on Glei chs pannungs-Restladungen (DC) @ 38\mod_1536652978281_18.doc x @ 753533 @ 5 @ 1

2.4.4.1.1 Measurement of residual DC charges

As a capacitive voltage divider, the coupler enables the measurement of DC voltages, e.g. after the opening
of disconnector switches or circuit breakers. The integrated low-voltage capacitor increases the low-voltage
capacitance of the voltage divider by C4 = 500 nF.
In addition to the VFT adapter (see 2.4.2.1.1) an additional DC adapter is necessary for this measurement.
This requires that the N connector for the DC adapter (No. 3) be inserted in the N jack of the VFT adapter (No.
3, cf. Section 2.4.2.1.1). As an alternative, an instrument cable can also be connected between the VFT
adapter and the DC adapter. Cable length is not relevant for this application.
The following installation sequence must be observed for the measurement:
1. Connect the den VFT adapter to the coupler (see Section 2.4.2.1).
2. Connect the DC adapter to the VFT adapter.
3. The measurement is made via the DC adapter (N jack, No. 2).

1 Capacitor (500 nF)

2 N jack
3 N-connector

Fig. 2-13 DC adapter

Caution!
The DC adapter shall only be used in conjunction with the VFT adapter.

Pos : 4.5.19 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.5.20 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.4 Ü berw achung, Prüfung und Detektion/2.4.4.2 Sens or Ty p 1.2 - Aufbau + T eilentladungs adapter @ 36\m od_1532594559750_18.docx @ 746085 @ 4 @ 1

2-77
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description
2.4.4.2 Partial discharge sensor type 1.2

The compact design of the partial discharge sensor type 1.2 includes an integrated adapter housing for partial
discharge measurement. There is always a connection with ground potential via the internal conductor over
the adapter housing.
The special geometry of the adapter housing ensures optimum decoupling of the high-frequency signals
relevant for partial discharge measurement. No additional adapter is required.

10
1
9

2
8

3
7

6 5

1 Conductor contact 6 Pressure cover

2 Insulating material 7 Multilam plug
3 Contact pin 8 N-type socket
4 Control ring 9 Inner conductor
5 Sensor 10 Adapter housing

Fig. 2-14 Partial discharge sensor assembly type 1.2

Warning!
The switchgear shall not be operated without the adapter housing.
There is a hazard of personal injury due to contact with live parts on
removal of the integrated adapter housing.
An adapter housing shall not be positioned or replaced when high voltage is
applied, i. e., the system must be locked out and tagged out, grounded and
in a deenergized state.

 Notice
The partial discharge sensor type 1.2 cannot detect voltages or measure
transient voltages.
Only the coupler type 1.1 can be used in connection with the corresponding
adapter for these types of measurements.

Pos : 4.5.21 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1
Pos : 4.5.22 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.4 Ü berw achung, Prüfung und Detektion/2.4.5 Sensgear C onnectivity Device @ 45\m od_1606203781472_18.docx @ 898956 @ 3 @ 1

2-78
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description
2.4.5 Sensgear™ Connectivity Device
The Sensgear™ Connectivity Device enables digital monitoring of gas-insulated switchgear and records
various measured values. These are transmitted to a cloud platform (such as Amazon Web services, AWS)
and evaluated. The data can be displayed via the Sensgear™ app.

The following measured values can be recorded:

- Gas density
- GPS data
- Circuit breakers: Switch position, number of switching operations and "ready to switch on" status
- Temperature in circuit breaker drive cabinet
- Ambient temperature

Configuration

1 Antenna connections for GSM/GPS

2 Status LEDs
3 Slot for SIM card
4 LAN/WAN connection
5 USB port
6 Power supply
7 Digital inputs for data on switch position, number of switching operations, "ready to switch on" status
8 Analog inputs for ambient temperature sensor
9 Connection for temperature sensor (circuit breaker drive cabinet)
10 Modbus connection for gas density measurement

Fig. 2-15 Configuration of Sensgear™ connectivity device

2-79
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description

Caution!
The power supply for the Sensgear™ connectivity device shall not be activated
until all installation and assembly work is completed.
Risk of electric shock!

Warning!
The Sensgear™ connectivity device shall only be installed, configured or replaced
by qualified specialist personnel.
Switching operations are only permitted after configuration is complete and the
circuit breaker drive cabinet is closed.
Risk of electric shock!

Operating instructions for IoT Connectivity Device for Sensgear (924 01416)

os: 5.5.50
@ /01
@ OPERATING
modules/2.4.5
100452 1MeasurementINSTRUCTIONS/2 Description/Modules/2.4
procedure with probes Monitoring, test and diagnosis @
095 - 8DN8 6 @ 14\mod_1362409260450_6.docx
Pos : 4.5.23 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

2-80
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description
Pos : 4.6.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.5 Leistungssc halter /2.5 Leistungssc halter /2.5 Leistungssc halter @ 1\m od_1332920361216_18.docx @ 11824 @ 2 @ 1

2.5 Circuit-breaker
This section contains a description of

- use of the circuit-breaker

- the external design of the circuit-breaker
- the internal design of the circuit-breaker
- design and function of the drive mechanism.
Basic information:

Electrical and mechanical parameters [ 1.1]

Dimensions and weights of switchgear modules [ 1.5]
Electrical control [ 2.2]
Pos : 4.6.2 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.5 Leistungssc halter /2.5.1 Verwendung/2.5.1 Verwendung @ 1\m od_1332940530911_18.docx @ 12406 @ 3 @ 1

2.5.1 Use
The circuit-breaker forms the central element of the gas-insulated switchgear. It activates electrical currents,
constantly controlling transmission and interruption. To increase the stability of the network, 3-pole auto-
reclosers can be implemented to provide time-specific and location-specific deactivation.
The circuit-breaker can be installed for the connection of overhead lines, feeders, transformers, reactors and
capacitors. In systems with multiple busbars, it works as a coupling to enable energy transport from one bus
bar to the other.
Pos : 4.6.3.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.5 Leistungssc halter/2.5.2 Äußer er Aufbau/2.5.2 Äußer er Aufbau 010 - 8D Q1 1/3 @ 1\m od_1332940618183_18.docx @ 12461 @ 3 @ 1

2.5.2 External design

The circuit-breaker consists of

- the three poles A, B and C, each with one spring stored-energy mechanism and a frame, which serves both
as a transport frame and as a final bay supporting structure at the installation site
- and a control unit on the middle pole.

Four feet, adjustable in height, are fitted to each frame. The feet enable the height of the three-pole circuit-
breaker to be aligned with that of the switchgear bay.
The circuit-breaker is connected via bushings to the rest of the switchgear at the flanges provided.
Pos : 4.6.3.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.5 Leistungssc halter/2.5.2 Äußer er Aufbau/2.5.2 Äußer er Aufbau 020 - 8D Q1 1 Bil d1 @ 14\m od_1361175950147_0.docx @ 96812 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.6.3.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.5 Leistungssc halter/2.5.2 Äußer er Aufbau/2.5.2 Äußer er Aufbau 020 - 8D Q1 1 Bil du @ 1\m od_1332940629339_18.docx @ 12494 @ @ 1

1 Housing
2 Frame
3 Drive unit
4 CB switch cabinet
Fig. 2-16 Three pole circuit breaker GIS
Pos : 4.6.4.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.5 Leistungssc halter/2.5.3 Innerer Aufbau/2.5.3 Innerer Aufbau @ 1\mod_1332924075330_18.docx @ 11930 @ 3 @ 1

2-81
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description
2.5.3 Internal design
Pos : 4.6.4.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.5 Leistungssc halter/2.5.3 Innerer Aufbau/2.5.3.1 Aufbau der Strom bahn 01 - 8D Q1 1/3 @ 4\m od_1340113534759_18.docx @ 19386 @ 4 @ 1

2.5.3.1 Design of conducting path

Each circuit-breaker pole contains a double-break interrupter head, consisting of two interrupter units and a
bell-crank mechanism.
Current Conductors [5] are used for connection to the conductors of the bushings of the adjacent switchgear
modules.
Grading capacitors connected in parallel to the interrupter units ensure uniform voltage distribution amongst
the two interrupters of the circuit-breaker pole.
Each double-break interrupter head is operated by a vertically acting spring stored-energy mechanism. The
bell-crank mechanism converts the vertical movement of the operating rod into a horizontal movement of the
tube contact and the rated current contacts.

Pos : 4.6.4.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.5 Leistungssc halter/2.5.3 Innerer Aufbau/2.5.3.1 Aufbau der Strom bahn 02 - 8D Q1 1/3 550k V LS im Schnitt P3 (I) Bild2 @ 14\mod_1361177441576_0.docx @ 96984 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.6.4.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.5 Leistungssc halter/2.5.3 Innerer Aufbau/2.5.3.1 Aufbau der Strom bahn 02 - 8D Q1 1/3 550k V LS im Schnitt P3 (I) Bildu @ 14\mod_1361177442013_18.doc x @ 97009 @ @ 1

1 Housing
2 Interrupter unit
3 Bell-crank mechanism
4 Cover with rupture disc
5 Current conductor
6 Cover
7 Grading capacitor
8 Insulator
9 Closing resistor
10 Cover with filter
11 Current conductor

Fig. 2-17 Circuit-breaker-pole, Type P3 (with closing resistor), I variant

Pos : 4.6.4.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.5 Leistungssc halter/2.5.3 Innerer Aufbau/2.5.3.1 Aufbau der Strom bahn 02 - 8D Q1 1/3 550k V LS im Schnitt P3 ( L) Bil d2 @ 14\m od_1361177036992_0.docx @ 96884 @ @ 1

2-82
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description

Pos : 4.6.4.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.5 Leistungssc halter/2.5.3 Innerer Aufbau/2.5.3.1 Aufbau der Strom bahn 02 - 8D Q1 1/3 550k V LS im Schnitt P2 ( L) Bil du @ 14\m od_1361177039727_18.docx @ 96909 @ @ 1

1 Housing
2 Interrupter unit
3 Bell-crank mechanism
4 Cover with rupture disc
5 Current conductor
6 Cover
7 Grading capacitor
8 Insulator
9 Cover with filter
10 Current conductor

Fig. 2-18 Circuit breaker pole, L variant

2-83
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description
Pos : 4.6.4.7 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.5 Leistungssc halter/2.5.3 Innerer Aufbau/2.5.3.1 Aufbau der Strom bahn 02 - 8D Q1 1/3 550k V LS im Schnitt P3 (U) Bild2 @ 14\m od_1361177433044_0.doc x @ 96934 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.6.4.8 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.5 Leistungssc halter/2.5.3 Innerer Aufbau/2.5.3.1 Aufbau der Strom bahn 02 - 8D Q1 1/3 550k V LS im Schnitt P3 (U) Bildu @ 14\m od_1361177435498_18.docx @ 96959 @ @ 1

1 Housing
2 Interrupter unit
3 Bell-crank mechanism
4 Cover with rupture disc
5 Current conductor
6 Cover
7 Grading capacitor
8 Insulator
9 Closing resistor
10 Cover with filter
11 Current conductor

Fig. 2-19 Circuit-breaker-pole, Type P3 (with closing resistor), U variant

Pos : 4.6.4.9 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.5 Leistungssc halter/2.5.3 Innerer Aufbau/2.5.3.2 Aufbau und Wirkungsw eis e des Sc haltsys tems 010 - 8DQ1 1/3 @ 4\mod_1340113866458_18.doc x @ 19406 @ 4 @ 1

2.5.3.2 Switching system design and method of operation

Switching system design
The switching system consists of the two interrupter units, the gear head and the grading capacitors.
The double-break interrupter is carried by a insulating support [5] and electrically insulated from the housing.
The spring-stored-energy mechanism switches the moving contact. The force is transmitted via the corner
gears and the operating rod [6].
The main current path is created by the contact carrier [2], contact laminations [12] arranged in a ring around
the contact carrier, the heat cylinder [9] and the base [4].
Arranged concentrically to the main current path is the arcing contact system which is made up of the pin [13]
located in the contact carrier [2] and the moving tube contact [10] located in the heat cylinder [9]. The pin and
the tube contact are made of materials that produce only minimal contact erosion.
The tube contact [10], the piston [8] and the heat cylinder [9] are mechanically fixed to each other and coupled
to the operating rod [6]. They form the moving parts of the switching system.
The piston [8] is equipped with a valve plate. Together with the valve group [7], the valve plate makes up the
compression unit for arc quenching.

Pos : 4.6.4.10 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.5 Leis tungssc halter/2.5.3 Inner er Aufbau/2.5.3.2 Aufbau und Wirkungsw eise des Sc haltsystems 020 - 8D Q1 1/3 550kV Bild3 @ 14\mod_1361178022474_0.docx @ 97034 @ @ 1

2-84
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description

Pos : 4.6.4.11 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.5 Leis tungssc halter/2.5.3 Inner er Aufbau/2.5.3.2 Aufbau und Wirkungsw eise des Sc haltsystems 020 - 8D Q1 1/3 550kV Bild3u @ 4\mod_1340114146207_18.doc x @ 19427 @ @ 1

1 Shielding with current conductor

2 Contact carrier
3 Moving contact
4 Base
5 Insulator
6 Operating rod
7 Valve group
8 Piston with valve plate
9 Heat cylinder
10 Tube contact
11 Nozzle
12 Contact laminations
13 Pin
Fig. 2-20 Switching system
Pos : 4.6.4.12 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.5 Leis tungssc halter/2.5.3 Inner er Aufbau/2.5.3.2 Aufbau und Wirkungsw eise des Sc haltsystems 030 - 8D Q1 1/3 550kV @ 14\mod_1361179389745_18.docx @ 97108 @ @ 1

Switching system operating principle

During the opening operation, the main contact, consisting of the contact laminations [10] and the heating
cylinder [3], is opened first.
The arcing contact, consisting of the pin [8] and the tube contact [4], remains closed, allowing the current to
be commutated to the arcing contact (Fig. b). The pin [8] is moved against the direction of motion of the tube
contact [4] by the firmly connected components heating cylinder [3], nozzle [9], coupler [7] and cam lever [6]
(opening motion of the power circuit breaker).
The electrode that is moved is shifted further toward the heating cylinder [3].
As the process progresses, this contact system opens as an arc is created (Fig. c/d). At the same time, the
heating cylinder [3] moves upward, compressing the quenching gas located between the piston [11] and the
valve group [1]. In this process, the quenching gas flows against the direction of motion of the moving contact
parts through the open valve of the piston [11] and into the heating cylinder, and also through the gap between
the tube contact [4] and the quenching nozzle to extinguish the arc.
2-85
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description
With high short-circuit currents, the quenching gas located around the pin [8] in the quenching chamber is
heated by the energy produced by the arc and forced at high pressure into the heating cylinder [3]. The gas
flows out of the heating cylinder near current zero and back into the nozzle, extinguishing the arc. The valve
on the piston [11] in the heating cylinder [3] prevents the high pressure present in this process from penetrating
into the compression space between the piston [11] and the valve group [1].
Pos : 4.6.4.13 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.5 Leis tungssc halter/2.5.3 Inner er Aufbau/2.5.3.2 Aufbau und Wirkungsw eise des Sc haltsystems 040 - 8D Q1 1/3 550kV Bild4 @ 14\mod_1361180255138_0.docx @ 97132 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.6.4.14 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.5 Leis tungssc halter/2.5.3 Inner er Aufbau/2.5.3.2 Aufbau und Wirkungsw eise des Sc haltsystems 040 - 8D Q1 1/3 550kV Bild4u @ 4\mod_1340114225207_18.doc x @ 19438 @ @ 1

1 Valve group
2 Piston
3 Heat cylinder
4 Tube contact
5 Nozzle
6 Contact laminations
7 Pin
8 Valve plate
9 Coupling
10 Control lever
11 Lever
Fig. 2-21 Schematics of opening operation
a) CLOSE switching position
b) Opening: Main contact in open position
c) Opening: Arcing contact in open position
d) OPEN switching position
Pos : 4.6.4.15 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.5 Leis tungssc halter/2.5.3 Inner er Aufbau/2.5.3.3 Aufbau und Wirkungsw eise des Eins chaltwi derstandes 010 - 8D Q1 1/3 550 k V - LS P3 @ 14\mod_1361180647720_18.docx @ 97156 @ 4 @ 1

2-86
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description
2.5.3.3 Design and function of the closing resistor

 Note
This section applies only if the type P3 circuit-breaker is used.

Use
Closing resistors are used in the double-break interrupter head and connected in parallel with the interrupter
units. They limit the switching overvoltages which can occour, e.g., in the case of switching unloaded overhead
lines.

Design and function of the closing resistor

The moving contact [6] is connected with the drive shaft [8] of the bell-crank mechanism via the coupler [10]
and lever [9]. Thus, the stroke of the moving contact is mechanically coupled with that of the interrupter unit.

Pos : 4.6.4.16 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.5 Leis tungssc halter/2.5.3 Inner er Aufbau/2.5.3.3 Aufbau und Wirkungsw eise des Eins chaltwi derstandes 020 - 8D Q1 1 550kV Bil d5 @ 14\m od_1361180948925_0.docx @ 97181 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.6.4.17 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.5 Leis tungssc halter/2.5.3 Inner er Aufbau/2.5.3.3 Aufbau und Wirkungsw eise des Eins chaltwi derstandes 020 - 8D Q1 1 550kV Bil d5u @ 14\mod_1361180949456_18.doc x @ 97206 @ @ 1

1 Bell-crank mechanism
2 Interrupter unit
3 Closing resistor
4 Mating contact
5 Sliding contact
6 Moving contact
7 Closing resistor
8 Drive shaft
9 Lever
10 Coupling

Fig. 2-22 Double-break interrupter head with closing resistor (shown in part)

2-87
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description
Pos : 4.6.4.18 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.5 Leis tungssc halter/2.5.3 Inner er Aufbau/2.5.3.3 Aufbau und Wirkungsw eise des Eins chaltwi derstandes 030 - 8D Q1 1/3 550 k V - LS P3 @ 14\mod_1361181354988_18.docx @ 97231 @ @ 1

Closing
The illustration below is a schematic representation of the four steps that make up the closing operation:

a) Switching position OPEN: resistor interrupter open (resistor cut out),

main interrupter open

b) Closing: resistor contacts closing (resistor being cut in);

main interrupter open

c) Closing, approx. 10 ms later: Resistor interrupter CLOSED,

main interrupter CLOSED (resistor short-circuited)

d) Switching position CLOSE: Resistor interrupter CLOSED,

main interrupter CLOSED (resistor short-circuited)

Pos : 4.6.4.19 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.5 Leis tungssc halter/2.5.3 Inner er Aufbau/2.5.3.3 Aufbau und Wirkungsw eise des Eins chaltwi derstandes 040 - 8D Q1 1 550kV Bil d6 @ 14\m od_1361181359331_0.docx @ 97256 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.6.4.20 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.5 Leis tungssc halter/2.5.3 Inner er Aufbau/2.5.3.3 Aufbau und Wirkungsw eise des Eins chaltwi derstandes 040 - 8D Q1 1 550kV Bil d6u @ 14\mod_1361181359785_18.doc x @ 97281 @ @ 1

1 Moving contact
2 Lever
3 Coupling
4 Drive shaft
5 Pressure contact
6 Spring
A Main interrupter unit
B Resistor contacts

Fig. 2-23 Closing sequence

2-88
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description
Pos : 4.6.4.21 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.5 Leis tungssc halter/2.5.3 Inner er Aufbau/2.5.3.3 Aufbau und Wirkungsw eise des Eins chaltwi derstandes 050 - 8D Q1 1/3 550 k V - LS P3 @ 14\mod_1361183068315_18.docx @ 97306 @ @ 1

Interruption
The illustration below is a schematic representation of the four steps that make up the opening operation:

a) Switching position CLOSE: resistor contacts closed (resistor short-circuited);

main interrupter closed

b) Opening: resistor contacts open (resistor cut out), main interrupter closed

c) Opening, approx. 10 ms later: resistor contacts open (resistor cut out), main interrupter open

d) Switching position OPEN: resistor interrupter open (resistor cut out), main interrupter open

Pos : 4.6.4.22 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.5 Leis tungssc halter/2.5.3 Inner er Aufbau/2.5.3.3 Aufbau und Wirkungsw eise des Eins chaltwi derstandes 060 - 8D Q1 1 550kV Bil d7 @ 14\m od_1361183072049_0.docx @ 97331 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.6.4.23 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.5 Leis tungssc halter/2.5.3 Inner er Aufbau/2.5.3.3 Aufbau und Wirkungsw eise des Eins chaltwi derstandes 060 - 8D Q1 1 550kV Bil d7u @ 14\mod_1361183072549_18.doc x @ 97356 @ @ 1

1 Moving contact
2 Lever
3 Coupling
4 Drive shaft
5 Pressure contact
6 Spring
A Main interrupter unit
B Resistor contacts

Fig. 2-24 Opening sequence

Pos : 4.6.4.24 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.5 Leis tungssc halter/2.5.3 Inner er Aufbau/2.5.3.3 Aufbau und Wirkungsw eise des Eins chaltwi derstandes 070 - 8D Q1 1/3 550 k V - LS P3 @ 42\mod_1576839475705_18.docx @ 830366 @ @ 1

Definition of Closing Time

The resistor pre-insertion time is the time between closing of the resistor contact and closing of the main
interrupter contacts.
A distinction must here be made between the mechanical and the electrical pre-insertion time.

- The mechanical pre-insertion time (no voltage) starts with the metal-to-metal contact of the resistor
interrupter contacts and ends with the metal-to-metal contact of the contact fingers in the main interrupter.

- The electrical pre-insertion time (at operating voltage) extends from the instant of pre-arcing in the resistor
contact to the instant of pre-arcing between con- tact parts of the main interrupter.

2-89
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description
While the mechanical pre-insertion time only depends on the operating state of the circuit-breaker (SF6
pressure), the electrical pre-insertion time is additionally influenced by the arcing time of the resistor and main
interrupters. The electrical and mechanical pre-insertion times are thus of different length.
The arcing time depends on the mechanical design of the interrupter assembly, the SF6 pressure, the operating
speed of the main and resistor interrupters and the instantaneous voltage magnitude (according to phase
angle, instant of closure and kind of load).
The mechanical pre-insertion time is determined from the minimum electrical pre-insertion time specified by
the customer and is set during final testing of the circuit-breaker in the factory.

Attention!
Changes to the factory-set pre-insertion time are only permitted after
consultation with the Siemens department concerned.

Any reduction of the pre-insertion time adjusted has a negative effect on

overvoltage limitation when underloaded overhead lines are switched. An
increase of the set pre-insertion time may lead to thermal overloading of the
resistor discs.

Pos : 4.6.5.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.5 Leistungssc halter/2.5.4 Aufbau und F unkti on des Antriebsys tem es/2.5.4 Aufbau und F unktion des Antriebssystems 010 - 8D Q1 1/3 @ 28\m od_1416810694519_18.docx @ 268921 @ 3 @ 1

2.5.4 Design and function of the drive system

The compact drive system is located in the drive cabinet. It performs the following functions:

- Charging of the closing spring,

- Closing,
- Opening,
- single pole auto-reclosure (OPEN-CLOSE-OPEN or CLOSE-OPEN).

The operating system consists of three individual drives, which are spring-stored-energy mechanisms.
When the drive cabinet is open, one can see the three spring-stored-energy mechanism [7] with the auxiliary
switches [8] and the position indicators [1].

An electromechanical control monitors and controls the circuit-breaker.

The heat resistors of the anti-condensation heating [2] prevent the build-up of condensation on drive unit
components.

The shafts are set into roller bearings.

The motor [6] drives the maintenance-free charging mechanism [5] to charge the closing spring.
Spring lifting is achieved with a charging motor [6] and charging mechanism [5] with free-wheel.

Pos : 4.6.5.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.5 Leistungssc halter/2.5.4 Aufbau und F unkti on des Antriebsys tem es/2.5.4 Aufbau und F unktion des Antriebssystems 020 - 8D Q1 1/3 Bil d5 @ 14\m od_1361185146256_0.docx @ 97430 @ @ 1

2-90
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description

Pos : 4.6.5.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.5 Leistungssc halter/2.5.4 Aufbau und F unkti on des Antriebsys tem es/2.5.4 Aufbau und F unktion des Antriebssystems 020 - 8D Q1 1/3 Bil d5u @ 14\mod_1361185242097_18.doc x @ 97454 @ @ 1

1 Spring status indicator

a) Closing spring charged
b) Closing spring relieved
c) Opening spring charged
d) Opening spring relieved

2 Heat resistor of the anti-condensation heating

3 OPEN release
4 CLOSE release
5 Charging mechanism
6 Charging motor
7 Spring-stored-energy mechanism
8 Auxiliary switch

Fig. 2-25 Spring-stored-energy mechanism, view of the charging mechanism

Pos : 4.6.5.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.5 Leistungssc halter/2.5.4 Aufbau und F unkti on des Antriebsys tem es/2.5.4 Aufbau und F unktion des Antriebssystems 040 @ 5\m od_1343824474646_18.docx @ 37168 @ @ 1

The following function chart provides a first primary overview of the sequence of motions occurring during
charging of the closing spring (arrow A), closing (arrow B) and opening (arrow C) of the circuit-breaker using
a spring-stored energy mechanism.

Pos : 4.6.5.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.5 Leistungssc halter/2.5.4 Aufbau und F unkti on des Antriebsys tem es/2.5.4 Aufbau und F unktion des Antriebssystems 050 - Bil d9 @ 5\m od_1343824520740_0.doc x @ 37192 @ @ 1

2-91
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
2
3
4
1
5
14
13 6
12 7
8
9
10

11

Pos : 4.6.5.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.5 Leistungssc halter/2.5.4 Aufbau und F unkti on des Antriebsys tem es/2.5.4 Aufbau und F unktion des Antriebssystems 050 - Bil du @ 1\m od_1335339562641_18.docx @ 14033 @ @ 1

1 Drive rod 12 Closing spring

2 Cam 13 Switching lever
3 Backstop 14 Connecting rod of the closing spring
4 Lever 15 Charging shaft
5 Damper (for closing) 16 Cam disc
6 Operating shaft 17 CLOSE latch
7 Damper (for opening) 18 CLOSE release
8 OPEN latch 19 Charging mechanism
9 OPEN release 20 Free-wheel (Free-wheel)
10 Connecting rod of the opening spring 21 Charging motor
11 Opening spring

Fig. 2-26 Function diagram of the spring-stored energy mechanism

Pos : 4.7.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.6 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n oder Tr ennsc halter/2.6 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter Baustein/2.6 Trennschalter - 8DQ1, 8DN 9 @ 4\m od_1340177384536_18.docx @ 19493 @ 2 @ 1

2-92
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description
2.6 Disconnectors

The following section will address:

- the use of the disconnector

- the external design of the disconnector
- the internal design of the disconnector
- the drive of the disconnector

Basic information:

Electrical and mechanical parameters [ 1.1]

Motor drives [ 1.2]
Nameplates [ 1.4]
Dimensions and weights of switchgear modules [ 1.5]

Pos : 4.7.2 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.6 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n oder Tr ennsc halter/2.6.1 Verw endung/2.6.1 Verw endung - 8DN 9, 8D Q1 @ 4\m od_1340187554698_18.docx @ 19510 @ 3 @ 1

2.6.1 Use
Disconnectors create the isolating distances required for safe work on electrical installations. They do not
interrupt the currents occurring in the switchgear in the course of normal operation.
These switching devices are used as busbar disconnectors and as outgoing disconnectors.

Pos : 4.7.3 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

2-93
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description
Pos : 4.7.4.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.6 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n oder Tr ennsc hal ter/2.6.2 Äußer er Aufbau/2.6.2 Äußer er Aufbau 010 - 8DN 9 6, 8D Q1 1 @ 11\m od_1350983230125_18.docx @ 70720 @ 3 @ 1

2.6.2 External design

Disconnectors are of single-pole design. The three poles are jointly actuated by a motor drive via the operating
linkage and a torque limiter.
The gas-tight bushings and/or permeable bushing versions carry the current path with the contact systems.
The module is closed off with a cover, sometimes with a rupture disk and diverter.
Depending on the purpose and location, the appropriate housing form is selected and can have one or two
earthing switches attached to it.

Pos : 4.7.4.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.6 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n oder Tr ennsc hal ter/2.6.2 Äußer er Aufbau/2.6.2 Äußer er Aufbau 020 - 8D Q1 1 Bil d1 @ 14\m od_1361188990020_0.docx @ 97575 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.7.4.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.6 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n oder Tr ennsc hal ter/2.6.2 Äußer er Aufbau/2.6.2 Äußer er Aufbau 020 - 8D Q1 1 Bil du @ 4\m od_1340189590352_18.docx @ 19543 @ @ 1

1 Positoon indicator
2 Motor drive
3 Auxiliary shaft

Fig. 2-27 Disconnector

Pos : 4.7.5 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

2-94
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description
Pos : 4.7.6.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.6 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n oder Tr ennsc hal ter/2.6.3 Inner er Aufbau Strom bahn / Kontak tsystem/2.6.3 Inner er Aufbau @ 1\m od_1335348791832_18.docx @ 14154 @ 3 @ 1

2.6.3 Internal design

Pos : 4.7.6.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.6 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n oder Tr ennsc hal ter/2.6.3 Inner er Aufbau Strom bahn / Kontak tsystem/2.6.3.1 Strom bahn 010 - 8D Q1 @ 4\m od_1340189924406_18.docx @ 19554 @ 4 @ 1

2.6.3.1 Conducting path

The conducting path section with contact pin, and also the conducting path section with fixed contact element,
are each fixed to a bushing.
Both conducting path sections can be fitted depending on requirements with contact systems for earthing
switches.

Pos : 4.7.6.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.6 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n oder Tr ennsc hal ter/2.6.3 Inner er Aufbau Strom bahn / Kontak tsystem/2.6.3.1 Strom bahn 020 - 8D Q1 1 Bild2 Abgangtrennsc halter mit zw ei Erdungssc haltern @ 14\mod_1361189552697_0.docx @ 97599 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.7.6.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.6 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n oder Tr ennsc hal ter/2.6.3 Inner er Aufbau Strom bahn / Kontak tsystem/2.6.3.1 Strom bahn 020 - 8D Q1 1 Bild2u Abg angtr ennsc hal ter mit zw ei Er dungssc hal ter n @ 5\mod_1340190073814_18.docx @ 19565 @ @ 1

1 Casing
2 Earthing switches
3 Moving contact
4 Conducting path section with moving contact
5 Conducting path section with fixed contact
6 Sealing ring
7 Bushing (gas-tight)
8 Bushing (gas-permeable)
9 Sealing ring

Fig. 2-28 Outgoing feeder disconnector with two earthing switches

Pos : 4.7.6.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.6 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n oder Tr ennsc hal ter/2.6.3 Inner er Aufbau Strom bahn / Kontak tsystem/2.6.3.1 Strom bahn 030 - 8D Q1 1 Bild3 Abgangtrennsc halter für 1 1/2 LS ... @ 14\mod_1361190140513_0.docx @ 97623 @ @ 1

2-95
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description

Pos : 4.7.6.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.6 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n oder Tr ennsc hal ter/2.6.3 Inner er Aufbau Strom bahn / Kontak tsystem/2.6.3.1 Strom bahn 030 - 8D Q1 1 Bild3u Abg angtr ennsc hal ter für 1 1/2 LS ... @ 5\mod_1340190292143_18.docx @ 19576 @ @ 1

1 Sealing ring
2 Earthing switches
3 Moving contact
4 Conducting path section with moving contact
5 Conducting path section with fixed contact
6 Sealing ring
7 Bushing (gas-permeable)
8 Sealing ring
9 Bushing (gas-permeable)
10 Housing
11 Cover

Fig. 2-29 Outgoing feeder disconnector for 1 1/2 circuit-breaker arrangement with one earthing
switch

Pos : 4.7.6.7 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.6 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n oder Tr ennsc hal ter/2.6.3 Inner er Aufbau Strom bahn / Kontak tsystem/2.6.3.1 Strom bahn 040 - 8D Q1 1 Bild4 Sammelsc hienentrennschalter für den Ans chl uss ...SS1 @ 14\m od_1361190341281_0.doc x @ 97648 @ @ 1

2-96
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description

Pos : 4.7.6.8 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.6 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n oder Tr ennsc hal ter/2.6.3 Inner er Aufbau Strom bahn / Kontak tsystem/2.6.3.1 Strom bahn 040 - 8D Q1 1 Bild4u Samm elsc hienentr ennsc halter für den Ansc hluss ...SS1 @ 5\mod_1340190343372_18.doc x @ 19587 @ @ 1

1 Casing
2 Conducting path section with fixed contact
3 Moving contact
4 Conducting path section with moving contact
5 Bushing (gas-tight)
6 Sealing ring
7 Sealing ring
8 Bushing (gas-tight)

Fig. 2-30 Busbar disconnector for connection of busbar 2 in a switchgear with a duplicate bus

Pos : 4.7.6.9 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.6 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n oder Tr ennsc hal ter/2.6.3 Inner er Aufbau Strom bahn / Kontak tsystem/2.6.3.1 Strom bahn 050 - 8D Q1 1 Bild5 Sammelsc hienentrennschalter für den Ans chl uss ...SS2 @ 14\m od_1361190349265_0.doc x @ 97673 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.7.6.10 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.6 Trenn- und Erdungssc halter- Baustein oder Trennschalter/2.6.3 Innerer Aufbau Str ombahn / Kontakts ystem/2.6.3.1 Strom bahn 050 - 8DQ1 1 Bild5u Sammels chi enentrennsc halter für den Ansc hluss ...SS2 @ 5\m od_1340190357353_18.docx @ 19598 @ @ 1

1 Sealing ring
2 Bushing (gas-tight)
3 Casing
4 Earthing switches
5 Moving contact
6 Conducting path section with moving contact
7 Conducting path section with fixed contact
8 Bushing (gas-tight)
9 Sealing ring
Fig. 2-31 Busbar disconnector for connection of busbar 1 in a switchgear with a duplicate bus
Pos : 4.7.6.11 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.6 Trenn- und Erdungssc halter- Baustein oder Trennschalter/2.6.3 Innerer Aufbau Str ombahn / Kontakts ystem/2.6.3.2 Kontaktsy stem 010 - 8DQ1 1 @ 5\mod_1340191032113_18.docx @ 19620 @ 4 @ 1

2-97
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description
2.6.3.2 Contact system
Both conducting path sections form the contact system.
The moving contact [2] is moved by the lever gear [6], the lever of which [3] is connected to the drive shaft of
the disconnector via the rotary insulator.
The moving contact is guided in the sliding contact [1] and by the guide rod [4].

Pos : 4.7.6.12 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.6 Trenn- und Erdungssc halter- Baustein oder Trennschalter/2.6.3 Innerer Aufbau Str ombahn / Kontakts ystem/2.6.3.2 Kontaktsy stem 020 - 8DQ1 1 Bild6 @ 14\m od_1361190707870_0.doc x @ 97698 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.7.6.13 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.6 Trenn- und Erdungssc halter- Baustein oder Trennschalter/2.6.3 Innerer Aufbau Str ombahn / Kontakts ystem/2.6.3.2 Kontaktsy stem 020 - 8DQ1 1 Bild6u @ 5\m od_1340191182355_18.docx @ 19631 @ @ 1

1 Sliding contact
2 Moving contact
3 Lever
4 Guide rod
5 Conducting path housing
6 Lever gear
7 Shield

Fig. 2-32 Conducting path section with moving contact (OPEN state)

Pos : 4.7.6.14 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

2-98
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description
Pos : 4.7.6.15 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.6 Trenn- und Erdungssc halter- Baustein oder Trennschalter/2.6.3 Innerer Aufbau Str ombahn / Kontakts ystem/2.6.3.2 Kontaktsy stem 030 - 8DQ1 1 @ 14\m od_1361190866335_18.docx @ 97722 @ @ 1

Conducting path section with fixed contact and preliminary contact system
The preliminary contact system consists of the preliminary contact [5], guide rod [2], guide socket [10],
preliminary contact bridge [1] and spring [3]. It serves to avoid pre-arcing between the contact surface
of the moving contact [6] and the contact fingers [7] of the fixed contact [8].

Pos : 4.7.6.16 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.6 Trenn- und Erdungssc halter- Baustein oder Trennschalter/2.6.3 Innerer Aufbau Str ombahn / Kontakts ystem/2.6.3.2 Kontaktsy stem 040 - 8DQ1 1 Bild7 @ 14\m od_1361191100220_0.doc x @ 97746 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.7.6.17 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.6 Trenn- und Erdungssc halter- Baustein oder Trennschalter/2.6.3 Innerer Aufbau Str ombahn / Kontakts ystem/2.6.3.2 Kontaktsy stem 040 - 8DQ1 1 Bild7u @ 5\m od_1340191374237_18.docx @ 19642 @ @ 1

1 Preliminary contact bridge

2 Guide rod
3 Spring
4 Shield
5 Preliminary contact
6 Moving contact
7 Contact finger
8 Fixed contact (main contact)
9 Conducting path housing
10 Guide socket

Fig. 2-33 Conducting path section with fixed contact and preliminary contact system

Pos : 4.7.6.18 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

2-99
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description
Pos : 4.7.6.19 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.6 Trenn- und Erdungssc halter- Baustein oder Trennschalter/2.6.3 Innerer Aufbau Str ombahn / Kontakts ystem/2.6.3.2 Kontaktsy stem 045 - 8DQ1 1 @ 14\m od_1361193101607_18.docx @ 97880 @ @ 1

When the moving contact enters into the fixed contact, this bridges the preliminary contact system.
In switching position CLOSE, the preliminary contact is pushed against the force of the spring into the
conducting path section.

Pos : 4.7.6.20 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.6 Trenn- und Erdungssc halter- Baustein oder Trennschalter/2.6.3 Innerer Aufbau Str ombahn / Kontakts ystem/2.6.3.2 Kontaktsy stem 050 - 8DQ1 1 Bild8 @ 14\m od_1361192273696_0.doc x @ 97780 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.7.6.21 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.6 Trenn- und Erdungssc halter- Baustein oder Trennschalter/2.6.3 Innerer Aufbau Str ombahn / Kontakts ystem/2.6.3.2 Kontaktsy stem 050 - 8DQ1 1 Bild8u @ 5\m od_1340191634961_18.docx @ 19653 @ @ 1

1 Preliminary contact bridge

2 Guide rod
3 Spring
4 Fixed contact (main contact)
5 Moving contact
6 Preliminary contact
7 Contact finger
8 Guide socket

Fig. 2-34 Moving contact and preliminary contact system

a) at the instant of touching
b) in switching position CLOSE

Pos : 4.7.6.22 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

2-100
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description
Pos : 4.7.6.23 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.6 Trenn- und Erdungssc halter- Baustein oder Trennschalter/2.6.3 Innerer Aufbau Str ombahn / Kontakts ystem/2.6.3.2 Kontaktsy stem 055 - 8DQ1 1 @ 14\m od_1361193341927_18.docx @ 97905 @ @ 1

Conducting path section with fixed contact and commutating-current contact system
Disconnectors intended for busbar changeover are provided with a commutating-current contact system.
The commutating-current contact system consists of the contact cup [6], the auxiliary contact [9], the guide
rod [2], the insert [10], the socket [12], the stop [1] and the spring [3].
The contact cup [6] and the moving contact [7] are equipped with inserts of erosion-resistant material.
The commutating-current contact system serves to avoid pre-arcing between the contact surface of the
moving contact [7] and the contact fingers [8] of the fixed contact [4].
The contact cup [6] is conductively connected to the conducting path via the auxiliary contact [9]. During
busbar changeover they carry the commutating current in the period between contact making of moving
contact [7] with contact cup [6] and contact making of moving contact with the fixed contact [4].

Pos : 4.7.6.24 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.6 Trenn- und Erdungssc halter- Baustein oder Trennschalter/2.6.3 Innerer Aufbau Str ombahn / Kontakts ystem/2.6.3.2 Kontaktsy stem 060 - 8DQ1 1 Bild9 @ 14\m od_1361192467221_0.doc x @ 97805 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.7.6.25 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.6 Trenn- und Erdungssc halter- Baustein oder Trennschalter/2.6.3 Innerer Aufbau Str ombahn / Kontakts ystem/2.6.3.2 Kontaktsy stem 060 - 8DQ1 1 Bild9u @ 5\m od_1340193174465_18.docx @ 19664 @ @ 1

1 Stop
2 Guide rod
3 Spring
4 Fixed contact (main contact)
5 Shield
6 Contact cup
7 Moving contact
8 Contact finger
9 Auxiliary contact
10 Insert
11 Conducting path housing
12 Socket

Fig. 2-35 Conducting path section with fixed contact and commutating-current contact system

Pos : 4.7.6.26 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

2-101
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description
Pos : 4.7.6.27 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.6 Trenn- und Erdungssc halter- Baustein oder Trennschalter/2.6.3 Innerer Aufbau Str ombahn / Kontakts ystem/2.6.3.2 Kontaktsy stem 065 - 8DQ1 1 @ 14\m od_1361193499157_18.docx @ 97930 @ @ 1

When the moving contact moves into the fixed contact, it bridges the commutating-current contact system.

In the CLOSED position, the contact cup [6] is pushed out of auxiliary contact [2] against the force of spring
and moved into the conducting path section.

Pos : 4.7.6.28 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.6 Trenn- und Erdungssc halter- Baustein oder Trennschalter/2.6.3 Innerer Aufbau Str ombahn / Kontakts ystem/2.6.3.2 Kontaktsy stem 070 - 8DQ1 1 Bild10 @ 14\m od_1361192885958_0.docx @ 97830 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.7.6.29 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.6 Trenn- und Erdungssc halter- Baustein oder Trennschalter/2.6.3 Innerer Aufbau Str ombahn / Kontakts ystem/2.6.3.2 Kontaktsy stem 070 - 8DQ1 1 Bild10u @ 5\m od_1340193360632_18.docx @ 19675 @ @ 1

1 Guide rod
2 Auxiliary contact
3 Fixed contact (main contact)
4 Moving contact
5 Contact finger
6 Contact cup

Fig. 2-36 Moving contact and commutating-current contact system

a) at the instant of touching
b) during movement into the fixed contact (commutation)
b) in switching position CLOSE

Pos : 4.7.6.30 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

2-102
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description
Pos : 4.7.6.31 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.6 Trenn- und Erdungssc halter- Baustein oder Trennschalter/2.6.3 Innerer Aufbau Str ombahn / Kontakts ystem/2.6.3.2 Kontaktsy stem 075 - 8DQ1 1 @ 14\m od_1361193638902_18.docx @ 97955 @ @ 1

The moving contact is actuated by means of the main shaft [3] (located on gas-tight bearings in the housing),
and by the rotary insulator [1].

Pos : 4.7.6.32 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.6 Trenn- und Erdungssc halter- Baustein oder Trennschalter/2.6.3 Innerer Aufbau Str ombahn / Kontakts ystem/2.6.3.2 Kontaktsy stem 080 - 8DQ1 1 Bild11 @ 14\m od_1361193013485_0.docx @ 97855 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.7.6.33 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.6 Trenn- und Erdungssc halter- Baustein oder Trennschalter/2.6.3 Innerer Aufbau Str ombahn / Kontakts ystem/2.6.3.2 Kontaktsy stem 080 - 8DQ1 1 Bild11u @ 5\m od_1340193461731_18.docx @ 19686 @ @ 1

1 Rotary insulator
2 Bearing
3 Drive shaft

Fig. 2-37 Bearings of the drive shaft

Pos : 4.7.6.34 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

2-103
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description
Pos : 4.7.7.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.6 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n oder Tr ennsc hal ter/2.6.4 Antrieb/2.6.4 Antri eb 010 - 8D Q1 1 @ 5\mod_1340193665554_18.doc x @ 19697 @ 3 @ 1

2.6.4 Operating mechanism

The motor drive [7] is fixed to the motor pedestal by the flange of the middle disconnector pole. The rotary
movement of the drive shaft is transmitted to the auxiliary shaft [8] via the lever [4], the coupling rod [5], the
lever [6] and the torque limiter. The rotary movement of the auxiliary shaft is at the same time transmitted to
the disconnector shafts via the lever [10], the coupling rods [11] and the lever [1].
The auxiliary shaft is supported in an adjustable manner on all three disconnector poles.

Pos : 4.7.7.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.6 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n oder Tr ennsc hal ter/2.6.4 Antrieb/2.6.4 Antri eb 020 - 8D Q1 1 Bil d12 @ 14\mod_1361193977063_0.docx @ 97980 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.7.7.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.6 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n oder Tr ennsc hal ter/2.6.4 Antrieb/2.6.4 Antri eb 020 - 8D Q1 1 Bil d12u @ 5\mod_1340193861070_18.doc x @ 19708 @ @ 1

1 Signal switch module

2 Drive shaft
3 Lever
4 Lever
5 Coupling rod
6 Lever
7 Motor drive
8 Auxiliary shaft
9 Bearing
10 Lever
11 Coupling rod

Fig. 2-38 Triple-pole coupled drive shafts

Pos : 4.7.7.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.6 Tr enn- und Erdungsschalter-Baus tei n oder Tr ennsc hal ter/2.6.4 Antrieb/2.6.4 Antri eb 03 - 8DQ1 1 Querv erweis @ 14\mod_1361194157917_0.docx @ 98029 @ @ 1

Motor drive [ 2.9]

Pos : 4.7.8 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

2-104
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description
Pos : 4.8.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.7 Sc hneller dungssc hal ter ( ohne 8DN8 5)/M odul e/2.7 Schnell erdungss chalter/2.7 Sc hnell erdungssc halter - 8D Q1, 8DN9 @ 5\m od_1340194051901_18.docx @ 19719 @ 2 @ 1

2.7 High-speed earthing switches

The section contains a description of

- the use of the high-speed earthing switch

- the external design of the high-speed earthing switch
- the internal design of the high-speed earthing switch
- design and function of the spring-snap mechanism.

Basic information:

Electrical and mechanical parameters [ 1.1]

Dimensions and weights of switchgear modules [ 1.5]

Pos : 4.8.2 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.7 Sc hneller dungssc hal ter ( ohne 8DN8 5)/M odul e/2.7.1 Verwendung/2.7.1 Verwendung 01 - 8D Q1 @ 5\m od_1340194234842_18.docx @ 19730 @ 3 @ 1

2.7.1 Use
High-speed earthing switches are used for earthing and short-circuiting system components after prior isolation
(e.g. overhead lines, cables and transformers).
High-speed earthing switches are make-proof. They achieve high-speed action (made possible by a spring-
snap mechanism) and the specially designed contact system ensures that the conducting path is reliably
earthed even if it is inadvertently switched into connection with live equipment.
High-speed earthing switches and their motor drives are of single-pole design.
Pos : 4.8.3 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.7 Sc hneller dungssc hal ter ( ohne 8DN8 5)/M odul e/2.7.2 Äuß erer Aufbau/2.7.2 Äuß erer Aufbau 010 @ 14\m od_1355293101994_18.docx @ 85790 @ 3 @ 1

2.7.2 External design

Pos : 4.8.4 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.7 Sc hneller dungssc hal ter ( ohne 8DN8 5)/M odul e/2.7.2 Äuß erer Aufbau/2.7.2 Äuß erer Aufbau 020 - 8DQ1 1 Bild1 Schnellerdungssc halter Innenraum aus führung @ 33\m od_1477901203729_0.doc x @ 676115 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.8.5 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.7 Sc hneller dungssc hal ter ( ohne 8DN8 5)/M odul e/2.7.2 Äuß erer Aufbau/2.7.2 Äuß erer Aufbau 020 - 8DQ1 1 Bildu Schnellerdungssc halter Innenraum aus führung @ 6\mod_1343992445457_18.doc x @ 40601 @ @ 1

1 Motor drive
2 Spring-snap mechanism (cover panel removed)
3 High-speed earthing switches

Fig. 2-39 High-speed Earthing switches, indoor substations

Pos : 4.8.6 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.7 Sc hneller dungssc hal ter ( ohne 8DN8 5)/M odul e/2.7.3 Innerer Aufbau/2.7.3 Inner er Aufbau 020 - 8DN 9 6, 8D Q1 1/3/6 @ 5\m od_1340194590195_18.docx @ 19752 @ 3 @ 1

2-105
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description
2.7.3 Internal design
The drive shaft [9] is supported in the housing such that it is gas-tight and is coupled to the earthing moving
contact [4] via the crank gear [1]. The contact pin is guided by the sliding contact [5].
In the fixed contact element [7], spring-loaded contact fingers are arranged over the entire periphery.
The moving contact and the fixed contact element are provided with arc-resistant inserts.

Pos : 4.8.7 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.7 Sc hneller dungssc hal ter ( ohne 8DN8 5)/M odul e/2.7.3 Innerer Aufbau/2.7.3 Inner er Aufbau 021 - 8DN 9 6, 8D Q1 1/3/6 Bil d2 @ 14\mod_1361196780536_0.docx @ 98077 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.8.8 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.7 Sc hneller dungssc hal ter ( ohne 8DN8 5)/M odul e/2.7.3 Innerer Aufbau/2.7.3 Inner er Aufbau 021 - 8DN 9 6, 8D Q1 1/3/6 Bil d2u @ 5\mod_1340194734968_18.docx @ 19763 @ @ 1

1 Crank gear
2 Sealing ring
3 Cover with link guide
4 Earthing moving contact
5 Sliding contact
6 Contact finger
7 Fixed contact element
8 Housing
9 Drive shaft
10 O-ring

Fig. 2-40 Design of the high-speed earthing switch (example)

a) Side view
b) Partial view

Pos : 4.8.9 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

2-106
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description
Pos : 4.8.10 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.7 Schnellerdungsschalter (ohne 8DN 8 5)/Module/2.7.3 Innerer Aufbau/2.7.3 Innerer Aufbau 030 - 8DN 9 6, 8DQ1 1/3/6 - T ex t z u is olierter Ausführung @ 28\m od_1417506500763_18.docx @ 269211 @ 4 @ 1

2.7.3.1 Insulated version

In the insulated version, the electrical connection between sliding contact and housing is interrupted by an
insulating flange [2]. Here, a connection exists to the housing and consequently to the earth potential only via
the connection piece [3] encapsulated into the insulating flange and the bridge [5].
The insulating bush [4] insulates the crank gear and thus also the housing from the contact pin.
The bridge should be removed for the purpose of taking measurements. When the bridge is removed, the
operation of the earthing switch is cancelled.

 Notice
The bridge must only be removed on the outer screw connection of item 5 if
necessary for measuring purposes, and only for the duration of
measurement. Bolted joints for pressurized containers on the flange
connection must not be untightened or removed!

• The bridge must only be removed on the bolts marked with an arrow!
Pos : 4.8.11 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.7 Schnellerdungsschalter (ohne 8DN 8 5)/Module/2.7.3 Innerer Aufbau/2.7.3 Innerer Aufbau 040 - 8DN 9 6, 8DQ1 1/3/6 Bild3 is olierte Ausf. @ 12\mod_1350995375627_0.docx @ 71629 @ @ 1

5 3

Pos : 4.8.12 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.7 Schnellerdungsschalter (ohne 8DN 8 5)/Module/2.7.3 Innerer Aufbau/2.7.3 Innerer Aufbau 040 - 8DN 9 6, 8DQ1 1/3/6 Bildu is olierte Ausf. @ 12\mod_1350995376018_18.docx @ 71652 @ @ 1

1 Housing
2 Insulating flange
3 Connection piece
4 Insulating bush
5 Bridge

Fig. 2-41 High-speed earthing switch, insulated

Pos : 4.8.13 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1

2-107
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description
Pos : 4.8.14.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.7 Schnellerdungsschalter (ohne 8DN 8 5)/Module/2.7.4 Antrieb/2.7.4 Antri eb 010 - 8DN9 6, 8D Q1 1/3 @ 12\m od_1350995755623_18.docx @ 71675 @ 3 @ 1

2.7.4 Drive
When the switching springs have been charged, the spring-snap mechanisms operate the high-speed earthing
switches with the speed of action required. To charge the springs, the spring-snap mechanisms are wound up
by means of a motor drive.
The motor drive of the high-speed earthing switch is of single-pole design. The drive shaft of the pole is coupled
directly to the motor drive.

Pos : 4.8.14.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.7 Schnellerdungsschalter (ohne 8DN 8 5)/Module/2.7.4 Antrieb/2.7.4 Antri eb 020 - 8DN9 6, 8D Q1 1/3 @ 27\m od_1409307088372_18.docx @ 252057 @ @ 1

Motor drive [ 2.9]

The switching spring [11] is precharged in the open state. The spring is fixed to the operating lever [1] and to
the charging lever [3].
The linkage [6] fixed to the operating lever [10] actuates the auxiliary switch [5] and the mechanical position
indicator [4].
The switching position is indicated by the mark 0 (OPEN) or I (CLOSED).
The auxiliary switch is used for the electrical switching state indicator.
Pos : 4.8.14.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.7 Schnellerdungsschalter (ohne 8DN 8 5)/Module/2.7.4 Antrieb/2.7.4 Antri eb 025 - 8DQ1 1/3 Bil d4 @ 14\m od_1361197409407_0.docx @ 98127 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.8.14.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.7 Schnellerdungsschalter (ohne 8DN 8 5)/Module/2.7.4 Antrieb/2.7.4 Antri eb 025 - 8DQ1 1/3 Bil d4u @ 14\mod_1361197498185_18.docx @ 98152 @ @ 1

1 Operating lever
2 Driver
3 Charging lever
4 Position indicator
5 Auxiliary switch
6 Linkage
7 Drive shaft
8 Driver
9 Pin
10 Operating lever
11 Switching spring
12 Damping element
Fig. 2-42 Spring-snap mechanism in switching position OPEN
Pos : 4.8.14.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.7 Schnellerdungsschalter (ohne 8DN 8 5)/Module/2.7.4 Antrieb/2.7.4 Antri eb 030 - 8DN9 6, 8D Q1 @ 12\m od_1350996709262_18.docx @ 71743 @ @ 1

2-108
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description
The operating lever is fixed to the drive shaft [4]. The charging lever [5] is connected to the motor drive via a
coupling linkage. It can move in a radial direction and charges the springs beyond their folded position. The
closing movement of the drive shaft starts only after the operating lever has gone past its dead-centre position.
With the spring energy, the switch is closed with a spring action.
An opening operation of the switch is in principle the same as a closing operation. In addition to the spring
force, the pin [2] of the driver [1] pushes the operating lever from below out of its dead-centre position.
The turning of the drive shaft is limited by stops which brake the turning movement of the operating lever [3].
Damping elements are attached to the stops in order to determine the switching angle.

Pos : 4.8.14.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.7 Schnellerdungsschalter (ohne 8DN 8 5)/Module/2.7.4 Antrieb/2.7.4 Antri eb 040 - 8DQ1 1/3/DC Bild5 @ 14\m od_1361197984716_0.docx @ 98176 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.8.14.7 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.7 Schnellerdungsschalter (ohne 8DN 8 5)/Module/2.7.4 Antrieb/2.7.4 Antri eb 040 - 8DQ1 1/3/DC Bild5u @ 14\m od_1361197987857_18.docx @ 98201 @ @ 1

1 Driver
2 Pin
3 Operating lever
4 Drive shaft
5 Charging lever

Fig. 2-43 Simplified representation of the spring-snap mechanism in dead-centre position.

a) Switching position OPEN
b) Switching position CLOSE

Pos : 4.9.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.8 Arbeits erdungsschalter (ohne 8DN 8 5)/2.8 Ar bei tser dungssc hal ter/2.8 Arbeits erdungss chalter - 8DQ1, 8DN 9 @ 5\mod_1340263850638_18.doc x @ 19810 @ 2 @ 1

2-109
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description

2-110
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description
2.8 Work-in-progress earthing switch
This section contains a description of

- use of the work-in-progress earthing switch

- external design of the work-in-progress earthing switch
- internal design of the work-in-progress earthing switch
- the drive of the work-in-progress earthing switch.

Basic information:

Electrical and mechanical parameters [ 1.1]

Dimensions and weights of switchgear modules [ 1.5]

Pos : 4.9.2 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.8 Arbeits erdungsschalter (ohne 8DN 8 5)/2.8.1 Verwendung/2.8.1 Verwendung - 8DQ1, 8DN 9 @ 5\mod_1340264156423_18.doc x @ 19820 @ 3 @ 1

2.8.1 Use
Following initial isolation, work-in-progress earthing switches are used for earthing and short-circuiting bus
bars or outgoing modules. Choose between insulated and non-insulated models. With insulated models, work-
in-progress earthing switches can be used to take readings and measurements.

Pos : 4.9.3 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.8 Arbeits erdungsschalter (ohne 8DN 8 5)/2.8.2 Äuß erer Aufbau/2.8.2 Äuß erer Aufbau 010 - 8DQ1 1 -mit- @ 5\mod_1340264225257_18.docx @ 19831 @ 3 @ 1

2.8.2 External design

The external construction of the work-in-progress earthing switch consists of the housing [1] and the motor
drive [3] with the operating linkage.
Work-in-progress earthing switches are of single-pole design. The three poles are jointly actuated by a motor
drive via the operating linkage and a torque limiter [2] .

Pos : 4.9.4 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.8 Arbeits erdungsschalter (ohne 8DN 8 5)/2.8.2 Äuß erer Aufbau/2.8.2 Äuß erer Aufbau 020 - 8DQ1 1 -mit- Bild1 @ 14\m od_1363100934830_0.docx @ 104098 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.9.5 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.8 Arbeits erdungsschalter (ohne 8DN 8 5)/2.8.2 Äuß erer Aufbau/2.8.2 Äuß erer Aufbau 020 - 8DQ1 1 -mit- Bild1u @ 5\m od_1340264310991_18.docx @ 19842 @ @ 1

1 Housing
2 Torque limiter
3 Motor drive

Fig. 2-44 Work-in-progress earthing switch

Pos : 4.9.6 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.8 Arbeits erdungsschalter (ohne 8DN 8 5)/2.8.3 Innerer Aufbau/2.8.3 Inner er Aufbau 010 - 8D Q1 @ 5\mod_1340264503086_18.doc x @ 19875 @ 3 @ 1

2-111
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description
2.8.3 Internal design
The drive shaft [9] is supported in the housing such that it is gas-tight and is coupled to the moving earth
contact [4] via the crank gear [1]. The contact pin is guided by the sliding contact [5].
In the fixed contact element [7], spring-loaded contact fingers are arranged over the entire periphery.

Pos : 4.9.7 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.8 Arbeits erdungsschalter (ohne 8DN 8 5)/2.8.3 Innerer Aufbau/2.8.3 Inner er Aufbau 020 - 8D Q1 1/3 Bil d2 @ 14\m od_1361198731599_0.docx @ 98226 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.9.8 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /2 Besc hrei bung/Module/2.8 Arbeits erdungsschalter (ohne 8DN 8 5)/2.8.3 Innerer Aufbau/2.8.3 Inner er Aufbau 020 - 8D Q1 1/3 Bil d2u @ 46\mod_1614689513708_18.doc x @ 907472 @ @ 1

1 Crank gear
2 Sealing ring
3 Cover with link guide
4 Earthing moving contact
5 Sliding contact
6 Contact finger
7 Fixed contact element
8 Housing
9 Drive shaft
10 O-ring

Fig. 2-45 Design of the work-in-progress earthing switch (example)

a) Side view
b) Partial view

Pos : 4.9.9 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

2-112
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description
Pos : 4.9.10 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.8 Arbeits erdungssc halter (ohne 8DN8 5)/2.8.3 Innerer Aufbau/2.8.3 Innerer Aufbau 030 - 8D Q1 1 Tex t z u is olierter Aus führung @ 5\mod_1340264714406_18.docx @ 19897 @ @ 1

In the insulated design, the electrical connection between sliding contact [3] and housing is interrupted by an
insulating flange [1]. Here, a connection exists to the housing and consequently to the earth potential only via
the connection piece [2] encapsulated into the insulating flange and an attached copper strap (not shown).
The insulating sleeve [6] insulates the crank gear and thus also the housing from the moving contact.
The copper strap should be removed for the purpose of taking measurements. When the copper strap is
removed, the operation of the earthing switch is cancelled.

 Notice
The copper strap must only be removed on the outer screw connection of
item 2 if necessary for measuring purposes, and only for the duration of
measurement. Bolted joints for pressurised containers on the flange
connection of Pos. 1 must not be undone.

• The copper strap must only be removed on the sections marked with an arrow!

Pos : 4.9.11 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.8 Arbeits erdungssc halter (ohne 8DN8 5)/2.8.3 Innerer Aufbau/2.8.3 Innerer Aufbau 040 - 8D Q1 1 Bild3 - is oliert @ 14\m od_1361198840064_0.docx @ 98250 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.9.12 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.8 Arbeits erdungssc halter (ohne 8DN8 5)/2.8.3 Innerer Aufbau/2.8.3 Innerer Aufbau 040 - 8D Q1 1 Bild3u - is oliert @ 5\m od_1340264811573_18.docx @ 19908 @ @ 1

1 Insulating flange
2 Connection piece (copper strap not shown)
3 Sliding contact
4 Sealing ring
5 Sealing ring
6 Insulating sleeve

Fig. 2-46 Earthing switch, insulated (partial view)

Pos : 4.9.13 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.8 Arbeits erdungssc halter (ohne 8DN8 5)/2.8.4 Antrieb/2.8.4 Antri eb 010 - 8DQ1 1 @ 5\mod_1340264925615_18.doc x @ 19919 @ 3 @ 1

2-113
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description
2.8.4 Drive
The motor drive [2] is fixed to the flange of the middle pole. The motor drive is connected to the drive of the
middle pole via its operating shaft, the lever [3], the coupling rod [4], the lever [1] and the toque limiter [7].
Coupling rods connect this drive to the levers of the two outer poles.

Pos : 4.9.14 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.8 Arbeits erdungssc halter (ohne 8DN8 5)/2.8.4 Antrieb/2.8.4 Antri eb 020 - 8DQ1 1 Bild4 @ 14\m od_1361199114461_0.docx @ 98275 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.9.15 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.8 Arbeits erdungssc halter (ohne 8DN8 5)/2.8.4 Antrieb/2.8.4 Antri eb 020 - 8DQ1 1 Bild4u @ 5\m od_1340264994205_18.docx @ 19930 @ @ 1

1 Lever
2 Motor drive
3 Lever
4 Coupling rod
5 Coupling rod
6 Position indicator
7 Torque limiter
8 Signal switch module

Fig. 2-47 Drive

Motor drive [ 2.9]

Pos : 4.9.16 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1

2-114
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description
Pos : null /01 BETR IEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Besc hr eibung/M odul e/2.9 Motor antrieb (ohne 8DN 8 5)/2.9 Motor antrieb/2.9 Motor antrieb - 8DQ1, 8DN 9 @ 5\mod_1340265232568_18.doc x @ 19941 @ 2 @ 1

2.9 Motor drive

The section contains a description of

- system application
- design and method of operation
- devices for manual operation

Motor drives [ 1.2]

Dimensions and weights of switchgear modules [ 1.5]

Pos : null /01 BETR IEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Besc hr eibung/M odul e/2.9 Motor antrieb (ohne 8DN 8 5)/2.9.1 Verwendung/2.9.1 Verwendung - 8DQ1, 8DN 9 @ 5\mod_1340265539347_18.doc x @ 19953 @ 3 @ 1

2.9.1 Use
The motor drive is intended for the drive of disconnectors and earthing switches.
For high-speed earthing switches, a front-mounted spring-snap mechanism guarantees the necessarily high
operating speed.

Pos : null /01 BETR IEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Besc hr eibung/M odul e/2.9 Motor antrieb (ohne 8DN 8 5)/2.9.2 Aufbau und Wirkungsweis e/2.9.2 Aufbau und Wirkungsweis e 010 - 8D Q1 3 -mit- @ 27\mod_1409558404690_18.docx @ 252551 @ 3 @ 1

2.9.2 Design and function of the motor Drives

The motor drive consists of a housing in which all operating elements of the control and the mechanical gearing
are located. The housing is fitted with dust-proof covers.
Other housings may be connected to this housing depending on the the motor drive application. These may
be housings for cable bushings.

Pos : null /01 BETR IEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Besc hr eibung/M odul e/2.9 Motor antrieb (ohne 8DN 8 5)/2.9.2 Aufbau und Wirkungsweis e/2.9.2 Aufbau und Wirkungsweis e 020 - 8D Q1 3 Bild1 @ 27\mod_1409558664401_0.docx @ 252570 @ @ 1

Pos : null /01 BETR IEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Besc hr eibung/M odul e/2.9 Motor antrieb (ohne 8DN 8 5)/2.9.2 Aufbau und Wirkungsweis e/2.9.2 Aufbau und Wirkungsweis e 020 - 8D Q1 3 Bild1u @ 27\m od_1409559016767_18.docx @ 252589 @ @ 1

Fig. 2-48 Motor drive for high speed earthing switch

Pos : null /01 BETR IEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Besc hr eibung/M odul e/2.9 Motor antrieb (ohne 8DN 8 5)/2.9.2 Aufbau und Wirkungsweis e/2.9.2 Aufbau und Wirkungsweis e 030 - 8D Q1 3 Bild2 @ 27\mod_1409559511545_0.docx @ 252667 @ @ 1

Pos : null /01 BETR IEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Besc hr eibung/M odul e/2.9 Motor antrieb (ohne 8DN 8 5)/2.9.2 Aufbau und Wirkungsweis e/2.9.2 Aufbau und Wirkungsweis e 030 - 8D Q1 3 Bild2u @ 27\m od_1409559417539_18.docx @ 252648 @ @ 1

Fig. 2-49 Motor drive for disconnectors and work-in-progress earthing switches
Pos : null /01 BETR IEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Besc hr eibung/M odul e/2.9 Motor antrieb (ohne 8DN 8 5)/2.9.2 Aufbau und Wirkungsweis e/2.9.2 Aufbau und Wirkungsweis e 040 - 8D Q1, 8DN9 6 @ 41\mod_1566294587177_18.docx @ 813396 @ @ 1

2-115
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description
The prelubricated gearing reduces the speed of the motor shaft to approximately one half the revolutions of
the drive shaft.
The moment of inertia of the motor is dampened in both directions of rotation by an armature parallel resistor.
Anti-condensation heating prevents the formation of condensation. The cover is provided with ventilation
openings for the housing.

Pos : null /01 BETR IEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Besc hr eibung/M odul e/2.9 Motor antrieb (ohne 8DN 8 5)/2.9.2 Aufbau und Wirkungsweis e/2.9.2.1 Motor antrieb für Trenn- u Ar bei tser dungssc h 010 - 8D Q1 3 @ 27\mod_1409561111133_18.docx @ 252726 @ 4 @ 1

2.9.2.1 Motor drive for disconnectors and work-in-progress earthing switches

The housing units the basic structure of the motor drive [4], the gearing [5] with the torque limiter [6] and
also the switch position indicator [7] and the alarm switch [8].
It signals the CLOSE, OPEN and fault position switching positions.

Pos : null /01 BETR IEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Besc hr eibung/M odul e/2.9 Motor antrieb (ohne 8DN 8 5)/2.9.2 Aufbau und Wirkungsweis e/2.9.2.1 Motor antrieb für Trenn- u Ar bei tser dungssc h 020 - 8D Q1 3 Bild1 @ 27\mod_1409561362972_0.docx @ 252745 @ @ 1

Pos : null /01 BETR IEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Besc hr eibung/M odul e/2.9 Motor antrieb (ohne 8DN 8 5)/2.9.2 Aufbau und Wirkungsweis e/2.9.2.1 Motor antrieb für Trenn- u Ar bei tser dungssc h 020 - 8D Q1 3 Bild1u @ 27\m od_1409561430492_18.docx @ 252764 @ @ 1
11

1 Drive shaft
2 Anti-condensation heating
3 Cover for manual operation and electric locking
4 Motor drive
5 Gearbox
6 Torque limiter
7 Position inidicator
8 Alarm switch

Fig. 2-50 Motor drive for disconnector and work-in-progress earthing switch (without cover plate)

Pos : null /01 BETR IEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Besc hr eibung/M odul e/2.9 Motor antrieb (ohne 8DN 8 5)/2.9.2 Aufbau und Wirkungsweis e/2.9.2.1 Motor antrieb für Trenn- u Ar bei tser dungssc h 030 - 8D Q1, 8DN 9 @ 5\m od_1340266658680_18.docx @ 20030 @ @ 1

The signal switch module is fitted directly onto the motor operating shaft. The auxiliary switch located in it is
positively controlled via a motor installed upstream. It signals the CLOSE, OPEN and fault switching positions.

Pos : null /01 BETR IEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Besc hr eibung/M odul e/2.9 Motor antrieb (ohne 8DN 8 5)/2.9.2 Aufbau und Wirkungsweis e/2.9.2.2 Motor antrieb für Schnellerdungsschalter 010 - 8DQ1 1/3, 8DN 9 @ 5\mod_1340266794920_18.docx @ 20041 @ 4 @ 1

2-116
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description
2.9.2.2 Motor drive for high-speed earthing switch
The electromechanical control [8] controls the drive.
Electrical connection is via a 46-pin plug [5] installed on the exterior of the drive housing.
An auxiliary switch is integrated into the drive. A second auxiliary switch is fitted in the spring-snap mechanism.
The contacts of both auxiliary switches are connected in series.

Pos : null /01 BETR IEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Besc hr eibung/M odul e/2.9 Motor antrieb (ohne 8DN 8 5)/2.9.2 Aufbau und Wirkungsweis e/2.9.2.2 Motor antrieb für Schnellerdungsschalter 020 - 8DQ1 1/3, 8DN 9 Bild5 @ 7\mod_1346309368001_0.docx @ 56995 @ @ 1

Pos : null /01 BETR IEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Besc hr eibung/M odul e/2.9 Motor antrieb (ohne 8DN 8 5)/2.9.2 Aufbau und Wirkungsweis e/2.9.2.2 Motor antrieb für Schnellerdungsschalter 020 - 8DQ1 1/3, 8DN 9 Bildu @ 7\mod_1346309269204_18.doc x @ 56970 @ @ 1

1 Drive shaft
2 Lever
3 Motor
4 Anti-condensation heating
5 Plug-in connection
6 Auxiliary switch
7 Hood
8 Electromechanical control
9 Venting stub
10 Auxiliary switch operating mechanism
11 Armature parallel resistor

Fig. 2-51 High-speed earthing switch motor drive

Pos : null /01 BETR IEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Besc hr eibung/M odul e/2.9 Motor antrieb (ohne 8DN 8 5)/2.9.2 Aufbau und Wirkungsweis e/2.9.2.2 Motor antrieb für Schnellerdungsschalter 030 - 8DQ1 3 @ 27\mod_1409562197996_18.doc x @ 252783 @ @ 1

Motor switches can also be operated manually. The cover must be removed for manual operation and electric
locking [15].

Manual operation [ 5.2]

Pos : 4.11.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.11 Str omwandler/2.11 Stromw andl er 000 - Ü bersc hrift @ 2\m od_1335512791563_18.docx @ 14651 @ 2 @ 1

2-117
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description

2-118
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description
2.10 Current transformer
Pos : 4.11.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.11 Str omwandler/2.11 Stromw andl er 010 - 8DN8, 8D Q1 1, 8DN9 2 @ 25\m od_1391499129388_18.docx @ 227733 @ @ 1

This section presents:

- use of the current transformer

- external design
- internal design
- terminal designations.

Basic information

Electrical and mechanical parameters [ 1.1]

Dimensions and weights of switchgear modules [ 1.5]

Order documentation

Pos : 4.11.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.11 Str omwandler/2.11.1 Verwendung @ 2\mod_1335513130469_18.doc x @ 14662 @ 3 @ 1

2.10.1 Use
Inductive current transformers (CT) step the operating currents and short-circuit currents down to values which
are suitable for measuring instruments and protective devices connected.
Inductive current transformers have been installed in the switchgear. The conductor which is run straight
through the module assumes the function of the primary winding. The built-in components on the secondary
side are summarised below as “core-and-coil assembly“.
The function units in the core-and-coil assembly, which consist of the iron cores and the associated secondary
winding, are called “cores“ in the following. A distinction is made between

- measuring and metering cores and

- protection cores.

Measuring and metering cores ensure a low transmission error in the rated current range and protect meters
and instruments from overloading.
Protection cores have a larger measuring error in the rated current range than measuring and metering cores.
But fault currents are measured up to the rated accuracy limit current (accuracy limit factor x primary rated
current) in approximate proportion.
Depending on the different demands made on current transformers, there are variations in

- the type, number and dimensions of the cores

- the design of the secondary windings and the number of secondary taps
- the length of the housing.

Pos : 4.11.4 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1

2-119
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description
Pos : 4.11.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.11 Str omwandler/2.11.4 Stromw andler mit inneliegenden Ker nen - Ü berschrift 8DN9 6, 8DQ1 @ 32\m od_1453194379466_18.docx @ 309617 @ 3 @ 1

2.10.2 Current transformer with internal cores

Pos : 4.11.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.11 Str omwandler/2.11.2 Äuß erer Aufbau 010 - 8DN 8, 8DN 9 2, 8DQ1 1 @ 12\m od_1351070517662_18.docx @ 72435 @ 3 @ 1

2.10.3 External design

Pos : 4.11.7 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.11 Str omwandler/2.11.2 Äuß erer Aufbau 015 - 8DQ1, 8DN 9 6 @ 5\m od_1340267082273_18.docx @ 20052 @ @ 1

Design for attachment to the circuit-breaker

The core-and-coil assembly [1] is installed inside a single-part housing which is mounted directly or via a
reducing ring [4] on the circuit-breaker. In the case of core-and-coil assemblies with a greater degree of
expansion, the core-and-coil assembly projects into the installation space in the stub of the contact-breaker.

The terminal box [2] is located on the side of the housing.

Pos : 4.11.8 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.11 Str omwandler/2.11.2 Äuß erer Aufbau 020 - 8DQ1 1 Bild1 @ 14\mod_1361200913763_0.docx @ 98300 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.11.9 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.11 Str omwandler/2.11.2 Äuß erer Aufbau 020 - 8DQ1 1 Bild1u @ 5\mod_1340267289320_18.docx @ 20063 @ @ 1

1 Core-and-coil assembly
2 Terminal box
3 Housing
4 Reducing ring

Fig. 2-52 Current transformer

Pos : 4.11.10 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi ervorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

2-120
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description
Pos : 4.11.11 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.2 Äußer er Aufbau 030 - 8DQ1, 8DN 9 6 T ext für auss enli egende Stromw andl er @ 12\m od_1351071771443_18.docx @ 72504 @ @ 1

Design for installation in outgoing lines

In the case of installation in outgoing lines, the housing [3] and the reducing housing [4] jointly form the
enclosure. This completely encloses the core-and-coil assembly [1].
The terminal box [2] is located on the side of the housing.

Pos : 4.11.12 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.2 Äußer er Aufbau 040 - 8DQ1 1 Bild3 @ 14\m od_1361201077898_0.docx @ 98324 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.11.13 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.2 Äußer er Aufbau 040 - 8DQ1 1 Bild3u Str omwandler @ 14\mod_1361201078352_18.docx @ 98349 @ @ 1

1 Core-and-coil assembly
2 Terminal box
3 Housing
4 Reducing ring
5 Reducing housing

Fig. 2-53 Current transformer for installation in outgoing lines

Pos : 4.11.14 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi ervorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

2-121
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description
Pos : 4.11.15 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.3 Innerer Aufbau 010 @ 2\mod_1335514457520_18.docx @ 14739 @ 3 @ 1

2.10.4 Internal design

Pos : 4.11.16 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.3 Innerer Aufbau 015 - 8DN 9, 8DQ1 @ 6\m od_1344864027710_18.docx @ 47498 @ @ 1

The current transformer includes the conductor (primary side) and the core-and-coil assembly (secondary
side).
The conductor [5] is fixed to one side of the bushing. On the opposite side it is con-nected to the conductor of
the subsequent module by means of a coupling contact.
The core-and-coil assembly of the current transformer consists of the inner electrode, the upper and lower
grading electrodes [6] [10] and the toroidal iron cores with secondary windings [9].
The inner electrode is closed off at either end by grading electrodes, which are additionally interconnected via
the connecting piece [8].

Pos : 4.11.17 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.3 Innerer Aufbau 020 - 8DQ1 1 Bild3 @ 6\mod_1344933398081_0.docx @ 47974 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.11.18 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.3 Innerer Aufbau 025 - 8DN 9, 8DQ1 1 Bildu Ty p 1 @ 6\mod_1344864325995_18.docx @ 47547 @ @ 1

1 Conductor (“primary winding”)

2 Grading electrode with insulation
3 Inner electrode
4 Connecting piece
5 Cores with secondary winding
6 Grading electrode (earth side)

Fig. 2-54 Internal view of a single-pole current transformer (example)

Pos : 4.11.19 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.3 Innerer Aufbau 030 - 8DN 9 2, 8DQ1 1 @ 6\mod_1344864560970_18.docx @ 47572 @ @ 1

The cores consist of wound strip material. A secondary winding is provided on each core. This consists of a
toroidal coil with multi-layer winding and turn insulation. The layers are isolated from each other by foils. The
core and the secondary winding are jointly arranged on the inner electrode and adhered in position.
The core-and-coil assembly is firmly bolted down in the chamber on one side when assembled in the factory.
In order to fixing the core-and-coil assembly at the opposite end, set screws are provided on the circumference
of the particular grading ring. If the current transformer is mounted horizontally, these set screws also support
the core-and-coil assembly proper.
The core-and-coil assembly is earthed at one end when it has been installed in the frame. The possible
resulting short-circuit path shown in black in Fig. 3 extends from the two grading electrodes, the inner electrode
and the chamber of the CT module (and also the struts). This falsifies the transformation ratio of the CT on
one side when. To prevent this, one of the grading electrodes is insulated from the inner electrode.
Pos : 4.11.21 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.3 Innerer Aufbau 040 - 8DN 9 2, 8DQ1 1 -mit- Bild2/4 @ 6\mod_1344864716527_0.docx @ 47597 @ @ 1

2-122
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description

Pos : 4.11.22 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.3 Innerer Aufbau 040 - 8DN 9 2, 8DQ1 1 -mit- Bildu @ 6\mod_1344864771072_18.doc x @ 47622 @ @ 1

Fig. 2-55 Possible short-circuit and insulation (principal)

Pos : 4.11.23 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.3 Innerer Aufbau 045 - 8DN 9 6, 8DQ1 @ 12\mod_1351073585627_18.docx @ 72619 @ @ 1

In the terminal box the secondary leads are led out of the gas compartment insulated and gas-tight via bushing
pins [2] which are located in the secondary terminal boards [1] and may be kept at hand to connect the control
cables on the terminal board.

Pos : 4.11.24 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.3 Innerer Aufbau 046 - 8DQ1 1 Bild5 @ 6\mod_1344934009464_0.docx @ 47999 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.11.25 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.3 Innerer Aufbau 046 - 8DQ1 1 Bild5u @ 6\m od_1344934011214_18.docx @ 48024 @ @ 1

1 Secondary terminal block

2 Bushing pins
3 Anti-condensation heating
4 Terminal strip
5 Venting stub
6 Screw connection with gasket for cables and wires
Fig. 2-56 Terminal box, open
a) Inside view
b) Sectional view
Pos : 4.11.27 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.3 Innerer Aufbau 060 - 8DN 9, 8DQ1 @ 43\mod_1590645893745_18.doc x @ 859642 @ @ 1

2-123
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description
On delivery, all cable glands in the terminal box are closed with a seal insert suitable for continuous use.

 Notice
When making cable connections, it must be ensured that the cable or lead
matches the diameter of the gland and seals against moisture.

Caution!
The circuits of the current transformer must be closed or short-circuited!
Failure to connect the conductors to terminal block may damage the
current transformer.
Voltage spikes of several 10 kV can occur!

The current transformer ratios required for operating the measuring and control equipment are switched at the
terminal strip. Unused secondary windings are short-circuited and earthed. The associated feed-through pins
were short-circuited and earthed in the manufacturing plant. The connection between such a feed-through pin
to the earthing terminal strip shall only be removed if the terminal strip is connected with measuring and control
lines.
The terminal box is closed with a cover to protect against direct contact with the live parts.
Pos : 4.11.28 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi ervorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.11.29 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.4 Str omwandler mit auß enli egenden Kernen - Ü bersc hrift 8DN 9 6, 8D Q1 @ 12\mod_1351082911800_18.docx @ 72822 @ 3 @ 1

2.10.5 Current transformer with external cores

Pos : 4.11.30 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.4.1 Äußer er Aufbau 010 - 8DN9 6, 8D Q1 @ 12\m od_1351082996763_18.docx @ 72845 @ 4 @ 1

2.10.5.1 External design

Design for attachment to the circuit-breaker
The core-and-coil assembly is located outside the SF6 gas compartment and is enclosed in a single-section
jacket sheet [3]. This jacket sheet serves as a protective cover for the core-and-coil assembly and at the same
time for current feedback.
The attachment bolts for the jacket sheet must not be released or removed. The terminal box [2] is located on
the side of the jacket sheet. Do not place loads on the terminal box [2] or use it to climb up on, as this can
cause damage to the transformer housing. The current transformer is attached to the circuit-breaker via
flanged connections [4] and [1].
Pos : 4.11.31 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.4.1 Äußer er Aufbau 020 - 8DQ1 Bild5 @ 33\m od_1468500277538_0.docx @ 338735 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.11.32 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.4.1 Äußer er Aufbau 020 - 8DN9 6, 8D Q1 Bil du @ 12\m od_1351083200362_18.docx @ 72890 @ @ 1

1 Core-and-coil assembly
2 Terminal box
3 Jacket sheet
4 Flange
Fig. 2-57 Current transformer
Pos : 4.11.34 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.4.2 Innerer Aufbau 010 - 8DN9 6, 8DQ1 @ 12\m od_1351083383058_18.docx @ 72913 @ 4 @ 1

2-124
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description
2.10.5.2 Internal design
The current transformer includes the conductor (primary side) and the core-and-coil assembly (secondary
side).
The conductor [2] is fixed to one side of the bushing. On the opposite side it is connected to the conductor of
the subsequent module by means of a coupling contact.
The transformer cores [4] are fitted on the inner electrode [3]. Flange 1 is connected with inner electrode 2 via
an insulation component to provide a gas-tight joint, thus preventing feedback of the housing current within the
core window. The housing current is routed via flange 1 [1], jacket sheet and flange 2.

Pos : 4.11.35 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.4.2 Innerer Aufbau 020 - 8DQ1 Bild6 @ 33\m od_1468500312482_0.docx @ 338758 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.11.36 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.4.2 Innerer Aufbau 020 - 8DN9 6, 8DQ1 Bildu @ 12\m od_1351083492523_18.docx @ 72959 @ @ 1

1 Flange 1
2 Conductor
3 Inner electrode (core support)
4 Cores with secondary winding

Fig. 2-58 Internal view of a current transformer (example)

Pos : 4.11.37 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.4.2 Innerer Aufbau 030 - 8DN9 6, 8DQ1 @ 12\m od_1351084916120_18.docx @ 72982 @ @ 1

The cores are wound tape. Every core has a secondary coil. The secondary winding consists of a ring coil with
layer winding and winding isolation. The layers are isolated from one another by foil. The core and the
secondary winding are jointly arranged on the inner electrode [3] and adhered in position.

In the terminal box the secondary lines are provided for connecting the control lines via a terminal rail. The
anticondensation heating is fitted to prevent condensation (option).
Pos : 4.11.38 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi ervorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

2-125
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description
Pos : 4.11.39 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.4.2 Innerer Aufbau 040 - 8DQ1 Bild7 @ 33\m od_1468500333916_0.docx @ 338781 @ @ 1

1
1

a) b)
Pos : 4.11.40 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.4.2 Innerer Aufbau 040 - 8DN9 6, 8DQ1 Bildu @ 12\m od_1351085381537_18.docx @ 73028 @ @ 1

1 Anti-condensation heating
2 Terminal strip
3 Connections for earth lines

Fig. 2-59 Terminal box, open

a) Inside view
b) Sectional view

Pos : 4.11.41 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.4.2 Innerer Aufbau 050 - 8DN9 6, 8DQ1 @ 43\m od_1590645936045_18.docx @ 859665 @ @ 1

Caution!
The circuits of the current transformer must be closed or short-circuited!
Failure to connect the conductors to terminal block may damage the
current transformer.
Voltage spikes of several 10 kV can occur!

• Do not operate the current transformer with open secondary circuit!

The current transformer ratios required for operating the measuring and control equipment are connected to
the terminal strip [2]. Secondary windings not used are short-circuited and earthed. The cores are short-
circuited and earthed at the factory via the jumpers supplied. Only remove these jumpers when measuring and
control lines are connected to the terminal strip [2].

For protection against contact with live parts, the terminal box is provided with a cover.

Pos : 4.11.42 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi ervorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

2-126
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description
Pos : 4.11.43 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.5 Ansc hluß bezeic hnungen 01 @ 24\m od_1390814123765_18.docx @ 226503 @ 3 @ 1

2.10.6 Terminal designations

With reference to current transformers, IEC 61869 prescribes the use of "P1” and "P2”, for the primary
conductor, for the secondary leads "1S1" and "1S2" for the first core,"2S1" and "2S2" for the second core, etc.

Pos : 4.11.44 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.5 Ansc hluß bezeic hnungen 02 - Bil d4 @ 6\m od_1344154761380_0.doc x @ 42244 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.11.45 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.5 Ansc hluß bezeic hnungen 02 - Bil du @ 24\m od_1390811620830_18.docx @ 226440 @ @ 1

Fig. 2-60 Terminal designations to IEC 61869 of a current transformer with three secondary
windings (each secondary winding with its own core)

Pos : 4.11.46 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.5 Ansc hluß bezeic hnungen 03 @ 2\m od_1335519738954_18.docx @ 14893 @ @ 1

The characters “P1” and “P2” also mark the mounting position with reference to the circuit-breaker as shown
on the switchgear overview diagram. These characters are punched into the outer flange of the housing.

Pos : 4.11.47 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.5 Ansc hluß bezeic hnungen 04 - Bil d5 @ 6\m od_1344154925264_0.doc x @ 42338 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.11.48 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.5 Ansc hluß bezeic hnungen 04 - Bil du @ 2\m od_1335519921232_18.docx @ 14904 @ @ 1

Fig. 2-61 Identification of CT mounting position referred to the circuit-breaker to IEC

Pos : 4.11.49 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi ervorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

2-127
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description
Pos : 4.11.50 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.5 Ansc hluß bezeic hnungen 05 @ 2\m od_1335521075425_18.docx @ 14915 @ @ 1

For detecting varying primary currents, the secondary windings of current transformers are provided with taps.
The numbers on the winding between the taps indicate the ratios. A current transformer with reconnectable
ratios can be recognized from the way in which the ratio is written, e.g. 1200-800-500 / 1A, the maximum
primary current always being at the beginning.

Pos : 4.11.51 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.5 Ansc hluß bezeic hnungen 06 - Bil d6 @ 6\m od_1344155070071_0.doc x @ 42362 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.11.52 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.11 Str omwandl er/2.11.5 Ansc hluß bezeic hnungen 06 - Bil du @ 24\m od_1390815029541_18.docx @ 226524 @ @ 1

Fig. 2-62 Terminal designation to IEC 61869 of a current transformer with secondary winding tap
(ratios entered)

Other regulations may stipulate other terminal designations.

Pos : 4.12.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.12 Spannungswandler/2.12 Spannungsw andler @ 2\m od_1335524288830_18.docx @ 14937 @ 2 @ 1

2-128
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description
2.11 Voltage transformer
This section describes:

- use of voltage transformers

- external design
- internal design
- the terminal box
- terminal designations.

Basic information:

Electrical and mechanical parameters [ 1.1]

Nameplates [ 1.4]
Dimensions and weights of switchgear modules [ 1.5]

Order documentation

Pos : 4.12.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.12 Spannungswandler/2.12.1 Verwendung - 8D alle - allgemei ner Text @ 2\m od_1335524511805_18.docx @ 14948 @ 3 @ 1

2.11.1 Use
Voltage transformers step the operating voltage down to values which are suitable for measuring instruments
and protective devices connected and also for earth fault detection.
Inductive voltage transformers are used in the switchgear installation.
Depending on the different demands made on voltage transformers, there are variations in

- the outer dimensions

- the design and number of secondary windings
- the number of secondary taps.

The gas compartment of the voltage transformer is monitored separately.

The voltage transformer is evacuated in the factory and provided with an SF6 transport filling.
The voltage transformer can be mounted in any location, the actual location being determined by the
switchgear configuration in hand.

Pos : 4.12.3 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1

2-129
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description
Pos : 4.12.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.12 Spannungswandler/2.12.2 Äuß erer Aufbau 010 - 8D alle - allgem einer T ext @ 29\mod_1422967532786_18.docx @ 272675 @ 3 @ 1

2.11.2 External design

The housing [1], bushing [2] and cover [3] form the enclosure of the voltage transformer. After assembly by
the manufacturer, these parts are interconnected gas-tight and pressure-proof.
The cast-resin bushing corresponds in design to the other gas-proof bushing used elsewhere in the switchgear
installation.
The terminal box [4], the nameplate and the Rupture disk assembly [5] are located at the cover.
The housing has multiple flanges that are, depending on the installation location and other operating
conditions, furnished with gas maintenance points and a valve block.
The gas monitoring system is mounted to the valve block after the voltage transformer has been delivered to
the construction site.

Pos : 4.12.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.12 Spannungswandler/2.12.2 Äuß erer Aufbau 025 - 8DQ1 1/3 Bild Spannungswandler ohne Trennstr eck e @ 29\m od_1422964134944_0.doc x @ 272609 @ @ 1

1
2

Pos : 4.12.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.12 Spannungswandler/2.12.2 Äuß erer Aufbau 025 - Bildu Spannungsw andl er ohne Trennstrec ke Allg. @ 28\m od_1422959076046_18.docx @ 272565 @ @ 1

1 Housing
2 Bushing
3 Cover
4 Terminal box
5 Rupture disk assembly

Fig. 2-63 Voltage transformer without integrated insulating section.

Pos : 4.12.8 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.12 Spannungswandler/2.12.2 Äuß erer Aufbau 030 - Spannungswandl er mit i ntegrierter Trenns treck e - Hinw eistext @ 2\m od_1335526545960_18.docx @ 14981 @ @ 1

Voltage transformer with integrated isolating distance

The voltage transformer is furnished with an integrated insulating section.

Caution!
The insulating section is not suitable for switching the transformer under
voltage.

If the insulating section of the transformer under voltage is actuated, the

transformer will be severely damaged.

• Switch off the voltage to the transformer before actuating the insulating section.

Pos : 4.12.9 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.12 Spannungswandler/2.12.2 Äuß erer Aufbau 025 - 8DQ1 1/3 Bild Spannungswandler ohne Trennstr eck e @ 29\m od_1422964134944_0.doc x @ 272609 @ @ 1

2-130
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description
5

1
2

Pos : 4.12.10 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.12 Spannungswandl er/2.12.2 Äußer er Aufbau 025 - Bil du Spannungsw andler ohne Tr ennstr eck e Allg. @ 28\m od_1422959076046_18.docx @ 272565 @ @ 1

1 Housing
2 Bushing
3 Cover
4 Terminal box
5 Rupture disk assembly

Fig. 2-64 Voltage transformer without integrated insulating section.

Pos : 4.12.11 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.12 Spannungswandl er/2.12.2 Äußer er Aufbau 040 - 8DQ1 1/3 Bil d Spannungsw andl er mit i ntegrierter T S (H and) @ 29\m od_1422965727674_0.docx @ 272631 @ @ 1

1
2

Pos : 4.12.12 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.12 Spannungswandl er/2.12.2 Äußer er Aufbau 041 - Bil du Spannungsw andler mit integrierter T S (Hand) Allg. @ 29\mod_1422960014018_18.doc x @ 272587 @ @ 1

1 Housing
2 Bushing
3 Cover
4 Terminal box
5 Rupture disk assembly
6 Manual drive of the integrated insulating section

Fig. 2-65 Voltage transformer with integrated insulating section (manual drive)

Pos : 4.12.13 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.12 Spannungswandl er/2.12.2 Äußer er Aufbau 050 - 8DQ1 1/3 Bil d Spannungsw andl er mit i ntegrierter T S (M otor) @ 33\mod_1467641340325_0.docx @ 337261 @ @ 1

2-131
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description
5

1
2

Pos : 4.12.14 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.12 Spannungswandl er/2.12.2 Äußer er Aufbau 051 - Bil du Spannungsw andler mit integrierter T S (Motor) Allg. @ 28\m od_1422957788577_18.docx @ 272467 @ @ 1

1 Housing
2 Bushing
3 Cover
4 Terminal box
5 Rupture disk assembly
6 Motor drive of the integrated insulating section

Fig. 2-66 Voltage transformer with integrated insulating section (motor drive)

Pos : 4.12.15 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.12 Spannungswandl er/2.12.3 Innerer Aufbau 010 - 8DN9 / 8D Q1 - Ak tivteile @ 29\mod_1422971454686_18.doc x @ 272697 @ 3 @ 1

2.11.3 Internal design

Inside the voltage transformer is the core-and-coil assembly.
The core-and-coil assembly is fixed to the case. It consists of the iron core with the secondary windings, the
single-stage primary winding with the high-voltage electrode and the high-voltage connection.
The core is of the interleaved limb type. The core has been configured over an air gap to prevent ferro-
resonances.
The primary winding sits on the secondary windings which sit on the core. All windings are of multi-layer
winding design, with plastic foil insulating the layers.
The High-voltage electrode controls the electrical field.
The high-voltage terminal of the core-and-coil assembly is connected to the bushing using flexible elements.
Owing to the non-linear behaviour of inductances and the high thermal time constants of the primary coils,
there are maximum load capacitances which can thermally and dynamically stress the transformers when
cables and overhead lines are disconnected.

Electrical and mechanical parameters [ 1.1]

Pos : 4.12.16 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi ervorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

2-132
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description
Pos : 4.12.17 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.12 Spannungswandl er/2.12.4 Klemm enkasten 01 - 8D alle @ 43\mod_1590643306012_18.docx @ 859595 @ 3 @ 1

2.11.4 Terminal box

The secondary leads and the earthing connection for the primary winding are routed out of the terminal box
via feed-through wires that are cast gas-tight and insulated in the cable feed-through plate [2]. The feed-
through plate provides a gas-tight and pressure-tight seal for the housing.
The secondary leads and the instrument leads to the terminal strip [1] are connected to the feed-through wires
with crimped connections.
The terminal strip, which is located in the terminal box, accommodates the control leads for connection to the
protection and measuring equipment. The control leads are routed out of the terminal box via cable glands.

Warning!
In operating systems, the accessible earth connection in the terminal box is
at full operating voltage when the jumper between the earth connection and
the earth terminal is opened.

Only open the jumper with the voltage transformers locked out and tagged out and only for the duration of
the measurements!

Caution!
Voltage transformers operate at nearly zero load.
The secondary windings of the voltage transformers must not be short-
circuited! Short-circuiting the secondary windings will destroy the voltage
transformer!

Pos : 4.12.18 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.12 Spannungswandl er/2.12.4 Klemm enkasten 02 - 8DN9 / 8D Q1 Bild @ 7\m od_1344939614827_0.docx @ 48295 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.12.19 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.12 Spannungswandl er/2.12.4 Klemm enkasten 03 - Bildu allg @ 2\m od_1335528530389_18.docx @ 15047 @ @ 1

1 Terminal strip
2 Bushing plate

Fig. 2-67 Terminal box, cover removed

Pos : 4.12.20 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi ervorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

2-133
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description
Pos : 4.12.21 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.12 Spannungswandl er/2.12.5 Ansc hluß bezeic hnungen 01 @ 24\m od_1390812471489_18.docx @ 226482 @ 3 @ 1

2.11.5 Terminal designations

In accordance with IEC 61869 the ends of the primary winding of voltage transformers are designated with
“A” (high-voltage connection) and “N” (earth connection) and the ends of the secondary winding with “a” and
“n”.
Secondary windings with several taps are numbered consecutively, e.g. “1a1”, “1a2”, “1n” for winding 1 and
“2a1”, “2a2”, “2n” for winding 2.

Pos : 4.12.22 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.12 Spannungswandl er/2.12.5 Ansc hluß bezeic hnungen 02 - Bil d @ 6\mod_1344155245564_0.docx @ 42386 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.12.23 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.12 Spannungswandl er/2.12.5 Ansc hluß bezeic hnungen 02 - Bil du @ 24\mod_1390811683539_18.docx @ 226461 @ @ 1

Fig. 2-68 Terminal designations of a voltage transformer with one secondary winding with tap
according to IEC 61869

Other regulations may stipulate other terminal designations.

Pos : 4.12.24 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi ervorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

2-134
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description
Pos : 4.13.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.13 RC-Spannungsteiler/2.13 RC-Spannungsteil er @ 2\mod_1335530242567_18.doc x @ 15080 @ 2 @ 1

2.12 RC divider
This section describes:

- the use of the RC divider

- the external design
- the internal design
- the connection.

Basic information:

Dimensions and weights of switchgear modules [ 1.5]

Order documentation

Pos : 4.13.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.13 RC-Spannungsteiler/2.13.1 Verwendung @ 2\m od_1335531204604_18.docx @ 15091 @ 3 @ 1

2.12.1 Use
RC voltage dividers reduce the operating voltage of the switchgear corresponding with the divider voltage to
values which are suitable for measuring instruments and protective devices connected. RC voltage dividers
provide this output value with a high precision to the overriding system as an analogue signal.
The power output is low, but is more than sufficient for the demands of modern protection and energy counting
systems.
The divider ratio varies according to the different demands of the connectible systems.
RC voltage divider are single-pole or triple-pole encapsulated and form a common gas compartment with the
adjacent module. A version as an enclosed gas chamber is available.

Pos : 4.13.3 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1

2-135
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description
Pos : 4.13.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.13 RC-Spannungsteiler/2.13.2 Äußer er Aufbau 01 - 8DQ1 1 @ 26\mod_1399623743135_18.doc x @ 239719 @ 3 @ 1

2.12.2 External design

The RC divider is supported by the cover [1]. The housing [2] is connected with the switchgear module via the
flange A in a gas-tight and pressure-proof manner.

Pos : 4.13.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.13 RC-Spannungsteiler/2.13.2 Äußer er Aufbau 02 - 8DQ1 Bild1 @ 47\mod_1614770355718_0.docx @ 907644 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.13.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.13 RC-Spannungsteiler/2.13.2 Äußer er Aufbau 02 - 8DQ1 Bild1u @ 47\m od_1614770411744_18.docx @ 907668 @ @ 1

1 Flange with gas-tight bushing

2 Housing
3 Diverter
4 Secondary box

Fig. 2-69 Exterior view of the RC voltage divider

Pos : 4.13.7 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1

2-136
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description
Pos : 4.13.8 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.13 RC-Spannungsteiler/2.13.3 Innerer Aufbau 01 - 8D Q1 1 @ 26\m od_1399623963924_18.docx @ 239739 @ 3 @ 1

2.12.3 Internal design

The RC voltage divider is of single-phase design. Each one of these voltage dividers consists of a high and
low voltage unit.
High and low-voltage units consist of parallel connected resistors and capacitors.
The high-voltage unit (primary part) is installed with 70 % of the secondary capacity of the low-voltage unit.
The rest of the secondary capacity is located with the secondary resistor in the secondary box [1].
The electrical components in the main insulator are surrounded by oil.
The low-voltage is lead out of the secondary cables via a secondary cable.

Pos : 4.13.9 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.13 RC-Spannungsteiler/2.13.3 Innerer Aufbau 02 - 8D Q1 1 Bil d2 @ 26\mod_1399548889452_0.docx @ 239167 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.13.10 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.13 RC- Spannungs teil er/2.13.3 Inner er Aufbau 02 - 8DQ1 1 Bild2u @ 26\m od_1399548769193_18.docx @ 239148 @ @ 1

1 Secondary box
2 Main isolator
3 Diverter

Fig. 2-70 Section of a RC devider

Pos : 4.13.11 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.13 RC- Spannungs teil er/2.13.4 Ans chl uß @ 5\mod_1340275793575_18.docx @ 20274 @ 3 @ 1

2.12.4 Connection
The Secondary cables that are guided out of the secondary box are connected unabridged with the measuring
instruments and protective devices. The identification of the secondary cables corresponds with the conductor
identification of the switchgear.

Pos : 4.14.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.14 Kompensator en/2.14 Kom pens atoren @ 2\m od_1335533011962_18.docx @ 15146 @ 2 @ 1

2-137
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description

2-138
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description
2.13 Expansion joints
This section presents:

- the use of the expansion joints

- the design of the expansion joints

Basic information:

Electrical and mechanical parameters [ 1.1]

Dimensions and weights of switchgear modules [ 1.5]

Pos : 4.14.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.14 Kompensator en/2.14.1 Verw endung 010 @ 2\m od_1335533720314_18.docx @ 15157 @ 3 @ 1

2.13.1 Use
Expansion joints compensate for changes in the length of the housings caused by temperature changes,
permissible module design tolerances and, to a certain extent, axial, lateral and angular inaccuracies of the
erection site.
Due to their flexibility, the expansion joints can also support the removal of adjacent modules.

Pos : 4.14.3 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1

2-139
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description
Pos : 4.14.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.14 Kompensator en/2.14.2 Aufbau und Wirkungsw eise der Kom pens atoren 01 - 8DN 9, 8D Q1 @ 47\m od_1614770728166_18.docx @ 907717 @ 3 @ 1

2.13.2 Design and function of the expansion joints

The expansion joint consists of stainless steel bellows, each end of which is closed with a flange. The two
flanges are connected by tie-rods.
The stainless steel bellows is bridged by busbars through which the possible housing current flows.
The conductor is located at both ends in a contact system consisting of the contact, the spacer and the
pressure washer.

Pos : 4.14.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.14 Kompensator en/2.14.2 Aufbau und Wirkungsw eise der Kom pens atoren 02 - 8D Q1 1 Bil d1 @ 7\m od_1345013330950_0.doc x @ 49039 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.14.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.14 Kompensator en/2.14.2 Aufbau und Wirkungsw eise der Kom pens atoren 02 - 8D Q1 1 Bil du @ 7\m od_1345013331325_18.docx @ 49064 @ @ 1

1 Flange
2 Tie-rod
3 Pressure washer

Fig. 2-71 Design of the expansion joints

Pos : 4.14.7 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.14 Kompensator en/2.14.2 Aufbau und Wirkungsw eise der Kom pens atoren 03 - 8DN 9, 8D Q1 1 @ 5\m od_1340278366931_18.docx @ 20395 @ @ 1

The tie-rods are adjustably bolted and supported by concave discs and conical seats. During assembly, the
tie-rods are fixed axially by means of nuts.

Pos : 4.14.8 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.14 Kompensator en/2.14.2 Aufbau und Wirkungsw eise der Kom pens atoren 04 - 8DN 9, 8D Q1 1 Bil d2 @ 7\m od_1345013450299_0.doc x @ 49089 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.14.9 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.14 Kompensator en/2.14.2 Aufbau und Wirkungsw eise der Kom pens atoren 04 - 8DN 9, 8D Q1 1 Bil du @ 7\m od_1345013450689_18.docx @ 49114 @ @ 1

Fig. 2-72 Fastening point of a tie-rod;

The two conical seats are shown in the centre (top arrow). The right conical seat is shown in a cut-away view.
On the outside are the two convex discs (bottom arrows).

Pos : 4.14.10 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi ervorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

2-140
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description
Pos : 4.14.11 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.14 Kom pens atoren/2.14.2 Aufbau und Wirkungsweis e der Kompensator en 05 - 8DN 9, 8DQ1 1 @ 7\m od_1345016129047_18.docx @ 49139 @ @ 1

The expansion joint can be used axially (a), laterally (b) and angularly (c).

Pos : 4.14.12 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.14 Kom pens atoren/2.14.2 Aufbau und Wirkungsweis e der Kompensator en 06 - 8DN 9, 8DQ1 1 Bild3 @ 13\mod_1351166102306_0.docx @ 73997 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.14.13 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.14 Kom pens atoren/2.14.2 Aufbau und Wirkungsweis e der Kompensator en 06 - 8DN 9, 8DQ1 1 Bildu @ 12\mod_1351158102371_18.docx @ 73882 @ @ 1

Fig. 2-73 Subjections of the expansion joints

Pos : 4.14.14 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.14 Kom pens atoren/2.14.2 Aufbau und Wirkungsweis e der Kompensator en 07 - 8DN 9, 8DQ1 1 @ 5\m od_1340278504379_18.docx @ 20406 @ @ 1

If the expansion joint is subjected to transverse stressing (angular and/or lateral) this way of fixing the tie-rods
allows them to be skewed. Once the tie-rods have been bolted in place, it is no longer possible to compensate
directly for axial stressing of the expansion joint. The expansion joints are therefore located in the bay in such
a way that axial movements expected are diverted and compensated for as transverse stressing.

Pos : 4.14.15 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.14 Kom pens atoren/2.14.2.1 Kom pens ator 400 020 - 8DQ1 1 / 3 / 8 Bild @ 33\m od_1477903553165_0.docx @ 676137 @ @ 1

2 1

Pos : 4.14.16 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.14 Kom pens atoren/2.14.2.1 Kom pens ator 400 020 - 8DQ1 1 / 3 / 8 Bildu @ 31\mod_1445516398576_18.doc x @ 298523 @ @ 1

1 Expansion joint housing

2 Tie rod
3 Copper bar

Fig. 2-74 Expansion joint module

Pos : 4.14.17 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.14 Kom pens atoren/2.14.2.1 Kom pens ator 401 020 - 8DQ1 1 / 3 / 8 Axi al-Sc hiebekom pens ator Bil d @ 33\m od_1477903857533_0.docx @ 676159 @ @ 1

2-141
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description
1

Pos : 4.14.18 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.14 Kom pens atoren/2.14.2.1 Kom pens ator 401 020 - 8DQ1 1 / 3 / 8 Bildu @ 33\mod_1477903857892_18.doc x @ 676181 @ @ 1

1 Expansion joint housing

2 Conductor
3 Bushing

Fig. 2-75 Axial expansion joint module

Pos : 4.15.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.15 Sammelsc hi ene/2.15 Sammels chi ene @ 2\m od_1335535810048_18.docx @ 15256 @ 2 @ 1

2-142
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description
2.14 Busbar
This section describes

- the use and

- design of the busbar.

Basic information:

Dimensions and weights of switchgear modules [ 1.5]

Housing and conductor connections [ 2.19]

Pos : 4.15.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.15 Sammelsc hi ene/2.15.1 Verwendung - 8DQ1, 8DN 9 6 @ 5\mod_1340276195659_18.doc x @ 20285 @ 3 @ 1

2.14.1 Use
The busbars are single-pole encapsulated. They connect the sections and bays of the switchgear according
to the operating requirements and for reasons such as the anticipated availability of the system and its
integration into the electrical power supply network.
Single and/or double busbars are used. Depending on the requirements, earthing switches, disconnectors and
expansion joints are installed.

Pos : 4.15.3 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1

2-143
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description
Pos : 4.15.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.15 Sammelsc hi ene/2.15.2 Aufbau 010 - 8D Q1 1 @ 5\m od_1340276307980_18.docx @ 20296 @ 3 @ 1

2.14.2 Construction
Each busbar module consists of the housing [5], the conductor [4] and the tie-rods [2]. An expansion joint [6]
is fitted between two bays.
The housings of the busbar modules are made of aluminium wrought alloy tubes with welded-on cast headers.
As a rule, the housings have opposite the flange for the disconnectors an access opening which, if required,
is sealed by means of a filter cover. If it is not required, the access opening is blanked off with a flat cover.
The vacant bay version without connection facilities has no access opening. The housings of the end-bays are
sealed with tie-rod covers.
The conductors [4] are made of aluminium tubes and are supported by the bushings of the disconnectors. To
the bushings are attached the conductors [4] and the corner ball-type assemblies [7], to which the conductors
[4] are fixed. One end of the conductor concerned is screwed to the corner ball-type assembly, and the other
end fits in a sliding bearing. The current flows to the corner ball-type assembly via a flexible connection.

Pos : 4.15.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.15 Sammelsc hi ene/2.15.2 Aufbau 020 - 8D Q1 1 Bil d1 Mittelfel daus führung @ 14\m od_1361371190816_0.doc x @ 98482 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.15.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.15 Sammelsc hi ene/2.15.2 Aufbau 020 - 8D Q1 1 Bil d1u @ 5\m od_1340276397364_18.docx @ 20307 @ @ 1

1 Tie-rod support
2 Tie-rod
3 Cover
4 Conductor
5 Housing
6 Expansion joint
7 Corner ball-type assembly
8 Conductor
9 Access cover
10 Sliding ring

Fig. 2-76 Inner bay version

Pos : 4.15.7 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.15 Sammelsc hi ene/2.15.2 Aufbau 030 - 8D Q1 1 Bil d2 @ 14\m od_1361371786472_0.docx @ 98526 @ @ 1

2-144
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description

Pos : 4.15.8 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.15 Sammelsc hi ene/2.15.2 Aufbau 030 - 8D Q1 1 Bil d2u Leerfeldausführ ung @ 5\m od_1340276502326_18.docx @ 20318 @ @ 1

1 Tie-rod lock
2 Corner ball-type assembly
3 Access cover
4 Cover
5 Conductor
6 Housing
7 Expansion joint
8 Support cover with ball-type assembly
Fig. 2-77 Vacant bay version with facilities for connection

Pos : 4.15.9 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.15 Sammelsc hi ene/2.15.2 Aufbau 040 - 8D Q1 1 Bild3 @ 14\m od_1361372487474_0.doc x @ 98550 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.15.10 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.15 Samm elsc hiene/2.15.2 Aufbau 040 - 8D Q1 1 Bil d3u l ang e Endfeldausführ ung @ 5\mod_1340277069900_18.docx @ 20330 @ @ 1

1 Cover
2 Gas connection
3 Cover
4 Tie-rod
5 Conductor
6 Housing
7 Expansion joint
8 Corner ball-type assembly
9 Conductor
10 Access cover
Fig. 2-78 Long end-bay version
2-145
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description
Pos : 4.15.11 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.15 Samm elsc hiene/2.15.2 Aufbau 052 - 8D Q1 1 Bild4 @ 14\mod_1361528253118_0.docx @ 98600 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.15.12 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.15 Samm elsc hiene/2.15.2 Aufbau 052 - 8D Q1 1 Bild4u k urze Endfel daus führung @ 5\mod_1340277155925_18.doc x @ 20341 @ @ 1

1 Cover
2 Cover
3 Corner ball-type assembly
4 Conductor
5 Access cover
6 Housing
Fig. 2-79 Short end-bay version
Pos : 4.15.13 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.15 Samm elsc hiene/2.15.2 Aufbau 065 - 8D Q1 1 Bild5 @ 14\mod_1361528973552_0.docx @ 98624 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.15.14 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.15 Samm elsc hiene/2.15.2 Aufbau 065 - 8D Q1 1 Bild5u Eckk ugel mit Str ombandv erbi ndung (Draufsic ht) @ 5\mod_1340277213390_18.docx @ 20352 @ @ 1

1 Corner ball-type assembly

2 Sliding ring
3 Conductor
4 Connection piece
5 Screw
6 Screw
7 Screw
8 Nut
9 Flexible connection
Fig. 2-80 Corner ball-type assembly with flexible connection (plan view)
Pos : 4.15.15 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.15 Samm elsc hiene/2.15.2 Aufbau 035 - 8D Q1 1 Bild2 Anschl uss pol lang @ 31\m od_1445518323603_0.docx @ 298545 @ @ 1

2-146
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description

Pos : 4.15.16 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.15 Samm elsc hiene/2.15.2 Aufbau 035 - 8D Q1 1 Bild2u @ 31\m od_1445518324040_18.docx @ 298657 @ @ 1

1 Connection housing
2 Conductor
3 Tie rod

Fig. 2-81 Busbar connection module

Pos : 4.15.17 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.15 Samm elsc hiene/2.15.2 Aufbau 054 - 8D Q1 1 Bild5 Axial- Schi ebek om pens ator @ 31\m od_1445511992398_0.docx @ 298453 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.15.18 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.15 Samm elsc hiene/2.15.2 Aufbau 054 - 8D Q1 1 Bild5u @ 31\m od_1445511954985_18.docx @ 298409 @ @ 1

1 Connection housing
2 Conductor
3 Sliding expansion joint
4 Bushing

Fig. 2-82 Sliding expansion joint module

Pos : 4.15.19 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi ervorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

2-147
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description
Pos : 4.15.20 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.15 Samm elsc hiene/2.15.2 Aufbau 070 - 8D Q1 1 Aufbau Z ugank er @ 5\m od_1340277474686_18.docx @ 20363 @ @ 1

Tie-rod
Each busbar module is provided with two opposed tie-rods [7]. The tie-rods are guided in the supports [6],
which, when the gas compartments are evacuated, take up the resulting buckling stress of the tie-rods.
The tie-rods of neighbouring modules are connected to each other by a tie-rod lock [5]. The tie-rods are fixed
only at the ends of the busbars or at the ends of the relevant gas compartment, insofar as the busbar is divided
up into several gas compartments by means of gas-tight bushings.
Stress on the tie-rods during lateral movements is compensated for by the elasticity of the material of which
they are made.

Pos : 4.15.21 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.15 Samm elsc hiene/2.15.2 Aufbau 080 - 8D Q1 1 Bild Zug ank er @ 14\mod_1361529508975_0.docx @ 98648 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.15.22 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.15 Samm elsc hiene/2.15.2 Aufbau 080 - 8D Q1 1 Bildu Z ugank er @ 5\mod_1340277570602_18.docx @ 20374 @ @ 1

1 Tie-rod lock
2 Tie-rod support
3 Tie-rod

Fig. 2-83 Tie-rod (example)

Pos : 4.15.23 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi ervorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

2-148
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description
Pos : 4.16.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.17 Freilei tungsansc hluss-Baustei n/2.17 Freil eitungs ansc hl uß-Baus tei n @ 2\m od_1335946380153_18.docx @ 15514 @ 2 @ 1

2.15 Overhead line connection module

This section describes:

- the use of the overhead line connection module

- the external design of the overhead connection module
- the internal design of the overhead line connection module

Basic information:

Dimensions and weights of switchgear modules [ 1.5]

Housing and conductor connections [ 2.19]

Pos : 4.16.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.17 Freilei tungsansc hluss-Baustei n/2.17.1 Verwendung @ 2\mod_1335946616682_18.doc x @ 15525 @ 3 @ 1

2.15.1 Use
The conductors are routed out of the bay gas compartments via the overhead line connector modules so that
bare conductors can be connected to them. The three outdoor bushings per bay are normally of the same
design.

Pos : 4.16.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.17 Freilei tungsansc hluss-Baustei n/2.17.2 Äuß erer Aufbau 005 - 8DQ1 1 Ü berschrift @ 27\m od_1409564306653_18.docx @ 252802 @ 3 @ 1

2.15.2 External design

Pos : 4.16.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.17 Freilei tungsansc hluss-Baustei n/2.17.2 Äuß erer Aufbau 010 - 8DQ1 1/3 @ 5\mod_1340279001803_18.docx @ 20428 @ @ 1

The overhead line connection module consists of the outdoor bushing [1] and the adapter housing [2]. To
produce the angles Alpha 1 and Alpha 2, extension modules [3] and angle modules [4] with angles Alpha =
30°, 45°, 60° and 90° are available.

Pos : 4.16.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.17 Freilei tungsansc hluss-Baustei n/2.17.2 Äuß erer Aufbau 050 - 8DQ1 1/3 Bild1 @ 14\m od_1361531376522_0.docx @ 98696 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.16.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.17 Freilei tungsansc hluss-Baustei n/2.17.2 Äuß erer Aufbau 050 - 8DQ1 1/3 Bild1u @ 14\m od_1361530687622_18.docx @ 98672 @ @ 1

1 Outdoor bushing
2 Adapter housing
3 Extension module
4 Angle module

Fig. 2-84 Overhead connection module

a) Side view
b) Front view

Pos : 4.16.7 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1

2-149
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description
Pos : 4.16.8 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.17 Freilei tungsansc hluss-Baustei n/2.17.3 Innerer Aufbau 005 - 8DN 9 6, 8D Q1 1/6 ( nicht 8DQ1 3) Ü bersc hrift @ 27\mod_1409565429962_18.docx @ 252862 @ 3 @ 1

2.15.3 Internal design

Pos : 4.16.9 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.17 Freilei tungsansc hluss-Baustei n/2.17.3 Innerer Aufbau 010 - 8DN 9 6, 8D Q1 @ 5\m od_1340279125420_18.docx @ 20438 @ @ 1

The outdoor bushing is mounted on the angle module [2] via the adapter housing [1]. The conductor of the
outdoor bushing is connected to the bushing of the angle module via the coupling contact.

Pos : 4.16.10 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.17 Fr eileitungsansc hluss- Baustei n/2.17.3 Innerer Aufbau 050 - 8DQ1 1/3 Bild2 @ 14\m od_1361531989954_0.doc x @ 98744 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.16.11 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.17 Fr eileitungsansc hluss- Baustei n/2.17.3 Innerer Aufbau 050 - 8DQ1 1/3 Bild2u @ 14\m od_1361531672473_18.docx @ 98720 @ @ 1

1 Adapter housing
2 Angle module

Fig. 2-85 Overhead connection module

Pos : 4.16.12 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi ervorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

2-150
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description
Pos : 4.17.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.18 Kabel ans chl uss-Baustein/2.18 Kabel ansc hluß-Baustein @ 2\m od_1335949316248_18.docx @ 15635 @ 2 @ 1

2.16 Cable connection module

This section describes

- application and
- the structure of a cable connection module.

Basic information:

Dimensions and weights of switchgear modules [ 1.5]

Housing and conductor connections [ 2.19]
Prerequisites [ 6.1]

Pos : 4.17.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.18 Kabel ans chl uss-Baustein/2.18.1 Verw endung - 8DQ1, 8DN 9 @ 5\m od_1340279220586_18.docx @ 20449 @ 3 @ 1

2.16.1 Use
The cable connection module connects the bay with the high-voltage cable. Oil-filled, plastic-sheathed or gas
pressure cables can be connected.
Each cable feeder bay has three (single cable) or 2 x 3 cable terminations (duplicate cable).
The cable termination module allows (via the standardized module interface) the attachment of other modules,
e.g. that of a voltage transformer and/or a second cable termination module (duplicate cable bay).

Pos : 4.17.3 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1

2-151
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description
Pos : 4.17.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.18 Kabel ans chl uss-Baustein/2.18.2 Aufbau 010 - 8DN9 6, 8DQ1 @ 5\mod_1340279380091_18.doc x @ 20460 @ 3 @ 1

2.16.2 Construction
The insulator of the cable sealing end [6] is fitted gas-tight in the lower housing opening [2]. It is fixed to the
housing by means of a pressure ring [7].

The conductor connection between the cable and the cable feeder bay consists of the corner ball-type
assembly [10] and the conductor [4], which is screwed to the conductor of the bushing [3]. For the cable test,
the conductor [4] is disconnected from the bushing [3]. After the flexible connector in the corner ball-type
assembly [10] has also been undone, the corner ball-type assembly is removed together with the conductor.

The housing is connected to the switchgear module using the flange of the side opening.

Pos : 4.17.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.18 Kabel ans chl uss-Baustein/2.18.22 Aufbau 060 - 8D Q1 1/3 Bil d1 @ 14\mod_1361534577867_0.docx @ 98792 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.17.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.18 Kabel ans chl uss-Baustein/2.18.22 Aufbau 060 - 8D Q1 1/3 Bil d1u @ 47\m od_1614771161202_18.docx @ 907815 @ @ 1

1 Cover
2 Housing
3 Bushing
4 Conductor
5 Sealing ring
6 Cable sealing end
7 Pressure ring
8 Sealing ring
9 Shield
10 Corner ball-type assembly
11 Sealing ring

Fig. 2-86 Cable connection module

Pos : 4.17.7 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1

2-152
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description
Pos : 4.18.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.19 Transformator ans chl uss-Baustein - 8D Q1, 8DN9/2.19 Tr ans form atoransc hluß- Baustei n - 8DQ1, 8DN 9 @ 5\mod_1340279563407_18.doc x @ 20472 @ 2 @ 1

2.17 Transformer termination module

This section describes

- the use and

- the structure of a transformer termination module.
Basic information:
Dimensions and weights of switchgear modules [ 1.5]
Housing and conductor connections [ 2.19]

Pos : 4.18.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.19 Transformator ans chl uss-Baustein - 8D Q1, 8DN9/2.19.1 Verw endung 010 - 8D Q1, 8DN9 @ 5\m od_1340279793205_18.docx @ 20482 @ 3 @ 1

2.17.1 Range of application

The transformer termination module provides the link between the conductor path of the bay and the bushing
of the transformer. The transformer termination module is linked with the bay via matched extension modules,
angle modules, rotary flanges and expansion joints.
Expansion joints compensate for the following:
- design tolerances of parts of the plant, the building and the transformer,
- one-off movements caused by differences in the settling of the transformer and plant foundations
and
- thermal expansion of component enclosures.
Pos : 4.18.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.19 Transformator ans chl uss-Baustein - 8D Q1, 8DN9/2.19.1 Verw endung 020 - 8D Q1, 8DN9 Bild1 @ 7\m od_1345036744927_0.docx @ 50404 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.18.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.19 Transformator ans chl uss-Baustein - 8D Q1, 8DN9/2.19.1 Verw endung 020 - 8D Q1, 8DN9 Bildu @ 7\m od_1345036888215_18.docx @ 50428 @ @ 1

1 Extension module
2 Expansion joint
3 Transformer termination module
Fig. 2-87 Transformer termination (example)
Pos : 4.18.5 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.18.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.19 Transformator ans chl uss-Baustein - 8D Q1, 8DN9/2.19.2 Aufbau 010 - 8DQ1 1/3 @ 5\mod_1340279916760_18.docx @ 20493 @ 3 @ 1

2.17.2 Construction
The transformer termination module comprises a housing [2] together with an intermediate plate [7] and the
conductor components for connecting the transformer bushing [10] to the transformer bay. The intermediate
plate permits connection of various transformer bushings.
The housing [2] is placed with the intermediate plate [7] over the transformer bushing [10] and screwed to its
flange to give a gas-tight joint. In the angle type shown here, the upper opening of the housing [2] is sealed
by cover [1]. A version with a face-to-face connection is also possible. The housing is connected to the
transformer bay by means of the stub on the side.
The conductor connection between the transformer bushing [10] and the transformer bay consists of the
conductor [11], the corner ball-type assembly [12] and the conductor [4], which is screwed to the conductor of
the bushing [3].

Pos : 4.18.7 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.19 Transformator ans chl uss-Baustein - 8D Q1, 8DN9/2.19.2 Aufbau 040 - 8DQ1 1/3 Bild2 @ 14\m od_1361535038277_0.doc x @ 98840 @ @ 1

2-153
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description

Pos : 4.18.8 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.19 Transformator ans chl uss-Baustein - 8D Q1, 8DN9/2.19.2 Aufbau 040 - 8DQ1 1/3 Bild2u @ 14\m od_1361534776710_18.docx @ 98816 @ @ 1

1 Cover
2 Housing
3 Bushing
4 Conductor
5 Sealing ring
6 Shield
7 Intermediate plate
8 Sealing ring
9 Sealing ring
10 Transformer Bushing
11 Conductor
12 Corner ball-type assembly
13 Sealing ring

Fig. 2-88 Transformer termination module

Pos : 4.19.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.20 Dec kel und Filter hal ter ung en/2.20 D eck el, Filterhalterungen, Bers tsc hei benanbauten @ 3\mod_1335952063123_18.docx @ 15712 @ 2 @ 1

2-154
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description
2.18 Covers, filter mounts, rupture disk assemblies
This section presents:

- the use of covers, filter mounts and rupture disk assemblies

- the structure of covers, filter mounts and rupture disk assemblies.

Basic information:

Electrical and mechanical parameters [ 1.1]

Dimensions and weights of switchgear modules [ 1.5]

Pos : 4.19.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.20 Dec kel und Filter hal ter ung en/2.20.1 Verw endung 010 @ 42\mod_1576760312022_18.doc x @ 829634 @ 3 @ 1

2.18.1 Use
Covers are required for gas- and pressure-tight closing of the following system parts:

- Flanges
- Nozzles for monitoring, testing and diagnostic equipment and
- Installation openings

Rupture discs are designed to burst at a defined pressure/stress. In the event of a fault during system
operation, such as due to an electric arc, the gas pressure rises in the gas compartment. The rupture disc
bursts before the pressure reaches an unacceptably high level for the container.

The blowout openings for the rupture disc assemblies can be provided with diverters if necessary. Diverters
direct the gas flow in a direction that is not hazardous for personnel or the system when a rupture disc
bursts. The outflow direction is shown in the supplied installation drawings.
Filter holders support the filter material in the gas chamber.

Caution!
The blowout openings of the rupture disc assemblies shall not be sealed or
covered during operation.
It is not permissible to modify the discharge direction of the blowout
openings and/or diverters.

Pos : 4.19.3 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1

2-155
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description
Pos : 4.19.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.20 Dec kel und Filter hal ter ung en/2.20.2 Aufbau von D eck el und Filter halterungen 010 - 8DN 9 6, 8D Q1 @ 47\m od_1614771356578_18.docx @ 907863 @ 3 @ 1

2.18.2 Design of covers and filter mounts

There are several kinds of cover:

- cover without attachments,

- cover with filter which is attached on the inside,
- cover with built-in rupture disk and diverter attached to the outside, and
- cover with attached filter holder, with rupture disk and diverter.

Filter holders serve to prevent the filter material from moving around in the switchgear. They can be fitted in
various ways:

- on the inside of covers

- in the housings, behind the access opening.

Every gas compartment includes a cover with fitted rupture disk.

Pos : 4.19.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.20 Dec kel und Filter hal ter ung en/2.20.2 Aufbau von D eck el und Filter halterungen 020 - 8DN 9 6, 8D Q1 Bild1 @ 47\mod_1614771293909_0.docx @ 907839 @ @ 1

a) b) c) d)

Pos : 4.19.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.20 Dec kel und Filter hal ter ung en/2.20.2 Aufbau von D eck el und Filter halterungen 020 - 8DN 9 6, 8D Q1 Bildu @ 13\mod_1351169515407_18.docx @ 74366 @ @ 1

Fig. 2-89 Cover designs (examples)

a) Without attachments
b) Cover with filter holder
c) Cover with rupture disk, diverter and filter holder
d) Cover with rupture disk and filter holder

Pos : 4.20.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.21 Gehäuse- und Leiterver bindungen/2.21 Gehäus e- und Lei terv erbi ndungen @ 3\m od_1335957137353_18.docx @ 15789 @ 2 @ 1

2-156
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description
2.19 Housing and conductor connections
This section contains a description of
- housing and housing connections
- conductor connections installed in the switchgear.
Basic information:
Preparing and assembling conductor and flange connections [ 7.7]
Corrosion protection, greases and oils [ 7.20]
Bolted connections, tightening torques, SL retaining clips [ 7.23]
Pos : 4.20.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.21 Gehäuse- und Leiterver bindungen/2.21.1 Gehäus e- und Gehäus ev erbi ndung en @ 3\m od_1335957414713_18.docx @ 15800 @ 3 @ 1

2.19.1 Housing and housing connections

Pos : 4.20.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.21 Gehäuse- und Leiterver bindungen/2.21.1.1 Hers tell ung und Pr üfung der Gehäuse - 8D Q1 @ 13\m od_1353595720968_18.docx @ 81382 @ 4 @ 1

2.19.1.1 Housing manufacture and testing

The chambers are manufactured and tested according to the latest state of the art.
Depending on their shape and size, the housings are made of cast aluminium or of welded aluminium or steel
construction.
Each housing is subjected to a pressure test using air.
The leak test is conducted at fill pressure with helium.
After the tests, the housings are degreased and painted on the inside and outside.
Housings made of steel for outdoor use receive in addition, an external metallic protective coat, e.g. of sprayed
zinc or zinc powder paint, and then the final coat of paint.
Pos : 4.20.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.21 Gehäuse- und Leiterver bindungen/2.21.1.2 Flansc he 010 @ 3\mod_1335957924276_18.docx @ 15833 @ 4 @ 1

2.19.1.2 Flanges
Flanges are located at connecting points with other housing components, on assembly openings which are
fitted with covers and on connections for monitoring, testing and diagnosis fixtures.
One flange has a groove in which an O-ring is placed; the connecting flange has a sealing surface with only a
minor scallop height.
Approved pressure vessel bolts are used to secure the flanges.
Pos : 4.20.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.21 Gehäuse- und Leiterver bindungen/2.21.1.2 Flansc he 020 - Bild1 @ 6\mod_1344158004172_0.docx @ 43158 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.20.7 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.21 Gehäuse- und Leiterver bindungen/2.21.1.2 Flansc he 020 - Bildu @ 3\mod_1335958268467_18.docx @ 15844 @ @ 1

1 Sealing surface
2 Casing
3 Flange without groove, with sealing surface
4 Bolt hole
5 Sealing ring
6 Flange with groove
Fig. 2-90 Parts of a gastight and pressure-resistant joint prior to being bolted together
2-157
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description
Pos : 4.20.9 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/2 Bes chr eibung/M odul e/2.21 Gehäuse- und Leiterver bindungen/2.21.1.3 Durc hführungen 010 @ 3\mod_1335958596214_18.docx @ 15855 @ 4 @ 1

2.19.1.3 Bushings
Gastight and gas-permeable bushings are used in the switchgear.
Gastight bushings separate adjacent gas compartments.
Gas-permeable bushings join two adjacent modules by means of apertures arranged in a circle.
The bushing consists of a flange ring [1], cast-resin body [2] and electrode [3]. The cast-resin body is in the
aluminium flange ring, the electrode encapsulated in the cast-resin body.
Pos : 4.20.10 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.21 Gehäus e- und Leiterv erbi ndungen/2.21.1.3 D urc hführ ung en 020 - 8DQ1 1/3 Bil d2 @ 14\m od_1361535612140_0.docx @ 98888 @ @ 1

3
a) b)
Pos : 4.20.11 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.21 Gehäus e- und Leiterv erbi ndungen/2.21.1.3 D urc hführ ung en 020 - 8DQ1 1/3 Bil d2u @ 14\mod_1361535465043_18.doc x @ 98864 @ @ 1

1 Flange ring
2 cast resin body
3 Electrode

Fig. 2-91 Bushings

a) gas tight
b) gas permeable

Pos : 4.20.12 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.21 Gehäus e- und Leiterv erbi ndungen/2.21.2 Leiterver bindungen 010 @ 3\m od_1335959006613_18.docx @ 15877 @ 3 @ 1

2.19.2 Conductor connections

Rigid and flexible conductor connections are used in the switchgear. Rigid conductor connections fix the inner
structures in the cast resin bushings. Flexible conductor connections compensate for manufacturing and
installation tolerances and absorb the thermal expansion of the conductors.
Pos : 4.20.13 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi ervorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.20.14 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.21 Gehäus e- und Leiterv erbi ndungen/2.21.2.1 Starre Leiterver bindungen 010 - 8DN 9, 8D Q1 @ 13\mod_1351170290346_18.docx @ 74479 @ 4 @ 1

2.19.2.1 Solid conductor connections

Solid conductor connections are produced by screwing the conductor, over an intermediate piece, directly to
the electrode of the bushing.
The joints may have to be shielded to achieve suitable electrical field distribution.

2-158
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description

Pos : 4.20.16 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.21 Gehäus e- und Leiterv erbi ndungen/2.21.2.1 Starre Leiterver bindungen 030 - 8D Q1 1/3 Bildu @ 7\m od_1345041009825_18.docx @ 50801 @ @ 1

1 Conductor connection
2 Cast resin body
3 Intermediate piece
4 Conductor
5 Shielding sleeve
6 Shielding sleeve

Fig. 2-92 Solid conductor connection

Pos : 4.20.17 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi ervorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.20.18 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.21 Gehäus e- und Leiterv erbi ndungen/2.21.2.2 Flexi ble Leiterver bindungen 010 - 8D Q1 1/3 @ 5\m od_1340282085950_18.docx @ 20557 @ 4 @ 1

2.19.2.2 Flexible conductor connections

Sliding contacts
Over long links (e.g. with extension modules), sliding contacts are used to compensate the length tolerances
and the temperature-related changes in length.
At the conductor joint, the plate ring [3] and the contact piece [12] are fixed by means of screws [13].
The guide is screwed centrally by means of screw to the plate ring [3]. The connection plate [7] fixed to the
conductor [6] with screws is pushed onto the guide [5], centred by the contours of the guide and slides onto
the sliding ring [4].
The symmetrical radially arranged contact fingers [10] are pushed by compression springs [9] onto the
connection with the required contact pressure.
These mechanical contact forces are increased in the event of a short-circuit by the current forces which occur.

Pos : 4.20.19 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.21 Gehäus e- und Leiterv erbi ndungen/2.21.2.2 Flexi ble Leiterver bindungen 020 - 8D Q1 1/3 Bild4 @ 14\mod_1361536960915_0.docx @ 98936 @ @ 1

2-159
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description

Pos : 4.20.20 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.21 Gehäus e- und Leiterv erbi ndungen/2.21.2.2 Flexi ble Leiterver bindungen 020 - 8D Q1 1/3 Bild4u @ 14\m od_1361536648757_18.docx @ 98912 @ @ 1

1 Bushing
2 Conductor connection
3 Plate ring
4 Slide ring
5 Guide
6 Conductor
7 Connection
8 Screw
10 Contact finger
11 Shielding sleeve
12 Contact piece
13 Screw

Fig. 2-93 Sliding contact

Pos : 4.20.22 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.21 Gehäus e- und Leiterv erbi ndungen/2.21.2.2 Flexi ble Leiterver bindungen 025 - 8D Q1 1/3 @ 5\m od_1340282171336_18.docx @ 20568 @ @ 1

A special form of sliding contact is used in the disconnector.

The contact piece [4] is fixed by bolts [1] to the conducting path housing [3]. The connection plate [10] is bolted
to the conductor [12]. The stub of the connection plate is introduced into the contact piece and slides in the
guide ring [7]. The symmetrical, radially arranged contact fingers [6] are pushed by compression springs [2]
with the required contact pressure onto the stub of the connection plate. The ring [5] prevents the contact
fingers from bending inwards when the conductor joint is open. The mechanical contact forces are increased
in the event of a short-circuit by the current forces which occur.

Pos : 4.20.23 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.21 Gehäus e- und Leiterv erbi ndungen/2.21.2.2 Flexi ble Leiterver bindungen 030 - 8D Q1 1/3 Bild5 @ 14\mod_1361538407596_0.docx @ 98984 @ @ 1
Max scm

2-160
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Description

Pos : 4.20.24 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.21 Gehäus e- und Leiterv erbi ndungen/2.21.2.2 Flexi ble Leiterver bindungen 030 - 8D Q1 1/3 Bild5u @ 14\m od_1361537912515_18.docx @ 98960 @ @ 1

1 Screw
2 Compression spring
3 Conducting path housing
4 Contact piece
5 Ring
6 Contact finger
7 Guide ring
8 Screw
9 Shielding sleeve
10 Connection plate
11 Conductor connection
12 Bushing

Fig. 2-94 Sliding contact for disconnector conductor joint

Pos : 4.20.26 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.21 Gehäus e- und Leiterv erbi ndungen/2.21.2.3 Str omv erbindung en 010 - 8D Q1 1/3 @ 5\mod_1340282266548_18.docx @ 20579 @ 4 @ 1

2.19.2.3 Flexible connectors

Flexible connectors are used to join conductors inside modules where axial changes in length of the conductor
must be compensated for.
The flexible connector can be fitted in various modules, e.g. in the supporting conductor of a busbar. The basic
design is, however, always the same.
A connection piece [4] is attached with screws [6] to the conductor [5]. The conductor slides in the sliding ring
[3] and is connected via the flexible connectors [1] with the conductor shielding [2]. The conductor shielding
itself is a current-carrying component of the second conductor to be connected.
If the flexible connection is to be undone, the screws [7] can be removed through the apertures in the conductor
shielding or, depending on the design and installation, through the otherwise closed access opening of the
cover.

2-161
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Description
Pos : 4.20.27 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.21 Gehäus e- und Leiterv erbi ndungen/2.21.2.3 Str omv erbindung en 020 - 8D Q1 1/3 Bil d6 @ 14\m od_1361538749052_0.docx @ 99008 @ @ 1

Pos : 4.20.28 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.21 Gehäus e- und Leiterv erbi ndungen/2.21.2.3 Str omv erbindung en 020 - 8D Q1 1/3 Bil d6u @ 14\mod_1361540887073_18.doc x @ 99032 @ @ 1

1 Flexible connector
2 Conductor shielding
3 Sliding ring
4 Conductor
5 Connection piece
6 Screw
7 Screw
8 Screw
9 Nut

Fig. 2-95 Flexible connection (example)

Pos : 4.20.29 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/2 Besc hrei bung/M odule/2.21 Gehäus e- und Leiterv erbi ndungen/2.21.2.3 Str omv erbindung en 030 - 8D Q1 1/3 @ 14\m od_1361541079168_18.docx @ 99056 @ @ 1

To refit a conductor with flexible connection, the connection piece [5] fixed to the conductor [4] is introduced
with the flexible connectors [1] fixed by screws [8] [9] through the sliding ring into the conductor shielding. Care
must be taken that the flexible connectors when introduced are as near as possible to their final position. Then
the flexible connectors are fixed with screws [7] through the apertures in the conductor shielding or through
the access opening.

Pos : 5.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /3 Transport und Lager ung/M odul e/3 Trans por t und Lag erung @ 0\m od_1330677580559_18.docx @ 2691 @ 1 @ 1

2-162
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Shipment and storage
3 Shipment and storage

3-163
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Shipment and storage

 Notice
The representations in the following illustrations can differ, in total or in
part, from the delivered version. This applies particularly to the current track
guiding, the location and execution of the bushings and the ancillary
equipment.

Pos : 5.2 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1

3-164
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Shipment and storage
Pos : 5.3 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /3 Transport und Lager ung/M odul e/3.1 Verpack ung @ 0\m od_1330679722682_18.docx @ 2713 @ 2 @ 1

3.1 Packaging
This section describes

- use of the packaging

- the structure and production of the packaging.

Basic information:

Markings [ 3.2]
Receiving and handling of shipments [ 3.3]
Working with sealed packaging [ 3.4]

Pos : 5.4 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /3 Transport und Lager ung/M odul e/3.1.1 Verwendung @ 46\m od_1606989079657_18.docx @ 900076 @ 3 @ 1

3.1.1 Use and packaging type

The purpose of packaging is to protect the packaged items both on the transport route as well as on loading
and unloading as well as during storage periods such that it experiences no (detrimental) changes. The
packaging must protect the packaged items against permissible transport loads such as vibrations, impacts
and moisture (seawater, rain, snow, condensate). If necessary, the packaging must also prevent the packaged
items from changing their specified orientation within the packaging.
The packaged items must be prepared for shipping before actual packaging to ensure that they can be
transported safely, in compliance with specifications and cost-effectively.
Various packaging types are specified, accounting for effects on the packaged items (climatic loads, total
transport and storage time, transport mode). The type of packaging is specified in the delivery note and below.
Packaging drawings provide information on the type and configuration of the transport devices.

Depending on the import regulations, the wooden crates are made from heat-treated wood (in accordance with
ISPM 15).

Order documentation

3-165
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Shipment and storage
Basic packaging
Suitable for shipment by truck within Europe including ferries.

- Module assemblies ready for shipping on transport frame or wooden skids.

- Weather protection exclusively by tarpaulin of truck.

 Notice
The equipment does not have its own weather protection, nor protection
against mechanical stresses, especially jolts.
Not suitable for outdoor storage!

Air-tight packaging A 12
Suitable for all types of shipment and all climatic conditions, for a total shipping and storage period of up to
12 months.

Suitable for outdoor storage.

Ambient temperature +55°C (+131°F) to -40°C (-40°F).
Stacking load 1,000 kg/m2 / 23,730 lbs/ft2 cover area

- Module group with basic packaging (wooden box with weatherproof lining).
- Packaged goods enclosed airtight in plastic film with the addition of a desiccant.

 Notice
Suitable for outdoor storage!

Air-tight packaging A 24
Suitable for all types of shipment and all climatic conditions, for a total shipping and storage period of up to 24
months.

Suitable for outdoor storage.

Ambient temperature +55°C (+131°F) to -50°C (-58°F).
Stacking load 1,000 kg/m2 / 23,730 lbs/ft2 cover area

- Module group with basic packaging (wooden box with weatherproof lining).
- Packaged goods enclosed airtight in composite aluminum/plastic film with the addition of a desiccant.

 Notice
Suitable for outdoor storage!

Pos : 5.5 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1

3-166
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Shipment and storage
Pos : 5.6 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /3 Transport und Lager ung/M odul e/3.1.2 Aufbau und Hers tell ung 010 @ 27\mod_1410162819169_18.docx @ 253730 @ 3 @ 1

3.1.2 Design and manufacture

The basic packing guarantees that modules and assemblies remain secure during transport and will not be
disturbed by surfaces of the transport vehicle or storage area. To this extent, wood and/or steel racks are used.
The accessory items are delivered on wooden pallets, in open crates or sturdy corrugated-cardboard boxes.
The sealed packaging surrounds the contents on all sides with a barrier layer. The quantity of drying agent
contained in this barrier layer limits the relative humidity to a level of < 60%, a level which can cause no damage
to the contents of the packaging for the duration of their storage life. The amount of desiccant depends on the
crate surface area, the type of barrier (vapour permeability), the climatic conditions and active life in months.
The factory-tested assemblies or bays are mounted on the transport elements. The transport elements ensures
secure standing during transport and storage.
Air-blister foil or PE foam plastic widths is used to cushion all sharp corners and edges of the goods, making
sure that they do not damage the foil applied in the next step.
Then the packaged goods is wrapped in foil and welded after inserting the desiccant. The air inside the barrier
has been evacuated; this is indicated by the clinging effect of the foil.
The crates for attachments consist of a solid wooden floor and also of boarding (with timbering) made likewise
of solid wood, plywood or other wood composite.

Pos : 5.7 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /3 Transport und Lager ung/M odul e/3.1.2 Aufbau und Hers tell ung 020 - Bild @ 6\m od_1344157178138_0.docx @ 42846 @ @ 1

Pos : 5.8 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /3 Transport und Lager ung/M odul e/3.1.2 Aufbau und Hers tell ung 020 - Bildu @ 3\m od_1335961544650_18.docx @ 15921 @ @ 1

1 PE foil
2 Air evacuator (partially)
3 Manual welder

Fig. 3-1 Welding the PE sheeting

Pos : 5.9 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /3 Transport und Lager ung/M odul e/3.1.2 Aufbau und Hers tell ung 030 @ 6\m od_1344433172955_18.docx @ 45847 @ @ 1

The side walls and a lid bracer made of squared timbers are attached to the crate floor of the sealed-packed
module and the crate closed off with its lid.
Pos : 5.10 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

3-167
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Shipment and storage
Pos : 5.11 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

3-168
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Shipment and storage
Pos : 5.12 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.2 M arkier ungen @ 45\m od_1606831229535_18.docx @ 899332 @ 2 @ 1

3.2 Markings
This section

- presents and explains the symbols used for marking packages

- describes the marking of the shipping assemblies.

Basic information:

Packaging [ 3.1]
Receiving and handling of shipments [ 3.3]

Pos : 5.13 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

3-169
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Shipment and storage
Pos : 5.14 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.2.1 Hi nw eiszeic hen auf Packs tüc ken 01 @ 45\m od_1606831417572_18.docx @ 899357 @ 3 @ 1

3.2.1 Signs on packages

To ensure safe handling of the packaged goods, the packages have signs attached. The symbols for handling
information on packages are specified on a standardized international basis in the ISO 780 standard.

 Notice
Additional text and/or visual information is possible relating to the
informational signs shown here.

The most important symbols are as follows:

Pos : 5.15 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.2.1 Hi nw eiszeic hen auf Packs tüc ken 02 - Bil d1 @ 45\m od_1606832766012_18.docx @ 899406 @ @ 1

Protect from heat (exposure to

sunlight).
Top
Deposit the goods in as cool a
The packages must always
place as possible. Under all
be transported, handled and
circumstances, protect the
stored in this way.
goods from additional heat
sources.

Do not damage the

Fragile packaged goods.
waterproofing layer.
Handle the goods carefully
Under the packaging, there is a
and do not drop them or tie
steam-proof layer in which
them up.
desiccant is included.

Attach here.
Center of gravity.
Indicates where the load is to be
Indicates the position of the
fastened and not how
center of gravity.
(attachment method).

Protect from moisture. Lifting device.

Protect the goods from Use a suitable lifting device to lift
excessive humidity. the goods being transported.

Do not stack.
Permissible stacking load.
Stacking of shipping packaging is
The permissible stacking
not allowed and no load must be
load "... kg max." is indicated
placed on the shipping
next to this symbol.
packaging.

Do not position the fork lift

truck here.
This is attached on the sides
where you are not allowed to
use the fork lift truck for
lifting.

3-170
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Shipment and storage
Pos : 5.16 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.2.1 Hi nw eiszeic hen auf Packs tüc ken 03 - Bil d2 @ 45\m od_1606833423957_0.docx @ 899431 @ @ 1

1
2

Pos : 5.17 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.2.1 Hi nw eiszeic hen auf Packs tüc ken 03 - Bil du @ 45\m od_1606833771702_18.docx @ 899455 @ @ 1

1 Sign
2 Center of gravity
3 Customer information, weight, dimensions
4 Attachment points

Fig. 3-2 Package with signs and labeling (example)

Pos : 5.18 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

3-171
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Shipment and storage
Pos : 5.19 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.2.2 Kennz eichnung der Versandbaugruppen 01 @ 0\mod_1330957787464_18.doc x @ 2810 @ 3 @ 1

3.2.2 Marking of shipping assemblies

The shipping assemblies must be provided with printed labels to enable clear assignment to the installation
location in the overall switchgear setup. They are located on the protective covers on the module's interface
points.

Pos : 5.20 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.2.2 Kennz eichnung der Versandbaugruppen 02 - Bild3 @ 43\m od_1590652542579_0.doc x @ 859734 @ @ 1

8 1
7
6 2
5

Pos : 5.21 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.2.2 Kennz eichnung der Versandbaugruppen 02 - Bildu @ 43\m od_1590652745879_18.docx @ 859757 @ @ 1

1 Order number
2 Bay designation
3 Delivery item
4 Weight
5 Accessory contents
6 Serial number
7 Project name / password
8 Switchgear type

Fig. 3-3 Label on shipping assembly (example)

Pos : 5.22 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

3-172
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Shipment and storage
Pos : 5.23 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.3 Em pfang und Behandl ung v on Sendungen @ 0\mod_1330958368781_18.doc x @ 2828 @ 2 @ 1

3.3 Receiving and handling of shipments

This section describes

- basic requirements for transportation

- receiving and external checking of the shipment
- unpacking of the shipment and checking for damage in transit
- storage of the shipment
- procedure in the event of damage or loss.

Basic information:

Safety notices [ 0.2]

Dimensions and weights of switchgear modules [ 1.5]
Packaging [ 3.1]
Markings [ 3.2]
Working with sealed packaging [ 3.4]

Pos : 5.24 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.3.1 Transport @ 45\mod_1606894718645_18.docx @ 899560 @ 3 @ 1

3.3.1 Transport

Warning!
Hazard due to transported material falling down as a result of improper
transport!
Tipping or falling transported material can cause death, severe injuries or
serious property damage.
Do not walk under suspended loads.

Before lifting the switchgear or individual components, you must read the safety instructions and
comply with them when carrying out all work:

• Suitable lifting equipment and qualified personnel must be available

(see ISO 12480-1, § 3.9).
• Before carrying out lifting, a trained person must be tasked with checking the dimensions, anchor
points and their lifting capacity, the overall weight, and the center of gravity of the shipping unit as well
as the suitability of the lifting equipment. The transported material must not be damaged.
• Pay attention to any information in the shipping papers.
• When carrying out any transportation work and during storage, pay attention to the handling markings
on the package (see Chapter 3.2.1 Signs on packages and ISO 780).
• Only ever attach material to be transported to the appropriate lifting elements (e.g. the red lifting lugs,
lifting eye bolts) and/or the marked locations (see Chapter 3.3.1.3 Crane work).
• Do not walk under suspended loads.
• Do not exceed the load-carrying capacity of transport and lifting equipment.
• Modules or bays in their basic packaging and folding boxes are not stackable.

3-173
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Shipment and storage
• Observe loading capacity/stacking load of box(es).
• Carry out all work in a prudent and careful manner.
• The weight of the shipping assembly is on the shipping label (see Chapter 3.2.2 Marking of shipping
assemblies).
• The center of gravity is shown on the main drawing and the shipping assembly. In the case of shipping
assemblies, it is marked on the packaging.
• The dimensions are shown on the shipping unit or on the packing list.

 Notice
Transportation logistics should be organized in such a way that only a few
movements of the goods are necessary. The packaging or goods can be
damaged each time they are moved.

• Only remove shipping plates (basic packaging), or transportation frames (sealed packaging), after
arrival at the intended installation location and after having adequately secured the load against tipping
over.

 Notice
The center of gravity of the goods being transported and the positions of
the lifting points are marked on the packaging. Do not attach any goods
whose packaging is damaged.

Fig. 3-4 Center of gravity marking on shipping unit (example)

Pos : 5.25 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

3-174
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Shipment and storage
Pos : 5.26 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.3.1.1 Tr ansport zur Baus tell e @ 45\m od_1606895411395_18.docx @ 899585 @ 4 @ 1

3.3.1.1 Transport to project site

Warning!
Hazard due to transported material falling down or tipping as a result of
improper transport!
Improper transport can lead to the goods being transported moving in an
uncontrolled manner. This can result in death, severe personal injury and/or
serious damage to property.
• Only ever task a qualified transport company with transportation to
the site.
• Under certain circumstances, this company may need experience in
heavy goods transportation.

Transportation of the packaged goods from the manufacturing plant to the project site must only ever be carried
out by experienced transport companies (shipping companies, shipping agents, railroad companies). Siemens
assembly personnel can only act in an advisory and monitoring role. The transport company is responsible for
transportation.
Only ever use suitable means of transportation and ensure that the cargo is secured adequately.
If damage occurs in transit to the goods being transported or the packaging, you must initiate measures
immediately to minimize damage and to find the causes, see Chapter 3.3.2.2.
Before onward transportation, repair the packaging or the transport frame. Never transport damaged goods or
goods in damaged packaging.

In addition to vibration and shock loads, impact loads due to falling, tipping, overturning and jarring must be
anticipated during transport. To prevent potential damage, the values listed below must not be exceeded (see
ISO 4180):

Vertical impact
Transport type: Road/air/water
Permissible loading: Amplitude 200 to 300 m/s² (656 to 984 ft/s2) = 20 g to 30 g
determined on individual modules without packing crates.

Free fall
Road transport: Max. drop height 100 mm (3.9 in)
Air transport: Max. drop height 100 mm (3.9 in)
Water transport: Max. drop height 300 mm (11.8 in)

Vibrations (natural frequency)

Road transport: < 9 Hz, max. 7.5 mm (0.3 in.) Amplitude
Air + water: > 200 Hz, max. 40 m/s² (131 ft/s²) = 4 g

Horizontal impact velocity

Road transport: < 2.7 m/s² (< 8.9 ft/s²)

The packaging has information for safe transportation and correct storage.
Regardless of container weight, damage must be anticipated if a container package falls from a specific height
(e.g. due to failure of load attachment rigging) or falls without the fall being broken, especially if the specified
drop heights have been exceeded.
Pos : 5.27 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

3-175
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Shipment and storage
Pos : 5.28 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.3.1.2 Tr ansport auf der Baustelle @ 45\mod_1606896146812_18.docx @ 899610 @ 4 @ 1

3.3.1.2 Transport on the project site

Warning!
Hazard due to transported material falling down or tipping as a result of
improper transport!
Improper transport can lead to the goods being transported moving in an
uncontrolled manner. This can result in death, severe personal injury and/or
serious damage to property.
• Only ever deploy qualified personnel for transportation and cargo-
handling work.
• The personnel must have taken note of the safety instructions at the
start of this chapter.

Transport on the project site is understood to mean movement of the packaged or unpackaged items before
or during assembly. The site manager (local project manager) is responsible for transportation. Siemens
personnel on-site can only act in an advisory and/or monitoring capacity (see Chapter 3.3.1 Transport).

You may use the resources below for transportation:

- Trucks or other vehicles

- Forklift truck
- Mobile and/or fixed cranes
- Roller transport system, especially for the complete bays of a switchgear system
- Hydraulic jacks
- Winches (rope winches, rack and pinion jacks)
- Rollers
- Crowbars with or without rollers
- Various ropes

 Notice
You must observe the working load limit for all resources!
The resources for all the activities to be carried out must be suitable and in
perfect technical condition.

Warning!
Risk of load tipping when loading and unloading heavy items, especially
when moving them using winches, jacks, crowbars etc. – DANGER OF
DEATH!

3-176
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Shipment and storage
• Parts that are top heavy or unbalanced must be supported and secured with ropes during
transportation.
• Support transport truck with jacks or presses during loading and unloading to prevent the loading
surface from moving or tipping (vehicle suspension). Brakes absolutely must be applied.
• Heavy items must be secured to prevent any movement or shifting during transportation.
• Use wire ropes with pads (e.g. wooden ones) to prevent damage due to rubbing or constriction in the
packaging.
• Use the marked attachment points (see Chapter 3.3.1.3 Crane work).

 Notice
Always attach the load at all of the attachment points.
Observe center of mass!

 Information about transporting the voltage transformer

Transport the voltage transformer vertically upright.
A protective cover with a transport plate is bolted to the bushing and must
not be removed during transportation or for the duration of storage.

 Information about transporting the RC voltage divider

RC voltage dividers must be transported vertically upright with the main
insulators facing downward.
A protective cover with a transport plate is bolted to the main insulators and
must not be removed during transportation or for the duration of storage.
The secondary cables are included in the packaging; each cable is marked
with the serial number of the respective RC voltage divider.

Pos : 5.29 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

3-177
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Shipment and storage
Pos : 5.30 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.3.1.3 Kranarbeiten @ 45\mod_1606834910332_18.docx @ 899479 @ 4 @ 1

3.3.1.3 Crane work

Moving means of transportation: Bridge crane

Warning!
Accident hazard due to falling or colliding loads. Potential injuries due to
crushing of your body between the crane, the crane load and other objects.

• Post and observe the crane operating instructions.

• Observe the load-carrying capacity of the crane.
• Only ever use tested and approved load attachment rigging.
• Only ever lift loads in their center of gravity.
• Have the crane inspected at regular intervals by a qualified person; keep an inspection log.
• The crane must only ever be operated by a trained and reliable person who has received proper
instruction, who has been tasked with operation of the crane and who is physically and mentally fit (at
least 18 years old).
• Select a safe location to operate the crane from; do not position yourself in a tight space.
• Do not lift the load at an angle; use hold ropes when required.
• Avoid swinging loads.
• Do not walk under suspended loads.
• If the view of the crane operator is obstructed, only ever continue using the crane with the assistance
of a spotter.

Uncontrolled moving parts

Warning!
Accident hazard due to rolling, sliding, tipping or falling parts.

• Secure parts against rolling, slipping and tipping.

• Keep tools, workpieces and accessory materials safe in suitable containers.
• Provide protection against falling parts in the form of catching/retaining equipment.
• Wear personal protective equipment (e.g. protective footwear, goggles, a helmet).
Pos : 5.31 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

3-178
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Shipment and storage
Pos : 5.32 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.3.1.4 Prinzi pdarstellungen z um Anheben v on Versandbaugruppen @ 45\mod_1606835027317_18.docx @ 899504 @ 4 @ 1

3.3.1.4 Schematic diagrams for lifting shipping assemblies

8DN8 5-bay

8DN8 6-bay 8DN9 2-bay

3-179
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Shipment and storage

Compensator module

8DQ1 6-bay Extension module

Outdoor bushing Distribution module Surge arrester Voltage transformer

Disconnector and Voltage transformer Expansion Compensator module

earthing switch module compensator

Pos : 5.33 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

3-180
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Shipment and storage
Pos : 5.34 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.3.2 Em pfang der Sendung @ 1\mod_1332483916302_18.docx @ 10790 @ 3 @ 1

3.3.2 Receipt of goods

Before being officially received (signing of receipt), all goods delivered must be checked by the recipient for

• Completeness with regard to the dispatch note

• External damage of all kinds

Pos : 5.35 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.3.2.1 Vollständigkeit der Li eferung k ontrollier en @ 44\m od_1598251327597_18.docx @ 884896 @ 4 @ 1

3.3.2.1 Make sure the delivery is complete

Check completeness of the delivery using the delivery note.
The delivery note provides the following information, among other things:

- delivery note number,

- package contents
- customer order item,
- manufacturer order item,
- case number,
- weight (gross/net),
- dimensions,
- type of packaging.

Pos : 5.36 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

3-181
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Shipment and storage
Pos : 5.37 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.3.2.2 Sendung auf äuß ere Besc hädigungen k ontrollier en @ 0\mod_1330959207104_18.docx @ 2867 @ 4 @ 1

3.3.2.2 Checking the shipment for external damage

Perform the checks after unloading when each package is accessible from all sides. Perform the check at the
location where the shipment is handed over by the transport company to the recipient designated in the
shipping papers (e.g. at the project site, in the harbor or at the railway station).
If visible external damage is detected on receipt of the shipment, the following must be observed:

• Immediately enter the detected damage in transit in the shipping papers and have the deliverer sign.
• Immediately notify the manufacturing plant in the event of serious damage, total loss or high costs
for damage.
• Do not further alter the damage condition after detection, and also retain the packaging material until
a decision has been made by the transport company or the transport insurer regarding inspection.
• Record the damage on the spot with the affected transport company (shipping agent, railroad, post).
This is essential for any compensation claim!
• Immediately inform the insurer responsible for the transport damage and consult an independent
expert if necessary.
• If possible, photograph damage to packaging and packaged goods. This also applies for traces of
corrosion on the packaged goods due to the ingress of moisture (rain, snow, seawater, condensed
water).
• Open the damaged crate(s) far enough to allow you to determine the entire scope of the damage.
• Name the damaged parts (based on images showing the parts in the operating instructions); this
simplifies identification at the manufacturer!
• Ensure that the manufacturing plant receives the damage record as quickly as possible (a copy
remains at the project site). Please consult the Siemens representative responsible for the project
site or the responsible Siemens agent.

The procedure is as follows in the event of hidden damage, i.e. damage that is not detected until the shipment
is unpacked after it has been received:

• Make sure that the potential perpetrator of the damage is held liable by telephone and in writing as
quickly as possible and prepare (or have prepared) a damage report.
• Observe the applicable deadlines in the respective country; inquire regarding these in good time.

Damage is often detected very late on project sites. Recourse to the transport company (or other originator of
damage) is hardly possible in these cases of so-called "hidden damage".

An insurance case for this type of damage can only be processed with prospects of success if a "subsequent
storage insurance" (extension of transport insurance) or assembly insurance policy is already in place.

Pos : 5.38 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

3-182
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Shipment and storage
Pos : 5.39 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.3.2.3 Kontrolle von Dic htv er pac kungen @ 0\mod_1330959273870_18.doc x @ 2871 @ 4 @ 1

3.3.2.3 Checking sealed packaging

Sealed packaging can be identified from the outside based on the corresponding marking.

Markings [ 3.2]
Working with sealed packaging [ 3.4]
Recognizing sealed packaging [ 3.4.2]

Pos : 5.40 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.3.3 Sendungen auspack en und auf Tr ans portsc häden kontr ollieren @ 0\m od_1330959335043_18.docx @ 2875 @ 3 @ 1

3.3.3 Unpacking shipments and inspecting them for damage in transit

Do not yet remove transport covers used for closing off openings for the duration of transport and storage or
parts that are attached for mechanical protection to porcelain parts such as outdoor bushings, insulators etc.!

1. If possible, transport the packages in their packaging all the way to the location where assembly is to
take place.
In exceptional cases, the packages can also be unpacked in a separate room or, if weather permits,
they can also be unpacked outdoors and brought to the assembly location in an externally clean
condition.

2. When unpacking, check the condition of the packaged goods; check includes items for completeness
based on the delivery notes and packing lists.
Do not unpack associated miscellaneous hardware packaged together in marked packets!

3. Store shipments carefully in accordance with the specifications in the sections below. Store spare
parts separately.
Preserve small parts if the climatic requirements for the storage room cannot be met and/or if longer
storage times can be anticipated.

 Notice
Do not remove identification or other markings on spare parts

Pos : 5.41 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

3-183
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Shipment and storage
Pos : 5.42 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.3.4 Einl ager n v on Sendung en @ 45\m od_1606906669495_18.docx @ 899851 @ 3 @ 1

3.3.4 Storage of shipments

Caution!
Avoid damage to assemblies during storage.
Hazard for operation.

• Observe load-bearing capacity of storage surfaces.

• Avoid stacking heavy items. Do not overload stored items by stacking.
• Position the crates such that you can see the package number.
• If possible, store parts that belong together in accordance with the order in which they are assembled.
• Store machines with roller bearings or assemblies containing roller bearings on a vibration-free floor
(bearings could be damaged).

A differentiation is made between:

• Limited-time storage of shipments in preparation for assembly of the switchgear or, for spare parts
until final storage.
• Storage of spare parts.

 Notice
Assemblies that are covered with tarps/film must not be stored outdoors for
more than 48 hours.

Pos : 5.43 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

3-184
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Shipment and storage
Pos : 5.44 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.3.4.1 Z eitlic h begrenz tes Ei nlager n v on Sendungen @ 46\m od_1606910999465_18.docx @ 899876 @ 4 @ 1

3.3.4.1 Limited-time storage of shipments

Limited-time storage of packaged items in sealed packaging

Packaged items with correctly functioning sealed packaging can be stored outdoors if the requirements below
are complied with.

Caution!
Highly combustible materials – FIRE HAZARD!

• Smoking is prohibited.
• Ensure compliance with fire protection regulations.
• The fire department must have access in the event of a fire.
• Keep fire extinguishers in a weatherproof place.

When selecting and setting up the storage area, the following requirements must be met:

• Protect stored items from moisture (rain, snow, flood, meltwater from snow and ice), contamination,
vermin such as rats, mice, termites etc. and protect against unauthorized access.
• Set down cases on boards and scantlings to protect against ground moisture and for better
ventilation.
• Set up the storage area based on the delivery papers, drawings and information on the shipping
crate:
- Prepare a general plan which shows where which packages are stored.
- Store packages such that they can be removed later in accordance with the assembly sequence.
- Markings must be visible.
• Ensure the load-bearing capacity of the ground.
• Keep access routes clear.
• Check the stored items at regular intervals. In addition, take appropriate measures to protect from
storms, heavy rainfall, heavy snowfall, etc.

 Notice
Suitable measures must be taken in good time if assembly of the plant is
delayed or the storage period extends beyond the intended effective
duration of the sealed packaging.

Appropriate measures:
- Proper regeneration of the desiccant and restoration of the sealed packaging.
- Unpacking the packaged goods and storing them in a suitable storage room.

Refitting sealed packaging [ 3.4.4]

Please contact the Siemens supervisor or request specialist personnel via the responsible Siemens agent.
Limited-time storage of shipments in basic packaging designed only for transport

3-185
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Shipment and storage
Shipments must be stored on enclosed premises or outdoors after enclosure in a folding box.

Limited-time storage of shipments in basic packaging

The following objects must be stored on enclosed premises:

- Unpacked parts,
- Parts that were shipped largely unpackaged (only on wooden skids, in open slatted crates)
- Parts not in seaworthy crates (marked "I", "Z" or "N" on the delivery note).

The storage rooms must be well ventilated, as free from dust as possible and dry. The relative humidity must
be kept below 50%. To prevent condensation forming, heat the storage rooms to approximately 10°C above
the outside temperature if possible. Ensure adequate ventilation if closed storage rooms are heated.
The storage rooms must be large enough to enable stable and clearly organized storage.

 Notice
Switchgear components intended for outdoor implementation are not
sufficiently protected against weathering effects until the switchgear unit
has been fully assembled and additional corrosion protection measures
have been implemented.

 Notice
Do not store shipping units in basic packaging outdoors unless it has been
ensured that they are protected effectively from weathering effects
especially moisture.

Protection outdoors is only provided in the following cases:

- if the requirements are met, which are listed in this section, for selection and setup of the storage
area for storage in seaworthy crates,
- if it is ensured when using tents and tarps that they are reliably secured and that no water can
accumulate (sufficient overhang of covers to protect against rain, snow or similar falling in from the
side),
- if the weather protection is adequately ventilated. In this connection, covers must not lie directly on
the packages. Use frames of slats or boards to maintain a separation of approximately 30 cm.
- The supply voltage for the anti-condensation heater is available and the heater has been
commissioned.

Check electrical equipment [ 7.11]

Pos : 5.45 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

3-186
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Shipment and storage
Pos : 5.46 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.3.4.2 Einl ager n v on Ers atz teil en @ 46\mod_1606913076454_18.docx @ 899901 @ 4 @ 1

3.3.4.2 Storage of spare parts

The storage room must be well ventilated, as free from dust as possible and dry. It should be at a constant
temperature of +15°C to +25°C. The relative humidity must not exceed 50%. The anti-condensation heaters
in the individual plant modules (e.g. in the control cabinet) must be activated at a relative humidity of over 70%.
The storage rooms must be large enough to allow stable and clearly organized storage. Access to the sub-
assemblies and individual parts as well as transport must be ensured at all times without damaging the spare
parts.

Spare parts must be stored on racks, depending on their size and weight. It must be ensured here that shifting
or rolling of adjacent parts must be prevented on removal.
The preparation of a stock list is recommended during setup of the storage rooms. The markings present on
the individual sub-assemblies, plant modules and individual parts from the factory simplify maintenance of the
stock list and enable rapid location of the spare parts.

 Notice
Identification or other markings on spare parts must not be removed.

You must carry out a visual inspection of the stored spare parts, as well as check the storage rooms with
regard to correct storage conditions, on a regular basis, at least every five years.

The distinctive specifications below apply to the different spare parts:

1) Plant modules and assemblies

Caution!
Risk of contamination of plant modules and assemblies during storage.
Hazard for operation!
Do not open assembly. Leave protective cover and transport attachments
on the assemblies.

The plant modules and assemblies must be stored in the as-delivered condition with protective covers and
transport attachments.
We recommend covering the assemblies with polyethylene film to allow air exchange under the cover. The
covering film should end approx. 0.5 m above the floor.

2) Sub-assemblies
The sub-assemblies should be stored on racks if possible. We recommend covering with PE film.

3) Insulating parts
Each individual insulating part is packaged air-tight in plastic film with a filter bag (250 g), that is also used in
the gas compartment of the switchgear. Check that the packaging is air-tight at inspection; in the event of
damage, replace the filter bag and restore the air-tight packaging.
If properly stored, the insulating parts can be kept for an unlimited time.

3-187
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Shipment and storage
4) Mounted and internal parts
Mounted and internal parts must be left in the original packaging (cardboard, bubble wrap).
Spare parts of aluminum and steel must be coated with WD-40® multifunction product for corrosion protection.
Check the coating at inspection and re-apply it if necessary.

5) Standard parts
Standard parts must be left in their packaging. They are protected against corrosion by surface treatment or
by the nature of the material.

6) Seal elements

Caution!
Risk of damage to seal elements during storage.
Hazard for operation!
Store seal elements only horizontally and not in suspended orientation!

- Do not store or place any objects on seal elements, as they can be damaged very easily.
- Seal elements must be left in their original packaging material and stored horizontally.
- The original packaging protects the seal elements from UV radiation. After removing the parts, the
packaging must be reclosed to seal out air and light.

If stored properly, the seal elements can be kept for five years.

7) Filter material
The filter material must be stored in the closed containers. After opening the container, use the filter material
without delay.

Pos : 5.47 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.3.5 Vorgehensweis e bei Schäden und Verl ust @ 46\mod_1606917575372_18.docx @ 899926 @ 3 @ 1

3.3.5 Procedure in the event of damage or loss

The procedure is determined by specific regulations in the contract (Incoterms®).

Order documentation

Pos : 5.48 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

3-188
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Shipment and storage
Pos : 5.49 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.4 Umg ang mit Dichtv erpack ungen @ 46\mod_1606917965431_18.doc x @ 899951 @ 2 @ 1

3.4 Working with sealed packaging

Packaged items that can be damaged by high levels of humidity in transit and/or storage are shipped in sealed
packaging. This packaging is attached and tested carefully at the manufacturing plant before the crate is
closed.

This section describes

- the basic configuration of sealed packaging

- recognition of sealed packaging
- unpacking of sealed packaging
- repairing of sealed packaging

Basic information:

Packaging [ 3.1]
Markings [ 3.2]
Receiving and handling of shipments [ 3.3]

Pos : 5.50 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.4.1 Eigensc haften von Dic htv er pack ungen @ 46\m od_1606918361421_18.docx @ 900001 @ 3 @ 1

3.4.1 Properties of sealed packaging

Sealed packaging surrounds the packaged items on all sides with a sealing barrier. The desiccant inside this
sealing barrier limits the relative humidity to a level that is not harmful to the packaged items. The amount of
desiccant is determined based on the warranted storage life and limits final humidity within the sealing barrier
to < 60%.
Airtight closed metal containers, for example, can be considered to be rigid sealing barriers. Corrosion
protection films are used for flexible seal barriers; these are sealed airtight after placement of the desiccant.

Caution!
Only open sealed packaging for use and inspection!
After carrying out inspection, you must reseal the sealed packaging air-
tight.

Pos : 5.51 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.4.2 Dic htver pac kung erk ennen @ 46\m od_1606987946462_18.docx @ 900046 @ 3 @ 1
Ann

3.4.2 Recognizing sealed packaging

You can recognize sealed packaging by the information signs on the outside of the package and the
corresponding information in the delivery note. It is marked as follows:

Fig. 3-5 Informational signs on sealed packaging

Limited-time storage of shipments [ 3.3.4.1]

Pos : 5.52 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.4.3 Auspack en @ 46\m od_1606991409938_18.docx @ 900101 @ 3 @ 1

3-189
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Shipment and storage
3.4.3 Unpacking

 Notice
Do not open sealed packaging for inspection in transit or after receipt of the
shipment!

Only unpack packaged goods in sealed packaging either if:

- it is needed immediately for installation or

- suitable storage provisions are available.

In all other cases, the packaged goods must remain in the sealed packaging.
You must inform the customs authorities and the transport company about shipments in sealed packaging in
good time and reach appropriate agreements for on-site customs controls.

Pos : 5.53 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.4.4 Dic htver pac kung wiederherstellen @ 0\mod_1330959990739_18.docx @ 2912 @ 3 @ 1

3.4.4 Refitting sealed packaging

Pos : 5.54 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.4.4.1 Dic htver pac kung öffnen @ 46\mod_1606993343552_18.doc x @ 900126 @ 4 @ 1

3.4.4.1 Opening sealed packaging

1. Remove a longitudinal crate wall or lift off the folding box.
2. Cut open the film with a straight cut down low and parallel to the bottom far enough to allow you to
remove all of the desiccant packets.
3. Check packaged goods to the extent possible. If moisture or traces of corrosion etc. are evident, you
must unpack the packaged goods partially or entirely to establish their overall condition.

 Notice
The responsible Siemens representative must be informed if moisture or
traces of corrosion etc. are evident.

Pos : 5.55 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.4.4.2 Tr ock enmi ttel er neuern @ 46\mod_1606994175145_18.doc x @ 900151 @ 4 @ 1

3.4.4.2 Replacing desiccant

If the packaged items are not damaged, you must renew the desiccant before closing the sealed packaging.
You can choose the following measures:

• Remove an identical number and size of desiccant packets from their air-tight packaging and place
them at the original locations, or
• adapt the rest of the amount of desiccant to the remaining storage period.
Pos : 5.56 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

3-190
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Shipment and storage
Pos : 5.57 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.4.4.3 Tr ock enmi ttelmenge an Lagerz eit anpass en @ 46\m od_1607073427379_18.docx @ 900286 @ 4 @ 1

3.4.4.3 Adapting the amount of desiccant to the remaining storage period

You can use the formula below to calculate the necessary amount of desiccant based on the remaining storage
period and the crate surface area:

B=Fxtxk

B = Number of desiccant units

F = Crate surface area in m2
t = Storage period in months
k = Desiccant units per m2 and month
32 units = 1 kg

Values for k:
(depending on the type of packaging film, climatic conditions and storage period)

Plastic film
Climatic conditions Temperature Relative humidity Storage period Desiccant unit
Moderate +23°C 83% < 12 months k=1
Severe +40°C 92% < 12 months k=3
Severe +40°C 82% 12 months k=5

Aluminum/plastic composite film

Climatic conditions Temperature Relative humidity Storage period Desiccant unit
Moderate +23°C 83% < 12 months k = 0.25
Severe +40°C 92% < 12 months k = 0.75
Severe +40°C 82% > 12 ≤ 24 months k = 1.25

Example:
Sealed packaging with plastic film
Severe climatic conditions, storage period 6 months, k = 3

Crate dimensions:
Length: 4m
Width 1.8 m
Height: 2m
How many kg of desiccant are required?

Crate surface area:

F = 2 x (4 x 1.8 + 4 x 2 + 1.8 x 2) = 37.6 m2

Amount of desiccant:
B = 37.6 x 6 x 3 = 676.8 units = 21.15 (22) kg
Pos : 5.58 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

3-191
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Shipment and storage
Pos : 5.59 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/3 Tr ans port und Lagerung/Module/3.4.4.4 F olie wieder vers chli eßen @ 46\mod_1607002258132_18.docx @ 900231 @ 4 @ 1

3.4.4.4 Reclosing the film

1) After placing the desiccant pouches, reseal the film at the cuts immediately using a film sealer. Finally,
leave an open slit of approximately 5 to 7 cm in length at the bottom.

The individual seals should overlap at the ends. Only if no film sealer is available, tape over the cuts
with aluminum adhesive tape (at least 0.1 mm thick and 30 mm wide).

2) Insert the hose from a vacuum cleaner into the remaining slit and extract a portion of the air from the
sealed packaging until the film can be clearly seen to be drawn inward against the package. Then pull
out the hose from the vacuum cleaner and seal the slit in the film leak-tight immediately.
If possible, do not reclose the crate until several hours have passed and if the film is still pressed
inward (check for leak-tightness).

If the film is not leak-tight, check the new seal strips, especially the sealing of the film all around the
bottom of the crate.

3) After successful checking of leak-tightness, restore mechanical protection by attaching the crate side
wall or by placing the folding box over the package.
Pos : 5.60 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

3-192
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Assembly and Commissioning
Pos : 6.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4 Montage und Inbetri ebs etzung/4 Montage und Inbetriebs etz ung @ 3\m od_1336030866902_18.docx @ 15970 @ 1 @ 1

4 Assembly and Commissioning

4-193
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Assembly and Commissioning

 Notice
The representations in the following illustrations can differ, in total or in part,
from the delivered version. This applies particularly to the current track
guiding, the location and execution of the bushings and the ancillary
equipment.

Pos : 6.2 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

4-194
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Assembly and Commissioning
Pos : 6.3.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.1 Vorauss etz ungen/4.1 Vorauss etzungen - Ü bers chrift @ 3\m od_1336031237013_18.docx @ 15981 @ 2 @ 1

4.1 Prerequisites
Pos : 6.3.2 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.1 Vorauss etz ungen/4.1 Vorauss etzungen - Ü bers chrift Text @ 25\mod_1391429825081_18.doc x @ 227623 @ @ 1

This section describes the requirements of installation and commissioning, accounting for the following:

- required documents
- personnel situation
- transport routes, hoisting gear and transport equipment
- tools, devices and expendable materials to be installed
- requirements of the assembly site
- the clean work requirements
- fire and accident prevention
- the recording.

Basic information:

Safety notices [ 0.2]

Preparatory work [4.2]
Assembling the switchgear [ 4.3]
Commissioning of switchgear [4.4]

Pos : 6.3.3 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.1 Vorauss etz ungen/4.1.1 Unterl agen @ 3\mod_1336031438686_18.doc x @ 15992 @ 3 @ 1

4.1.1 Documentations
All documents have been collected in the order documentation.

The following are some of the documents available for assembly:

Pos : 6.3.4 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.1 Vorauss etz ungen/4.1.1.1 Betri ebs anleitung @ 3\m od_1336031689859_18.docx @ 16003 @ 4 @ 1

4.1.1.1 Operating instructions

The operating instructions describe the structure and the working of the switchgear as well as its component
parts and provide important information on assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance and on how
to remedy faults.

Pos : 6.3.5 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1

4-195
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Assembly and Commissioning
Pos : 6.3.6 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.1 Vorauss etz ungen/4.1.1.2 Zeic hnungen @ 3\m od_1336031694672_18.docx @ 16014 @ 4 @ 1

4.1.1.2 Drawings
Assembly drawings
Installation drawings are necessary in order to assemble the individual subassemblies on site. They show:

- the switchgear structure

- the joints of the transport units
- the connecting points between the shipping assemblies.

Gas monitoring drawings

Gas monitoring drawings provide information relating to each gas compartment on

- the weight of the SF6 gas

- the volume of the gas compartment
- the filling pressure
- the switchgear structure
- the triggering values of the gas monitoring system
- the gas compartments
- the used monitoring devices, filling devices and test devices.

Single-line diagram, single-pole

The single-pole single line diagram shows the switchgear with the busbar system, all the active modules and
outgoing feeders. Each module can be clearly identified by means of its device designation. The separation
into bays and the separation into gas compartments can be seen.

Pos : 6.3.7 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.1 Vorauss etz ungen/4.1.1.3 Sc haltbüc her @ 3\m od_1336031706828_18.docx @ 16025 @ 4 @ 1

4.1.1.3 Wiring manuals

The wiring manuals for a feeder or a component contain, for example:

- Single-line diagram of the feeder

- Explanation of the designation system
- Circuit diagram
- Component list
- Connection diagram.

Pos : 6.3.8 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.1 Vorauss etz ungen/4.1.1.4 Weitere Unterl agen @ 3\mod_1336031711484_18.doc x @ 16036 @ 4 @ 1

4.1.1.4 Further documentation

The order documentation includes further documentation, e. g.

- routine test records

- records of tests carried out after assembly.

Pos : 6.3.9 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1

4-196
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Assembly and Commissioning
Pos : 6.3.10 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.1 Vorauss etz ung en/4.1.2 Personell e Vor aussetzungen @ 3\m od_1336031724235_18.docx @ 16047 @ 3 @ 1

4.1.2 Personnel prerequisites

Pos : 6.3.11 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.1 Vorauss etz ung en/4.1.2.1 Verantw ortung @ 3\mod_1336031728406_18.doc x @ 16058 @ 4 @ 1

4.1.2.1 Responsibility
For the assembly and the commissioning, a person in charge must be designated, and - as far as he/she does
not supervise the work directly and several persons are working simultaneously on the site - a deputy head
must also be designated. We recommend using a Siemens supervisor for the duration of the work.
The exact division of the tasks between the person in charge, the deputy head and the Siemens supervisor
must be defined before work begins. This division of tasks should be as follows:

Person in charge
- Instruction of personnel on the safety measures to be taken during assembly and commissioning and
ensuring that personnel observe the safety procedures.
- Organization of work.

Deputy head
- Supervision of work in the absence of the person in charge

Siemens Supervisor
- Instruction of personnel with regard to assembly regulations, guidelines or other documentation.
- Supervising the correct execution of the work in hand, the observance of the assembly regulations,
guidelines and other documentation. In the event of a deviation from the assembly regulations, this person
is authorized to stop work until the required conditions are met.

Pos : 6.3.12 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.1 Vorauss etz ung en/4.1.2.2 M ontage- und Inbetriebsetzungs pers onal @ 3\m od_1336031738719_18.docx @ 16069 @ 4 @ 1

4.1.2.2 Erection and maintenance personnel

Assembly and commissioning work may only be carried out by sufficiently qualified, instructed and authorized
personnel. The degree of responsibility varies depending on the tasks in hand, the anticipated degree of
danger to personnel and objects and the damage which may be caused.
If outside staff or the customer's staff are employed instead of Siemens expert personnel, it is assumed that
this personnel satisfies the minimum requirements for the individual categories from unskilled laborer to
specialist foreman and is in possession of the minimum qualifications for their respective specialist field. This
applies to electricians, pipesmiths, steelsmiths, welders etc.
Assembly and commissioning personnel are required to attend instruction given by the responsible person and
are under obligation to familiarize themselves with the content of the relevant documents provided.

Pos : 6.3.13 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.1 Vorauss etz ung en/4.1.3 Transportw ege, Hebezeuge, Trans por tmittel @ 21\m od_1378110820159_18.docx @ 183930 @ 3 @ 1

4.1.3 Transportation routes, lifting equipment, transportation equipment

The modules are delivered largely preassembled. The modules and components are usually transported to
the site on trucks. The transportation routes must be suitable for truck traffic. Bridges must have the necessary
load-carrying capacity.
One or two truck cranes may be required for unloading, depending on conditions at the site.
Suitable and proper lifting and transportation equipment of sufficient load-carrying capacity must be deployed
for installation work. An overhead traveling crane must be provided in the switchgear compartment.

Pos : 6.3.14 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

4-197
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Assembly and Commissioning
Pos : 6.3.15 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.1 Vorauss etz ung en/4.1.4 W erkz eug e, Vorric htungen, Verbr auchsm aterialien, Steighilfen @ 3\mod_1336031754532_18.doc x @ 16091 @ 3 @ 1

4.1.4 Tools, devices, expendable materials, gantries

Appropriate tools in perfect working order must be used. Special tools and devices are imperative for some
tasks.
Only ladders, scaffolding or conveyor cages for cranes are allowed as gantries.
It is not allowed to use any elements of motor drives as a gantry, especially the motor drive itself, motor drive
attachments, linkage and cable plugs. The same applies for freely accessible measuring instruments and
gauges, gas and hydraulic pipes, rupture disc attachments, current and voltage transformer connection boxes
as well as expansion joints.

Pos : 6.3.16 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.1 Vorauss etz ung en/4.1.5 Anforderungen an di e Baustelle und deren Einric htung en @ 3\m od_1336031759250_18.docx @ 16102 @ 3 @ 1

4.1.5 Requirements with regard to the building site and its equipments
Pos : 6.3.17 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.1 Vorauss etz ung en/4.1.5.1 Aufstellungsraum der Sc hal tanlag e @ 3\mod_1336031770047_18.doc x @ 16113 @ 4 @ 1

4.1.5.1 Location of the switchgear

- Construction work on the room in which the switchgear is to be installed and its roofing must have been
completed. No construction work may be carried out while the switchgear is being assembled.

- The flooring must be equal to the designated loads, must rest on the required foundations, have a flat
surface and have been treated with a priming coat.

Pos : 6.3.18 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.1 Vorauss etz ung en/4.1.5.2 Lagerräume @ 3\m od_1336031773547_18.docx @ 16124 @ 4 @ 1

4.1.5.2 Storage areas

There must be one or more lockable storage rooms. Tools, devices and expendable materials have to be
stored in the storage rooms. The racks are for storage of installation components, small accessories and tools.
Wherever possible, the location of the storage rooms should be central to keep routes short.
A stores supervisor should be designated to ensure that stores are kept correctly. The tasks of the storage
supervisor are as follows:

- Keeping records of all stock movements

- Reporting all incoming and outgoing deliveries, all damage and any losses.

Pos : 6.3.19 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.1 Vorauss etz ung en/4.1.5.3 Büro- und Aufenthaltsräum e, s anitär e Anl agen @ 21\m od_1378111153576_18.docx @ 183980 @ 4 @ 1

4.1.5.3 Office and recreation rooms, sanitary facilities

The following must be provided, as appropriate for the strength of the workforce

- a sufficiently large, heated and, if possible, air-conditioned office room and recreation room

- a desk, one to three filing cabinets, a few chairs, and a large table for spreading out drawings
(approx. 3 x 1.5 m)

- phone, fax and Internet connections

- sanitary facilities (washroom, restroom) of sufficient size and in sufficient quantity.

Pos : 6.3.20 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

4-198
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Assembly and Commissioning
Pos : 6.3.21 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.1 Vorauss etz ung en/4.1.5.4 Beleuc htung, Belüftung, Strom- und Was serv ersorgung @ 21\m od_1378111178256_18.docx @ 184030 @ 4 @ 1

4.1.5.4 Lighting, ventilation, electricity and water supplies

All rooms and compartments, including adjacent rooms and stairwells, must have general lighting as
prescribed by national codes and regulations.
The electricity and water supply systems must be dimensioned appropriately for the expected demand,
particularly that of large loads (e.g. welding equipment, testing equipment, devices for gas filling, heaters, etc.).

Pos : 6.3.22 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.1 Vorauss etz ung en/4.1.6 Anforderungen an Sauberkeit @ 3\m od_1336034027717_18.docx @ 16157 @ 3 @ 1

4.1.6 Clean work requirements

Cleanliness on site is an absolute prerequisite for the maintenance of the assured quality parameters.
It is appropriate to name a responsible person who will maintain the cleanliness of the assembly area. The
name of the person should be clearly noted with a sign at the site. The person responsible for cleanliness
should instruct all personnel working at the site as well as procure the appropriate cleaning solutions and other
necessary supplies.

Cleanliness on the project site [ 7.25]

Pos : 6.3.23 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.1 Vorauss etz ung en/4.1.7 Brandsc hutz und U nfallver hütung @ 3\mod_1336034031686_18.doc x @ 16168 @ 3 @ 1

4.1.7 Fire and accident prevention

The room where the switch gear is located, as well as all other adjacent rooms, built-in systems, devices and
equipment must adhere to all applicable laws, regulations and norms for fire and accident prevention. This
includes the provision of warnings, notices, fire extinguishers and alarms as well as first-aid equipment.
Accident prevention regulations must be available either by providing copies directly to personnel or through
signage.

Pos : 6.3.24 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.1 Vorauss etz ung en/4.1.8 Protokollier en der M ontage und Inbetriebsetzung @ 21\m od_1378111211968_18.docx @ 184080 @ 3 @ 1

4.1.8 Documentation of erection and commissioning

Erection and commissioning shall be documented in full using the reports provided for this purpose.
The Test Report TR 3000 supports organization of the work.
Completion of all listed activities shall be noted in the Test Report. Non-applicable items shall be marked N.A.
(not applicable). Items not performed or only partially completed are to be provided with a footnote and
explained in more detail on page 6 of the Test Report under item 5, "Comments."

Pos : 6.3.25 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

4-199
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Assembly and Commissioning
Pos : 6.3.26 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.1 Vorauss etz ung en/4.1.9 Besteigen und Betreten v on GIS-Anlag en @ 35\m od_1528449031561_18.docx @ 739414 @ 3 @ 1

4.1.9 Climbing and standing on the gas-insulated switchgear system

It is possible to stand or climb on the housing and flange connections with no hazard, even if the system is
under gas pressure. Only stand or climb on the gas-insulated switchgear in exceptional cases, for accident
prevention.

It is always prohibited to stand or climb on any mounted parts on the gas-insulated switchgear; these
include:

- Drive motors and the drive linkage

- SF6 density monitors, SF6 fill connections and SF6 gas piping (marked in yellow)
- Grounding connections and grounding busbars of aluminum or copper.
- Hydraulic pipes, valves (for implementation with hydraulic drive)
- Pipe connections and accumulator equipment
- Overpressure relief devices/rupture disc assemblies and diverters
- Viewports (if present)
- Sub-assemblies for monitoring and control functions
- Cable ducts/cabling as well as its brackets, bolted connections and plug connectors
- Mounted parts on control and signal distribution cabinets.

The aforementioned components shall also not be used as supports for scaffolding, for leaning ladders against
or as setdown surfaces. Changes to the installation (control cable attachments, steel scaffolding, disconnection
of flange bolts, etc.) require the consent of the manufacturer).

The following points must be observed before starting the work:

- Lockout/tagout of the affected system areas to prevent operating disturbances
- Provision of the requisite access aids and work platforms (ladders, scaffolding)
- Provision of personal work safety equipment (additional protective clothing when working on
operating system, suitable fall arrest devices for work at heights)
- Suitable measures to prevent damage must be taken for work in of the vicinity of rupture disc
assemblies/overpressure relief devices

The following apply in all cases for the performance of work:

- The safety and warning notices in the operating instructions
- 5 electrical safety rules when working on electrical equipment or resources
- Work on gas systems require verification of the qualification of the person responsible for the work
- The locally applicable work safety procedures apply
Pos : 6.3.27 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

4-200
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Assembly and Commissioning
Pos : 6.5.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.2 Vorberei tende Arbeiten/4.2 Vorberei tende Arbeiten - Übersc hrift @ 22\mod_1378111252342_18.docx @ 184130 @ 2 @ 1

4.2 Preparatory work

Pos : 6.5.2 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.2 Vorberei tende Arbeiten/4.2 Vorberei tende Arbeiten - all e Anl agenty pen @ 44\mod_1597647327195_18.docx @ 883776 @ 3333333333 @ 1

This section refers to the contents of Test Report TR 3000. It lists and describes the activities to be documented
and provides references to additional reports.
The entire assembly procedure, including preparatory work and commissioning, must be documented in Test
Report TR 3000. The test report can also be used as a checklist for the work procedures. Some individual
work steps must be repeated or can also be performed once for the entire switchgear system.
The test report and the installation descriptions are based on the usual sequence of the work to be performed,
while the specific conditions on site can result in deviations in the indicated sequence.

Basic information:

Safety notices [ 0.2]

Prerequisites [ 4.1]
Assembling the switchgear [ 4.3]
Commissioning of switchgear [ 4.4]

Order documentation

 Notice
All work associated with dust formation must be completed before the start
of installation. Work that is not directly related to assembly of the
switchgear is not permitted due to the high cleanliness requirements.

The performance of the following activities must be confirmed in Test Report TR 3000.

4-201
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Assembly and Commissioning
4.2.1 Structural and spatial prerequisites (Test Report 3001)
• Check and confirm fulfillment of the requirements for the switchgear system installation location and
the ancillary rooms, e.g. common rooms and offices.

4.2.2 Instruction of third-party personnel (Test Reports 3002a/b)

• Instruct assembly and commissioning personnel in the following topics:

1. Hazard assessments
2. Protection measures for working in SF6 systems
3. Occupational health and safety in electrical installations
4. Safety markings (warning signs)
5. Handling of hazardous substances
6. Precautionary fire protection measures
7. Cleanliness and order on project sites
8. Waste disposal
9. Use of cleaning agents
10. Handling of transport damage
11. Working with sealed packaging
12. Handling of flanges and O-rings, as well as flat gaskets on sight glasses
13. Tightening torques
14. Brazing of copper tubing
15. Closing off of unused threaded glands for HIS systems

Safety notices [ 0.2]

Receiving and handling of shipments [ 3.3]
Preparing and assembling conductor and flange connections [ 7.7]
Install rupture discs [ 7.18]
Cleaning [ 7.19]
Bolted connections, tightening torques, SL retaining clips [ 7.23]
Instructions for handling SF6 [ 7.24]
Cleanliness on the project site [ 7.25]

4.2.3 Drawings
• Check drawings including copies for completeness.

4.2.4 Circuit diagrams

• Check circuit diagrams including copies for completeness.

4.2.5 Delivery documents

• Check HSA lists and delivery notes for completeness.

Receiving and handling of shipments [ 3.3]

4-202
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Assembly and Commissioning
4.2.6 Check of delivery units
• Check delivery units for transport damage.
• Check sealed packaging: Check moisture indicators; document any nonconformances and initiate
further measures.
• Check shock indicators.

Receiving and handling of shipments [ 3.3]

4.2.7 Tools / Instruments

• Check completeness and condition of tools and instruments.

 Notice
Tools must correspond to the current state of the art.
Measuring instruments must be calibrated!

4.2.8 Check dimensions of penetrations in floor, ceiling and walls

• Measure longitudinal and transverse axes of the switchgear and mark out on the floor.
• Check and measure the location of the wall penetrations (e.g. for leads) and the ceiling penetrations
for the high-voltage, control and converter cables as well as for grounding.
• In the event of deviations, penetrations must be corrected before transport of the first switchgear
design groups to the installation room.
• Cable ducts and cable trays (including wall penetrations) must be completed and approved.
• Penetrations in ceilings and floors must be covered with non-skid covers with appropriate load-carrying
capacity.

4.2.9 Check cable ducts in floors

• Check location and configuration of cable ducts including covers and coordinate with project
management in the event of any tolerance deviations.

4.2.10 Measurement of system support points

• Measure and mark the load points for the bays and supports (steel framework).
• Exactly measure height differences of the load points.
• Coordinate with project management in the event of any tolerance deviations.

4-203
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Assembly and Commissioning
Pos : 6.5.3 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1

4-204
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Assembly and Commissioning
Pos : 6.6 /10
Pos : 6.7.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.3 Sc haltanl age m ontier en/4.3 Sc haltanlag e m ontieren - Übersc hrift @ 22\m od_1378111395809_18.docx @ 184280 @ 2 @ 1

4.3 Assembling the switchgear

Pos : 6.7.2 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.3 Sc haltanl age m ontier en/4.3 Sc haltanlag e m ontieren - Übersc hrift T ext @ 25\m od_1391493448789_18.docx @ 227670 @ @ 1

This section states the function of the Test Report 3000. The section describes the activities to be recorded
and explains them or provides references to further explanations.

Basic information:

Safety notices [ 0.2]

Prerequisites [ 4.1]
Preparatory work [ 4.2]
Commissioning of switchgear [ 4.4]
Cleanliness on the project site [ 7.25]

Order documentation

 Notice
Given the strict requirements for cleanliness, all work not directly connected
with assembly of the switchgear is prohibited.

 Notice
Protect locations at which work is being performed against moisture until all
modules have been connected and the prescribed corrosion protection has
been applied. When working outdoors, seal off open modules against the
ingress of dust using the original cover, transportation cover or protective
film, even during short breaks in the work.

Danger!
Hazard due to tipping or falling load – MORTAL DANGER!

• Do not walk under suspended loads.

• Do not exceed the load-carrying capacity of transportation and lifting equipment.

• Bays must never be stacked on transportation frames. This also applies if folding boxes are used.

• Only remove shipping plates (basic packaging), or transportation frames (sealed packaging), after
arrival at the intended installation location and after having adequately secured the load against
tipping over.

Completion of the following activities must be confirmed in Test Report TR 3000.

Pos : 6.7.3 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.3 Sc haltanl age m ontier en/4.3. 1 Anlag enaufbau nach Hauptz eichnung durc hführen @ 22\m od_1378111460550_18.docx @ 184530 @ 3 @ 1

4-205
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Assembly and Commissioning
4.3.1 Installation of switchgear according to main drawing
The exact sequence of installation activities must be planned based on the overview circuit diagram,
considering the position of the access routes to the switchgear room, the options for deploying the overhead
crane, and the options for transporting and setting down equipment. This planning, which is already performed
at the factory, is used to define the delivery sequence of shipments from the factory.

The basis for the entire switchgear assembly process are the bays preassembled in the factory. After the bays
have been installed, the other modules (e.g. cable modules, extensions, etc.) must be mounted.

The type of connection required in each case is shown in the assembly drawing.

If more than two weeks separate the end of erection from the start of commissioning, the anticondensation
heating for the affected modules must be provisionally put into operation.

Check electrical equipment [ 7.11]

Pos : 6.7.5 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.3 Sc haltanl age m ontier en/4.3. 2 F elder positi oni eren 010 @ 24\mod_1383311533142_18.docx @ 197580 @ 3 @ 1

4.3.2 Positioning of bays

The following Description of Erection provides only a general overview of the work to be performed. It does
not provide firm instructions for the erection personnel.

 Notice
Even out any differences in height after installation by adjusting the feet. Lift
the first bay until it is slightly higher than the other bays based on the height
measurements made. Then align each of the bays to be installed in the
busbar run and with this bay on the exit side.

 Notice
For single bays, the lifting slings must have a load-carrying capacity of ≥ 2.5
t and, depending on the height of the crane, a length of approximately 4 m.

For double bays, the lifting slings must have a load-carrying capacity of ≥ 5 t
and, depending on the height of the crane, a length of approximately 5 m.

 Notice
Because of the limited accessibility of the busbar fasteners, the work should
be performed by two people.

To avoid damaging the expansion joints on the removal link, work carefully
and with suitable tools.
(Ratchet wrenches must not be used partly!)

• Position the bay carefully.

4-206
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Assembly and Commissioning

• Using a spirit level and leveling instrument, adjust the first bay by adjusting the feet.

• Provisionally fix the first bay in the support structure (steel frames) in the hall floor (with
spot welds).

Pos : 6.7.6 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.3 Sc haltanl age m ontier en/4.3. 2 F elder positi oni eren 030 @ 22\mod_1378123354490_18.docx @ 187929 @ @ 1

5. Treat the flanges

6. Position the second bay carefully.

7. Using a spirit level and leveling instrument, align the second bay by adjusting the bases.

8. Connect the second bay to the first bay using centering pins and fitting bolts.

9. Bolt on the busbar flange with the correct tightening torques.

Pos : 6.7.7 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.3 Sc haltanl age m ontier en/4.3. 2 F elder positi oni eren 040 - Bil d @ 22\m od_1378124238590_0.docx @ 187977 @ @ 1

Pos : 6.7.8 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.3 Sc haltanl age m ontier en/4.3. 2 F elder positi oni eren 040 - Bil du @ 22\mod_1378124382269_18.docx @ 188001 @ @ 1

Fig. 4-1 Centering pins

Pos : 6.7.9 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.3 Sc haltanl age m ontier en/4.3. 2 F elder positi oni eren 045 - Bil d @ 24\m od_1384786014009_0.docx @ 210822 @ @ 1

Pos : 6.7.10 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3. 2 Fel der positioni eren 045 - Bildu @ 24\m od_1384786748940_18.docx @ 210864 @ @ 1

Fig. 4-2 Fitting bolts

Pos : 6.7.11 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3. 2 Fel der positioni eren 050 @ 24\mod_1383311538723_18.docx @ 197680 @ @ 1

The allowable tolerances along the longitudinal direction of the busbar (axially)have to be gathered from the
order documentation:

4-207
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Assembly and Commissioning
• Now mount the next modules following the relevant work instructions.

• Finally, check alignment of the supports and delivered assemblies and, if necessary, make final
corrections and tighten the bolt fasteners using the prescribed final torque.

• Fill the completed bays with gas to nominal pressure.

• Weld the bays to the support structure (steel frames) in the hall floor.

Pos : 6.7.13 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3. 3 Ü berpr üfung auf äuß ere Besc hädigungen der Baugruppe @ 3\m od_1336039436590_18.docx @ 16344 @ 3 @ 1

4.3.3 Check for visible damage to assemblies

• Check assemblies externally for signs of damage

• If any damage is discovered, take the appropriate measures as suggested.

Receiving and handling of shipments [ 3.3]

Pos : 6.7.14 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3. 4 Äußer e R einigung der Baugruppen @ 3\mod_1336039541010_18.docx @ 16355 @ 3 @ 1

4.3.4 External cleaning of the assemblies

• Check whether assemblies are clean (externally).

• If the required state of cleanliness is not met, clean the assembly.

Cleaning [ 7.19]

Pos : 6.7.15 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3. 5 Innere Sic htk ontrolle jener Baugruppen, di e z ur M ontage z u öffnen si nd, hinsichtlic h Sauberk e @ 3\m od_1336042098736_18.docx @ 16366 @ 3 @ 1

4.3.5 Internal inspection of design groups for cleanliness and damage

• Check inside of modules that are open for assembly for damage and cleanliness.

• Take the specified measures if damage is detected. Clean the module if the cleanliness
requirements are violated.

Receiving and handling of shipments [ 3.3]

Cleaning [ 7.19]

Pos : 6.7.16 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3. 6 Flansc h- und O-Ri ng-Behandlung @ 22\m od_1378112302087_18.docx @ 185155 @ 3 @ 1

4.3.6 Treatment of flanges and O-rings

• Prepare flanges and conductor connections of the modules to be connected.

• Treat the O-rings.

Preparing and assembling conductor and flange connections [ 7.7]

Pos : 6.7.18 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3. 7 Gasdic hte und gas durc hläs sige D urchführungen 010 @ 39\mod_1544624735974_18.doc x @ 765442 @ 3 @ 1

4-208
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Assembly and Commissioning
4.3.7 Gas-tight and gas-permeable bushings
• Prior to installation, check each delivered assembly against the main drawing to ensure
that the gas-tight and gas-permeable bushings are in the installation locations intended
for them.

• Check whether there is a customer requirement for identification.

• Before installing each delivered assembly, check against the main drawing that the
bushings are being mounted as required:

Pos : 6.7.19 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3. 8 Einbau der Z ugank er und Messen der Fel dteilung - 8DN9 6, 8D Q1 @ 5\mod_1340373619845_18.docx @ 35048 @ 3 @ 1

4.3.8 Installation of tie-rods and measurement of bay width

• The tie-rods are screwed tight for transport purposes and need to be adjusted in accordance with the
assembly drawings before the expansion joint gas compartment is filled with gas.

• Repeat the measuring procedure after filling with gas. Record the results of both measurements.

• When the adjustment is correct, the inner spherical seats can be turned by hand. When the gas
chamber is evacuated, the free play moves over to the outside of the flanges or consoles allowing
the outer spherical seat to be turned. In the case of expansion joints which are pressurised, the tie-
rod play is again measurable at the inner spherical seat.

• Check the bay width of the busbars at two places on the busbar flange each 180° apart with a tape
measure. If necessary, re-align the circuit-breaker. Enter the measurements A and B in the log.

Pos : 6.7.20 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3. 9 Filter i n Anl agen-Gasräume ei ns etz en @ 3\m od_1336043547560_18.docx @ 16432 @ 3 @ 1

4.3.9 Insert filter in switchgear gas compartments

• Check that a “Filter” label is attached.

Install/replace filter material [ 7.17]

Pos : 6.7.21 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3.10 Bei Erweiterung: Primärleiterz uor dnung zwisc hen altem und neuem Anl agenteil prüfen @ 22\mod_1378112736242_18.doc x @ 185955 @ 3 @ 1

4.3.10 In case of extension: check primary conductor allocation

• When equipment is to be added to switchgear that is already in operation, always check that the
assignment of the primary conductors from the old to the new switchgear and the phase angle are
correct.

Pos : 6.7.22 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1

4-209
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Assembly and Commissioning
Pos : 6.7.23 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3.11 Anlag enerdung gemäß Er dungs plan v erlegen @ 22\mod_1378112820047_18.doc x @ 186205 @ 3 @ 1

4.3.11 Switchgear earthing according to earthing plan

The building earthing system must have been completed before the switchgear earthing system is installed
and must be accessible at the specified locations.

• Bolt the earthing cables to the switchgear as shown in the earthing drawing and weld them to the
building earthing system.

Pos : 6.7.24 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3.12 Steuerleitung en verl egen @ 22\m od_1378112954069_18.docx @ 186455 @ 3 @ 1

4.3.12 Installing control cables

• Install the control cables of the drives and instrument transformers and the control equipment.

Assembling the switchgear [ 4.3]

Pos : 6.7.25 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3.13 Kontroll e auf Dic htheit nic ht belegter Kabelv ersc hraubungen @ 22\m od_1378113848923_18.docx @ 186955 @ 3 @ 1

4.3.13 Check unused cable glands for tightness

(Install blind plugs in the glands!)

Pos : 6.7.26 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3.14 Absc hirmung der W andler und Steuerl eitungen beids eitig erden @ 3\m od_1336045705918_18.docx @ 16498 @ 3 @ 1

4.3.14 Earth the transformer and control cables shielding at both ends

Pos : 6.7.27 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3.15 Far bbehandlung pr üfen, durc hführ en, ausbess ern @ 22\mod_1378113077639_18.docx @ 186705 @ 3 @ 1

4.3.15 Check, apply and/or repair paintwork

• Apply paint coatings in accordance with the required protection class.

• Check the surface of the paintwork on the entire switchgear, including the gas pipes, for any damage
and repair if necessary.
Pos : 6.7.28 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3.16 Besc hriftung und Besc hilderung anbringen @ 3\mod_1336046070230_18.docx @ 16520 @ 3 @ 1

4.3.16 Application of signs and lettering

• Check that factory-applied signs and labelling are complete and clearly visible. Complete or improve
where necessary.

Pos : 6.7.29 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1

4-210
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Assembly and Commissioning
Pos : 6.7.30 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3.17 Montage der Spannungsw andler @ 22\mod_1378113983003_18.docx @ 187205 @ 3 @ 1

4.3.17 Installing the voltage transformer

Preparation for assembly

1. Unpack the voltage transformer until it is only on the transport rack.

2. Check the shock indicators. The supervisor and the Siemens representative must be informed if an
indicator indicates faulty transport.

3. Check pressure of the SF6 gas fill provided for transport at the DILO connection (ask manufacturer if
positive pressure is not present) – do not discharge the transport gas fill!

4. Check that the rating plate data match the overview circuit diagram to avoid mixing up electrically
different but visually identical voltage transformers.

Assembly

1. Raise the voltage transformer using lifting equipment and remove the transport rack.

2. Install and align the contact element using the special installation device and install the voltage
transformer using centering pins and dowels.

3. If necessary, relocate the diverter above the rupture disc as specified in the installation drawing. Check
again here whether the blowout opening of the diverter in this installation orientation is facing away
from the point where personnel could be and whether there are any parts in the blowout direction that
could deflect the gas flow.

4. Apply corrosion protection if necessary.

5. Install density monitor.

Pos : 6.7.31 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1

4-211
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Assembly and Commissioning
Pos : 6.7.32 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3.18 Montage des RC-T eilers @ 22\mod_1378114033766_18.docx @ 187305 @ 3 @ 1

4.3.18 Installation of RC-divider

Preparation of RC divider for installation
• Unpack the RC divider until it is only on the transport rack,

• Clean the insulators.

• Mount the contact elements using the assembly device and align them.

• Check that the rating plate data match the overview circuit diagram.

 Notice
Shortening or extending the secondary cables of the RC divider is
prohibited! The cables are part of the RC measuring system.

Installation
• Screw crane lifting lugs into either the cover or the housing of the RC divider, depending on the
position in which it is installed, and lift the RC divider up using lifting equipment.

• Attach the RC divider using centering pins and fitting bolts.

• Establish high-voltage connections to the relevant contacts.

• Perform secondary wiring.

• Remove the crane lifting lugs.

Preparing and assembling conductor and flange connections [ 7.7]

Pos : 6.7.33 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3.19 Korrosi onssc hutz an im Frei en liegenden Anbauteilen durchführen @ 3\m od_1336046795215_18.docx @ 16553 @ 3 @ 1

4.3.19 Apply corrosion protection to attachments located outdoors

Corrosion protection, greases and oils [ 7.20]

Pos : 6.7.34 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.3 Sc hal tanlag e monti eren/4.3.20 Hochs pannungs-Ansc hlußklemm en an Fr eiluftdurc hführ ung @ 3\mod_1336047002496_18.docx @ 16564 @ 3 @ 1

4.3.20 HV terminals on Air bushings

• Advise customers and/or other firms to adhere to the torque settings.

• Tighten screws to specified torque.

Pos : 6.7.35 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1

4-212
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Assembly and Commissioning
Pos : 6.8.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.4 Sc haltanl age i n Betrieb s etz en/4.4 Sc haltanlag e i nbetriebs etz en - Ü bersc hrift @ 22\m od_1378114115619_18.docx @ 187430 @ 2 @ 1

4.4 Commissioning of switchgear

Pos : 6.8.2 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.4 Sc haltanl age i n Betrieb s etz en/4.4 Sc haltanlag e i nbetriebs etz en - Ü bersc hrift Tex t @ 25\m od_1391496157134_18.docx @ 227712 @ @ 1

This section states the function of the Test Report TR 3000. The section describes the activities to be recorded
and explains them or provides references to further explanations.
Commissioning should be started when

- the switchgear or large parts of the switchgear (e.g. several bays) have been completely assembled
- auxiliary and control cables have been connected
- all auxiliary and control voltages are available at the switchgear
- the SF6 activities have been completed.

Basic information:

Safety notices [ 0.2]

Prerequisites [ 4.1]
Preparatory work [ 4.2]
Assembling the switchgear [ 4.3]
Instructions for handling SF6 [ 7.24]
Cleanliness on the project site [ 7.25]

Order documentation

Completion of the following activities must be confirmed in Test Report TR 3000.

Pos : 6.8.3 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.4 Sc haltanl age i n Betrieb s etz en/4.4. 1 Pr üfen auf Überei nstimm ung v om Ü bersichtssc haltpl an @ 3\m od_1336047840948_18.docx @ 16586 @ 3 @ 1

4.4.1 Check the accordance with the circuit diagram.

Check that the actual arrangement of the devices is in accordance with the circuit diagram

Order documentation

Pos : 6.8.4 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.4 Sc haltanl age i n Betrieb s etz en/4.4. 2 Widerstandsm ess ung der Hauptstr ombahn @ 3\m od_1336048178010_18.docx @ 16597 @ 3 @ 1

4.4.2 Resistance measurement of main current path

Check primary section [ 7.16]

Pos : 6.8.5 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.4 Sc haltanl age i n Betrieb s etz en/4.4. 3 SF 6-Gasfüllung und Dr uckm ess ung @ 3\mod_1336048632273_18.docx @ 16608 @ 3 @ 1

4.4.3 SF6 gas filling and pressure measurement

Evacuating, filling and emptying the gas compartments [ 7.2]

Pos : 6.8.6 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.4 Sc haltanl age i n Betrieb s etz en/4.4. 5 F unk tions prüfung Trenner, Erder - 8DQ1, 8DN 9 @ 13\mod_1352360002574_18.docx @ 77360 @ 3 @ 1

4-213
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Assembly and Commissioning
4.4.4 Function test disconnector and earthing switches

Testing the disconnectors, earthing and high-speed earthing switches [ 7.8]

Pos : 6.8.7 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.4 Sc haltanl age i n Betrieb s etz en/4.4. 6 F unk tions prüfung Leistungss chalter @ 3\m od_1336049411084_18.docx @ 16641 @ 3 @ 1

4.4.5 Check operation of circuit-breakers

Checking the electronic circuit-breaker control [ 7.10]

Pos : 6.8.8 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.4 Sc haltanl age i n Betrieb s etz en/4.4. 7 Pr üfung der Mel dungen @ 3\m od_1336050104149_18.docx @ 16652 @ 3 @ 1

4.4.6 Check alarms

Checking the gas monitoring system [ 7.3]

Check electrical equipment [ 7.11]

Pos : 6.8.9 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.4 Sc haltanl age i n Betrieb s etz en/4.4. 8 Pr üfung der Rückspannungsfrei heit all er Schutz schalter @ 3\mod_1336050344019_18.docx @ 16663 @ 3 @ 1

4.4.7 Check that MCB’s are free of reverse voltage

Pos : 6.8.10 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.4 Sc hal tanlag e in Betrieb setzen/4.4. 9 Entfernen der Klebemark en und/oder Pl astik stopfen an Belüftungss tutzen @ 3\m od_1336050513625_18.docx @ 16674 @ 3 @ 1

4.4.8 Removing the stickers and/or plastic stopper at ventilation tubes

Pos : 6.8.11 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.4 Sc hal tanlag e in Betrieb setzen/4.4.10 Pr üfung der Antik ondensatheizungen @ 3\m od_1336050792292_18.docx @ 16685 @ 3 @ 1

4.4.9 Check anti-condensation heating units

Check electrical equipment [ 7.11]

Pos : 6.8.12 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.4 Sc hal tanlag e in Betrieb setzen/4.4.11 F unk tions prüfung der Steuerung @ 3\m od_1336051377708_18.docx @ 16696 @ 3 @ 1

4.4.10 Check operation of control system

Check electrical equipment [ 7.11]

Pos : 6.8.13 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.4 Sc hal tanlag e in Betrieb setzen/4.4.13 Kunde über bevors tehende Hoc hs pannungs prüfung informiert @ 3\m od_1336051784504_18.docx @ 16718 @ 3 @ 1

4.4.11 Customer informed of pending high-voltage tests

Pos : 6.8.14 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.4 Sc hal tanlag e in Betrieb setzen/4.4.14 Z ustand des Kabel endv ersc hlus ses kontr ollieren/Kabelansc hluss überpr üfen @ 3\m od_1336052001668_18.docx @ 16729 @ 3 @ 1

4.4.12 Check the condition of the cable end closing bush

• Record the way in which the cable end is terminated.

Check cable terminator [ 7.15]

Pos : 6.8.15 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.4 Sc hal tanlag e in Betrieb setzen/4.4.15 Hochs pannungs prüfung @ 3\m od_1336052227708_18.docx @ 16740 @ 3 @ 1

4-214
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Assembly and Commissioning
4.4.13 High-voltage test

Check primary section [ 7.16]

Pos : 6.8.16 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.4 Sc hal tanlag e in Betrieb setzen/4.4.16 Stromw andler über prüfen @ 22\mod_1378114190983_18.docx @ 187630 @ 3 @ 1

4.4.14 Check current transformer

Check primary section [ 7.16]

Pos : 6.8.17 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.4 Sc hal tanlag e in Betrieb setzen/4.4.18 Spannungsw andler prüfungen @ 3\mod_1336053090629_18.doc x @ 16773 @ 3 @ 1

4.4.15 Check voltage transformer

Check voltage transformer [ 7.13]

Pos : 6.8.18 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.4 Sc hal tanlag e in Betrieb setzen/4.4.19 RC-Teil er pr üfen @ 22\m od_1378464143679_18.docx @ 188981 @ 3 @ 1

4.4.16 Check the RC-divider

• For this, apply an alternating voltage of approx. 1000 V to the primary connections and to the
corresponding secondary connections (at the end of the secondary lead). Measure the voltage with
a high-impedance voltmeter under load. Thes secondary voltage must measure 0.833 V ±5 % at a
primary voltage of 1000V.

• Note the results in the test report TR 3008 and keep them for later comparison measurements.
Pos : 6.8.19 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/4 M ontag e und IBS/Module/4.4 Sc hal tanlag e in Betrieb setzen/4.4.19 Wetterschutz haube, Kontr olle der Z entr alsc hraube @ 3\m od_1336053301203_18.docx @ 16784 @ 3 @ 1

4.4.17 Weather-protection cover, check central bolt

Install rupture discs [ 7.18]

Pos : 6.8.20 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

4-215
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Assembly and Commissioning
Pos : 6.9.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /4 Montage und IBS/M odul e/4.4 Sonstiges /4.5 Sonstiges @ 44\mod_1597409235056_18.docx @ 883476 @ 2 @ 1

4-216
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Assembly and Commissioning
4.5 Miscellaneous
This section refers to the contents of Test Report TR 3000. It lists the activities to be documented and provides
references to additional reports.

The performance of the following activities must be confirmed in Test Report TR 3000.

1. Revise assembly drawings.

2. Revise circuit diagrams.

3. Document deviations and corrective measures in NCR (Non-Conformity Report).

4. Prepare Test Reports.

5. Arrange for return shipment of von SF6 cylinders, forming gas, residual materials, tools, instruments
and equipment.
• Return delivery notes submitted/sent to project management
• Return shipment of HV test equipment and shielding parts.

6. Place documentation of system parts that are not ready for operation in the control cabinet for the
respective feeder.

7. Close ventilation openings for anti-condensation equipment that is not connected.

8. Accept switchgear accessories (Test Report 3015).

9. Prepare preliminary/final acceptance report (Test Report 3016).

Pos : 6.9.2 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1

4-217
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Assembly and Commissioning
Pos : 7.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /5 Betrieb/M odul e/5 Betri eb/5 Betrieb @ 0\m od_1331115525877_18.docx @ 3164 @ 1 @ 1

4-218
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Operation
5 Operation

5-219
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Operation

 Notice
The representations in the following illustrations can differ, in total or in
part, from the delivered version. This applies particularly to the current track
guiding, the location and execution of the bushings and the ancillary
equipment.

Pos : 7.2.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /5 Betrieb/M odul e/5.1 Vorauss etz ungen/5.1 Vorauss etzungen @ 0\mod_1331045132419_18.docx @ 2996 @ 2 @ 1

5-220
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Operation
5.1 Prerequisites
This section describes

- basic requirements of operation

- specific measures for accident and fire prevention.

Basic information:

Safety notices [ 0.2]

Manual operation [ 5.2]
Checks, alarms, causes, measures [ 5.3]
Instructions for handling SF6 [ 7.24]

Pos : 7.2.2 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /5 Betrieb/M odul e/5.1 Vorauss etz ungen/5.1.1 Gr unds ätzlic he Anforderungen 01 @ 0\m od_1331105846780_18.docx @ 3020 @ 3 @ 1

5.1.1 Basic requirements

The scope and content of switchgear operation guidelines are confirmed by the fact that a system is always a
part of the larger system, a substation and finally a network with varying interdependencies and links.
The operator must diligently adapt his plant-specific directions to the respective manufacturers’ documentation
and regulations. This ensures reliable, safe and fault-free operation of the switchgear.
Pos : 7.2.3 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /5 Betrieb/M odul e/5.1 Vorauss etz ungen/5.1.1 Gr unds ätzlic he Anforderungen 02 - Vorsc hriften zum Betrieb Grafik mit Bildu @ 25\mod_1392811792473_18.doc x @ 229732 @ @ 1

Operating regulations (national and international)

Operating- Operating instructions / Circuit manuals /

instructions other documentations from manufacturer
Network Station Bay
Network control Station control Bay control Switchgear
system system system system
Network control Substation Bay control unit Drive system
control device
Load Central control Input / output Gas monitoring
management system unit unit
Station Feeder Circuit
protection protection protection
device devices
Telecontrol Telecontrol

Operating requirements

Fig. 5-1 Operating regulations for the operation of the switchgear

Pos : 7.2.4 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1

5-221
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Operation
Pos : 7.2.5 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /5 Betrieb/M odul e/5.1 Vorauss etz ungen/5.1.2 Spezifisc he Maß nahm en z ur Verhütung von Bränden und U nfällen @ 46\mod_1607500585112_18.docx @ 900516 @ 3 @ 1

5.1.2 Specific measures to prevent fires and accidents

Metal-enclosed gas-insulated switchgear systems provide a high degree of safety. Familiarization of the
operating personnel with the operating safety of the switchgear shall not result in a relaxed attitude towards
the safety procedures over time.
Regardless of the safety procedures and operating regulations applicable in the respective country, the
instructions, precautionary measures and safety notices must be observed:

• Switchgear accessories for operation and general safety measures (e.g. devices for manual switching,
warning signs, flashlights, fire extinguishers etc.) must be kept at a fixed location in clear view and must
be regularly checked for completeness and correct functioning.

• Keys of all types shall only be accessible to the responsible operating personnel.

• There is no protection against incorrect switching operations on manual switching. This protection is only
ensured when switching using station or bay control units.

• A minimum command duration of approx. 200 ms must be maintained when performing local control via
station or bay control units. Latching does not become effective until after this time.

• It is not permissible to make changes to the switchgear during operation, such as disassembling parts,
changing the settings on monitoring equipment, intervening in the drive system of the circuit breaker etc.

• The springs in the drive systems are under preload even in the untensioned state.

• Do not climb between or on system modules; use stable ladders or scaffolding if necessary. (cf. Sect.
4.1.9)

• The openings of the diverters shall not be sealed or covered during operation. It is not permissible to
change or influence the discharge direction of the diverters. The response pressures of the pressure
relief devices are above the maximum operating pressure of the switchgear that can occur. Diverters on
the rupture disks prevent gasses flowing out directly into passages and operating areas.

Danger!
Risk of serious personal injuries and damage to property
If the pressure relief devices trip, the hazards below can occur:
• Sudden escape of gasses that can be very hot
• When the gasses escape, particles and molten metal can be expelled
• A loud popping sound

During operation, people should keep away from the immediate vicinity of
the pressure relief devices.

5-222
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Operation
• Work on the switchgear (e.g. additions, maintenance or repairs) shall only be performed by or under the
supervision/instruction of Siemens AG specialist personnel.

• The operation of cable connector systems with blind connectors or compressed-gas tight covers on cable
connector jacks is only permissible for the duration of high-voltage testing. The continuous operation of
cable terminators with cable connector jacks is only permissible with a connected high-voltage cable.

Warning!
System parts that have been locked out and tagged out must be grounded
to prevent the extended presence of residual charge (> 15 min.).

Incorrect handling of the switchgear and failure to comply with the safety
instructions can result in serious bodily injury and significant damage to the
equipment and the environment.

Pos : 7.2.6 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /5 Betrieb/M odul e/5.1 Vorauss etz ungen/5.1.3 Verhalten bei tiefen oder hohen Umg ebungstem peraturen @ 0\m od_1331109945042_18.docx @ 3047 @ 3 @ 1

5.1.3 Procedure if ambient temperatures are too high or too low

In addition to observing the relevant regulations and standards, the following safety notice must be observed
in order to prevent injuries:

Caution!
Touching the metallic housing when temperatures are low (freezing) or high
(direct sunlight) can result in injuries to the hands.

The risk of injury is decreased or increased respectively by the current

flowing through the affected component at the time.

Special care must therefore be taken when ambient temperatures are high
and the rated normal current is flowing through the system at the same time.

Pos : 7.2.7 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1

5-223
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Operation
Pos : 7.2.8 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1

5-224
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Operation
Pos : 7.3 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

Pos : 7.4.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /5 Betrieb/M odul e/5.2 Behelfsmäßig Schalten/5.2 Behelfsm äßig Schalten @ 0\m od_1331560404803_18.docx @ 4446 @ 2 @ 1

5.2 Manual operation

Manual operation of disconnectors, earthing switches, high-speed earthing switches and circuit-breakers is
possible during commissioning and maintenance work, and also in an emergency if the control supply has
failed or (for example) the motor drive is defective.
Manual operation always takes place by way of over-riding the switchgear interlock unit.
This section describes in detail how to, during commissioning, maintenance and in the event of malfunction,

- manually switch all locally controlled bay equipment when interlocking has been deactivated (S1 switched
to OPEN);
- manually actuate disconnector and earthing switch modules as well as work-in-progress earthing switches
and high-speed earthing switches through direct activation of the motor drive;
- manually switch the circuit-breaker using direct electrical or mechanical activation of the releases.

Basic information:

Safety notices [ 0.2]

Prerequisites [ 5.1]
Checks, alarms, causes, measures [ 5.3]

Danger!
Failing to observe a minimum safe distance to live system components,
particularly outdoor bushings, may result in death, severe injury and
considerable damage to property and environmental damage.

Before work on high-voltage systems can be carried out, a safe working

area must be created.

• Any work on high-voltage systems may be performed by adequately qualified personnel only.

• Always observe a minimum safe distance to live system components.

Pos : 7.4.3 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /5 Betrieb/M odul e/5.2 Behelfsmäßig Schalten/5.2.1 Mit Vor ortsteuer ung bei abgesc haltetem Sc haltfehl ersc hutz behelfsm äßig schalten @ 0\mod_1331110129358_18.docx @ 3055 @ 3 @ 1

5.2.1 Manual operation in local control with the switchgear interlock deactivated

Warning!
In manual operation, switchgear interlocking is ineffective. Actuation of
switching devices in contravention of the interlock conditions specified for
the switchgear can result in serious damage to the switching device and to
the system.

• Manual operation may be performed only by adequately qualified personnel.

• Prior to manual operation, check the mechanical position indicators to ensure that the interlock
conditions are fulfilled.
• Non-maintained command operation is possible; disconnectors, earthing switches and high-speed
earthing switches must therefore be moved into their final positions.

Pos : 7.4.4 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

5-225
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Operation
Pos : 7.4.5 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /5 Betrieb/M odul e/5.2 Behelfsmäßig Schalten/5.2.2 Am M otorantri eb behelfsm äßig sc halten 010 @ 1\m od_1332999412214_18.docx @ 12510 @ 3 @ 1

5.2.2 Manual operation of the motor drive

Warning!
In manual operation, switchgear interlocking is ineffective. Actuation of
switching devices in contravention of the interlock conditions specified for
the switchgear can result in serious damage to the system.

• Manual operation may be performed only by adequately qualified personnel.

• Prior to manual operation, check the mechanical position indicators to ensure that the interlock
conditions are fulfilled.

• Interrupt the control circuit by actuating the cutout and pulling the plug. Secure against reclosing.

• Isolate the manually switched disconnector, earthing switch and work-in-progress as well as the
high-speed earthing switch from high-voltage. Secure them against reclosing.

• Operation by non-maintained command is possible; disconnectors, earthing switches and high-

speed earthing switches must therefore be moved into their final positions.

Caution!
Reconnection of high voltage when a disconnector or earthing switch has
not reached its proper end position (i.e. is in fault position) can cause
damage to the switchgear.

 Notice
Switching sounds that might occur inside the gas compartment during
manual switching shortly before or after disconnecting the switching
contacts are normal and do not constitute any danger to the operator.

The final position of the switching device must be reached. Never leave the
switching device in an intermediate position.

Pos : 7.4.6 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /5 Betrieb/M odul e/5.2 Behelfsmäßig Schalten/5.2.2 Am M otorantri eb behelfsm äßig sc halten 020 - 8D Q1, 8DN9 @ 40\m od_1553839862674_18.docx @ 795664 @ @ 1

The motor drive for the disconnector and earthing switch can be manually switched by placing a cordless driver
or a hand crank on the motor shaft. However, the torque transmitted to the motor shaft must be limited by a
sliding clutch to protect the motor drive as well as the disconnector or earthing switch from mechanical damage.
The hand crank on the sliding clutch can be removed to attach a cordless driver.

Caution!
The use of a electrically operated machine without a sliding clutch will result
in damage to the motor drive and/or the earthing switch.

5-226
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Operation
• Use only approved tools (cordless driver or hand crank with sliding clutch).

The limit switch is not designed for manual switching of the motor drive. Operation of the limit switch
by removing the cover during switching operation will damage the limit switch!

• Only remove the cover on the motor drive when the motor drive is not being actuated.

• Do not use limit switches for switching the motor drive.

There is no hazard for the operator if the motor is electrically operated during manual operation either
inadvertently or due to an ON command that is still active (such as on restoration of control power). The limit
switch prevents electrical switching.

The following are required (in each case with sliding clutch):

- A hand crank or
- A cordless driver (not included in scope of supply).

The manual tools can be used with extensions if accessibility to the motor drive is restricted.

Pos : 7.4.7 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /5 Betrieb/M odul e/5.2 Behelfsmäßig Schalten/5.2.2 Am M otorantri eb behelfsm äßig sc halten 030 - 8D Q1, 8DN9 Bild1 8D-Mot-Antrieb @ 7\m od_1345463832185_0.docx @ 51992 @ @ 1

Pos : 7.4.8 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /5 Betrieb/M odul e/5.2 Behelfsmäßig Schalten/5.2.2 Am M otorantri eb behelfsm äßig sc halten 030 - 8D Q1, 8DN9, Bil du 8D-Mot- Antrieb @ 0\mod_1331110446137_18.doc x @ 3067 @ @ 1

Fig. 5-2 Hand crank and cordless screwdriver with friction clutch (for 2 to 3 Nm)

Pos : 7.4.9 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

5-227
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Operation
Pos : 7.4.10 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfsm äßig Sc halten/5.2.2 Am M otorantrieb behelfsm äßig sc halten 040 - 8DQ1, 8DN 9 T ext z u elektr omechanische Verri egelung @ 0\mod_1331110856706_18.doc x @ 3076 @ @ 1

For manual operation:

• Loosen the wing nuts [2] and pull off the cover [1].

The limit switch interrupts the control circuit.

Pos : 7.4.11 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfsm äßig Sc halten/5.2.2 Am M otorantrieb behelfsm äßig sc halten 050 - 8DQ1, 8DN 9 Bild2 8D-Mot- Antrieb @ 7\mod_1345464327769_0.docx @ 52016 @ @ 1

Pos : 7.4.12 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfsm äßig Sc halten/5.2.2 Am M otorantrieb behelfsm äßig sc halten 050 - 8DQ1, 8DN 9 Bild2u 8D-M ot-Antri eb @ 0\m od_1331111373826_18.docx @ 3086 @ @ 1

1 Cover
2 Wing bolt
3 Drive

Fig. 5-3 Drive with cover for manual operation and electric locking

Pos : 7.4.13 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfsm äßig Sc halten/5.2.2 Am M otorantrieb behelfsm äßig sc halten 060 - 8DQ1, 8DN 9 @ 7\m od_1345464535296_18.docx @ 52041 @ @ 1

Control operation can be interrupted for the duration of manual operation or at intervals independently from
this by installing the cover in a rotated position and if necessary securing it with a padlock to prevent
removal/turning.

Prerequisites [ 5.1]

• Attach cordless driver or hand crank with sliding clutch on the free shaft end of the motor drive.

• Turn cordless driver or hand crank in the desired direction.

The direction of rotation for switching on or off is indicated on the motor drive housing.

The limit positions of the disconnector and work-in-progress earthing switches and their auxiliary switches
are reached when the hole in the indicator lever of the switch position indicator is over the punch marks on
the indicator plate (marked by a white line) and the sliding clutch in the driver or the crank handle begins to
slip.

Caution!
An incorrect limit position of the earthing switch (faulted position) can result
in damage to the switchgear on restoration of high voltage power!

5-228
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Operation
• Turn crank handle until the limit position of the switching unit is reached. Under no circumstances
shall the switching unit be left in an intermediate position.

As a result of the gear ratio of the motor drive, only a slight mechanical resistance is noticeable during
manual operation, which does not increase until the final phase of spring tensioning.

The limit positions of the high-speed earthing switch and the auxiliary switch for the motor drive are reached
when the stored-energy spring mechanism is switched and the sliding clutch for the cordless driver or crank
handle has started to slip.

 Notice
- High-speed earthing switch.
The high-speed earthing switch must be overhauled after two short-circuit
switching operations!

Chatter of the sliding clutch is generally an indication that the required limit position has been reached. As
chatter can also result from unallowable drag, the mechanical switch position indicator for the switching unit
must always be observed.

After completion of manual operation:

• Remove cordless driver or crank handle.

• Replace cover [1] and thread in wing bolts [2] or screw on cap.

The control circuit is closed again.

Pos : 7.4.14 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1

Pos : 7.4.15 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfsm äßig Sc halten/5.2.3 Leistungssc halter behelfsm äßig sc hal ten 010 - [War nhi nweis e] @ 0\m od_1331110385338_18.docx @ 3063 @ 3 @ 1

5.2.3 Manually switching circuit breaker

On failure of the control voltage, manual switching is possible by mechanically actuating the trip.

• Before each manual switching operation, check for compliance with the interlock conditions at the
mechanical switch position indicators.

• Manual operation shall only be performed by properly trained personnel.

• Before any manual switching, check to verify the presence of the minimum pressure for mechanical
switching (≥ minimum SF6 operating pressure).

Warning!
Risk of serious mechanical damage!
The switchgear interlocking device is deactivated during manual operation.
The operation of switching units contrary to the interlock conditions
specified for the switchgear can result in severe damage to the switching
unit and the switchgear.

5-229
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Operation

Warning!
Risk of serious mechanical damage!
The minimum operating pressure is also required for the SF6 fill for damping
the moving parts in the circuit breaker during the switching operation in the
deenergized condition.
Switching below this gas pressure results in damage to the circuit breaker!

Gas monitoring [ 1.3]

The OFF trip [2] or ON trip [1] must be operated for manual switching.

The circuit breaker can only be switched off if the opening spring is tensioned and can only be switched on if
the closing spring is tensioned. The tensioning condition of the springs is shown by a spring position indicator
[3].
Pos : 7.4.16 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfsm äßig Sc halten/5.2.3 Leistungssc halter behelfsm äßig sc hal ten 040 Einschaltfeder spannen 8DN 9, 8D Q1 @ 36\m od_1534316040015_18.docx @ 747377 @ @ 1

If the closing spring is not under tension due to failure of the control voltage or a defect in the tensioning motor,
it can be manually tensioned with a tool. This requires that the tool – as shown in the Fig. – be placed on the
gear shaft and turned clockwise until the ON latch audibly engages.

Caution!
The tensioning motor starts automatically on restoration of the supply
voltage – possible startle reflex.

• Interrupt the motor power circuit before every positioning of the tool.

Pos : 7.4.17 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfsm äßig Sc halten/5.2.3 Leistungssc halter behelfsm äßig sc hal ten 042 - Bild manuelles Spannen Ei nsc haltfeder 8DN 9, 8D Q1 @ 36\m od_1534315735790_0.docx @ 747333 @ @ 1

5-230
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Operation

Pos : 7.4.18 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfsm äßig Sc halten/5.2.3 Leistungssc halter behelfsm äßig sc hal ten 042 - Bildu m anuelles Spannen Einschaltfeder 8DN 9 8DQ1 @ 36\m od_1534315736301_18.docx @ 747355 @ @ 1

Fig. 5-4 Charging the closing spring using a tool

Pos : 7.4.19 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

5-231
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Operation
Pos : 7.4.20 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfsm äßig Sc halten/5.2.3 Leistungssc halter behelfsm äßig sc hal ten 070 - 8DN 8 nur bei Ei nz elpolantri eb @ 4\m od_1336134848700_18.docx @ 17015 @ @ 1

In version E, the access to the drive shaft is possible only from front. To do this, the special key at the height
of the marking (see figure below) must be guided backwards horizontally and must be placed on the square
of the drive shaft.
Pos : 7.4.21 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfsm äßig Sc halten/5.2.3 Leistungssc halter behelfsm äßig sc hal ten 075 - 8DN 8 Bild nur bei Einz elpol antri eb @ 6\m od_1344156403564_0.docx @ 42724 @ @ 1

Pos : 7.4.22 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.2 Behelfsm äßig Sc halten/5.2.3 Leistungssc halter behelfsm äßig sc hal ten 075 - 8DN 8 Bildu nur bei Ei nz elpolantrieb @ 4\m od_1336135061883_18.docx @ 17026 @ @ 1

Fig. 5-5 Charging the closing spring by means of a special key with extended handle
(Circuit breaker single pole drive)

Pos : 7.5 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

5-232
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Operation
Pos : 7.6.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /5 Betrieb/M odul e/5.3 Kontroll en, M eldung en, Ursachen, M aßnahmen/5.3 Kontr ollen, M eldungen, Urs ac hen, M aß nahm en @ 4\m od_1336135437393_18.docx @ 17037 @ 2 @ 1

5.3 Checks, alarms, causes, measures

This section lists:

- The recommended checks during operation

- The fault alarms and their causes as well as the measures for their correction.

Basic information:

Safety notices [ 0.2]

Checks, alarms, causes, measures [ 5.3]
Manual operation [ 5.2]
Check leak-tightness of gas compartments [ 7.4]
Pressure-temperature diagram for SF6 [ 7.22]
Instructions for handling SF6 [ 7.24]
Gas monitoring [ 1.3]

Pos : 7.6.2 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /5 Betrieb/M odul e/5.3 Kontroll en, M eldung en, Ursachen, M aßnahmen/5.3.1 Kontr ollen w ähr end des Betri ebs @ 39\m od_1548080271253_18.docx @ 771785 @ 3 @ 1

5.3.1 Checks during operation

In all cases, no checks are required during operation. All of the parameters relevant for operating the
switchgear are continuously monitored. Reaching of specified limits is visually and in part also acoustically
signaled. Interlocks take effect for protecting the switchgear if necessary.
Regardless of this, the lamp test devices provided on the displays and digital alarm modules must be operated
as a control.

The following conditions are important for fault-free operation of the switchgear:

- Specified gas density in the individual gas compartments.

- Tensioned activation and deactivation springs.
- The various auxiliary voltages for control, switch position indicators, motor drives, electrical anti-
condensation heaters etc.

Visual (and possibly also acoustic) alarms are triggered in the event of failures or impermissible deviations.
If the deviations reach values that no longer permit unrestricted operation, interlocks automatically take effect
which prevent automatic switching of the circuit breaker both by operating personnel as well as by the
protection devices.

Caution!
The five safety rules in accordance with VDE 0105 must be complied with in
all work on electrical installations!

Caution!
In some cases, deviations from the normal operating conditions necessitate
actions without the interlocks to prevent incorrect switching operations
acting in normal operation – danger of damage to/destruction of system
parts.

5-233
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Operation

- Fault clearance shall only be performed by qualified and correspondingly instructed personnel.

- Observe safety instructions and operating specifications.

- Perform all actions with special caution and great care

Pos : 7.6.3 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /5 Betrieb/M odul e/5.3 Kontroll en, M eldung en, Ursachen, M aßnahmen/5.3.2 M eldung en für den Leistungssc halter @ 4\mod_1336379051441_18.docx @ 17060 @ 3 @ 1

5.3.2 Alarms for the circuit-breaker

Pos : 7.6.4 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /5 Betrieb/M odul e/5.3 Kontroll en, M eldung en, Ursachen, M aßnahmen/5.3.2.1 Leis tungssc halter: SF 6-Verlust @ 39\m od_1546505924005_18.docx @ 768895 @ 4 @ 1

5.3.2.1 Circuit breaker: SF6 loss

Alarm at: 520 kPa

Meaning:
Gas density has decreased in the gas compartment. There is (still) no restriction for operation.

Cause:
Gas has escaped to the surrounding air or to an adjacent gas compartment due to a leak.

Measures:

1. Switch affected gas compartment to deenergized state.

(observe the five safety rules!)

2. Connect filling device to the gas maintenance connection and refill with SF6 from the gas cylinder.

3. Wait 10 minutes.

4. Remove filling device and close gas compartment.

Use the precision pressure gauge to check the gas compartment for leak-tightness at regular intervals (start
with shorter time intervals).

Please notify the responsible SIEMENS representative if the gas pressure decreases in measurable amounts
(note temperature dependence!). Make up gas losses until repair by SIEMENS specialist personnel.

Warning!
Incorrect handling of the switchgear can result in serious bodily injury and
significant damage to the equipment and to the environment.

Danger from accidental arcs.

Observe safety regulations to rule out malfunctions and hazards!

Pos : 7.6.5 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1

5-234
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Operation
Pos : 7.6.6 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /5 Betrieb/M odul e/5.3 Kontroll en, M eldung en, Ursachen, M aßnahmen/5.3.2.2 LS: F unk tionss perr e SF6 @ 39\mod_1546524895793_18.docx @ 769586 @ 4 @ 1

5.3.2.2 Circuit breaker: SF6 function block

Alarm at: 500 kPa

Meaning:
Gas pressure has decreased so far that arc extinguishing is no longer ensured.
The power breaker is electrically blocked to prevent activation or deactivation, as the trip circuits and the
activation circuit are interrupted. The gas loss must be made up to enable renewed switching of the circuit
breaker.

Caution!
The power breaker is not blocked to prevent manual switching at the trip
releases. The parameters for safe switching are not fulfilled on manual
switching – switching under load can result in severe damage to the power
breaker!

Caution!
Manually switch the power breaker only on commissioning or during
maintenance as well as in emergency operation.
Switch the power breaker to a deenergized state before manual switching!

A minimum pressure is also required for the SF6 fill for damping the moving parts in the power breaker during
the switching operation in the deenergized condition – switching below this minimum pressure will result in
damage to the power breaker!
A gas pressure corresponding to the SF6 function block must be present as a minimum.
Check the minimum pressure for mechanical switching before performing any manual switching.

Cause:
Gas has escaped to the surrounding air due to a leak.

Measures:

1. Switch affected gas compartment to deenergized state.

(observe the five safety rules!)

2. Connect filling device to the gas maintenance connection and refill with SF6 from the gas cylinder.

3. Wait 10 minutes.

4. Circuit breaker can be switched.

5. Remove filling device and close gas compartment.

Use the precision pressure gauge to check the gas compartment for leak-tightness at regular intervals (start
with shorter time intervals).

5-235
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Operation
Please notify the responsible SIEMENS representative if the gas pressure decreases in measurable amounts
(note temperature dependence!). Make up gas losses until repair by SIEMENS specialist personnel.

Warning!
Incorrect handling of the switchgear can result in serious bodily injury and
significant damage to the equipment and to the environment.

Danger from accidental arcs.

Observe safety regulations to rule out malfunctions and hazards!

No: null /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18854 @ @ 1

Pos : 7.6.7 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
Pos : 7.6.8 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /5 Betrieb/M odul e/5.3 Kontroll en, M eldung en, Ursachen, M aßnahmen/5.3.2.3 LS: Ei nfeder ents pannt @ 4\mod_1336379729043_18.docx @ 17093 @ 4 @ 1

5.3.2.3 Circuit Breaker: On-spring unloaded

Meaning:
Closing spring is not tensioned. The circuit-breaker is

- locked against closing,

- locked against auto-reclosing (AR).

Caution!
The circuit-breaker is not locked against manual operation from the
releases.

Causes:
a) Charging process running
b) No motor voltage
c) Charging motor defective.

Measures to be taken in the control room:

If the message appears for less than 30 s, no further measures are required. The motor has tensioned the
closing spring. The circuit-breaker is ready for switching again.
If the message appears for more than 30 s, motor run time monitoring starts. [ 5.3.2.5]

Measures to be taken locally:

Cause a) No further action necessary (normal operation)
Cause b) [ 5.3.2.5]
Cause c) [ 5.3.2.5]

Pos : 7.6.9 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1

5-236
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Operation
Pos : 7.6.10 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.3 Kontrollen, Mel dungen, Urs ac hen, Maß nahm en/5.3.2.4 Motorsc hutz @ 4\m od_1336380531148_18.docx @ 17104 @ 4 @ 1

5.3.2.4 Motor protection

Meaning:
The fault current circuit-breaker for the motor circuit has tripped.

Causes:
a) Short circuit in the motor circuit
b) The kinematic chain is sluggish.

Measures to be taken in the control room:

In order to ensure continuity of supply, initiate the appropriate load transfer actions in the system. Then open
the circuit-breaker that caused the alarm. Further measures need to be taken locally after opening.

Measures to be taken locally:

a) Measure the motor circuit. In the case of a short circuit, replace the faulty part.
b) Perform a visual inspection of the drive. Check visually that the spring is in the correct position.

If the spring is only partly wound up, use a suitable spring discharging mechanism to discharge it. Then check
the kinematic chain for sluggishness.

Warning!
Any attempt to relieve by hand or by the release a spring which has not
been wound properly can lead to severe physical injury.

• Only use a suitable spring discharging mechanism to discharge the spring

• After repairing any faults, switch the circuit-breaker on.

Pos : 7.6.11 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1
Pos : 7.6.12 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.3 Kontrollen, Mel dungen, Urs ac hen, Maß nahm en/5.3.2.5 Motorlaufzeitüberw achung @ 4\m od_1336380729729_18.docx @ 17115 @ 4 @ 1

5.3.2.5 Motor run time monitoring

Meaning:
The motor run time monitor has tripped. The motor is switched off by default (if required, the motor can be left
running and just a message output). The run time monitor is set by default to 60 s.
In circuit-breaker drives with AC motors, the set time can be increased in order to prevent motor voltage failures
through AC network operations (no CB-internal malfunction).

Causes:
a) The kinematic chain is broken
b) The kinematic chain is sluggish
c) No motor voltage
d) The charging motor is faulty

Measures to be taken in the control room:

In order to ensure continuity of supply, initiate the appropriate load transfer actions in the system. Then open
the circuit-breaker that caused the alarm. Further measures need to be taken locally after opening.

• Acknowledge alarm using lockswitch after rectifying the fault.

5-237
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Operation
Measures to be taken locally:
a) Perform a visual inspection of the drive. Check that the spring is in the correct position. If the spring is
not wound up, measure the motor circuit. Replace the faulty part when the motor circuit is open. If the
motor circuit is in order, see b).

When the spring is fully wound up, check that the motor shuts down properly. Change the faulty part when the
motor circuit is closed.

b) Perform a visual inspection of the drive. Check that the spring is in the correct position. If the spring is
not (or only partly) wound up, measure the motor circuit. Replace the faulty part when the motor circuit
is open. Check the kinematic chain for sluggishness when the motor circuit is OK. To do this, relieve
the wound-up spring beforehand using the spring relieving mechanism.

Warning!
Any attempt to relieve by hand or by the release a spring which has not
been wound properly can lead to severe physical injury.

• Only use a suitable spring discharging mechanism to discharge the spring

c) Check whether

- motor protecting switch is active

- the necessary voltage is present

d) Replace charging motor.

Pos : 7.6.13 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1
Pos : 7.6.14 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.3 Kontrollen, Mel dungen, Urs ac hen, Maß nahm en/5.3.2.6 Verriegel ung der Kurzunterbr ec hung @ 39\m od_1548055878041_18.docx @ 771595 @ 4 @ 1

5.3.2.6 Interlock blocking of brief interruption

This interlock is not processed in the switch control. This is provided to the control room for blocking the brief
interruption function of the feeder protection.

Meaning:
The power breaker cannot currently switch a brief interruption.

Causes:
a) The tensioning motor is tensioning the springs (operating case)
b) The SF6 function block has been triggered.

Measures:
a) [ 5.3.2.3]
b) [ 5.3.2.2]

Pos : 7.6.15 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.3 Kontrollen, Mel dungen, Urs ac hen, Maß nahm en/5.3.2.7 Mel dung Zw angsgleic hlauf @ 4\m od_1336382567054_18.docx @ 17137 @ 4 @ 1

5.3.2.7 Pole discrepancy alarm

Meaning:
The pole discrepancy alarm is generated when the pole discrepancy supervision has tripped.

Causes:

5-238
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Operation
The pole discrepancy supervision provides for the automatic opening of the closed interrupter unit if, after an
adjustable time period, not all the poles are in the same breaker state. This can have various causes:

a) The command was initiated for a single pole only.

b) One or more releases are defective.
c) One or two drives are not ready for switching.

The waiting time is factory-set to 1 second. This is necessary in order to carry out a single-pole auto-reclosure
without tripping the pole discrepancy supervision.

Measures to be taken in the control room:

a) Acknowledge the alarm after establishing the reason for the tripping of the pole discrepancy.
b) Check whether the command was initiated for a single pole only.

Measures to be taken locally:

a) Check the releases and the electrical trigger circuits of the CB.
b) Check the kinematic chain.

Pos : 7.6.16 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1
Pos : 7.6.17 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.3 Kontrollen, Mel dungen, Urs ac hen, Maß nahm en/5.3.3 Mel dungen der Anlag enbaus tei ne @ 13\m od_1351781657329_18.docx @ 76203 @ 3 @ 1

5.3.3 Signals from switchgear modules

Pos : 7.6.18 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.3 Kontrollen, Mel dungen, Urs ac hen, Maß nahm en/5.3.3.1 SF 6-Verlus t @ 39\m od_1546505988714_18.docx @ 768918 @ 4 @ 1

5.3.3.1 SF6 loss

Alarm at: 370 kPa

Meaning:
Gas density has decreased in the gas compartment. There is (still) no restriction for operation.

Cause:
Gas has escaped to the surrounding air or to an adjacent gas compartment due to a leak.

Measures:

1. Switch affected gas compartment to deenergized state.

(observe the five safety rules!)

2. Connect filling device to the gas maintenance connection and refill with SF6 from the gas cylinder.

3. Wait 10 minutes.

4. Remove filling device and close gas compartment.

Use the precision pressure gauge to check the gas compartment for leak-tightness at regular intervals (start
with shorter time intervals).

Please notify the responsible SIEMENS representative if the gas pressure decreases in measurable amounts
(note temperature dependence!). Make up gas losses until repair by SIEMENS specialist personnel.

5-239
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Operation

Warning!
Incorrect handling of the switchgear can result in serious bodily injury and
significant damage to the equipment and to the environment.

Danger from accidental arcs.

Observe safety regulations to rule out malfunctions and hazards!

Pos : 7.6.19 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1
Pos : 7.6.20 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.3 Kontrollen, Mel dungen, Urs ac hen, Maß nahm en/5.3.3.2 Minimal er Betriebsdr uck @ 39\mod_1546524869019_18.doc x @ 769563 @ 4 @ 1

5.3.3.2 Minimum operating pressure

Alarm at: 350 kPa

Explanation:
Gas density in the gas compartment has decreased to the extent that the insulating capacity of the affected
system module(s) is slightly below the normal level. No further decrease in gas density is permissible; the
affected part of the switchgear must be removed from operation.

Cause:
Gas has escaped to the surrounding air due to a leak.

Measures:

1. Switch affected gas compartment to deenergized state.

(Observe the five safety rules!)

2. Connect filling device to the gas maintenance connection and refill with SF6 from the gas cylinder.

3. Wait 10 minutes.

4. Remove filling device and close gas compartment.

Use the precision pressure gauge to check the gas compartment for leak-tightness at regular intervals (start
with shorter time intervals).

Please notify the responsible SIEMENS representative if the gas pressure decreases in measurable amounts
(note temperature dependence!). Make up gas losses until repair by SIEMENS specialist personnel.

Warning!
Incorrect handling of the switchgear can result in serious bodily injury and
significant damage to the equipment and to the environment.

Danger from accidental arcs.

Observe safety regulations to rule out malfunctions and hazards!

Additional specifications:

5-240
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Operation
• Monitor gas pressure especially carefully and have the repair performed as soon as possible by the
responsible SIEMENS specialist personnel.

Evacuating, filling and emptying the gas compartments [ 7.2]

Pos : 7.6.21 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1
Pos : 7.6.22 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.3 Kontrollen, Mel dungen, Urs ac hen, Maß nahm en/5.3.3.3 SF 6-Druck steigt @ 4\mod_1336382979711_18.doc x @ 17170 @ 4 @ 1

5.3.3.3 SF6 pressure rising

Alarm initiated: 470 kPa

Meaning:
The gas pressure in the gas compartment has risen above the rated operating level.

Cause:
a) Too much gas was pumped in at a lower ambient temperature.
b) Gas has entered the compartment from an adjacent compartment with higher operating pressure (circuit
breaker) through a defective bushing.

The alarm may have already been initiated there

“CB: Loss of SF6”.

Measures to be taken:
Cause a)

• Lower the gas pressure to the rated operating level (as a function of the temperature) by bleeding it
off, or pumping it into the vessel of a service unit.

Cause b)
• Notify the appropriate Siemens agency and ask for specialists to be sent.

Pos : 7.6.23 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/5 Betrieb/Module/5.3 Kontrollen, Mel dungen, Urs ac hen, Maß nahm en/5.3.4 Störstellung @ 4\mod_1336383136836_18.doc x @ 17181 @ 3 @ 1

5.3.4 Fault position

Alarm:
Signal is given when the pin of the disconnector or of the earthing switch is not in its prescribed end position
after a switching process.

Meaning:
The fault position results in a change in the dielectric properties of the switching device concerned. If this state
is allowed to continue, severe damage can result when the high voltage is switched back in.

Cause:
The disconnector or earthing switch has not been moved into its end position (with the switchgear interlock
unit deactivated, i.e. S1 switch in OPEN position).

Measures to be taken:
• Acknowledge fault position via switchgear interlock unit, or acknowledge customer-specific
activation.

• Then close or open by means of appropriate pushbuttons.

5-241
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Operation

• Reactivate switchgear interlock unit.

Pos : 7.6.24 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

5-242
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Maintenance
Pos : 8.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /6 Instandhaltung/Modul e/6 Ins tandhaltung/6 Ins tandhaltung @ 0\mod_1331121759710_18.docx @ 3235 @ 1 @ 1

6 Maintenance

6-243
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Maintenance

 Notice
The representations in the following illustrations can differ, in total or in
part, from the delivered version. This applies particularly to the current track
guiding, the location and execution of the bushings and the ancillary
equipment.

Pos : 8.2.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /6 Instandhaltung/Modul e/6.1 Vor aus setzungen/6.1 Vor aussetzungen @ 0\m od_1331121890930_18.docx @ 3244 @ 2 @ 1

6-244
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Maintenance
6.1 Prerequisites
This section describes

- The procedures for safe work

- The requirements for personnel deployment
- Maintenance packages
- The measures to be initiated in the event of faults.

Basic information:

Safety notices [ 0.2]

Cycles and maintenance service [ 6.2]
Maintenance work [ 6.3]
Instructions for handling SF6 [ 7.24]
Cleanliness on the project site [ 7.25]
Disposing of high-voltage switching devices and systems [ 7.26]

Pos : 8.2.2 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /6 Instandhaltung/Modul e/6.1 Vor aus setzungen/6.1.1 Sicherheitsm aß nahmen - mit RC-T eiler @ 13\mod_1351508747225_18.docx @ 75060 @ 3 @ 1

6.1.1 Basic safety measures

Danger!
During operation, certain parts of the switchgear carry dangerous voltage.
Improper operation and non-observance of safety instructions can result in
death, severe personal injury and substantial property and environment
damage.

Before any work starts:

• Switch off and isolate

• Secure against reclosing
• Check for de-energized state
• Earth and short circuit the equipment
• Cover or cut off adjacent live parts.

Warning!
In operation, parts of the drive systems are spring charged. Even in
discharged state, springs are pre-charged.
The closing spring is automatically recharged after closing as long as the
control voltage and motor voltage of the circuit-breaker drive are not
switched off.
The spring snap mechanism of the high speed earthing switch is charged
during closing and opening.
Improper operation of the switchgear and non-observance of safety
instructions can result in serious injury to personnel and substantial
damage to property and the environment.

6-245
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Maintenance
When working on the circuit-breaker, discharge the closing and opening springs. To do this

• Switch off the motor voltage.

• Open the circuit-breaker if it is set to CLOSE.
• Close the circuit-breaker.
• Open the circuit-breaker again.
• Switch off the control voltage.

When working on the high-speed earthing switch, turn off the control and motor voltage.

Danger!
During operation, certain parts of the switchgear are under SF6 pressure.
Under certain circumstances, SF6 and its decomposition products may
represent a hazard.
Improper operation and non-observance of safety instructions can result in
death, severe personal injury and substantial property and environment
damage.

• Reduce the SF6 pressure to the required value. Install the appropriate service units for work with
gas.

• When dismantling modules with gastight bushings whose convex side is located within the module to
be dismantled, the adjacent gas compartment (on the concave side of the gastight bushing) must
also depressurized to prevent gas loss. If depressurization were not carried out, the pressure would
escape through the groove of the inner O-ring situated in the cast-resin body.

• When working in gas compartments, if there is a danger of mechanical load on the bushing due to
the use of tools or as a result of falling objects, the pressure in the adjacent gas compartment must
be reduced to < 0.5 bar.

• If the occurrence of SF6 decomposition products is to be expected, the prescribed protective

measures must be taken.

Instructions for handling SF6 [ 7.24]

Caution!
On the primary side, a removed RC divider can have a residual charge,
because of the condensers fitted, even after switching off and earthing of
the switchgear.
On the secondary side a voltage is applied when the switchgear is in
operation.
If it is touched the charge is balanced via the person.
The shock can lead to a defence reaction and this can result in bodily injury
and material and environmental damage.

6-246
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Maintenance
• Before removing an RC divider from the switchgear, the relevant installation component must be
insulated and earthed.

• After removing the RC divider from the switchgear, short-circuit the primary side of the RC divider
between the primary conductor and the housing.

• Before starting work on the measurement and protection devices, all secondary side outputs of the
RC divider must be short-circuited.

Danger!
Failing to observe a minimum safe distance to live system components,
particularly outdoor bushings, may result in death, severe injury and
considerable damage to property and environmental damage.
Before work on high-voltage systems can be carried out, a safe working
area must be created.

• Any work on high-voltage systems may be performed by adequately qualified personnel only.

• Always observe a minimum safe distance to live system components.

Instructions for handling SF6 [ 7.24]

Pos : 8.2.3 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

Pos : 8.2.4 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /6 Instandhaltung/Modul e/6.1 Vor aus setzungen/6.1.2 Antrieb gegen Betätigen sic her n @ 39\m od_1544705731550_18.docx @ 766023 @ 3 @ 1

6.1.2 Secure drive against operation

Pos : 8.2.5 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /6 Instandhaltung/Modul e/6.1 Vor aus setzungen/6.1.3 TR + ES 040 - 8D Q1 1/3, 8DN 9 elektrom ec hanisc h @ 13\mod_1351509507247_18.docx @ 75083 @ 4 @ 1

6.1.2.1 Electromechanically interlocking drives

Electromechanical interlocking is achieved by interruption of the control circuit by a limit switch.
During normal operation, the limit switch sensor is in contact with the cover for manual operation and electrical
interlocking [1]. On removal of the interlocking cover, the limit switch opens the control circuit and remains in
this condition as long as the interlocking cover is installed in a rotated position.

Procedure:

1. Remove the padlock if one is present.

2. Loosen the wing nuts [2] on the interlocking cover.

3 Pull off the interlocking cover [1].

4. Set the interlocking cover in place, rotated by 180°.

The cover marking must point to Position O ”Control blocked”. The control circuit is then interrupted.

5. Tighten the wing nuts [1] on the interlocking cover.

The interlocking cover can also be secured using a padlock as an option.

Pos : 8.2.6 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /6 Instandhaltung/Modul e/6.1 Vor aus setzungen/6.1.3 TR + ES 053 - 8D Q1 1/3, 8DN 9 elektrom ec hanisc h Bild1 8D-Mot- Antrieb @ 7\mod_1345538828021_0.docx @ 52223 @ @ 1

6-247
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Maintenance

Pos : 8.2.7 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /6 Instandhaltung/Modul e/6.1 Vor aus setzungen/6.1.3 TR + ES 054- 8DQ1 1/3, 8DN 9 elek trom echanisc h Bildu 8D-Mot- Antrieb @ 7\mod_1345539322553_18.docx @ 52277 @ @ 1

1 Cover
2 Wing bolt
3 Drive

Fig. 6-1 Drive with cover for manual operation and electric locking

Pos : 8.2.8 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /6 Instandhaltung/Modul e/6.1 Vor aus setzungen/6.1.3.4 TR + ES 150 - 8DN 9 2/6, 8DQ1 1/3 m ec hanisc h blocki eren @ 11\mod_1347872548203_18.doc x @ 66558 @ 4 @ 1

6.1.2.2 Mechanical blocking of the disconnector and earthing switch motor drive
Pos : 8.2.9 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /6 Instandhaltung/Modul e/6.1 Vor aus setzungen/6.1.3.4 TR + ES 151 - 8DN 9 2/6, 8DQ1 1/3 m ec hanisc h blocki eren @ 7\m od_1345541194105_18.docx @ 52402 @ @ 1

As an option, the cover for manual switching can be replaced by a mechanical blocking device and fastened
with wing bolts. After insertion, the control circuit is interrupted by the limit switch and simultaneously the
inductor shaft of the motor is positively interlocked.
The mechanical blocking device can also be secured with a padlock.

Pos : 8.2.10 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/6 Ins tandhaltung/M odule/6.1 Vorauss etz ungen/6.1.3.4 TR + ES 152 - 8DN9 2/6, 8DQ1 1/3 mechani sch bl ocki eren Bil d4 8D-M ot-Antri eb @ 7\m od_1345541196011_0.doc x @ 52427 @ @ 1
Ich

Pos : 8.2.11 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/6 Ins tandhaltung/M odule/6.1 Vorauss etz ungen/6.1.3.4 TR + ES 153 - 8DN9 2/6, 8DQ1 1/3 mechani sch bl ocki eren Bil du 8D-M ot-Antri eb @ 7\m od_1345541196433_18.docx @ 52452 @ @ 1

Fig. 6-2 Mechanical blocking device

Pos : 8.2.12 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1

6-248
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Maintenance
Pos : 8.2.13 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/6 Ins tandhaltung/M odule/6.1 Vorauss etz ungen/6.1.3.6 Verriegel ung und/oder Blockier ung mit Vorhängesc hloß sic her n 010 @ 0\mod_1331123409998_18.docx @ 3300 @ 4 @ 1

6.1.2.3 Securing locking and/or blocking with a padlock

All fixtures can be secured from removal and/or rotation by using a padlock.
Pos : 8.2.14 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/6 Ins tandhaltung/M odule/6.1 Vorauss etz ungen/6.1.3.6 Verriegel ung und/oder Blockier ung mit Vorhängesc hloß sic her n 020 - Bild @ 6\m od_1344153067505_0.docx @ 42070 @ @ 1

Pos : 8.2.15 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/6 Ins tandhaltung/M odule/6.1 Vorauss etz ungen/6.1.3.6 Verriegel ung und/oder Blockier ung mit Vorhängesc hloß sic her n 020 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1331123414420_18.docx @ 3310 @ @ 1

Fig. 6-3 Example of securing with a padlock

Pos : 8.2.16 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/6 Ins tandhaltung/M odule/6.1 Vorauss etz ungen/6.1.4 Personalei ns atz @ 11\mod_1348056107517_18.doc x @ 66860 @ 3 @ 1

6.1.3 Assignment of personnel

The inspection and maintenance services may only be carried out by qualified personnel.
The advantage of calling in SIEMENS personnel is that the work is always carried out in accordance with the
latest knowledge and experience gained from a large number of metal-enclosed gas-insulated switchgear.
This is then reflected in the switchgear having a higher reliability standard
The experience of the SIEMENS personnel also ensures completion of the work in the shortest possible time.
Consequently, the periods of reduction or interruption to the operation of the switchgear line are kept as short
as possible.
SIEMENS qualified personnel should be supported, however, by the customer's/user's personnel.
Assignment of SIEMENS personnel also means that tools and measuring instruments etc. that are usually not
worth buying are provided on a hire basis.

Pos : 8.2.17 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/6 Ins tandhaltung/M odule/6.1 Vorauss etz ungen/6.1.5 Wartungspakete @ 42\m od_1576843759908_18.docx @ 830434 @ 3 @ 1

6.1.4 Maintenance packages

Maintenance packages are supplied by Siemens against payment. These contain suitable gasket material
depending on the installation service.
Stockpiling of maintenance packages is not recommended, as some parts such as O-rings are subject to
aging.

Only spare parts approved by the manufacturer shall be used.

Pos : 8.2.18 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1

6-249
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Maintenance
Pos : 8.2.19 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/6 Ins tandhaltung/M odule/6.1 Vorauss etz ungen/6.1.6 Verhalten bei Störungen @ 0\mod_1331123682627_18.doc x @ 3323 @ 3 @ 1

6.1.5 Responding to malfunctions

Any unintended deterioration in the proper functioning of the switchgear as a whole or one of its bays is
regarded as a disturbance.
A disturbance is caused by failure of one or several parts of the switchgear. These parts have then lost their
wear reserve prematurely, possibly as a result of maloperation. For this reason, high-speed earthing switches
that caused three-phase fault by being closed inadvertently should be inspected and, if necessary, repaired.
In the event of a disturbance apply to the appropriate SIEMENS office for assignment of qualified personnel,
stating the type and extent of the disturbance as accurately as possible and naming any parts that are showing
signs of damage. To simplify identification state the part designations given in these instructions (terminology
and/or part numbers used, reference to drawings).

Checks, alarms, causes, measures [ 5.3]

Pos : 8.3 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

6-250
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Maintenance
Pos : 8.4.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /6 Instandhaltung/Modul e/6.2 Zykl en und Ins tandhaltungs dienste/6.2 Zykl en und Ins tandhaltungs dienste @ 0\mod_1331123899020_18.docx @ 3330 @ 2 @ 1

6.2 Cycles and maintenance service

The metal-enclosed, gas-insulated switchgear is designed and manufactured so as to yield an optimum
balance between the design and the materials used on the one hand and the maintenance expenditure and
time intervals between maintenance measures on the other. This provides for optimum utilization of the
equipment.
The switchgear offers a high degree of operating reliability over time while simultaneously approaching the
wear limit, e.g. due to burning, aging, corrosion etc.

The switchgear system must be maintained to retain the operating reliability. The purpose of every
maintenance measure is to
- Determine the extent to which specific parts are worn and to evaluate their condition,
- Ensure that parts that are still good continue to retain their good condition,
- Replace specific parts with new ones as a precaution.

This section describes

- The effects on determination of the maintenance intervals
- Determination of the starting date for the maintenance interval timeline
- The various maintenance services with the anticipated restrictions for operation
- The permissible number of opening operations as a function of breaking current

Basic information:

Safety notices [ 0.2]

Prerequisites [ 5.1]
Checks, alarms, causes, measures [ 5.3]
Instructions for handling SF6 [ 7.24]
Cleanliness on the project site [ 7.25]
Disposing of high-voltage switching devices and systems [ 7.26]

Pos : 8.4.2 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /6 Instandhaltung/Modul e/6.2 Zykl en und Ins tandhaltungs dienste/6.2.1 Einfl üss e auf W artungsinterv all @ 0\m od_1331123945021_18.docx @ 3334 @ 3 @ 1

6.2.1 Influences on the maintenance interval

Inspection and maintenance services are categorized in line with the work involved and designated
accordingly.

Pos : 8.4.3 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /6 Instandhaltung/Modul e/6.2 Zykl en und Ins tandhaltungs dienste/6.2.1.1 Einfl üss e durc h m ec hanisc hen Verschl eiß und/oder Sc haltungen @ 0\mod_1331123983412_18.doc x @ 3338 @ 4 @ 1

6.2.1.1 Influences through mechanical wear and/or switching operations

Switchgear that is operated frequently obviously suffers greater wear than switchgear operated only seldom.
The following distinction must be made here:

- mechanical wear caused by friction because of the number of (mechanical) operating cycles and
- arc erosion due to the switching of load current or fault current.

The wear reserve is calculated so that in most cases the various maintenance services can be performed at
fixed intervals. Only if switchgear is operated particularly frequently, the permissible number of mechanical
operations and/or load switching operations may make it necessary to bring forward the corresponding
maintenance service.

The prescribed maintenance intervals and the instructions for maintenance work and the replacement of parts
must be complied with.
Pos : 8.4.4 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1

6-251
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Maintenance
Pos : 8.4.5 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /6 Instandhaltung/Modul e/6.2 Zykl en und Ins tandhaltungs dienste/6.2.1.2 Schädliche Umw eltei nfl üss e @ 34\m od_1521786429722_18.docx @ 718875 @ 4 @ 1

6.2.1.2 Harmful environmental influences

Metal-enclosed gas-insulated switchgear equipment is provided with surface sealing to protect it against
corrosion. Additional measures are required to ensure that this surface sealing is effective.

To protect against harmful environmental effects, the surface sealing should be regularly checked for incipient
corrosion damage at intervals not exceeding 24 months starting from the start date.

Starting date [ 6.2.2]

This inspection shall be conducted by an expert specialist contracted by the plant owner/operator.

 Note
Care, maintenance and checking/inspection of the coating system requires a
fundamental knowledge of surface engineering and familiarity with the
associated technical terms.

Owing to his technical training, knowledge and experience as well as

knowledge of the applicable regulations to evaluate the assigned work, a
specialist is capable of identifying potential hazards and of taking appropriate
safety measures. Specialists are obligated to comply with the applicable
specific technical regulations.

The visual inspection involves checking the surface of the sealing for any damage and/or anomalies (cracks,
wear, notches, bubbles, creep corrosion or partial flaking of the surface coating) and for contamination. Any
detected anomalies shall be evaluated on the basis of EN ISO 4628, Part 1 to 10.

The results of the visual inspection must be documented (photo documentation) and provided to the system
manufacturer to enable him to react appropriately, where required in cooperation with the plant owner/operator,
before the damage to the surface sealing advances to a point at which its elimination becomes very expensive.

Ambient conditions which exert special stress on the surface sealing demand heightened requirements.
Special stress can bring about premature aging or damage of the protective surface sealing and make repairs
necessary earlier than normally required by the protection applied on account of appearance and other
reasons.
In the case of ambient conditions that involve special stress, the inspection intervals may have to be reduced,
based on the results of the initial visual inspection.
This special stress, which can adversely impact the surface sealing, includes:

- Temperature
Large differences in temperature
Constantly high or low ambient temperatures
- Water
High level of precipitation
Formation of condensate
- UV radiation
Direct sunlight
Ozone
6-252
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Maintenance
- Reducing or oxidizing substances
Acidic solution (pH level below 6.5)
Base solution (pH level above 7.5)
Chloride ions (e.g. salt solution)
Sulfur compounds (e.g sulfur dioxide, hydrogen sulfide)
Nitrogen compounds (e.g., nitrogen oxides, ammonia)
- Physical wear mechanisms
Abrasion (sand, ice crystals)
- Biological factors
Microbially induced corrosion (e.g. algae, moss)
Bird droppings, insects, acids, alkalis or salts, organic solvents and corrosive gases).

The protection duration or the time period until the first corrective maintenance measures can become
necessary for reasons of corrosion protection is > 15 years for indoor systems under normal operating
conditions, < 15 years for indoor systems under elevated loading and < 5 years for outdoor installations.
The protection duration is not a "warranty period"; it is a technical term to aid in planning maintenance work.
The basic climatic and ambient conditions which are significant for providing proper corrosion protection are
taken into account for defining the protection period. Proper corrosion protection exists for steel parts when
the coating system has not exceeded rust grade Ri 3 based on ISO 4628-3.

Any contamination and/or damage to the surface sealing shall be eliminated by a specialist in coordination
with the plant manufacturer.

 Note
Care, maintenance and checking/inspection of the coating system requires a
fundamental knowledge of surface engineering and familiarity with the
associated technical terms.

Based on his/her specialized training, knowledge, skills and expertise and

familiarity with the pertinent regulations and guidelines, a specialist is
capable of assessing the work assigned to him/her, of recognizing any
associated risks and of implementing all appropriate safety/protection
measures required. A specialist must comply with the applicable technical
regulations.

Pos : 8.4.6 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /6 Instandhaltung/Modul e/6.2 Zykl en und Ins tandhaltungs dienste/6.2.2 Starttermin @ 0\mod_1331124823298_18.docx @ 3346 @ 3 @ 1

6.2.2 Starting date

The starting date for the inspection and maintenance schedule is that at which the filter material is placed in
the gas compartments, and these are evacuated and filled with gas.
However, since not all compartments are filled with gas on the same day, a starting date for the switchgear
installation (or its various construction stages) must be set. Generally, differences of between two and three
months are of no significance here. It does not matter either whether the gas-filled switchgear is put into service
or not, following its installation.
The starting date should be recorded in writing and the number of mechanical operations and fault current
operations etc. monitored to see whether inspection and maintenance should be carried out as a function of
time or of wear.

Pos : 8.4.7 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1

6-253
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Maintenance
Pos : 8.4.8 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /6 Instandhaltung/Modul e/6.2 Zykl en und Ins tandhaltungs dienste/6.2.3 Instandhaltungsmaßnahm en - T abelle 8D Q1 6, 8DN9 2 @ 42\m od_1582280276722_18.docx @ 838344 @ 3 @ 1

6.2.3 Maintenance measures

Maintenancemeasures due based on time or wear1)

Time Wear limit Remarks
Inspection Circuit-breakers: The switchgear remains in
After 12 years After 6,000 mechanical switching operation. The bays must be locked
cycles out and tagged out in sequence.

The gas compartments are not

opened.
Preventive maintenance Circuit breakers: The switchgear system is shut
After 25 years after 10,000 mechanical down either in sections or in its
entirety depending on the scope
operating cycles
and implementation.

Disconnector switch:
The gas compartments are
after 2,000 mechanical opened.
operating cycles

Earthing switch:
after 2,000 mechanical
operating cycles
Check of contact system Circuit breakers: The affected module must be
if the maximum permissible number locked out and tagged out.
of switching cycles under load as
per No. 6.2.4.1 is reached. The affected gas compartment is
opened.
High-speed earthing switches:
after every 2nd activation to high
voltage live parts
Inspection The maintenance program is restarted.
After 37 years
1) Repair intervals must be shortened accordingly under extreme ambient conditions such as heavy dirt or dust loads. Cf.
Also 6.2.1.2 Harmful environmental influences. Based on this the coating systems must be regularly checked at
intervals not exceeding 24 months and repaired if necessary.
Pos : 8.4.9 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
Pos : 8.4.10 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/6 Ins tandhaltung/M odule/6.2 Zykl en und Instandhal tungsdi enste/6.2.4 Kontroll e des Kontaktsys tems @ 0\m od_1331125491275_18.docx @ 3373 @ 3 @ 1

6.2.4 Inspection of the contact system

Pos : 8.4.11 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/6 Ins tandhaltung/M odule/6.2 Zykl en und Instandhal tungsdi enste/6.2.4.1 Kontrolle des Kontaktsys tems des Leistungssc halters in Abhängigkeit 01 @ 0\m od_1331125571979_18.docx @ 3377 @ 4 @ 1

6.2.4.1 Contact system check as a function of the breaking current

If the permissible number of interruptions is reached before the maintenance date, the specified maintenance
has to be carried out earlier.
The permissible number of interruptions shown in the graphics below refers to a pole of a triple-pole circuit-
breaker.
As a result, three times as many single-pole interruptions may be caused for the triple-pole circuit-breaker.

Pos : 8.4.12 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/6 Ins tandhaltung/M odule/6.2 Zykl en und Instandhal tungsdi enste/6.2.4.1 Kontrolle des Kontaktsys tems des Leistungssc halters in Abhängigkeit 02 - Bil d1 @ 43\m od_1590484840996_0.docx @ 859515 @ @ 1

6-254
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Maintenance

I
Pos : 8.4.13 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/6 Ins tandhaltung/M odule/6.2 Zykl en und Instandhal tungsdi enste/6.2.4.1 Kontrolle des Kontaktsys tems des Leistungssc halters in Abhängigkeit 02 - Bil du @ 0\m od_1331125698559_18.docx @ 3382 @ @ 1

6-255
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Maintenance
n max. permissible number of interruptions
I breaking current in kA

Fig. 6-4 Max. permissible number of interruptions as a function of the breaking current.

Pos : 8.4.14 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/6 Ins tandhaltung/M odule/6.2 Zykl en und Instandhal tungsdi enste/6.2.4.2 Kontrolle des Kontaktsys tems des Sc hneller dungssc halters @ 1\m od_1333107740538_18.docx @ 13142 @ 4 @ 1

6.2.4.2 Inspection of the high-speed earthing switch contact system

The contact system of the high-speed earthing switch must be inspected after the second switching into
connection with conductors carrying high-voltage.
Pos : 8.4.15 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

6-256
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
Maintenance
Pos : 8.5 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /6 Instandhaltung/Modul e/6.3 Ins tandhaltungs arbeiten/6.3 Ins tandhaltungs arbeiten - Tabelle @ 43\mod_1590484395516_18.doc x @ 859491 @ 2 @ 1

6.3 Maintenance work

Maintenance Section
Inspection
Maintenance
Entire installation, including leads
• • Check external condition, note switching cycle counter 7.1
• • Check corrosion protection and repair if necessary. 7.20
• • Visually check rupture disk with protective plate for damage. -
• • Check functioning of anti-condensation heaters in drive housings and cabinets 7.11
• • Check for secure cables and screwed cable glands and tighten terminals if 7.11
necessary.
Gas work
• • Check gas fill pressure with precision pressure gauge. 7.4
• Extract SF6 gas 7.2
• Replace filters 7.17
• Evacuate gas compartment and fill with SF6 gas 7.2
• Check moisture content of SF6 gas 7.5
• Measure SF6 air content 7.5
• Perform leak test on system ready for operation (in the event of gas loss and in all 7.4
cases on covers and flanges that have been disconnected)
Gas monitoring
• • Check functioning of density monitors 7.3
Circuit breaker
• Check drive 7.9
• Evaluation of condition of contact system by Siemens Service -
• • Check functioning of trip circuits 7.10
• • Check functioning of activation interlock 7.3
• • Check functioning of SF6 function interlock. 7.3
• • Check functioning of anti-pumping function 7.10
• • Check control system. 7.10
• Check electrical connections, tighten terminals if necessary 7.11
Disconnector and earthing switch module as well as work-in-progress earthing and high-speed
earthing switch
• Check drive 7.8
• Evaluation of condition of contact system by Siemens Service -
• Check electrical connections, tighten terminals if necessary 7.11
Expansion joint
• Check setting of the removal expansion joint. Establish bolted connections in 4.3.1
accordance with specifications
Current and voltage transformers and RC voltage dividers
• Check electrical connections in terminal box or control cabinet, tighten terminals if 7.12 / 7.13 /
necessary. 7.14
The switchgear system is a complex technical product. Modifications to primary and secondary components
shall only be made in agreement with the manufacturer, as otherwise correct functioning and safety may no
longer be ensured under some circumstances.
Pos : 9.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anweis ungen/Module/7 Allgem eine Hinw eis e/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eisungen @ 4\m od_1336390058800_18.docx @ 17193 @ 1 @ 1

6-257
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r Maintenance

6-258
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions
7 General considerations and instructions

7-259
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions

 Notice
The representations in the following illustrations can differ, in total or in
part, from the delivered version. This applies particularly to the current track
guiding, the location and execution of the bushings and the ancillary
equipment.

Pos : 9.2 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

7-260
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.3 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anweis ungen/Module/7.1 Z us tandskontr olle der Betri ebs stätte und Anl age/7.1 Zus tandsk ontr olle der Betri ebs stätte und Anlage @ 42\m od_1582883638932_18.docx @ 839167 @ 2 @ 1

7.1 Condition check of facility and switchgear

This section lists the evaluation criteria for checking the external condition of the facility and of the switchgear.

Basic information:

Safety notices [ 0.2]

Caution!
If they are not sufficiently covered, parts moved by switching operations
can cause crushing of body parts when touching or reaching behind them.

- In the event that it is necessary to access the system for a satisfactory inspection, no switching
operations shall be performed during this period.

- Necessary organizational specifications must be documented.

- The inspection must be performed on the basis of the evaluation criteria below and the results
recorded.

- Measures for correction of the deficiencies must be determined if necessary.

Evaluation criteria for facility:

- General tidiness and cleanliness
- The structural cladding must be free from damage, especially the fire protection structures and their
closures.
- Emergency equipment and firefighting resources must be available.
- Documents for safe operation of the switchgear system (operating instructions, HP drawings etc.)
must be available.

Evaluation criteria for system:

- Cleanliness
- Paint damage
- Rust
- Check expansion joint bellows for deformation and impact damage
Pos : 9.4 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

7-261
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.5 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

7-262
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.6.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anweis ungen/Module/7.2 Ev akui eren, Füll en und Leeren der Gasräume/7.2 Ev ak uier en, F üllen und Leeren der Gasräum e @ 42\m od_1576667346934_18.docx @ 828330 @ 2 @ 1

7.2 Evacuating, filling and emptying the gas compartments

This Section describes the following in detail:

- Evacuation and filling of the gas compartments

- Emptying of gas compartments.

Basic information:

Safety notices [ 0.2]

Install/replace filter material [ 7.17]
Instructions for handling SF6 [ 7.24]
Cleanliness on the project site [ 7.25]

Warning!
SF6 is heavier than air and can displace the air required for breathing in
lower or confined spaces.

Suffocation hazard – for more than 35% volume concentration of SF6 in the
air!

• Work entailing a suffocation hazard due to escaped or escaping SF6 shall only be performed if a
second person familiar with the hazards is present. Both persons must remain in constant visual and
acoustic contact.

• Provide for sufficient ventilation and exhaust during all activities on gas compartments.

Necessary organizational provisions must be recorded in the method statement.

 Note
Evacuation and emptying must be performed with the maintenance unit or a
suitable vacuum pump. Its design ensures environmentally compatible
evacuation.
Filling and refilling can also be performed with a compressed gas cylinder
with a filling device.
On filling and refilling, a safety valve must be installed between the
maintenance unit or compressed gas cylinder and the gas compartment that
prevents unintentional violation of the maximum permissible operating
pressures in the gas compartment to be filled by more than 10%.

7-263
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions
The following information is given in the HP drawing:

- Filling pressures, hazard alarms

- Designation of the gas compartments
- Volume of the gas compartments and
- Weight of SF6 fill.

Order documentation

Pos : 9.6.2 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anweis ungen/Module/7.2 Ev akui eren, Füll en und Leeren der Gasräume/7.2.1 Ev ak uier en und F üllen der Gasr äum e 01 @ 42\m od_1576669755572_18.docx @ 828353 @ 3 @ 1

7.2.1 Evacuating and filling gas compartments

Evacuation and filling must be performed with the maintenance unit or a suitable vacuum pump. The system
can also be filled directly from the compressed gas cylinder using a filling device after evacuation with a
maintenance unit.

1. Install filter.

2. Remove union nut for the maintenance connection of the gas compartment to be tested.

3. Connect maintenance unit to the maintenance connection via the safety valve. See operating
instructions for the maintenance device or the vacuum pump for handling the vacuum equipment.

If pressure is measured in the suction line, the valve between the pump and the gas compartment must be
closed for the duration of the measurement.

4. Evacuate the ventilated gas compartment to a pressure of < 20 mbar (2 kPa). Continue evacuation
for an additional 15 min after this pressure is achieved.

5. After the completion of evacuation, switch the maintenance unit to filling or connect compressed gas
cylinder with filling device and safety valve to the gas compartment.

6. Take fill pressure for the gas compartment to be filled from the HP drawing and determine tank
temperature.

The specified pressures are always based on a tank temperature of +20°C. The gas pressures resulting at
various temperatures must be taken from the pressure/temperature diagram.

Caution!
The tanks are designed in part for different filling pressures.

7. Obtain information on the maximum permissible operating pressure before filling the individual tanks.

8. Fill gas compartment. When the fill pressure is achieved (with temperature correction if necessary),
stop filling, disconnect the maintenance unit or filling device from the maintenance connection and
record the fill pressure and tank temperature.

7-264
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions
9. When using cable connector jacks on the cable terminator without a high-voltage cable or blind
connector, close these off with pressurized gas-tight covers, evacuate and fill.

Any necessary checking of the density monitors should be performed during filling.

10. Screw union nut on the maintenance connection.

Pressure-temperature diagram for SF6 [ 7.22]

Pos : 9.6.3 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anweis ungen/Module/7.2 Ev akui eren, Füll en und Leeren der Gasräume/7.2.1 Ev ak uier en und F üllen der Gasr äum e 02 - Bild1 @ 7\mod_1345548586547_0.docx @ 52575 @ @ 1

Pos : 9.6.4 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anweis ungen/Module/7.2 Ev akui eren, Füll en und Leeren der Gasräume/7.2.1 Ev ak uier en und F üllen der Gasr äum e 02 - Bildu @ 7\mod_1345548641171_18.doc x @ 52599 @ @ 1

1 Pressure reducer regulating valve

2 Pressure reducer shut-off valve
3 Distributor with shut-off valve (for density monitor testing)
4 Precision pressure gauge (0 to 10 bar, class 0.6)
5 Safety valve
6 Filler stub

Fig. 7-1 Connecting the gas cylinder with SF6 filling device and safety valve

Pos : 9.6.5 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-265
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.6.6 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anweis ungen/Module/7.2 Ev akui eren, Füll en und Leeren der Gasräume/7.2.2 Leer en und Bel üften der Gasräume @ 25\mod_1395047613483_18.docx @ 233183 @ 3 @ 1

7.2.2 Emptying and venting of gas compartments.

The gas compartments shall only be emptied using a maintenance device.

The maintenance device shall achieve a final pressure safely below 2 kPa (20 mbar) in its performance data
on extracting SF6. Under some circumstances, additional equipment such as suction pump units may have to
be implemented in order to achieve the required extraction performance when using older maintenance
equipment.

1. Remove union nut for the maintenance connection of the gas compartment to be tested. Connect
maintenance device with maintenance connection. See operating instructions for the maintenance
device for handling the maintenance device.

If pressure is measured in the suction line, the valve between the pump and the gas compartment must be
closed for the duration of the measurement.

2. Pump out SF6 from the system compartments until a final pressure of < 2 kPa (20 mbar) is established.
If the extraction equipment has better performance data, the lowest possible final pressure must be
targeted.

3. Vent the system compartments via vent filters if possible until atmospheric pressure is reached.

SF6 can be reused provided its decomposition products do not exceed a level of 1 ppmv. The measurement
should be made with a measurement system that does not release the SF6 to the surroundings but rather
retains it in a closed system.

4. Screw union nut on the maintenance connection.

Pos : 9.6.7 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-266
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.7.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anweis ungen/Module/7.3 Gasüberw ac hung prüfen/7.3 Gas überwachung prüfen @ 0\m od_1331127950150_18.docx @ 3442 @ 2 @ 1

7.3 Checking the gas monitoring system

This section contains a detailed description of

- testing the density monitor

- replacing the density monitor.

Basic information:

Gas monitoring [ 1.3]

Gas monitoring [ 2.3]
Evacuating, filling and emptying the gas compartments [ 7.2]
Pressure-temperature diagram for SF6 [ 7.22]
Instructions for handling SF6 [ 7.24]

Warning!
SF6 is heavier than air and, in low-lying or confined spaces, can displace the
air required for breathing.

There is danger of suffocation if the SF6 concentration in the air

exceeds 35 %!

• Work involving a risk of suffocation as a result of escaped or escaping SF6 may only be performed in
the presence of a second person who must likewise be familiar with the risks involved. Both persons
must remain in constant visual and acoustic contact.

• Necessary organizational stipulations should be adopted in the operating instructions.

• When any work is done on gas compartments, there must be adequate ventilation.

Pos : 9.7.2 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
Pos : 9.7.3 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anweis ungen/Module/7.3 Gasüberw ac hung prüfen/7.3.2 Dichtew äc hter ab- und anbauen 010 @ 35\mod_1526303963161_18.docx @ 731515 @ 3 @ 1

7.3.1 Removing and reinstalling density monitor

The density monitor must be removed

- in the event of defects
- for testing.

Density monitors can be replaced without having to remove or pup out the gas fill in the affected gas
compartment.

Danger!
Electrical voltage – POTENTIALLY FATAL HAZARD!

Removing density monitor:

7-267
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions

1. Switch off control voltage.

2. Disconnect plug-in or terminal connection of signal leads (depending on design).

3. Unscrew density monitor.

Reinstalling density monitor

1. Check for correct seating of the O-ring in the seal groove.

2. Install density monitor.

3. Attach plug-in or terminal connection of signal leads (depending on design).

4. Check leak-tightness of the connection.

Pos : 9.7.4 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
Pos : 9.7.5 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anweis ungen/Module/7.3 Gasüberw ac hung prüfen/7.3.1 Pr üfen der Dic htewäc hter @ 42\m od_1576672405932_18.docx @ 828399 @ 3 @ 1

7.3.2 Density monitor testing

The measured values for signals from the density monitors were preset in the factory. Subsequent adjustment
on site is not possible and not necessary. The settings and fill pressures are documented in the HP diagram.
Only function testing must be performed.
Testing is performed by increasing/decreasing the gas pressure and measuring the gas pressure at which the
alarms are triggered. The density monitors must be removed and tested using SF6 test equipment. An adapter
is part of the test equipment.

1. Switching pressures are given in Section "Technical data"; determine tank temperature.

The specified pressure for the density monitors is always based on a tank temperature of +20°C. The gas
pressures resulting at other temperatures must be taken from the pressure/temperature diagram.

2. Find the associated SF6 density curve in the SF6 diagram.

3. Gradually reduce pressure. Pressure reduction gradient approx. 0.02 bar (2 kPa) per second.

4. Determine the actual switching pressures and compare with the specified values.

5. Reinstall density monitor if no deviations occur.

6. Install new density monitor if the actual switching pressures are outside of the specified tolerances.

Pos : 9.7.6 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anweis ungen/Module/7.3 Gasüberw ac hung prüfen/7.3.2.3 Dichtew äc hter ohne Pr üfans chl uss @ 35\mod_1526304810499_18.doc x @ 731626 @ 4 @ 1

7.3.2.1 Density monitor without test connection

When the density monitor is unbolted, the non-return valve in the DN8 connection temporarily seals the gas
compartment.

Because slight quantities of SF6 gas can escape via the non-return valve due to its design, the time during
which no density monitor is installed must be kept at a minimum. If it is planned to leave the density monitor
removed for longer than 10 minutes, the connection must be closed with a screw cap to minimize SF6 losses.
The gas compartment is not monitored in the absence of a density monitor.

Pos : 9.7.7 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1
Pos : 9.7.8 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anweis ungen/Module/7.3 Gasüberw ac hung prüfen/7.3.2.4 Dichtew äc hter ohne Pr üfans chl uss prüfen @ 0\m od_1331128560017_18.docx @ 3466 @ 4 @ 1

7-268
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions
7.3.2.2 Checking density monitor without test connection
Remove density monitor and connect to gas test equipment to prepare for the test.
Testing is performed by increasing/decreasing the gas pressure and measuring the gas pressure at which the
alarms are triggered.

1. Switching pressures are given in Section "Technical data"; determine tank temperature.

The specified pressure for the density monitors is always based on a tank temperature of +20°C.
Deviating thermally-induced gas pressures are given in the pressure/temperature diagram.

2. Find the associated density curve in the pressure/temperature diagram.

3. Gradually reduce pressure. Pressure reduction gradient approx. 0.02 bar (2 kPa) per second.

4. Determine the actual switching pressures and compare with the specified values.

5. Remove connection between the maintenance device and the density monitor.

6. If the deviations are within the permissible range, bolt the density monitor back in place.

7. Replace density monitor in the event of deviation of the actual switching pressures from the
permissible tolerances.
Pos : 9.7.9 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anweis ungen/Module/7.3 Gasüberw ac hung prüfen/7.3.2.2 Dichtew äc hter mit Prüfansc hlus s prüfen @ 0\mod_1331128661784_18.docx @ 3471 @ 4 @ 1

7.3.2.3 Testing density monitor with test connection

To prepare for the test, unscrew the union nut for the test connection and remove the plug with the end
resembling a pin. The maintenance device can then be connected to the test connection opening.
Testing is performed by increasing/decreasing the gas pressure and measuring the gas pressure at which the
alarms are triggered.

1. Switching pressures are given in Section "Technical data"; determine tank temperature.

The specified pressure for the density monitors is always based on a tank temperature of +20°C.
Deviating thermally-induced gas pressures are given in the pressure/temperature diagram.

2. Find the associated density curve in the pressure/temperature diagram.

3. Gradually reduce pressure. Pressure reduction gradient approx. 0.02 bar (2 kPa) per second.

4. Determine the actual switching pressures and compare with the specified values.

5. Remove connection between the maintenance device and the density monitor.

6. If the deviations are within the permissible range, thread the union nut and plug back on the test
connection.

7. Replace density monitor in the event of deviation of the actual switching pressures from the
permissible tolerances.
Pos : 9.7.10 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-269
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.7.11 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.3 Gas überw achung pr üfen/7.3.2 Austaus chen der Dic htew ächter - nic ht f. 8DN 8 5, 8DN 8 6 @ 13\m od_1351515594576_18.docx @ 75333 @ 3 @ 1

7.3.3 Replacing the density monitors

Density monitors can be replaced without letting out or having to pump out SF6 gas from the corresponding
gas compartment.
On unscrewing a density monitor, a non-return valve situated in the flange closes off the gas compartment.

Danger!
Potentially lethal voltage – MORTAL DANGER!

• Switch off control voltage.

Do not yet unscrew density monitors!

• Check the type and model number before starting replacement work.

• Now unscrew density monitors.

The connection to the gas compartment will be closed off.

• Clamping or plug-and-socket connectors of the signal lines undo (dependent on the design).

• Replace the O-ring. Check that the O-ring sits correctly in the seal groove.

• Install a new density monitor.

• Attach the clamping or plug-and-socket connectors of the signal lines (dependent on the design).

• Screw on the union nut

The density monitor is now re-connected to the gas compartment.

• Check the joint to make sure it is air-tight.

Pos : 9.8 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch------------ @ 0\mod_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

7-270
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.9.1 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anweis ungen/Module/7.4 Dic htheit der Gasräume pr üfen/7.4 Di chtheit der Gasräume pr üfen @ 0\m od_1331128717488_18.docx @ 3476 @ 2 @ 1

7.4 Check leak-tightness of gas compartments

This Section describes the following in detail:

- Checking the gas fill with a precision pressure gauge

- Leak testing.

Basic information:

Safety notices [ 0.2]

Evacuating, filling and emptying the gas compartments [ 7.2]
Instructions for handling SF6 [ 7.24]

Warning!
SF6 is heavier than air and can displace the air required for breathing in
lower or confined spaces.

Suffocation hazard - at more than 35% volume concentration of SF6 in the

air!

• Work entailing a suffocation hazard due to escaped or escaping SF6 shall only be performed if a
second person familiar with the hazards is present. Both persons must remain in constant visual and
acoustic contact.

• Necessary organizational provisions must be recorded in the method statement.

• Provide for sufficient ventilation and exhaust during all activities on gas compartments.

Pos : 9.9.2 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-271
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.9.3 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anweis ungen/Module/7.4 Dic htheit der Gasräume pr üfen/7.4.1 Dr uck der Gasfüllung mit Fei nmes smanom eter k ontrollier en @ 42\m od_1576673124337_18.docx @ 828465 @ 3 @ 1

7.4.1 Checking gas fill pressure with precision pressure gauge

1. Take fill pressure for the gas space to be filled from the gas monitoring plan and determine vessel
temperature.

The specified pressures are always based on a tank temperature of +20°C. The gas pressures resulting at
various temperatures must be taken from the pressure/temperature diagram.

2. Remove union nut for the maintenance connection of the gas compartment to be tested; connect
maintenance unit or SF6 filling device to maintenance connection.

3. Record indicated pressure and measured vessel temperature.

4. Evaluate result, referring to the pressure/temperature diagram in the event of deviations from the
normal temperature (+20°C).

5. For pressure difference:

≤ 0.2 bar (20 kPa),  Refill SF6; record refill pressure.

> 0.2 bar (20 kPa),  Perform leak testing

Evacuating, filling and emptying the gas compartments [ 7.2]

Order documentation

Pos : 9.9.4 /01 BETRIEBSANLEITUN GEN /7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anweis ungen/Module/7.4 Dic htheit der Gasräume pr üfen/7.4.2 Lecks uc he @ 0\m od_1331128845833_18.docx @ 3486 @ 3 @ 1

7.4.2 Leakage detection

A check for leakage must be made

- on the flange connections and pipe unions which were assembled on site, and
- in the event of inadmissible loss of pressure.

• Search for leaks using a leak tester.

Halons and halogenated substances, also cigarette smoke and perspiration under certain conditions can
influence the readings. Measurements should thus not be taken immediately after cleaning and/or painting.

• If a leakage is detected, it must be stopped.

Pos : 9.9.5 /10 Sonstiges /01 Kopi ervorlag en / Sei tenumbr üche/-------------Seitenumbr uch----------------------- @ 4\m od_1338380864624_0.doc x @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-272
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.10.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.5 Gas-F euchtegehalt m ess en/7.5 Gas-Feuc htegehalt und SF 6-Proz ents atz mes sen @ 42\m od_1576673968394_18.docx @ 828555 @ 2 @ 1

7.5 Measuring gas moisture content and SF6 percentage

This Section describes the following in detail:

- Measurement of gas moisture content for determining dew point

- Possible health hazards.

Basic information:

Safety notices [ 0.2]

Instructions for handling SF6 [ 7.24]

Warning!
SF6 is heavier than air and can displace the air required for breathing in
lower or confined spaces.

Suffocation hazard – with more than 35 % volume concentration of SF6 in

the air!

• Work entailing a suffocation hazard due to escaped or escaping SF6 shall only be performed if a
second person familiar with the hazards is present. Both persons must remain in constant visual and
acoustic contact.

• Provide for sufficient ventilation and exhaust during all activities on gas compartments.

• Necessary organizational provisions must be recorded in the method statement.

The following information is given in the HP drawing:

- Filling pressures, hazard alarms

- Designation of the gas compartments
- Volume of the gas compartments and
- Weight of SF6 fill.

Order documentation

Pos : 9.10.2 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-273
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.10.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.5 Gas-F euchtegehalt m ess en/7.5.1 M ess en des Gas-F euc htegehal tes (Taupunkt) 01 @ 0\mod_1331128958944_18.doc x @ 3496 @ 3 @ 1

7.5.1 Measuring the moisture content of the gas (dew point)

A dew point measuring instrument must be used for this purpose. Refer to the instructions supplied by the
manufacturer.

The gas must flow very slowly through the sensor.

The criterion for the humidity content of the SF6 gas is the dew point temperature, i. e. the temperature at which
condensation of the water vapour begins.
The permissible humidity levels at the corresponding dew point temperatures are shown below:

Pos : 9.10.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.5 Gas-F euchtegehalt m ess en/7.5.1 M ess en des Gas-F euc htegehal tes (Taupunkt) 02 - T abelle @ 30\m od_1435144075567_18.docx @ 282781 @ @ 1

Dew point1)
Critical humidity level -5 °C (+23 °F)
Maximum permitted humidity:
- during start-up -10 °C (+14 °F)
- in operation -10 °C (+14 °F)
1) The values refer to a gas temperature of 20°C (68°F)

The measurement must be taken at operating pressure.

 Notice
In order to prevent condensation, the maximum allowable moisture content
within gas-filled switchgear and control gear filled with gas at the rated
filling density for insulation ρ shall be such that the dew-point is not higher
than -5°C (23°F) for a measurement at 20°C (68°F)
The temperature of the gas inside the switchgear compartment is meant.

In general, the temperature difference between a measured dew-point value

and the corresponding gas temperature inside a compartment shall be
minimum 25 K. This is based on the basic requirement regarding an
acceptable dew-point of -5°C (23°F) at a temperature of 20°C (68°F).

Pos : 9.10.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.5 Gas-F euchtegehalt m ess en/7.5.2 M ess en des SF 6-Pr oz entsatzes oder des Luftanteiles @ 0\m od_1331129132853_18.docx @ 3511 @ 3 @ 1

7.5.2 Measuring the SF6 percentage or air content

Use an SF6 percentage gauge for taking measurements, thereby referring to the provided instructions for use.
The SF6 percentage must not fall below 95 %. By analogy, the air content must not be more than 5 %.
The SF6 percentage or air content need not be measured if the switchgear is filled with gas straight from the
original cylinders.

Pos : 9.10.6 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-274
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.11.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.6 Kabel verl egen/7.6 Kabel verleg en @ 0\m od_1331129944301_18.docx @ 3554 @ 2 @ 1

7.6 Laying cables

This section contains detailed information on

- basic requirements for laying and joining cables

- measures to ensure electromagnetic compatibility.

Basic information:

Order documentation

Pos : 9.11.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.6 Kabel verl egen/7.6.1 Gr unds ätzlic he Anforderungen an das Verlegen und Ver binden von Kabeln @ 0\m od_1331130372150_18.docx @ 3558 @ 3 @ 1

7.6.1 Basic requirements for the laying and joining of cables

The cables are laid when assembly of all components and the on-site control cabinet has been completed.
Access is better if the cables are only laid when the filter material has been fitted, the gas compartments
evacuated and filled with SF6.
The cables are provided by the company installing the system and according to the operator's instructions.
For information on the electrical equipment, see the circuit manuals.

Pos : 9.11.3 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-275
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.11.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.6 Kabel verl egen/7.6.2 Maß nahm en z ur el ektr omag netischen Vertr äglichk eit @ 42\m od_1576844567270_18.docx @ 830457 @ 3 @ 1

7.6.2 Measures for electromagnetic compatibility

The use of electronic and digital protection and I&C equipment and the compact design of modern switchgear
systems require special attention to measures for electromagnetic compatibility (EMC).
Measures to ensure EMC are taken during design and construction of the cabinets. These measures also
apply for routing cables and lines. The installation company must account for additional requests from the
operator accordingly.

This includes items such as the following:

- Physical separation of the signal lines sensitive to interference from the signal lines with high
interference voltage levels by routing them on different racks or cable risers.

- Good reliable ground connections via toothed contact or locking washers

- Limitation of switching surge voltages by connecting the coils of relays, contactors, solenoid valves
etc. with diodes, varistors or RC elements.

- Short electrical connections between corresponding modules in subracks.

- Consideration of stray magnetic fields from busbars and cables.

- Protection of the subracks and wiring bays from scatter interference by shielding with perforated
sheets.

- Good, flat ground connection of all assemblies and devices with one another and with the system
ground potential.

- Use of shielded, high-frequency compatible cable or leads that are electrically contacted as
concentrically as possible at the ends.

- Use of corrosion protection to protect the contacts in outdoor applications.

- Concentric and well-conducting electrical connection of the shields on both ends via short connecting
cables (< 10 cm).

A number of methods of connection treatment are available depending on the different design of the shields.
Which of these methods is used is determined by the planning department or site management under
observance of the above basic EMC requirements.

Pos : 9.11.5 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-276
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.12.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.7 Leiter und Fl ansc hver bindungen v or ber eiten und herstellen/7.7 Leiter- und Fl ans chv erbi ndungen v orbereiten und herstell en @ 0\m od_1331129195119_18.docx @ 3516 @ 2 @ 1

7.7 Preparing and assembling conductor and flange connections

This section contains a detailed description of

- the spare parts, expendable materials and tools

- preparing and joining flanges
- preparing and connecting conductors.

Basic information:

Safety notices [ 0.2]

Cleaning [ 7.19]
Corrosion protection, greases and oils [ 7.20]
Bolted connections, tightening torques, SL retaining clips [ 7.23]
Cleanliness on the project site [ 7.25]

Warning!
To protect personnel and the environment it is important to observe the
instructions for use of lubricants and cleansing agents.

Pos : 9.12.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.7 Leiter und Fl ansc hver bindungen v or ber eiten und herstellen/7.7.1 Ers atz teil e, Verbrauc hsm aterialien und W erkz euge @ 0\mod_1331129256807_18.docx @ 3520 @ 3 @ 1

7.7.1 Spare parts, expendable materials and tools

O-Rings
O-rings are made seamlessly from a mixture of synthetic kinds of rubber and natural rubber. Each individual
application requires a special compound. Specialist suppliers offer about 150 such compounds in 7 degrees
of hardness. The following directives therefore apply:

- Fit only the O-rings supplied by the factory producing the switchgear.

- Clean O-rings by wiping them with lint-free paper moistened with liquid cleaning agent. Never immerse the
O-rings in the cleaning agent or allow them to remain immersed.

Consumables
- “Tectyl 506” (manufacturer: Valvoline)
- “Ritzol Tecto 7/2” (manufacturer: Valvoline)
- Vaseline
- paint (coating varnish included in switchgear auxiliary pack)
- Haku 5067 (or alternative cleansing agent)
- lint-free paper (manufacturer: e.g. Mölnlycke, trade name “A-Tork”)
- cleaning cloths

7-277
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions
Tools
- flat brushes, one each 6 mm and 15 mm wide
- 2 conical fitting spikes or stud bolts
- 1 spanner
- 1 torque wrench
- 1 vacuum cleaner (if required)
- wire brushes
- sponges (switchgear auxiliary pack)
Pos : 9.12.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.7 Leiter und Fl ansc hver bindungen v or ber eiten und herstellen/7.7.2 Flansc he v orbereiten und v erbi nden 01 @ 0\m od_1331129323683_18.docx @ 3525 @ 3 @ 1

7.7.2 Preparing and connecting flanges

When preparing the flanges, a distinction must be made between

- interior flanges and

- exterior flanges.

In addition, the preparation of the bright surfaces depends on whether these are exposed to the gas (interior
zone B) or the outside air (exterior zone A).

Pos : 9.12.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.7 Leiter und Fl ansc hver bindungen v or ber eiten und herstellen/7.7.2 Flansc he v orbereiten und v erbi nden 02 - Bil d @ 6\mod_1344069715578_0.docx @ 41772 @ @ 1

Pos : 9.12.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.7 Leiter und Fl ansc hver bindungen v or ber eiten und herstellen/7.7.2 Flansc he v orbereiten und v erbi nden 02 - Bil du @ 0\m od_1331129478326_18.docx @ 3534 @ @ 1

––– Coating with Tectyl™ 506 for exterior area A

---- Coating with WD-40® multifunction product for interior area B

Lubricate bolts with Molykote Longterm 2 before insertion.

Fig. 7-2 Flange treatment of metallically bare surfaces of flanges and covers
Pos : 9.12.6 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-278
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.12.7 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.7 Leiter und Fl ansc hver bindungen v or ber eiten und herstellen/7.7.2 Flansc he v orbereiten und v erbi nden 03 @ 0\m od_1331129801549_18.docx @ 3544 @ @ 1

The following shall generally apply:

1. Remove dust from painted external surfaces of flanges and covers.

2. Remove plastic transport cover and all residual adhesive tape and Tectyl™ 506 (protective coating
for transport and storage).

3. Clean metallically bare flange surfaces

4. Check groove and seal faces for damage.

5. Use a flat brush to apply a thin uniform coating of WD-40® multifunction product in (inner) area B
and Tectyl™ 506 in (outer) area A.

 Note
If covers for assembly openings are supplied separately, the Tectyl™ 506
coating applied in the manufacturer's plant must be completely removed
and the seal face of the cover must then be treated as described here.

6. Use lint-free paper to carefully wipe away any Tectyl™ 506 that enters (inner) area B.

7. Check round seal ring for damage and clean.

 Note
O-rings may be reused if they
- Were installed less than 12 months before and
- Exhibit no damage and/or permanent deformation (> 10%).

8. Grease round seal ring with a thin coating of Vaseline.

9. Carefully place round seal ring in the groove of the flange; it must lie uniformly in the groove around
the entire circumference. It is held in place by the thin Vaseline coating.

10. If necessary, vacuum out the gas compartment with a vacuum cleaner before connecting the
flanges; prepare coupling contacts.

11. Carefully move flanges towards each other, placing an assembly pin through each of two holes
offset by approx. 180°, or thread studs in tapped holes.

12. After drying of WD-40® multifunction product and Tectyl™ 506, bring flanges together and then
connect with 4 bolts and hex nuts, offset from each other by approx. 90°. Tighten the bolts in a
crosswise pattern in steps. Then remove the installation pins or studs and install and tighten all
additional bolts and nuts.

13. Then tighten all bolts with the specified torque.

Flanged connections with cast resin bushings are implemented with a second, inner O-ring (not shown below).
Only the outer O-ring seals the flanges. However, the inner O-ring must be handled in the same way as the
outer O-ring.
Pos : 9.12.8 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.7 Leiter und Fl ansc hver bindungen v or ber eiten und herstellen/7.7.3 Leiterv erbindung en vor ber eiten und herstellen @ 0\m od_1331129848909_18.docx @ 3549 @ 3 @ 1

7-279
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions
7.7.3 Prepare and establish conductor connections

Caution!
Risk of soiling of the modules during assembly - risk for operation.

• No dirt particles such as dust or metal chips shall be allowed to enter the modules.

To ensure optimum operation, the copper spray-plated contact surfaces of the aluminum conductors must be
prepared before assembly so as to permanently prevent impermissible voltage drops and contact corrosion.
The contact surfaces shall not be damaged and must be reworked if necessary. The supervisor can provide
information on reworking.

1. Clean contact surfaces with a wire brush.

2. Remove impermissible grease residues (Haku 5067).

3. Then coat with a thin film of Vaseline.

4. Establish conductor connections in accordance with the specific requirements for the respective
connection point.

Housing and conductor connections [ 2.19]

Pos : 9.12.9 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-280
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.13.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.8 Trenn-, Erdungs- und Sc hneller dungssc halter prüfen/7.8 Prüfen der Trenn-, Er dungs- und Schnellerdungsschalter - 0-Überschrift @ 25\m od_1391508655215_18.docx @ 227910 @ 2 @ 1

7.8 Testing the disconnectors, earthing and high-speed earthing switches

Pos : 9.13.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.8 Trenn-, Erdungs- und Sc hneller dungssc halter prüfen/7.8 Prüfen der Trenn-, Er dungs- und Schnellerdungsschalter - 8DN9, 8DQ1 @ 7\mod_1345639901070_18.docx @ 52845 @ @ 1

This section contains a detailed description of

- visual check and inspection of the heating unit of the motor drive
- the function test.

Basic information:

Safety notices [ 0.2]

Disconnectors [ 2.6]
High-speed earthing switches [ 2.7]

Pos : 9.13.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.8 Trenn-, Erdungs- und Sc hneller dungssc halter prüfen/7.8.1 Sichtpr üfung und Pr üfen der Heiz ung des M otorantri ebes und Mel des chaltermoduls @ 0\m od_1331130698782_18.docx @ 3572 @ 3 @ 1

7.8.1 Visual inspection and checking of the heater for the motor drive

Danger!
Electrical voltage – POTENTIALLY FATAL HAZARD!

• The work shall only be performed by qualified and instructed personnel.

• Testing on the open device shall only be done to the extent necessary for performance of the check
and must be done with corresponding care. Live parts that can be touched must be covered.

• Perform visual inspection and correct any deficiencies.

• Before activating the anti-condensation heaters, the transport plugs (if present) for preventing the
ingress of water spray during installation must be removed from the ventilation nozzles for the motor
drives. Air circulation in the motor drives is not possible and functioning of the anti-condensation
heater is not ensured until after removal of the transport plugs.

• Ensure heaters are functioning correctly.

Only during commissioning:

Danger!
Electrical voltage – POTENTIALLY FATAL HAZARD!

1. Establish the measurement circuit for determining current draw in the deenergized state.

2. Measure current draw.

3. Record measured values.

Pos : 9.13.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.8 Trenn-, Erdungs- und Sc hneller dungssc halter prüfen/7.8.2 F unkti ons prüfung 01 - 8DN 8, 8DN 9 2, 8D Q1 @ 0\m od_1331130985387_18.docx @ 3577 @ 3 @ 1

7-281
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions
7.8.2 Function test

Warning!
Exposed moving parts – danger of injury to personnel and/or damage to
property.

• Before switching on the motor drive, ensure that no persons, tools or other articles are in the vicinity
of the operating mechanisms.

The following must be checked

- switching operations
- free movement of the drive linkage
- condition of the position indicator
- limit of travel of switching devices.

During maintenance work, the following must also be checked:

- Lock nuts, other bolted joints and locking tabs for secure seating and corrosion.

• Close and open disconnectors and earthing switches as well as work-in-progress earthing switches
5x with the motor drive to check them. Check any specific features in the switching movements.

Disconnector and earthing switch modules as well as earthing switches can also be operated manually by
means of the hand crank in order to check the easy running of the drive linkage.

• Check that the position of the position indicator is correct when the switching devices are in their limit
positions CLOSE and OPEN.

• Check the position indicator for damage and wear at mechanical contact points.

• Record the results.

Pos : 9.13.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.8 Trenn-, Erdungs- und Sc hneller dungssc halter prüfen/7.8.2 F unkti ons prüfung 03 - 8DN 9 6, 8D Q1 Bild2 Indik atorfoli e am Drehm omentbegrenz er @ 13\m od_1352120832114_0.doc x @ 77072 @ @ 1

Pos : 9.13.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.8 Trenn-, Erdungs- und Sc hneller dungssc halter prüfen/7.8.2 F unkti ons prüfung 03 - 8DN 9 6, 8D Q1 Bild2u @ 13\m od_1352120833849_18.docx @ 77094 @ @ 1

Fig. 7-3 Indicator foil on torque limiter

Pos : 9.14.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.9 F eders peic her antrieb des Leistungsschalters k ontrollier en/7.9 Federspeic her antrieb des Leistungss chalters k ontrollier en @ 0\m od_1331131695557_18.docx @ 3596 @ 2 @ 1

7-282
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions
7.9 Check stored-energy spring mechanism drive for circuit breaker
This Section describes the following in detail:

- Checking the auxiliary switch

- The inspection
- Checking the triggers and latch blocks.

Danger!
Hazardous electrical voltage and tensioned springs – POTENTIALLY FATAL
HAZARD!

As long as the control and motor voltage for the drive are not disconnected,
the activation spring is automatically retensioned after switching on.

Incorrect handling of the switchgear and failure to comply with the safety
instructions can result in serious bodily injury and significant damage to the
equipment and the environment.

The work shall only be performed by qualified and instructed personnel.

Relieve tension from the closing and opening springs when working on the drive. Procedure:

1. Disconnect motor voltage.

2. Switch off circuit breaker if it is in the ON position.

3. Switch on circuit breaker.

4. Switch circuit breaker back off again.

5. Switch off control voltage.

Order documentation

Safety notices [ 0.2]

Cycles and maintenance service [ 6.2]
Maintenance work [ 6.3]

Pos : 9.14.2 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-283
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.14.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.9 F eders peic her antrieb des Leistungsschalters k ontrollier en/7.9.1 Hilfssc hal ter kontr ollieren 01 @ 0\m od_1331197697802_18.docx @ 3613 @ 3 @ 1

7.9.1 Check auxiliary switches

The bearings of the auxiliary switches are maintenance free. Check that the AMP plugs [1] are seated properly
and check the coupling rods [2] for wear and damage.
Pos : 9.14.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.9 F eders peic her antrieb des Leistungsschalters k ontrollier en/7.9.1 Hilfssc hal ter kontr ollieren 02 - Bil d1 @ 6\m od_1344024077495_0.doc x @ 41676 @ @ 1

1 AMP plug
2 Coupling rods

Pos : 9.14.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.9 F eders peic her antrieb des Leistungsschalters k ontrollier en/7.9.1 Hilfssc hal ter kontr ollieren 02 - Bil du @ 0\m od_1331199009376_18.docx @ 3620 @ @ 1

Fig. 7-4 Auxiliary switch

Pos : 9.14.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.9 F eders peic her antrieb des Leistungsschalters k ontrollier en/7.9.1 Hilfssc hal ter kontr ollieren 03 @ 0\m od_1331199580104_18.docx @ 3638 @ @ 1

Line is to be laid from the auxiliary switch from the auxiliary switch contact, press the spring tab [3] on the AMP
plug. In the case of AMP plugs with insulating sleeves [4], simply pull the insulating sleeve to disengage the
plug.

Pos : 9.14.7 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.9 F eders peic her antrieb des Leistungsschalters k ontrollier en/7.9.1 Hilfssc hal ter kontr ollieren 04 - Bil d2 @ 6\m od_1344025013206_0.doc x @ 41700 @ @ 1

1 Spring tab
2 Insulating sleeve

Pos : 9.14.8 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.9 F eders peic her antrieb des Leistungsschalters k ontrollier en/7.9.1 Hilfssc hal ter kontr ollieren 04 - Bil du @ 0\m od_1331199686889_18.docx @ 3648 @ @ 1

Fig. 7-5 AMP plug

Pos : 9.14.9 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-284
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.14.10 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anw eisungen/M odule/7.9 Federspeicherantri eb des Leistungssc halters k ontr ollieren/7.9.2 Kontr olle der D ämpfer auf Dic htheit 01 @ 0\m od_1331199782938_18.docx @ 3658 @ 3 @ 1

7.9.2 Check of dampers for leaks

1. Check for leak-tightness of dampers for closing and opening springs.

2. Search for reddish traces of oil in the areas of the lower damper attachments (marked in the image).

 Notice
If reddish traces of oil are found at the indicated points, the responsible
Siemens representative must be informed and the deployment of specialist
personnel requested.

Pos : 9.14.11 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anw eisungen/M odule/7.9 Federspeicherantri eb des Leistungssc halters k ontr ollieren/7.9.2 Kontr olle der D ämpfer auf Dic htheit 02 - Bild3 @ 6\m od_1344068201342_0.docx @ 41724 @ @ 1

Pos : 9.14.12 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anw eisungen/M odule/7.9 Federspeicherantri eb des Leistungssc halters k ontr ollieren/7.9.2 Kontr olle der D ämpfer auf Dic htheit 02 - Bildu @ 0\m od_1331199942064_18.docx @ 3662 @ @ 1

Fig. 7-6 Inspection of the dampers

Pos : 9.14.13 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anw eisungen/M odule/7.9 Federspeicherantri eb des Leistungssc halters k ontr ollieren/7.9.3 Kontr olle der Ausl ös er und Verklink ungsbl öck e auf F estsitz 01 @ 0\m od_1331200118455_18.docx @ 3672 @ 3 @ 1

7.9.3 Checking that the releases and latching blocks are affixed tightly
• Using a torque wrench, check that the cheese-head screws [1] of the release plate and the cheese-
head screws [2] of the latching blocks are tightly seated.

Torques: Cheese-head screws [1] 8 ±1 Nm and cheese-head screws [2]: 40 ± 4 Nm

Pos : 9.14.14 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anw eisungen/M odule/7.9 Federspeicherantri eb des Leistungssc halters k ontr ollieren/7.9.3 Kontr olle der Ausl ös er und Verklink ungsbl öck e auf F estsitz 02 - Bild4 @ 6\m od_1344069509567_0.docx @ 41748 @ @ 1

Pos : 9.14.15 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anw eisungen/M odule/7.9 Federspeicherantri eb des Leistungssc halters k ontr ollieren/7.9.3 Kontr olle der Ausl ös er und Verklink ungsbl öck e auf F estsitz 02 - Bildu @ 0\m od_1331200122268_18.docx @ 3682 @ @ 1

Fig. 7-7 Latching block

Pos : 9.14.16 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi ervorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-285
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions

7-286
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.15.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.10 El ektrisc he Steuer ung des Leis tungssc hal ters pr üfen/7.10 Elek trische Steuerung des Leistungss chalters prüfen @ 0\mod_1331217136067_18.doc x @ 3705 @ 2 @ 1
l

7.10 Checking the electronic circuit-breaker control

This section describes in detail the procedure for testing

- the anti-pump function

- the release coils
- the closing spring motor

Basic information:

Safety notices [ 0.2]

Order documentation

Pos : 9.15.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.10 El ektrisc he Steuer ung des Leis tungssc hal ters pr üfen/7.10.1 Pum pv erhinderung pr üfen @ 25\m od_1395052375747_18.docx @ 233725 @ 3 @ 1

7.10.1 Check anti-pumping device

Caution!
Switching operations without the necessary gas pressure can result in
mechanical damage!

1. A minimum SF6 gas pressure (SF6 seal pressure) must be present for test switching (at zero current
and voltage state).

The anti-pumping device prevents repeated switching (pumping) on simultaneous incoming or active
switching commands.

2. The circuit breaker is in the ON position. An ON and an OFF command must be input simultaneously.

The circuit breaker shall only switch off once.

3. The circuit breaker is in the OFF position. An ON and an OFF command must be input simultaneously.

The circuit breaker shall only switch on once and off once.

4. Record results.

Pos : 9.15.3 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-287
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.15.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.10 El ektrisc he Steuer ung des Leis tungssc hal ters pr üfen/7.10.2 Ausl ös er pr üfen @ 0\m od_1331217809269_18.docx @ 3725 @ 3 @ 1

7.10.2 Check trip releases

1. Check activation and deactivation of the circuit breaker via all implemented trip circuits by applying
voltages or actuating the station or bay controller.

2. Record results.

Pos : 9.15.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.10 El ektrisc he Steuer ung des Leis tungssc hal ters pr üfen/7.10.3 D oppelerregung prüfen @ 0\mod_1331217872863_18.doc x @ 3729 @ 3 @ 1

7.10.3 Checking the double excitation

to be dropped

Pos : 9.15.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.10 El ektrisc he Steuer ung des Leis tungssc hal ters pr üfen/7.10.4 M otor der Ei nsc haltfelder prüfen @ 0\mod_1331218107818_18.docx @ 3733 @ 3 @ 1

7.10.4 Test closing spring motor

1. Check for correct selection of MCB.

2. Check any operating time monitoring for correct functioning.

3. Record results.

Pos : 9.15.7 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-288
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.16.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.11 El ektrisc he Ausrüstung prüfen/7.11 El ektrisc he Ausrüstung prüfen @ 0\mod_1331218298366_18.docx @ 3738 @ 2 @ 1

7.11 Check electrical equipment

This section describes the details of testing of the following:

- The open-loop feedback control and alarm circuits

- The measurement, indicating and signal/alarm circuits
- The electrical interlocks
- The heaters.

Basic information:

Safety notices [ 0.2]

Order documentation

Pos : 9.16.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.11 El ektrisc he Ausrüstung prüfen/7.11.1 Steuer- und M eldekr eise pr üfen @ 0\m od_1331218333038_18.docx @ 3742 @ 3 @ 1

7.11.1 Checking the control and alarm circuits

Danger!
Potentially lethal voltage – MORTAL DANGER!

• Such work may only be done by appropriately qualified and instructed personnel.

• Inspections on open equipment should be limited to the time absolutely necessary for the test and
appropriate caution should be taken. Exposed live parts in the vicinity should be covered.

The tests include the control and alarm circuits from the switching devices to the local control cabinet and the
local control cabinet itself.

• Check that installation has been carried out according to the circuit diagram. This includes

- Electric circuits and their protection

- Switch position indicators/system balancing.

• Check terminal and plug-in connections for adequate contacting and correct if necessary.

• Check for correct operation of the control and alarm circuits.

Pos : 9.16.3 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-289
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.16.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.11 El ektrisc he Ausrüstung prüfen/7.11.2 Mess- , Anz eige- und Z ählgeräte prüfen @ 0\m od_1331218369835_18.docx @ 3746 @ 3 @ 1

7.11.2 Checking measuring, display and counting devices

• Check connection circuits (phase sequence, rotating field, energy flow direction) of all measuring,
display and counting devices and ensure that the device data correspond to the system data
(measuring ranges, characteristic curves, auxiliary supplies). Ensure the chosen circuitry is
adequate for the measuring task involved.
• Test the measuring, display and counting devices, including appropriate measuring amplifiers and
transducers – except current and voltage transformers – by simulated excitation.
• Check the markings on the display devices and function keys for correctness and perceptibility.
Pos : 9.16.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.11 El ektrisc he Ausrüstung prüfen/7.11.3 El ektrisc he Verriegel ung prüfen @ 0\mod_1331218420335_18.docx @ 3750 @ 3 @ 1

7.11.3 Checking the electric interlock

The system interlocking is structured as follows

- internal interlocking (interlock conditions between the switching devices of one feeder) and
- external lockout (higher-order interlocking conditions between the branches).
The following lockout conditions apply:

- Disconnectors are not to be switched "under load".

- Circuit-breakers may not closed when a disconnector in the same electrical circuit is in the fault
position/centre position.
- Circuit-breakers which create a parallel current loop to other disconnectors (e.g. in a bus coupling) may not
be opened when in a branch of another switchgear panel
- more than one bus isolator is closed
- one of these isolators is in fault position
- all isolators are closed.
- Earthing switches should only be operated if it is certain that the component to be earthed is off circuit.
• Check to see that all internal and external interlocks correspond to the interlock plan.
• Check the interlock lockswitches.
• Check the transition from remote to local control.
• Check the fault signal keys (acknowledgement, test program).

Pos : 9.16.6 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1
Pos : 9.16.7 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.11 El ektrisc he Ausrüstung prüfen/7.11.4 Pr üfen der Antik ondensatheiz ungen @ 0\m od_1331218461289_18.docx @ 3754 @ 3 @ 1

7.11.4 Check of anti-condensation heaters

Anti-condensation heaters prevent the formation of condensate and resulting corrosion. They must therefore
remain switched on throughout the entire year, also in the warm and hot seasons.
The check of the heaters for the motor drives is performed together with the check of the motor drives.

1. Before activating the anti-condensation heaters, the transport plugs must be removed from the
ventilation nozzles for the motor drives. The transport plugs prevent the ingress of water spray during
installation.
Air circulation in the motor drives is not possible and functioning of the anti-condensation heater is not
ensured until after removal of the transport plugs.
2. Switch on the heaters at the corresponding breaker in the local control cabinet and check for heat
output by moving hand close.
Only during commissioning:

Danger!
Electrical voltage – POTENTIALLY FATAL HAZARD!

1. Establish the measurement circuit for determining current draw in the deenergized state.
2. Measure current draw.
3. Record measured values.
Pos : 9.17 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

7-290
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.18.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.12 Str omwandler prüfen/7.12 Stromw andler pr üfen @ 42\mod_1582884171356_18.docx @ 839190 @ 2 @ 1

7.12 Check current transformers

This Section describes the following in detail:

- Performance of the inspection

- Performance of the polarity check
- Testing of the secondary circuits.

Basic information:

Safety notices [ 0.2]

Current transformer [ 2.10]

Order documentation

Pos : 9.18.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.12 Str omwandler prüfen/7.12.1 Inspek tion @ 42\m od_1582884575589_18.docx @ 839213 @ 3 @ 1

7.12.1 Inspection

The following must be checked during the inspection:

- Selection and dimensioning of the transformers (rating, capacity, overcurrent factor, cores,
secondary windings and their taps etc.)
- Proper assembly of the current transformer based on pertinent drawings and circuit diagrams
- Grounding of the transformer on the secondary side
- Termination of all secondary windings with the corresponding specified resistance (load).
- Sufficient contact of the terminal connections. Retighten bolted connections if necessary.

Pos : 9.18.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.12 Str omwandler prüfen/7.12.2 Polaritäts pr üfung @ 0\mod_1331219226012_18.docx @ 3767 @ 3 @ 1

7.12.2 Polarity check

1. Apply a DC pulse to the primary connections of the transformer (plus to P1).

2. For correct polarity/winding direction, the meter connected on the secondary side (plus to S1, with
indicator zero position in the center) must deflect as follows:
- Positive on activation of the DC current and
- Negative on deactivation of the DC current.

The polarity measurement must be performed in connection with the voltage drop measurement of the main
conductor during commissioning.

Pos : 9.18.4 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-291
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.18.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.12 Str omwandler prüfen/7.12.3 Pr üfen der Sek undärstr omkreis e @ 0\mod_1331219262044_18.docx @ 3771 @ 3 @ 1

7.12.3 Testing the secondary circuits.

1. Feed a test current to the secondary terminals (e.g. with a secondary test unit or with a variable voltage
transformer).

2. Connect an ammeter in the corresponding transformer circuit.

3. Check for correct phase assignment to the downcircuit unit and check whether all circuits are closed.

Insulation testing was performed in the manufacturing plant. Additional tests can be part of the grid and system
protection tests.

Pos : 9.18.6 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-292
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.19.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.13 Spannungswandler prüfen/7.13 Spannungsw andler prüfen @ 42\mod_1582885047002_18.doc x @ 839258 @ 2 @ 1

7.13 Check voltage transformer

This Section describes the following in detail:

- Performance of the inspection

- Performance of insulation testing
- Testing of the secondary circuits.

Basic information:

Safety notices [ 0.2]

Voltage transformer [ 2.11]

Order documentation

Pos : 9.19.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.13 Spannungswandler prüfen/7.13.1 Inspek tion @ 42\m od_1582885211383_18.docx @ 839281 @ 3 @ 1

7.13.1 Inspection

The following should be checked in the course of an inspection:

- Selection and dimensioning of the transformers

- That the voltage transformers have been installed according to the drawings and circuit diagrams
- Secondary-side earthing of the transformers
- Correct configuration of the links on the terminal board.
- Check terminal connections for adequate contacting. Tighten the screws if necessary.

Pos : 9.19.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.13 Spannungswandler prüfen/7.13.2 Is olations prüfung @ 0\m od_1331277726829_18.docx @ 3785 @ 3 @ 1

7.13.2 Insulation test

Caution!
Residual charge – risk of minor electric shocks if conducted through the
body!

• Upon completion of the insulation check, the residual charge should be earthed.

• Inspect the insulation on the secondary circuits of the voltage transformer up to the protective circuit-
breaker (phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth with 2kV).

The secondary leads must not be connected to the transformer during the test. The insulation of the voltage
transformer itself was checked at the works.

• Earth the secondary circuits after the insulation test has been completed.

Pos : 9.19.4 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-293
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.19.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.13 Spannungswandler prüfen/7.13.3 Sek undärstromkr eise pr üfen @ 0\m od_1331277772692_18.docx @ 3789 @ 3 @ 1

7.13.3 Checking the secondary circuits

Downstream devices must be checked for in-phase connection.

• Disconnect secondary circuits at the bushing box of the voltage transformer.

• Apply voltage to the three phases and check for in-phase connection.

Additional tests can be components of preventive network and system tests.

Pos : 9.19.6 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-294
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.20.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.14 RC-Teiler pr üfen/7.14 RC-T eiler prüfen @ 42\m od_1582885434441_18.docx @ 839304 @ 2 @ 1

7.14 Check RC divider

This section contains a detailed description of

- inspections
- the preparation for high voltage checking of the switchgear
- checking secondary circuits

Basic information:

Safety notices [ 0.2]

RC divider [ 2.12]

Pos : 9.20.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.14 RC-Teiler pr üfen/7.14.1 Ins pektion @ 42\mod_1582885561101_18.doc x @ 839327 @ 3 @ 1

7.14.1 Inspection
The following should be checked in the course of an inspection:

- the selection and dimensioning of the RC divider

- That the RC divider has been installed according to the drawings and circuit-diagrams
- the secondary side earthing of the RC divider.
- Check connections of the coaxial lines in the switchgear cabinet for adequate contact.

Pos : 9.20.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.14 RC-Teiler pr üfen/7.14.2 Vor ber eitung des RC-Teil ers für die H oc hs pannungspr üfung der Sc haltanlag e @ 4\mod_1336398174211_18.docx @ 17243 @ 3 @ 1

7.14.2 Preparation of the RC divider for high voltage test of the switchgear

• Short-circuit all secondary lines before carrying out high voltage testing of the switchgear.

The primary side of the RC divider must not be separated from the installation for the duration of the high
voltage test of the switchgear.

Pos : 9.20.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.14 RC-Teiler pr üfen/7.14.3 Sek undärstr omkreis e prüfen @ 4\mod_1336398286593_18.doc x @ 17254 @ 3 @ 1

7.14.3 Check secondary current circuits

Secondary lines in the switchgear cabinet must be checked for in-phase connection.

• Disconnect coaxial lines in the switchgear cabinet.

• check the correct phasing connection with a suitable test unit.

Additional tests can be components of preventive network and system tests.

Pos : 9.20.5 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-295
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.21 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

7-296
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.22.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.15 Kabel endv erschl uß prüfen/7.15 Kabel endv erschl uss überprüfen @ 0\m od_1331277941459_18.docx @ 3799 @ 2 @ 1

7.15 Check cable terminator

This Section describes the following in detail:

- Preparation for high-voltage test

- The prerequisites for high-voltage testing.

Basic information:

Safety notices [ 0.2]

Evacuating, filling and emptying the gas compartments [ 7.2]
Instructions for handling SF6 [ 7.24]
Cleanliness on the project site [ 7.25]
Cable connection module [ 2.16]

Order documentation

Warning!
High-voltage testing or commissioning of a bay
without the cable terminator closed gas-tight can result in serious bodily
injury and significant damage to the system.

• It must be ensured that the cable terminator is closed gas-tight before high-voltage testing. The
terminator can be closed with a high-voltage cable, with a compressed-gas tight cover or, if cable
plug connections are used, with a dummy plug approved by the manufacturer.

• High-voltage testing or commissioning of a bay without a gas-tight sealed terminator is not permitted.

• The work shall only be performed by qualified and instructed personnel.

Pos : 9.22.2 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-297
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.23 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

7-298
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.24.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.16 Primärteil prüfen/7.16 Primärteil prüfen @ 0\mod_1331278440429_18.doc x @ 3830 @ 2 @ 1

7.16 Check primary section

This Section describes the following in detail:

- Voltage drop measurement

- High-voltage testing.

Basic information:

Safety notices [ 0.2]

Evacuating, filling and emptying the gas compartments [ 7.2]
Instructions for handling SF6 [ 7.24]
Cleanliness on the project site [ 7.25]

Order documentation

Pos : 9.24.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.16 Primärteil prüfen/7.16.1 Spannungsfall mes sen @ 0\mod_1331278749567_18.docx @ 3847 @ 3 @ 1

7.16.1 Measure voltage drop

This test must be performed to detect excessive contact resistances. The test must be performed with a
constant DC supply.

1. Determine measurement paths. Ensure here that

- The shortest possible measuring paths are defined to enable the fastest possible localization of poor
contact points,
- Measuring points are defined between respective adjacent feeders to ensure good comparability

2. The permissible voltage drop is calculated for the defined measurement path. The test is based on the
manufacturer's specifications of the voltage drop for each coupling point, conductor connection and
each running cm of conductor length.

The following are suitable input and measuring points:

- Cable and overhead line outputs
- Earthing switch in insulated implementation.

Earthing switches are to be used primarily as current feed points. Simultaneous use as a measuring point
results in significant falsification of the measured value. A single-pole measurement via closed a earthing
switch is not recommended due to the ground transition resistance.

3. If earthing switches are used, disconnect the connection provided for this purpose and reconnect it
after the measurement.
4. Input a constant single-phase DC current of 100 and measure the voltage drop at the specified
measuring points.
5. Record measurement results and test conditions.

Pos : 9.24.3 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-299
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.24.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.16 Primärteil prüfen/7.16.2 Hoc hs pannungspr üfung 01 @ 0\mod_1331279044982_18.doc x @ 3852 @ 3 @ 1

7.16.2 High-voltage testing

After installation of the switchgear, a voltage test of the main current paths must be performed with AC voltage
in accordance with the applicable procedures. The test voltage is applied to one phase at a time against both
of the other grounded phases and the grounded encapsulation.

1. Define test sections. The shortest possible sections must be defined because:
- The limited output power of the test transformer limits the maximum test capacity
- In the event of a fault (breakdown), the discharge energy (proportional to the test capacitance) is
reduced, i.e., the probability of destruction of system components is lower
- Localization of a fault is simplified.

The high-voltage test consists of forming and the main test. The test is passed if all of the 3 phases of a test
section have withstood the test voltage for one minute without the occurrence of a fault.

Pos : 9.24.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.16 Primärteil prüfen/7.16.2 Hoc hs pannungspr üfung 02 - Bild1 @ 6\mod_1344022602913_0.docx @ 41604 @ @ 1

Pos : 9.24.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.16 Primärteil prüfen/7.16.2 Hoc hs pannungspr üfung 02 - Bildu @ 6\mod_1344023237964_18.doc x @ 41628 @ @ 1

C Forming (1 and 2)
Uds Test voltage as per EC 62271-203
T Main test
Ur Rated voltage

Fig. 7-8 Timing diagram for forming and main test with alternating voltage

Pos : 9.24.7 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.16 Primärteil prüfen/7.16.2 Hoc hs pannungspr üfung 03 @ 6\mod_1344023400539_18.doc x @ 41652 @ @ 1

Danger!
High voltage - POTENTIALLY FATAL!

7-300
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions
The high-voltage test shall only be performed by specially trained electrical engineers.

For the duration of high-voltage testing:

1. Establish an intermediate section grounded at two isolation points between the system section to be
tested and each system section that may be in operation.

2. Short-circuit and ground the current transformers on the secondary side.

3. Install shields if system parts have to be disconnected for testing.

4. Depending on the type of high-voltage test, disconnect voltage transformers and any other equipment
(e.g. transformers and cables) from the system section to be tested.

After high-voltage testing, ground and short-circuit the system to discharge any residual charges.

Before the start of high-voltage testing

1. Announce high-voltage testing to the plant operator and coordinate safety measures.

2. Implement safety measures.

3. Safely ground system parts not to be tested.

4. If a resonance test system is not used, remove conductor connections to the voltage transformer for
the duration of high-voltage testing.

5. Install shields on the connection element on the system side if system parts have to be disconnected
for testing (such as the voltage transformer).

6. Close off gas compartments. Install voltage transformers or additional covers for this purpose for the
duration of the test. Do not connect conductors or control cables to the terminal box.

7. Evacuate gas compartments and fill with SF6.

8. Check gas quality: The SF6 gas must have an SF6 content of ≥ 95 % and a maximum dew point
temperature of -10°C. Measuring gas moisture content and SF6 percentage

9. Define test sections so that the energy is as low as possible in the event of a flashover.

10. Establish the possibility to feed in test voltage via the outdoor bushing or encapsulated attachment.

11. Record high-voltage test conditions.

12. Perform high-voltage test. Record results.

Pos : 9.24.8 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

Measuring gas moisture content and SF6 percentage [ 7.5]

7-301
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.25.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.17 Filterm aterial eins etz en / taus chen/7.17 Filtermateri al ei ns etz en / tausc hen @ 0\m od_1331279172616_18.docx @ 3862 @ 2 @ 1

7-302
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions
7.17 Install/replace filter material
This Section describes the following in detail:

- Preparatory work
- Use of filter material
- Replacement of filter material.

Basic information:

Safety notices [ 0.2]

Evacuating, filling and emptying the gas compartments [ 7.2]
Cleaning [ 7.19]
Corrosion protection, greases and oils [ 7.20]
Bolted connections, tightening torques, SL retaining clips [ 7.23]
Instructions for handling SF6 [ 7.24]
Cleanliness on the project site [ 7.25]

Order documentation

Pos : 9.25.2 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-303
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.25.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.17 Filterm aterial eins etz en / taus chen/7.17.1 Vor bereitende Arbeiten 01 @ 42\m od_1576666898725_18.docx @ 828307 @ 3 @ 1

7.17.1 Preparatory work

 Note
Cleanliness at the workplace and in its immediate surroundings is a
mandatory prerequisite for compliance with the warranted quality
parameters.

The following information is given in the HP drawing:

- Filling pressures, hazard alarms
- Designation of the gas compartments
- Volume of the gas compartments and
- Weight of SF6 fill.

The following must be prepared prior to the start of the work:

- Tins with filter material,
- O-rings and
- Anti-corrosive agent

The filter material is in filter bags packed in hermetically sealed metal tins.
Pos : 9.25.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.17 Filterm aterial eins etz en / taus chen/7.17.1 Vor bereitende Arbeiten 02 - Bild1 @ 6\mod_1344022329934_0.docx @ 41580 @ @ 1

Pos : 9.25.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.17 Filterm aterial eins etz en / taus chen/7.17.1 Vor bereitende Arbeiten 02 - Bildu @ 0\mod_1331279677358_18.docx @ 3870 @ @ 1

Fig. 7-9 Opened tins with filter material

Pos : 9.25.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.17 Filterm aterial eins etz en / taus chen/7.17.1 Vor bereitende Arbeiten 03 @ 6\mod_1344235729239_18.doc x @ 43930 @ @ 1

 Notice
Do not use filter material from leaking tins, as its capacity to absorb
moisture and decomposition products may be insufficient for the period
until the next scheduled filter change.

There must be a loud hiss when an air-tight tin is opened. If in doubt, compare the weight with that of bags
from another tin to determine whether the filter material has absorbed moisture.
The maximum time lapse between the opening of a tin, the insertion of the filter material it contains as well as
the gas-tight sealing of the gas compartment must not exceed 1 hour. The evacuation process must begin
within a further hour.
Pos : 9.25.7 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-304
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.25.8 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.17 Filterm aterial eins etz en / taus chen/7.17.2 Einsetzen v on Filtermaterial - 8DN 9 6, 8D Q1 @ 13\mod_1351519104236_18.docx @ 75378 @ 3 @ 1

7.17.2 Inserting filter material

In all modules the location of the filter bags is accessible by opening the cover (which may be fitted with rupture
disc and diverter).

1. Remove the union nut on the maintenance point of the respective gas compartment. Connect
the service unit to the maintenance point. To operate the service unit see the appropriate
operating instructions.

2. Open the cover.

3. Remove the filter cover of the circuit-breaker or the filter holder of other modules.

4. Remove dry material.

5. Clean the interior.

6. Apply an anti-corrosion agent.

7. Open the filter tins and insert the filter bags in the holders provided.

8. Re-attach the filter cover of the circuit-breaker or the filter holder of other modules.

9. Insert new sealing rings and close the filter cover. Observe the specified tightening torque.

10. Evacuate the gas compartment and then fill with SF6 gas.
Pos : 9.25.9 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-305
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.25.10 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anw eisungen/M odule/7.17 Filtermateri al ei ns etz en / tausc hen/7.17.3 T aus chen v on Filterm aterial @ 4\mod_1336399111054_18.docx @ 17265 @ 3 @ 1

7.17.3 Replacement of filter material

Warning!
SF6 decomposition products that are harmful to health are generated in
gaseous and/or dust form after short-circuit shutdowns under load in the
gas compartment of the affected circuit breaker or load disconnector
switch!

• Use personal protective equipment.

• Do not release SF6 gas into the environment.
• Carefully remove switching dust and contaminated gas and dispose of in accordance with
regulations.

After analysis of the quality of the SF6 gas in the system, a decision must be made regarding its reusability.
The gas must be replaced if an SF6 fraction of < 95% is detected.
Do not open the voltage transformer gas compartment!

1. Remove the union nut for the maintenance connection of the affected gas compartment. Connect
maintenance device with maintenance connection. See operating instructions for the maintenance
device for handling the maintenance device.

2. Extract SF6 gas.

3. Ventilate the emptied gas compartment.

4. Open filter covers.

5. Remove old filter bags.

6. Visually inspect the interior. Record special aspects.

7. Remove old corrosion protection from the opened flanges and covers.

8. Clean interior.

9. Apply new corrosion protection.

10. Open filter tins and insert the required number of filter bags in the holders provided.

11. Install new O-rings and close filter cover. Observe specified tightening torque.

12. Evacuate gas compartment and then fill with SF6 gas.

13. Clean maintenance unit after contact with contaminated gas.

Pos : 9.26.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.18 Berstsc heiben monti eren/7.18 Berstsc heiben monti eren @ 1\mod_1332412784483_18.docx @ 10700 @ 2 @ 1

7-306
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions
7.18 Install rupture discs
This Section describes

- Unpacking the rupture disc

- Installation of the rupture disc.

Basic information:

Safety notices [ 0.2]

Covers, filter mounts, rupture disk assemblies [ 2.18]
Cleaning [ 7.19]

Rupture discs are safety-relevant precision parts. The following instructions therefore absolutely must
be observed!

 Note
Reinstalling previously used rupture discs is prohibited! Rupture discs are
considered to be used once they have been tightened to a specified torque
or subjected to a different pressure load.

• Visually inspect new rupture discs prior to installation. The rupture discs shall not be used if damage
is detected, e.g. dents, deformation, scoring, spherical deformations of the dished structure!

Pos : 9.26.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.18 Berstsc heiben monti eren/7.18.1 Berstsc heiben aus packen @ 0\m od_1331282874338_18.docx @ 3893 @ 3 @ 1

7.18.1 Unpack rupture discs

1. Carefully remove rupture disc from the packaging.

2. Check dished shape and seal faces of the rupture disc for damage.

 Note
Always store rupture discs on clean surfaces and in such a way that the
curvature of the rupture discs faces upwards. Never store other objects on
top of rupture discs.

Pos : 9.26.3 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1

7-307
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.26.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.18 Berstsc heiben monti eren/7.18.2 Ei nbau der Bers tsc hei be 01 - 8DN 9 6, 8DQ1 @ 13\mod_1351519937219_18.doc x @ 75423 @ 3 @ 1

7.18.2 Fitting the rupture disc

1. Compare the rupture disc identification with the product specification.

2. Inspect (and clean if necessary) the sealing surfaces and O-ring groove. O-rings must only be
used in accordance with specifications.

3. Screw the relevant bolts into the holes provided and tighten by hand.

4. In a clean assembly area, position the rupture disc central to the holes in the switchgear.
Inadequate centering can damage the rupture disc.

5. Fit the thrust ring.

6. Fit nuts onto the bolts and tighten evenly and diagonally in pairs, starting with a torque of 25%
and increasing to 50%, then 75% and finally 100% of the required torque, which will depend on
the thread size and the strength of the material involved.

Bolted connections, tightening torques, SL retaining clips [ 7.23]

Pos : 9.26.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.18 Berstsc heiben monti eren/7.18.2 Ei nbau der Bers tsc hei be 02 - 8DQ1 1 Bild1 @ 14\mod_1362086872739_0.docx @ 99503 @ @ 1

Pos : 9.26.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.18 Berstsc heiben monti eren/7.18.2 Ei nbau der Bers tsc hei be 02 - 8DQ1 1 Bildu @ 14\mod_1362086983984_18.doc x @ 99527 @ @ 1

Fig. 7-10 Rupture disc assembly

Pos : 9.26.7 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1

7-308
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.27 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

Pos : 9.28.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.19 Rei nigung/7.19 R einigung @ 0\mod_1331283986344_18.docx @ 3918 @ 2 @ 1

7.19 Cleaning
This Section describes the following in detail:

- The cleaning agents to be used

- The cleaning equipment to be used
- The cleaning work
- Disposal of the cleaning agents and cleaning equipment.

Basic information:

Safety notices [ 0.2]

Instructions for handling SF6 [ 7.24]

Pos : 9.28.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.19 Rei nigung/7.19.1 R einigungsmittel @ 0\mod_1331283474843_18.docx @ 3910 @ 3 @ 1

7.19.1 Cleaning agents

Warning!
Cleaning agents are harmful to water and/or highly flammable.

To protect employees and the environment, follow instructions for use of cleaning agents carefully!

The following cleaning agents for work done during installation and maintenance may be used.

The selection was made from manufacturer's data sheets, and constitutes a summary thereof; not a substitute
for the manufacturer's information. If necessary, further information should be obtained from the appropriate
Siemens office or from the manufacturer.

Ethanol (Spirit) / Isopropanol

- Solvents available from various manufacturers
- Highly volatile solvents for insulating components in SF6 compartments
- Cast resin components are not electrostatically charged when rubbed with cloths moistened therein

 Notice
Highly flammable solvent.

• Do not smoke or approach with a naked flame; when working in vessels, take adequate precautions
to prevent explosions!

7-309
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions
Haku 5067
Kluthe
D-Heidelberg
- readily volatile solvent for insulating components in SF6 compartments
- Cast resin components are not electrostatically charged when rubbed with cloths moistened therein

 Notice
Inflammable solvents.

• Do not smoke or approach with a naked flame; when working in vessels, take adequate precautions
to prevent explosions!
→ Fluid is slightly harmful to water

Agents on hydrocarbon base (no halogenated hydrocarbons)

Shellsol D60, Shell
Essovarsal 60, Esso
Aral 4005, Aral
Haku 1025 / 920, Kluthe
Low-volatility solvents for painted and metal parts outside SF6 compartments

 Notice
Combustible solvents (no EC labelling requirement).

• Do not smoke or approach with a naked flame!

→ Fluid is slightly harmful to water

Pos : 9.28.3 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1
Pos : 9.28.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.19 Rei nigung/7.19.2 R einigungsgeräte @ 0\m od_1331283528266_18.docx @ 3914 @ 3 @ 1

7.19.2 Cleaning equipment

Lint-free paper
Use lint-free paper e.g. “A-Tork” (supplier: Mölnlycke) to apply or remove cleaning agents.

 Notice
Each paper is only to be used once.

Cloths and brushes

Cloths or brushes must not be used for the interior of metal-enclosed gas-insulated switchgear, nor for parts
of switchgear which are to carry high-voltage in subsequent operation.
Cloths and brushes may be used outside the gas compartments, provided that no lint or bristles find their way
into the gas compartments under any circumstances.

7-310
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions
Vacuum cleaners
Vacuum cleaners may be used if the tubes and nozzles are made of plastic. The nozzles may be made of
rubber or plastic.

 Notice
Brushes are not allowed owing to the risk of loosing bristles.

High pressure cleaner

The use of high pressure cleaners having a working pressure of maximum 10 MPa on switchgear components
located outdoors is allowed providing the following instruction is considered.

 Notice
Rupture discs, drives, density monitor and electrical control elements and
the immediate environment of these components must not be cleaned with a
high pressure cleaner - danger of damage!

• The manufacturer's regulations of the high pressure cleaner must be maintained.

• Do not use a high pressure cleaner indoors!

Pos : 9.28.5 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1
Pos : 9.28.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.19 Rei nigung/7.19.3 R einigungsar beiten @ 4\mod_1336400145267_18.docx @ 17287 @ 3 @ 1

7.19.3 Cleaning tasks

The cleaning agents and equipment and the cleaning methods are determined by the location and type of
soiling.

Internal spaces of housings and external surfaces with loose dust and small foreign objects

 Note
If switching dust is anticipated following repeated short-circuit shutdowns
under load, precautionary measures must be taken for health protection.

• Use the vacuum to remove loose dust, small foreign objects etc. from smooth surfaces and from
inside housings.

Insulating elements in SF6 gas compartments

Warning!
Fire and explosion hazard.

Do not smoke or approach with open flame!

7-311
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions

1. Ensure good ventilation when using in vessels.

2. Select a suitable cleaning agent/solvent for use in SF6 gas compartments.

3. Moisten lint-free paper with cleaning agent and rub the surface to be cleaned.

Prevent dripping. Do not allow cleaning agent to penetrate into openings or gaps.

Slightly soiled external surfaces

1. Add a mild, liquid household cleaner to warm water.

2. Moisten lint-free paper with cleaning agent and rub the surface to be cleaned.

Prevent dripping. Do not allow cleaning agent to penetrate into openings or gaps.

External surfaces or parts that are greased or protected with corrosion protection agents

Warning!
Fire and explosion hazard.

Do not smoke or approach with open flame!

1. Select a hydrocarbon-based room-temperature degreaser.

2. Moisten lint-free paper with cleaning agent and rub the surface to be cleaned. Immerse small parts if
applicable.

Prevent dripping. Do not allow cleaning agent to penetrate into openings or gaps.

3. Wipe with lint-free paper.

O-rings

• As above but do not immerse O-rings.

Pos : 9.28.7 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.19 Rei nigung/7.19.4 Entsorgung @ 4\mod_1336400260053_18.docx @ 17298 @ 3 @ 1

7.19.4 Disposal
Use the cleaning paper once only!

Dispose of used cleaning paper, brushes, cleaning cloths and dirty solvent in confirmity with national
regulations.

Pos : 9.28.8 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-312
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.29 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

Pos : 9.30.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.20 Korrosi ons schutz , F etten und Ölen/7.20 Korrosi onssc hutz, F etten und Ölen @ 39\mod_1546511146626_18.doc x @ 768986 @ 2 @ 1

7.20 Corrosion protection, greases and oils

This section provides details about

- corrosion protection work,

- the properties and use of corrosion protection agents and sealants,
- the properties and use of specified paints/varnishes,
- the properties and use of greases and oils.

Basic information:

Safety notices [ 0.2]

Pos : 9.30.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.20 Korrosi ons schutz , F etten und Ölen/7.20.1 Korrosi onsschutz durc hführ en - all e Anl agen @ 39\m od_1546511165149_18.docx @ 769009 @ 3 @ 1

7.20.1 Corrosion protection

Corrosion protection is implemented in the manufacturing plant before delivery of the switchgear facility.
Further corrosion protection measures are also required during installation and maintenance of outdoor
components to reliably protect the switchgear facility and its parts against corrosion-induced damage. This
helps avoid corrosion-related maintenance activities, along with the associated operating restrictions.

 Notice
Corrosion loads are highly dependent on the often widely differing ambient
atmospheric conditions and the microclimate at the installation location.

 Notice
The specified maintenance activities and their intervals must be complied
with to ensure the operational safety and reliability of the system.

Cycles and maintenance service [ 6.2]

Pos : 9.30.3 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-313
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.30.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.20 Korrosi ons schutz , F etten und Ölen/7.20.2 Vorgesc hriebene Korrosionssc hutz- und Dic htmittel @ 35\mod_1527159879146_18.docx @ 734059 @ 3 @ 1

7.20.2 Corrosion protection and sealants

The following selection of the most important material data has been taken from the manufacturer datasheets
and provides for initial information. It does not replace the manufacturer information. If necessary, further
information must be requested via the responsible Siemens representative or directly from the manufacturer.

Danger!
Observe anti-corrosive agent product descriptions and safety data sheets
for protection of personnel and the environment!

WD-40® multifunction product

- Corrosion protection oil, dissolved in benzene
- Temporary corrosion protection for indoor applications
- Liquid hazardous to water

Danger!
Extremely flammable aerosol!
Can be fatal on ingestion or ingress into the airways.
May cause drowsiness and disorientation.

______________________________________________________________________________________
Tectyl™ 506
- Solvent-based corrosion protection agent
- Temporary corrosion protection for outdoor applications
- Liquid hazardous to water

Caution!
Flammable aerosol!

______________________________________________________________________________________
Sikaflex® 221
- 1-component polyurethane sealant
- Liquid hazardous to water

Danger!
Inhalation can cause allergy, asthma symptoms or difficulty breathing.
Can damage organs on extended or repeated exposure.

______________________________________________________________________________________
Klübersynth® LR44-21
- Synthetic hydrocarbon oil/mineral oil with lithium soap
- Aging-resistant, strongly adhesive and largely neutral for plastics and car body paints
______________________________________________________________________________________
Pos : 9.30.5 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-314
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.30.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.20 Korrosi ons schutz , F etten und Ölen/7.20.3 Vorgesc hriebene Lac ke @ 35\m od_1527160097110_18.docx @ 734082 @ 3 @ 1

7.20.3 Specified paints

Only the materials listed here shall be used for paint coatings in accordance with SN 15491, under observation
of the manufacturer's processing instructions. The materials shall not contain any lead, cadmium or chromium-
containing pigments.
The following selection of the most important material data has been taken from the manufacturer datasheets
and provides for initial information. It does not replace the manufacturer information. If necessary, further
information must be requested via the responsible Siemens representative or directly from the manufacturer.

Danger!
Observe paint product descriptions and safety data sheets for protection of
personnel and the environment!

Alexit® 5225 finish coat

- In combination with Celerol® reaction base 918 as well as Alexit® hardener 402 for repair of paint
damage and for final sealing of flanges and covers.

Caution!
Liquid and vapor flammable
Can irritate airways.
May cause drowsiness and disorientation.
Harmful to aquatic organisms, with long-lasting effects.
Repeated exposure may cause skin dryness or cracking.

______________________________________________________________________________________
Alexit® 402 hardener
- Hardener component for Alexit® 5225

Danger!
Liquid and vapor flammable
Can be fatal on ingestion or ingress into the airways.
Causes skin irritation.
Can cause allergic skin reactions.
Causes severe eye irritation.
Harmful to health on inhalation.
Can irritate airways.
May cause drowsiness and disorientation.
Can damage organs on extended or repeated exposure.

______________________________________________________________________________________

7-315
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions
Alexit® 62 thinner

Danger!
Can be fatal on ingestion or ingress into the airways.
May cause drowsiness and disorientation.
Repeated exposure may cause skin dryness or cracking.

______________________________________________________________________________________
Finalux top coat 812
- Air-drying synthetic enamel for repair of minor paint damage on external surfaces in indoor areas
(surface area < 20 cm x 20 cm).

Caution!
Liquid and vapor flammable
May cause drowsiness and disorientation.
Harmful to aquatic organisms, with long-lasting effects.

______________________________________________________________________________________
Finalux zinc protection 899-12

Danger!
Liquid and vapor flammable
Generates flammable gases in contact with water.
Causes skin irritation.
Highly toxic to aquatic organisms, with long-lasting effects.

______________________________________________________________________________________
Seevenax® 112 protective paint
- In combination with Seevenax® hardener 125 at room temperature, 2-component epoxy resin paint
curing at room temperature, for repairing paint damage in SF6 areas.
- Liquid very hazardous to water

Danger!
Liquid and vapor flammable
Causes skin irritation.
Can cause allergic skin reactions.
Causes severe eye irritation.
Can damage organs on extended or repeated exposure.

______________________________________________________________________________________

7-316
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions
Seevenax® hardener 125
- Hardener component for Seevenax® 112 protective paint.

Danger!
Liquid and vapor flammable
Causes skin irritation.
Causes severe eye irritation.
Can irritate airways.
May cause drowsiness and disorientation.
Harmful to aquatic organisms, with long-lasting effects.

______________________________________________________________________________________
Seevenax® thinner 75

Danger!
Liquid and vapor flammable
Can be fatal on ingestion or ingress into the airways.
Causes skin irritation.
Causes severe eye irritation.
Can irritate airways.
May cause drowsiness and disorientation.
Can damage organs on extended or repeated exposure.
Harmful to aquatic organisms, with long-lasting effects.

______________________________________________________________________________________
Seevenax® 5407 zinc protective coating

Caution!
Liquid and vapor flammable
Can cause allergic skin reactions.
Highly toxic to aquatic organisms, with long-lasting effects.

______________________________________________________________________________________
Seevenax® intermediate coat 113-09

Danger!
Liquid and vapor flammable
Causes skin irritation.
Can cause allergic skin reactions.
Causes severe eye irritation.

______________________________________________________________________________________

7-317
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions
Celerol® 918-14 reaction base
- Fast-drying metal reactive primer with bonding properties and corrosion protection effect

Danger!
Liquid and vapor flammable
Causes skin irritation.
Can cause allergic skin reactions.
Causes severe eye irritation.
Can irritate airways.
May cause drowsiness and disorientation.
Harmful to aquatic organisms, with long-lasting effects.

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Thinner 53

Danger!
Liquid and vapor flammable
Can be fatal on ingestion or ingress into the airways.
Harmful to health on contact with skin or inhalation.
Causes skin irritation.
Causes severe eye irritation.
Can irritate airways.
May cause drowsiness and disorientation.
Can damage organs on extended or repeated exposure.

______________________________________________________________________________________
Thinner 58

Danger!
Liquid and vapor flammable
Can be fatal on ingestion or ingress into the airways.
Can irritate airways.
May cause drowsiness and disorientation.
Toxic to aquatic organisms, with long-lasting effects.
Supplemental hazard warnings
Repeated exposure may cause skin dryness or cracking.

______________________________________________________________________________________

7-318
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions
Schuppenpanzer® K zinc protection
Air-drying zinc powder paint for repairing zinc damage

Danger!
Liquid and vapor flammable
Can be fatal on ingestion or ingress into the airways.
May cause drowsiness and disorientation.
Toxic to aquatic organisms, with long-lasting effects.

______________________________________________________________________________________

Pos : 9.30.7 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1
Pos : 9.30.8 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.20 Korrosi ons schutz , F etten und Ölen/7.20.4 Fetten und Öl en @ 35\m od_1527160413548_18.docx @ 734128 @ 3 @ 1

7.20.4 Greases and oils

Greases and oils are used depending on the loading to minimize friction losses and wear on moving parts as
well as to ensure freedom of movement of threaded connections during the entire service life of the switchgear.
The greases and oils must be replaced or supplemented during maintenance.

Caution!
Observe paint product descriptions and safety data sheets for protection of
personnel and the environment! All of the following greases and oils are
liquids or substances hazardous to water.

Amblygon TA 15/2
- Mineral-oil based grease with polyurea
- Long-term, high-temperature grease
______________________________________________________________________________________
Barrierta® I EL 102
- Synthetic-oil based grease with PTFE as a thickener/long-term lubrication at high temperatures
- Contact grease
______________________________________________________________________________________
Beacon™ 325
- Synthetic-oil based grease with Li soap as a thickener
______________________________________________________________________________________
Fomblin® YUH 2
- Synthetic-oil based grease with PTFE as a thickener/long-term lubrication at high temperatures
- Contact grease
______________________________________________________________________________________
High-purity Vaseline
- Hydrocarbon mixture
______________________________________________________________________________________
Isoflex® Topas L152
- Grease based on synthetic hydrocarbon oil
- Roller bearing grease
______________________________________________________________________________________
Molykote® 111 Compound

7-319
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions
- Silicone-oil based grease
______________________________________________________________________________________
Molykote® 1000 Paste
- Mineral-oil based paste with metal powder

Caution!
Toxic to aquatic organisms, can have long-term deleterious effects in the
aquatic environment.

______________________________________________________________________________________
Molykote® G-N plus Paste
- MoS2 and white solid lubricants in mineral oil / sliding faces with high surface pressure

Danger!
Causes severe eye irritation.
Only use in well ventilated places.

______________________________________________________________________________________
WD-40® multifunction product
- Corrosion protection oil, dissolved in benzene
- Temporary corrosion protection for indoor applications
- Liquid hazardous to water

Danger!
Extremely flammable aerosol!
Can be fatal on ingestion or ingress into the airways.
May cause drowsiness and disorientation.

______________________________________________________________________________________
Pos : 9.30.9 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-320
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.31 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

Pos : 9.32.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.22 Zeitablaufdiagramm e/7.22 Zei tablaufdiagramm e 01 @ 4\mod_1336470656595_18.doc x @ 17607 @ 2 @ 1

7.21 Timing charts

The identification data for the auxiliary switches are completed by the timing charts which show the switching
position of the individual auxiliary contacts in the course of switching the main interrupter on or off. This does
not contain time data. The time data are provided in the routine test records.

Basic information:

Order documentation

Motor drives [ 1.2]

Pos : 9.32.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.22 Zeitablaufdiagramm e/7.22 Zei tablaufdiagramm e 02 - T abelle Bez eichnungen @ 4\m od_1336470889895_18.docx @ 17618 @ @ 1

Key
The timing charts use the following descriptions:

Motor running time with motor drives runtime

Main interrupter contact main contact
Wipe contact (auxiliary switch) wiper
NO contact (auxiliary switch) NO
NC contacts (auxiliary switch) NC
NO contact leading (auxiliary switch) NO em
NC contacts delayed break (auxiliary switch) NC lb

Pos : 9.32.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.22 Zeitablaufdiagramm e/7.22 Zei tablaufdiagramm e 03 - 8DN9 6, 8DQ1 LS Bild1 @ 13\mod_1351839430405_0.docx @ 76300 @ @ 1

Pos : 9.32.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.22 Zeitablaufdiagramm e/7.22 Zei tablaufdiagramm e 03 - 8DN9, 8DQ1 LS Bildu @ 13\mod_1351839483233_18.doc x @ 76323 @ @ 1

Fig. 7-11 Circuit-breaker - OPEN and CLOSE

Pos : 9.32.5 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-321
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.32.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.22 Zeitablaufdiagramm e/7.22 Zei tablaufdiagramm e 04 - 8DN9 6, 8DQ1 Bild2 @ 13\m od_1351840356986_0.docx @ 76346 @ @ 1

Pos : 9.32.7 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.22 Zeitablaufdiagramm e/7.22 Zei tablaufdiagramm e 04 - 8DN9, 8DQ1 Bildu @ 13\m od_1351840383595_18.docx @ 76369 @ @ 1

Fig. 7-12 Circuit-breaker, Operating sequence CO

Pos : 9.32.8 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.22 Zeitablaufdiagramm e/7.22 Zei tablaufdiagramm e 05 - 8DN9 6, 8DQ1 Bild3 @ 13\m od_1351840597063_0.docx @ 76392 @ @ 1

Pos : 9.32.9 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.22 Zeitablaufdiagramm e/7.22 Zei tablaufdiagramm e 05 - 8DN9, 8DQ1 Bildu @ 13\m od_1351840639344_18.docx @ 76415 @ @ 1

Fig. 7-13 Circuit-breaker, Operating sequence O - 0,3 s - CO

Pos : 9.32.10 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anw eisungen/M odule/7.22 Z eitabl aufdi agramme/7.22 Z eitablaufdiagramm e 06 - 8DN 9, 8D Q1 Bil d4 @ 13\mod_1351841327303_0.docx @ 76438 @ @ 1

Pos : 9.32.11 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anw eisungen/M odule/7.22 Z eitabl aufdi agramme/7.22 Z eitablaufdiagramm e 06 - 8DN 9, 8D Q1 Bil du @ 13\mod_1351841360772_18.docx @ 76461 @ @ 1

Fig. 7-14 Work-in-progress earthing switch - CLOSE and OPEN

Pos : 9.32.13 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anw eisungen/M odule/7.22 Z eitabl aufdi agramme/7.22 Z eitablaufdiagramm e 07 - 8DN 9, 8D Q1 Bil d5 @ 13\mod_1351841761585_0.docx @ 76484 @ @ 1

7-322
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions

Pos : 9.32.14 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anw eisungen/M odule/7.22 Z eitabl aufdi agramme/7.22 Z eitablaufdiagramm e 07 - 8DN 9, 8D Q1 Bil du @ 13\mod_1351841794195_18.docx @ 76507 @ @ 1

Fig. 7-15 High-speed earthing switch - CLOSE and OPEN

Pos : 9.32.15 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi ervorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-323
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.33 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

7-324
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.34.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.23 Druck-T emperatur-Diagr amm für SF 6/7.23 Hinw eis e z um Umgang mit SF 6 01 @ 0\m od_1331545030665_18.docx @ 4193 @ 2 @ 1

7.22 Pressure-temperature diagram for SF6

All indications for gas pressures always assume a temperature of + 20 °C, even if this has not been stated in
individual cases.
After evacuation a gas compartment is filled with gas up to the prescribed rated filling pressure at + 20 °C.
This filling then corresponds to a certain density.
If the temperature changes, then the gas pressure indicated on the pressure gauge will also change, but not
the density. Consequently, the gas pressures for various temperatures lie on a curve which is referred to as
the line of constant gas density.
If the gas density should change, e.g. due to loss of gas, a different constant gas density curve is applicable.
To get an accurate reading of the pressure gauge display, use the diagram.

Pos : 9.34.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.23 Druck-T emperatur-Diagr amm für SF 6/7.23 Hinw eis e z um Umgang mit SF 6 02 - Bild @ 6\mod_1343994465657_0.docx @ 40502 @ @ 1

Pos : 9.34.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.23 Druck-T emperatur-Diagr amm für SF 6/7.23 Hinw eis e z um Umgang mit SF 6 02 - Bildu @ 4\m od_1336476833572_18.docx @ 17718 @ @ 1

* Gauge pressure

Fig. 7-16 Pressure-temperature diagram for different gas densities (SF6).

The following examples demonstrate how it is to be used.

Pos : 9.34.4 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-325
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.34.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.23 Druck-T emperatur-Diagr amm für SF 6/7.23 Hinw eis e z um Umgang mit SF 6 03 @ 4\m od_1336477436866_18.docx @ 17729 @ @ 1

Examples
The examples do not apply to any particular type of switchgear.
If pressure values lie between two lines of constant gas density an interpolated density line must be used.

1. Example
The gas filling pressure at +20°C is 4 bar (gauge pressure). The pressure gauge indicates 3.5 bar at -5°C.

Question:
Is the indication in order or has a loss of gas occurred?
Answer:
There has been no loss of gas, because the value of 3.5 bar at -5°C lies on the same line of constant gas
density as the value of 4 bar at +20°C.

2. Example
The gas filling pressure at +20°C is 3.2 bar (gauge pressure). The pressure gauge indicates 3.25 bar at 50°C.

Question:
Is the indication in order or has a loss of gas occurred?
Answer:
3.25 bar at +50°C lies on a line of constant gas density which is equal to a gas pressure of 2.8 bar at +20°C.
There has, therefore, been a loss of gas that has led to a pressure loss of (3.2 – 2.8) bar = 0.4 bar referred to
+20°C.

3. Example
The gas loss found in the second example is to be made good by topping up the gas filling. The temperature
has in the meantime dropped to +32.5°C and the pressure gauge indicates 3.0 bar.

Question:
Which value must the pressure gauge indicate when topping up is completed?
Answer:
Topping up must continue until the density line is reached that at +20°C corresponds to the value of 3.2 bar
(gauge pressure). At +32.5°C, this density line corresponds to a pressure of 3.4 bar. Topping up must therefore
stop when the pressure gauge indicates 3.4 bar (gauge pressure).

Pos : 9.34.6 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-326
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.35.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.24 Sc hraubver bindungen, Anzi ehdrehmom ente, SL- Sicher ungen/7.24 Schr aubv erbi ndungen, Anzi ehdr ehm omente, SL-Sic her ung en @ 0\m od_1331537613355_18.docx @ 4091 @ 2 @ 1

7.23 Bolted connections, tightening torques, SL retaining clips

This Section describes the following in detail:

- Implementing bolted connections

- Identifying the strength grade
- Working with SL retaining clips
- Checking bolted connections.

Basic information:

Safety notices [ 0.2]

Pos : 9.35.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.24 Sc hraubver bindungen, Anzi ehdrehmom ente, SL- Sicher ungen/7.24.1 H erstell en ei ner Sc hraubver bindung 01 @ 0\m od_1331537708941_18.docx @ 4095 @ 3 @ 1

7.23.1 Assembling a bolted joint

For assembling the switchgear use only the bolts supplied. Spare bolts are included in the accessories pack,
in case any are lost during assembly work.
If the number of bolts supplied for the pressure vessels is insufficient, spare bolts must be ordered from the
factory only.

Warning!
If unsuitable bolts are used, they can malfunction and cause severe
personal injury.

All bolted joints must be tightened with a torque wrench set to the prescribed tightening torque. Arbitrary
tightening can result in damage due to loosening of bolted joints. Refer to the following table for tightening
torques.

 Notice
Take heed of deviations in drawings.

7-327
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions
Lubrication
Bolt threads must be greased before use to reduce the effects of friction on the tightening torque to a
minimum.The following lubricants have to be used:

- for hot-galvanized bolts for housing flanges “Molykote-Longterm 2” from Dow Corning
- for all other bolts “Centoplex 24” from Klüber Lubrication

Pos : 9.35.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.24 Sc hraubver bindungen, Anzi ehdrehmom ente, SL- Sicher ungen/7.24.1 H erstell en ei ner Sc hraubver bindung 02 - Bil d @ 6\mod_1343988431777_0.docx @ 40478 @ @ 1

Pos : 9.35.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.24 Sc hraubver bindungen, Anzi ehdrehmom ente, SL- Sicher ungen/7.24.1 H erstell en ei ner Sc hraubver bindung 02 - Bil du @ 0\m od_1331538071922_18.docx @ 4099 @ @ 1

Fastening elements for general use

a) Hex. socket head grub screws

b) Hex. socket head countersunk bolts
c) Studs
d) Nuts
e) Hexagon bolts
f) Cheese-head bolts with hexagon sockets

Fig. 7-17 Fastening elements for general use

Pos : 9.35.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.24 Sc hraubver bindungen, Anzi ehdrehmom ente, SL- Sicher ungen/7.24.1 H erstell en ei ner Sc hraubver bindung 03 - T abelle Anziehdrehmom ente @ 4\m od_1336478106776_18.docx @ 17740 @ @ 1

Tightening torques in Nm arranged according to strength class and thread size. The values apply to clean,
greased threads and any nuts.

Tightening torques for general applications for pressure

vessels
Strengh class 5.6 8.8 10.9 8.8
Thread sizes
M6 6 ± 0,5 8±1 8±1 8±1
M8 12 ± 2 20 ± 2 20 ± 2 20 ± 2
M 10 25 ± 3 40 ± 4 40 ± 4 40 ± 4
M 12 40 ± 4 70 ± 7 70 ± 7 70 ± 7
M 16 100 ± 10 170 ± 20 170 ± 20 170 ± 20
M 20 340 ± 30 340 ± 30 340 ± 30
M 24 600 ± 60 600 ± 60 600 ± 60
> M 24 see drawing data

Pos : 9.35.6 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-328
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.35.7 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.24 Sc hraubver bindungen, Anzi ehdrehmom ente, SL- Sicher ungen/7.24.2 Identi fizierung der Fes tigkeitskl ass e 01 @ 0\m od_1331541347514_18.docx @ 4128 @ 3 @ 1

7.23.2 Identifying the strength class

Hexagon bolts:

Pos : 9.35.8 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.24 Sc hraubver bindungen, Anzi ehdrehmom ente, SL- Sicher ungen/7.24.2 Identi fizierung der Fes tigkeitskl ass e 02 - Bil d2 @ 6\m od_1343979695826_0.docx @ 39490 @ @ 1

a) mainly raised or impressed on the top of the bolt

head, or
b) impressed on a flat

Pos : 9.35.9 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.24 Sc hraubver bindungen, Anzi ehdrehmom ente, SL- Sicher ungen/7.24.2 Identi fizierung der Fes tigkeitskl ass e 02 - Bil du @ 4\m od_1336478415356_18.docx @ 17751 @ @ 1

Fig. 7-18 An example of the strength class (here 8.8) shown on hexagon bolts

Pos : 9.35.10 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anw eisungen/M odule/7.24 Sc hraubv erbi ndungen, Anziehdrehmom ente, SL-Sic herungen/7.24.2 Identifizi erung der F estigk eitskl ass e 03 @ 6\m od_1343980132223_18.docx @ 39453 @ @ 1

Cheese-head bolts with hexagon sockets:

Pos : 9.35.11 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anw eisungen/M odule/7.24 Sc hraubv erbi ndungen, Anziehdrehmom ente, SL-Sic herungen/7.24.2 Identifizi erung der F estigk eitskl ass e 04 - Bild3 @ 6\m od_1343980350236_0.docx @ 39537 @ @ 1

a) mainly by raised or impressed figures on the top

of the bolt, or
b) impressed on the side

Pos : 9.35.12 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anw eisungen/M odule/7.24 Sc hraubv erbi ndungen, Anziehdrehmom ente, SL-Sic herungen/7.24.2 Identifizi erung der F estigk eitskl ass e 04 - Bildu @ 0\m od_1331542053523_18.docx @ 4132 @ @ 1

Fig. 7-19 An example of the strength class (e.g. 10.9) shown in cheese-head bolts with hexagon
sockets

Pos : 9.35.13 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anw eisungen/M odule/7.24 Sc hraubv erbi ndungen, Anziehdrehmom ente, SL-Sic herungen/7.24.2 Identifizi erung der F estigk eitskl ass e 05 @ 6\m od_1343980497081_18.docx @ 39561 @ @ 1

Studs:

Strength class / Symbol

Pos : 9.35.14 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anw eisungen/M odule/7.24 Sc hraubv erbi ndungen, Anziehdrehmom ente, SL-Sic herungen/7.24.2 Identifizi erung der F estigk eitskl ass e 06 - Bild4 @ 6\m od_1343980582817_0.docx @ 39585 @ @ 1

Pos : 9.35.15 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anw eisungen/M odule/7.24 Sc hraubv erbi ndungen, Anziehdrehmom ente, SL-Sic herungen/7.24.2 Identifizi erung der F estigk eitskl ass e 06 - Bildu @ 4\m od_1336478547631_18.docx @ 17762 @ @ 1

Fig. 7-20 Identification of strength class on studs

a) on the thread pint in figures, or . . .
b) . . . with symbols.

Pos : 9.35.16 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi ervorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-329
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.35.17 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anw eisungen/M odule/7.24 Sc hraubv erbi ndungen, Anziehdrehmom ente, SL-Sic herungen/7.24.2 Identifizi erung der F estigk eitskl ass e 07 @ 4\m od_1336479359348_18.docx @ 17773 @ @ 1

 Note
If a nut is used, the screw must protrude from it by at least one thread turn.

- Only the tightening torques for bolts of strength grade 8.8 shall be used for bolts of strength grade
10.9 and higher that are screwed into aluminum.

- The tightening torques for strength grade 8.8 apply for bolted connections on pressure vessels
(flange connections for Al vessels) and for bolts, nuts and studs made of SA540 grades B23/24,
material No. 1.6582 (34CrNiMo6 with tensile strength of 1000 N/mm2, 12% elongation).

- Only the tightening torques for bolts of strength grade 5.6 shall be used for studs (e.g. per DIN 833,
835, 836 and 939). The torques for the nuts must be applied in accordance with the table.

- Bolts and union nuts for tube fittings must be treated and tightened in accordance with the
corresponding sections of the operating instructions.

- If the bolted connections are tightened with the specified torque, this ensures sufficient contact
pressure, even after the bolt has settled. Deviating tightening torques may be measured in a
subsequent check.

Procedure:

1. Lubricate bolt threads.

2. Use rupture discs in accordance with drawing specifications.

3. Use a wrench to slightly tighten all bolts or nuts in a connection.

4. Tighten bolted connection with adjusted torque wrench according to procedure (table or drawing).
Specifications, values and tolerances must be strictly complied with. Any special requirements in the
associated drawing take precedence over the values in the table.

Pos : 9.35.18 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi ervorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1
Pos : 9.35.19 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anw eisungen/M odule/7.24 Sc hraubv erbi ndungen, Anziehdrehmom ente, SL-Sic herungen/7.24.3 Anziehdrehmom ente für Kabelv ersc hraubungen @ 33\m od_1479968216886_18.docx @ 677875 @ 344 @ 1

7.23.3 Tightening torques for cable glands

7.23.3.1 Tightening torques for cable glands and metal EMC cable glands

Cable glands must be tightened with the specified tightening torques based on the thread design and material.
Further information is given in standards EN 60423 for fittings with metric threads and DIN 40430 for fittings
with Panzergewinde (reinforced) threads.

EMC glands with metric threads:

7-330
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions

Fig. 7-21 Metal EMC gland with metric threads

SW1 SW2 Min.

Clamping area Clamping area L H max. D
Wrench size 1 Wrench size 2 tightening
Thread
torque
KB (mm) Shield (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) [Nm]
G ≥ ≤ ≥ ≤ AD
M12x1.5 3.0 6.5 2.0 5.0 14 14 6.0 28.0 12.0 3.0

M16X1.5 5.0 10.0 3.5 8.0 20 20 6.0 33.0 16.0 4.0

M20x1.5 6.0 12.0 4.5 10.0 22 22 6.0 32.0 20.0 5.5

M20x1.5 7.5 14.0 5.5 11.5 24 24 8.0 40.0 20.0 5.5

M25x1.5 10.0 18.0 7.0 14.0 30 30 8.0 43.0 25.0 6.0

M32x1.5 61.0 25.0 12.0 20.0 40 40 9.0 53.0 32.0 6.0

M40x1.5 22.0 32.0 18.0 27.0 50 50 9.0 60.5 40.0 12.0

M50x1.5 30.0 38.0 26.0 34.0 58 58 9.0 73.0 50.0 18.0

M63x1.5 34.0 44.0 30.0 40.0 68 64 14.0 62.0 63.0 25.0

Fig. 7-22 Tightening torques for metal EMC cable glands with metric threads

7-331
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions
EMC glands with metric threads or Panzergewinde (reinforced) threads:

Fig. 7-23 Metal cable gland with metric threads or Panzergewinde (reinforced) threads

SW1 SW2
Clamping area L H max. D Min. tightening
Thread Wrench size 1 Wrench size 2
torque [Nm]
KB (mm)
G ≥ ≤ (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) AD
M12x1.5 3.0 6.5 14 14 6.0 21.5 12.0 3.0

M16X1.5 4.0 8.0 18 17 7.0 23.0 16.0 4.0

M16X1.5 5.0 10.0 20 20 7.0 28.5 16.0 7.0

M20x1.5 6.0 12.0 22 22 8.0 25.0 20.0 5.5

M25x1.5 10.0 14.0 27 24 8.0 28.0 25.0 6.0

M25x1.5 11.0 17.0 27 27 8.0 32.5 25.0 8.0

M32x1.5 13.0 18.0 34 30 9.0 33.0 32.0 6.0

M32x1.5 15.0 21.0 34 34 8.0 36.0 32.0 8.0

M40x1.5 18.0 25.0 43 40 9.0 38.0 40.0 12.0

M40x1.5 19.0 28.0 43 43 9.0 43.5 40.0 12.0

M50x1.5 22.0 32.0 55 50 9.0 48.0 50.0 18.0

M50x1.5 27.0 38.0 58 58 9.0 52.0 50.0 18.0

M63x1.5 34.0 44.0 68 64 14.0 54.0 63.0 25.0

M63x1.5 37.0 53.0 75 75 10.0 50.0 63.0 25.0

Fig. 7-24 Tightening torques for metal cable glands with metric threads

7-332
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions
SW1 SW2
Clamping area L H max. D Min. tightening
Thread Wrench size 1 Wrench size 2
torque [Nm]
KB (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
G ≥ ≤ AD
PG7 3.0 6.5 14 14 6.0 22.0 12.5 3.0

PG9 4.0 8.0 17 17 6.0 23.5 15.2 4.0

PG11 5.0 10.0 20 20 6.0 24.5 18.6 5.0

PG13.5 6.0 12.0 22 22 6.5 26.0 20.4 5.5

PG16 10.0 14.0 24 24 6.5 28.0 22.5 7.0

PG21 13.0 18.0 30 30 7.2 32.5 28.3 10.0

PG29 18.0 25.0 40 40 8.0 38.5 37.0 15.0

PG36 22.0 32.0 50 50 9.0 48.0 47.0 20.0

PG42 30.0 38.0 58 58 12.0 48.5 54.0 27.0

PG48 34.0 44.0 64 64 14.0 53.0 59.3 35.0

Fig. 7-25 Tightening torques for metal cable glands with Panzergewinde (reinforced) threads

7-333
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions
7.23.3.2 Tightening torques for plastic cable glands

Fig. 7-26 Plastic cable gland with metric threads or Panzergewinde (reinforced) threads

SW1 SW2
Clamping area L H max. D Min. tightening
Thread Wrench size 1 Wrench size 2
torque [Nm]
KB (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
G ≥ ≤ AD
M12x1.5 3.0 6.5 15 15 8.0 23.0 12.0 2.0

M16X1.5 4.0 8.0 19 19 8.0 25.0 16.0 2.5

M16X1.5 5.0 10.0 22 22 10.0 30.0 16.0 2.5

M20x1.5 6.0 12.0 24 24 10.0 30.0 20.0 3.5

M20x1.5 10.0 14.0 27 27 10.0 33.0 20.0 3.5

M25x1.5 11.0 17.0 29 29 8.0 34.0 25.0 3.5

M25x1.5 13.0 18.0 33 33 10.0 35.5 25.0 3.5

M32x1.5 15.0 21.0 36 36 10.0 41.0 32.0 5.0

M32x1.5 18.0 25.0 42 42 15.0 41.0 32.0 5.0

M40x1.5 19.0 28.0 46 46 10.0 45.5 40.0 5.0

M40x1.5 22.0 32.0 53 53 18.0 50.0 40.0 5.0

M50x1.5 30.0 38.0 60 60 18.0 54.0 50.0 8.0

M63x1.5 34.0 44.0 65 65 18.0 54.5 63.0 12.0

M75x2.0 48.0 55.0 80 75 25.0 55.0 75.0 30.0

Fig. 7-27 Tightening torques for plastic cable glands with metric threads

7-334
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions

SW1 SW2
Clamping area L H max D Min. tightening
Thread Wrench size 1 Wrench size 2
torque [Nm]
KB (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
G ≥ ≤ AD
PG7 3.0 6.5 15 15 8.0 23.0 12.5 1.5

PG9 4.0 8.0 19 19 8.0 26.5 15.2 1.5

PG11 5.0 10.0 22 22 8.0 29.0 18.6 2.0

PG13.5 6.0 12.0 24 24 10.0 29.5 20.4 3.0

PG16 10.0 14.0 27 27 10.0 32.5 22.5 3.5

PG21 13.0 18.0 33 33 11.0 35.0 28.3 8.0

PG29 18.0 25.0 42 42 11.0 42.0 32.0 9.0

PG36 22.0 32.0 53 53 13.0 52.0 47.0 11.0

PG42 30.0 38.0 60 60 13.0 54.5 54.0 14.0

PG48 34.0 44.0 65 65 14.0 54.5 59.3 14.0

Fig. 7-28 Tightening torques for plastic cable glands with Panzergewinde (reinforced) threads
Pos : 9.35.20 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anw eisungen/M odule/7.24 Sc hraubv erbi ndungen, Anziehdrehmom ente, SL-Sic herungen/7.24.4 SL-Sic her ung en 01 @ 4\mod_1336479661634_18.docx @ 17794 @ 3 @ 1

7.23.4 Locking tabs

All locking tabs must be inspected for proper fit and freedom from corrosion.

Pos : 9.35.21 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anw eisungen/M odule/7.24 Sc hraubv erbi ndungen, Anziehdrehmom ente, SL-Sic herungen/7.24.4 SL-Sic her ung en 02 - Bild @ 6\m od_1343987408223_0.docx @ 40430 @ @ 1

Pos : 9.35.22 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anw eisungen/M odule/7.24 Sc hraubv erbi ndungen, Anziehdrehmom ente, SL-Sic herungen/7.24.4 SL-Sic her ung en 02 - Bildu @ 6\mod_1343987606924_18.docx @ 40454 @ @ 1

Fig. 7-29 Locking tabs

Pos : 9.35.23 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi ervorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-335
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.35.24 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anw eisungen/M odule/7.24 Sc hraubv erbi ndungen, Anziehdrehmom ente, SL-Sic herungen/7.24.5 Sc hraubver bindungen kontr ollieren @ 4\mod_1336479805027_18.docx @ 17805 @ 3 @ 1

7.23.5 Check bolted connections

All bolted connections were tightened to the specified torque during assembly. The threaded connection(s)
must be checked as follows:

1. Adjust the torque wrench to the specified torque. See table for values.

2. Position the torque wrench and tighten the bolt securely.

Warning!
Risk of personal injury from moving, uncovered parts.

- System parts can be damaged.

- The work shall only be performed if it is ensured that no switching operations can be performed on
the unit.

Pos : 9.35.25 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi ervorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-336
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.36 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.docx @ 906 @ @ 1

Pos : 9.37.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.25 Hinw eise z um Umgang mit SF6/7.25 Hi nweis e z um Umg ang mit SF 6 @ 0\mod_1331549800142_18.docx @ 4300 @ 2 @ 1

7.24 Instructions for handling SF6

This Section describes the following in detail:

- Physical and chemical properties of SF6

- Possible health hazards and general work hygienic requirements
- The requisite equipment for handling SF6
- Work on SF6 gas compartments
- Cleaning and disposal of the used materials and equipment.

Basic information:

Safety notices [ 0.2]

Evacuating, filling and emptying the gas compartments [ 7.2]

Pos : 9.37.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.25 Hinw eise z um Umgang mit SF6/7.25.1 Ges undheitsgefahren und allgemei ne arbeits hygienische F orderungen @ 4\m od_1336480579083_18.docx @ 17827 @ 3 @ 1

7.24.1 Health hazards and general occupational hygiene requirements

Commercially available pure SF6 is non-toxic. The SF6 used in the switchgear does not contain any harmful
contaminants. However, SF6 displaces the normal oxygen concentration in breathing air.

SF6 gas concentrations above 19 % by volume require special safety precautions!

Such concentrations may occur in open and unventilated SF6 gas compartments and at the bottom of tightly
closed system rooms, as well as in rooms below the ground level (e.g. basements, cable ducts)
The decomposition products of SF6 are of different levels of toxicity. These products may cause irritation to
the skin, eyes and mucous membranes and, if inhaled in large quantities, may cause nausea, dizziness and
pulmonary edema. However, even small amounts of gaseous decomposition products point out a hazard within
seconds by means of an unpleasant, pungent smell, even before there is a risk of poisoning.

Compliance with the following general occupational hygiene requirements is mandatory:

- Contact of the skin, eyes or clothing with the decomposition products and the ingestion or inhalation
of these products must be avoided.

- Disposable suits, used materials, filters from SF6 systems, breathing apparatus, maintenance
equipment or vacuum cleaners, switching dust and cleaning fluids must be disposed of in such a way
that dust and water-soluble fluorides contained therein are not released again.

- Personal hygiene as well as keeping clothing and workplaces clean is very important. Any dust
contacting skin must be rinsed off immediately with large quantities of water!

- Face, neck, arms and hands must be thoroughly cleansed with soap and plenty of water before work
breaks and after work.

- Eating, drinking and smoking as well as storing food in areas with opened SF6 systems containing
switching dust are prohibited.
Pos : 9.37.3 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-337
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.37.4 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.25 Hinw eise z um Umgang mit SF6/7.25.2 Umw elteinfl üss e v on Schw efelhex afl uorid (SF 6) 01 - NEU - ab J anuar 2017 v erwenden @ 34\m od_1485500509884_18.docx @ 684625 @ 3 @ 1

7.24.2 Environmental effects of sulfur hexafluoride (SF6)

Although SF6 is a gas that is non-detrimental to ozone, it is nevertheless considered to be a greenhouse gas
(GHG). The global warming potential (GWP) of SF6 is roughly 22,800 times greater than that of carbon dioxide
(CO2).
However, on account of the very low concentration of SF6, its impact on global climate warming is rather minor.
During the Kyoto Climate Conference in Japan in 1997, SF6 was put on the list of greenhouse gases to be
monitored and whose emissions are to be reduced worldwide by appropriate measures. The objectives of the
Kyoto Protocol were implemented in Europe on entering into force of the EU F-Gas Regulation (No. 842/2006)
in June of 2006. Additionally, the German voluntary commitment declaration has also existed in Germany since
May 2005.
The new regulation (EU) No. 517/2014 for fluorinated greenhouse gases is valid as of January 1, 2015 and
replaces Regulation (EC) No. 842/2006. The new F-Gas Regulation constitutes a contribution to further
reducing emissions from the industrial sector.
Documentation of the total filling quantities in kg/lbs of SF6 used in the switchgear system is provided at the
bay and in the switchgear system documents. The quantity for a bay is entered on the rating plates for the
system. The GWP and the individual quantities of SF6 [kg/lbs] and corresponding CO2 equivalent [kt] per gas
compartment are indicated in the gas monitoring drawings and on the gas pressure label. The fact that the
system contains SF6 is also indicated in a notice.
Pos : 9.37.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.25 Hinw eise z um Umgang mit SF6/7.25.2 Umw elteinfl üss e v on Schw efelhex afl uorid (SF 6) 02 - Bild Hinw eissc hild ab J anuar 2017 @ 33\m od_1484228319419_18.docx @ 682115 @ @ 1

Pos : 9.37.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.25 Hinw eise z um Umgang mit SF6/7.25.2 Umw elteinfl üss e v on Schw efelhex afl uorid (SF 6) 02 - Bildu Hi nw eissc hild auf SF6 Ky oto-Pr otok ol @ 26\m od_1396956519352_18.docx @ 237448 @ @ 1

Fig. 7-30 SF6 warning sign

Pos : 9.37.7 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.25 Hinw eise z um Umgang mit SF6/7.25.2 Umw elteinfl üss e v on Schw efelhex afl uorid (SF 6) 03 - NEU - Januar 2017 @ 34\mod_1485500541042_18.docx @ 684670 @ @ 1

In all cases, both the manufacturer as well as the system operator are obligated to take all appropriate
measures to prevent SF6 emissions during installation, service, maintenance, repair or decommissioning of
high-voltage switchgear equipment and systems as well as during transport, storage, recovery, recycling or
disposal of SF6.

 Notice
Under no circumstances shall SF6 be discharged to the atmosphere.
A fundamental prerequisite for this is the use of trained personnel and state-
of-the-art equipment.

Pos : 9.37.8 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h------------ @ 0\m od_1326983152848_0.doc x @ 906 @ @ 1

7-338
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.37.9 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.25 Hinw eise z um Umgang mit SF6/7.25.3 Phy sikalisc he und c hemische Eigensc haften @ 4\m od_1336480131123_18.docx @ 17816 @ 3 @ 1

7.24.3 Physical and chemical properties

Sulphur hexafluoride (SF6) is a colourless and odourless gas. Its density at 20° C and 1 bar (100 kPa) is 6.07
g/l. It is therefore approximately five times denser (heavier) than air. Under compression it can be easily
liquefied and can therefore be stored and transported in gas cylinders as liquid gas.
At an ambient temperature SF6 is chemically and thermally stable, inactive (inert), almost water-insoluble and
non-combustible.
Due to its high dielectric strength and excellent arc quenching properties, SF6 makes a good insulating and
extinguishing medium.
If SF6 escapes from an SF6 installation without becoming a turbulent mixture with the ambient air, with its high
density it may accumulate at ground level and penetrate basement areas. Once mixed with the ambient air
SF6 will not separate again.
SF6 decomposes if exposed to electrical discharges and arcs. Upon cooling, recombination occurs to a large
extent. However, it may react with air and water vapour, as well as construction materials (e.g. with volatile
flammable substances given off by contacts). Gaseous low sulphur fluorides and solid metallic fluorides (in
dust-form – known as switch dust) may thereby be produced in the presence of moisture, as well as hydrogen
fluoride. Some of these decomposition products can be detected by their unpleasant, pungent smell.

Pos : 9.37.10 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anw eisungen/M odule/7.25 Hi nweis e zum Umg ang mit SF 6/7.25.5 Ausrüstung für die Handhabung v on SF 6 @ 4\mod_1336480759348_18.docx @ 17838 @ 3 @ 1

7.24.4 Equipment for handling SF6

SF6 handling equipment should enable quick emptying and filling of gas compartments, effective and safe
handling and disposal of waste materials, and most important of all afford protection to personnel.
The range of equipment recommended depends on the nature of the work to be carried out.

Pos : 9.37.11 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anw eisungen/M odule/7.25 Hi nweis e zum Umg ang mit SF 6/7.25.3.1 Gas arbeiten außer hal b des Gasr aum es @ 4\m od_1336480875884_18.docx @ 17849 @ 4 @ 1

7.24.4.1 Carrying out gas-related work outside the gas compartment

The following equipment is recommended if the gas-related task can only be carried out outside the gas
compartment.

- Notices informing personnel of safety regulations, including drawings showing the layout of the switchgear
and division into compartments.

- SF6 maintenance unit or SF6 filling device with gas cylinder

- SF6 percentage measuring device

- device for measuring SF6 moisture content

- SF6 leakage measuring device

- Precision pressure gauge 0 - 10 bar (0 - 1000 kPa)

- First Aid equipment.

Pos : 9.37.12 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi ervorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-339
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.37.13 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anw eisungen/M odule/7.25 Hi nweis e zum Umg ang mit SF 6/7.25.3.2 Ar beiten im geöffneten Gasr aum, wenn k eine SF 6-Zers etz ungs punk te vor handen si nd @ 4\mod_1336481028464_18.docx @ 17860 @ 4 @ 1

7.24.4.2 Working inside gas compartments without SF6 decomposition products

In addition to the equipment recommended under 3.1, the following is recommended for work in an open gas
compartment:

- Electrical suction blower with hoses for the forced ventilation

- Cloth gloves

- Sleeve protectors

- Oxygen meter

- A sign indicating that there are persons in the gas compartment.

Pos : 9.37.14 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anw eisungen/M odule/7.25 Hi nweis e zum Umg ang mit SF 6/7.25.3.3 Ar beiten im geöffneten Gasr aum, wenn SF6-Z ersetzungs produk te vor handen sind @ 4\mod_1336481187013_18.doc x @ 17871 @ 4 @ 1

7.24.4.3 Working inside gas compartments with SF6 decomposition products

If work is to be carried out where SF6 decomposition products are to be expected (e.g. after a stray light arc),
the following is recommended in addition to the equipment listed under 3.1 and 3.2:

- Full vision safety glasses

- Half-mask breathing equipment with combination filter cartridge B2P2

- Cotton tricot gloves worn with protective gloves (rubber)

- Double-walled plastic rubbish bags and a plastic container for the used cleaning material

- A roll of cleaning cloths made of lint-free paper, a dustpan, brush

- High-power industrial vacuum cleaner with a fine dust filter (Category K1) to trap particles of up to 0.3
micrometers

- Pre-filter unit for the maintenance unit with adapters

- Measuring device for decomposition products with a corresponding number of test tubes.

Pos : 9.37.15 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi ervorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-340
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.37.16 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anw eisungen/M odule/7.25 Hi nweis e zum Umg ang mit SF 6/7.25.4 Ar beiten an Gasräum en @ 4\m od_1336481321797_18.docx @ 17882 @ 3 @ 1

7.24.5 Work in gas compartments

Pos : 9.37.17 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anw eisungen/M odule/7.25 Hi nweis e zum Umg ang mit SF 6/7.25.4.1 Gr unds ätzlic he Anforderungen @ 4\mod_1336481429100_18.docx @ 17893 @ 4 @ 1

7.24.5.1 Basic requirements

With all work in the gas chambers, you must ensure that

- no SF6 (even in very small amounts) escapes to the atmosphere

- the room of installation is well ventilated, particularly close to ground level
- no naked flame (e.g. welding flame) or hot surface (e.g. radiator) is located in the vicinity of work.

In addition, eating, drinking and smoking, as well as storage of foodstuffs, are prohibited during work on open
gas compartments.
SF6 gas compartments may not be opened until they have been emptied and the has been reduced to
atmospheric level.
For filling and emptying of SF6 installations, maintenance units which operate in enclosed systems must be
used. After connecting such a unit to the SF6 installation, the connections should be checked for leaks.
SF6 can be returned to the manufacturer in special cylinders.
Only the SF6 cylinders that are necessary for uninterrupted continuation of the work and connected to the
extraction equipment may be located in the installation rooms. In addition, it is permitted to store the same
number of cylinders again in the installation room. On SF6 plants without a SF6 cylinder continuously attached
to the removal device, you are permitted to hold a SF6 cylinder in readiness in the installation room. Additional
SF6 cylinders should be stored in a storeroom or outdoors.
If the occurrence of switch dust and/or decomposition products is anticipated, the following additional
precautions must be observed.

Pos : 9.37.18 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi ervorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-341
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.37.19 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anw eisungen/M odule/7.25 Hi nweis e zum Umg ang mit SF 6/7.25.4.2 Zusätzliche Anfor der ung en nac h sc hw eren Kurzsc hl uss absc haltungen @ 4\m od_1336481548136_18.docx @ 17904 @ 4 @ 1

7.24.5.2 Additional requirements following severe short-circuit disconnections

The occurrence of switching dust is not to be expected during normal operation. However, if switching dust is
to be expected after repeated severe short-circuit disconnections or if it cannot be ruled out for other reasons
that maintenance personnel could inhale gas or dust decomposition products, the following additional
procedures must be followed:

• If the release of larger quantities of SF6 is detected, immediately exit the equipment rooms as well as
rooms below and adjacent to them and rooms in connection with them.

• Thoroughly ventilate the rooms before re-entering. In particular, do not enter equipment rooms below
ground level until the oxygen content has been checked with an oxygen meter.

Because the switching dust forms a firmly adhering layer after absorbing moisture from the air, work must be
started immediately to remove the switching dust.

1. Wear suitable personal protection equipment in all cases before opening the circuit breaker, e.g. also
after technical ventilation of the system compartment.

2. Take the following sequence of steps to effectively remove accumulated dust without swirling it up:
- Loose dust with suitable vacuums
- Firmly adhering dust with dry, lint-free cloths
- All mechanical parts with ARAL 4005 or HAKU 1025/920 and all insulation elements with HAKU
5067.

3. Immediately rinse off switching dust that contacts the skin using large quantities of water or soap
solution.

4. Place switching dust, absorbents and filters as well as the materials and equipment used in suitable
plastic containers or double-walled plastic bags.

5. Dispose of switching dust, absorbents and filters in accordance with local procedures.

6. Clean or dispose of the materials and equipment used.

Pos : 9.37.20 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anw eisungen/M odule/7.25 Hi nweis e zum Umg ang mit SF 6/7.25.5 Rei nigung und Ents orgung der v erwendeten M aterialien und Ausrüs tungen @ 4\mod_1336481854453_18.docx @ 17915 @ 3 @ 1

7.24.6 Cleaning and disposing of used materials and equipment

Materials and equipment must be cleaned or disposed of so that the decomposition products they contain are
not released.
The owner is always responsible for cleaning and disposal tasks.

• Tools and appliances (e.g. vacuum cleaners) which have been in contact with decomposition
products must be wiped with dry cloths, then thoroughly cleaned with ARAL 4005 or HAKU
1025/920.

• Switch dust, absorption agents and filters from gas compartments, respiratory equipment, cleaning
and maintenance gear, disposable protective clothing and other materials which have been in
contact with the decomposition products, must be deposited in sealed containers and disposed of in
compliance with local regulations, stating refuse code ASN 59304 (materials contaminated with
chemicals) as necessary.

Pos : 9.38.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.26 Sauberkeit auf der Baustelle/7.26 Sauberk eit auf der Baustell e @ 0\mod_1331549095213_18.docx @ 4258 @ 2 @ 1

7-342
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions
7.25 Cleanliness on the project site
This section lists the most important requirements for cleanliness and tidiness on assembly, commissioning
and maintenance of the switchgear.

Basic information:

Safety notices [ 0.2]

The high insulation resistance of metal-encapsulated gas-insulated switchgear can only be achieved if, in
addition to the basic design concept implemented in manufacturing, correspondingly stringent cleanliness
requirements for the gas compartments of all modules are also met.

Caution!
Risk of damage to the switchgear due to electrical flashovers.

All internal parts of the gas compartments must be free from dirt and foreign particles. In order to ensure this,
the following requirements must be complied with at all times.
Pos : 9.38.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.26 Sauberkeit auf der Baustelle/7.26.1 F ertigstell ung des Gebäudes @ 0\mod_1331549126354_18.doc x @ 4262 @ 3 @ 1

7.25.1 Completing work on the building

Before any assembly housings are opened at the site, all work in the switchgear room must be completed and
the floor should be coated with a dust-binding primer. Windows and doors should be lockable. Caulking, drilling
and other such work must be prohibited inside the building while module assemblies are open.

If an air conditioning unit exists, it should be in operation before assembly work begins. The air conditioning
unit should not be turned on for the first time during switchgear installation due to the likelihood of whirling
dust.

Pos : 9.38.3 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.26 Sauberkeit auf der Baustelle/7.26.2 Ver pac kungsmateri al @ 0\m od_1331549196057_18.docx @ 4266 @ 3 @ 1

7.25.2 Packing material

After unpacking the module assemblies, remove the packing material from the site before any assemblies are
opened.
Pos : 9.38.4 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-343
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.38.5 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.26 Sauberkeit auf der Baustelle/7.26.3 R einigung des Sc haltanl agenr aumes @ 0\m od_1331549228338_18.docx @ 4270 @ 3 @ 1

7.25.3 Cleaning the switchgear room

• Regularly vacuum the floor.

 Notice
Don't use the same devices intended to vacuum gas compartments!

• Sweep only when using specially-designed brooms that hold dust. Dispose of waste immediately.

• Place a grating at the entrance or other floor treatment to minimise the amount of dirt carried into the
switchgear room.
Pos : 9.38.6 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.26 Sauberkeit auf der Baustelle/7.26.4 Sauberk eit und Ordnung bei Ar beiten an offenen Baugruppen @ 0\m od_1331549285636_18.docx @ 4274 @ 3 @ 1

7.25.4 Cleanliness and tidiness when working on open modules

 Note
When working on open modules, smoking, eating and drinking are
prohibited in the entire switchgear room.

• Before starting work on open modules, establish a special cleanliness area and identify it with a
barrier.

• Group components of the modules to be installed, tools and resources together by function.

• Provide suitable containers for collecting small parts, especially during disassembly work.

• Ensure proper waste disposal.

• Clean the exterior surfaces of the modules before opening them.

• Do not open housing covers until necessary, so as to minimize the ingress of moisture etc.

• Cover all housing openings with the provided covers during transport or intermediate storage.

• Empty clothing pockets before working on or in opened system modules!

7-344
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions
When working inside open modules, wear the following work clothes:

- Single-use protective suit

- Paper hood
- Paper shoe covers and
- Textile gloves

Wear the following work clothing when working through assembly openings, e.g. for installing shields,
depending on the depth of reach:

- Single-use protective suit or sleeve protectors

- Paper hood and
- Textile gloves

Close the modules dust-tight during every work interruption.

Before finally closing the housing, carefully check all accessible parts for freedom from dirt and grease and
clean if necessary. A module is considered to be carefully cleaned if no particles are visible to the naked eye
when illuminated with a hand lamp.

- If treatment with grease and Vaseline is specified, use grease and Vaseline sparingly.

- Use a vacuum cleaner and lint-free paper for cleaning inside modules.

- Only use approved chemical cleaning agents.

Cleaning [ 7.19]

Pos : 9.38.7 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.26 Sauberkeit auf der Baustelle/7.26.5 Sauberk eit v on Werk zeugen @ 0\mod_1331549372185_18.docx @ 4278 @ 3 @ 1

7.25.5 Cleanliness of tools

All tools, SF6 pressure hoses and other required items must be kept clean.

Pos : 9.38.8 /10 Sons tiges/01 Kopierv orlagen / Seitenum brüc he/-------------Seitenum bruc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-345
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.38.9 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.26 Sauberkeit auf der Baustelle/7.26.6 Vorsic htsm aß nahmen bei sc hmutz erzeugenden Ar bei ten @ 0\m od_1331549409014_18.docx @ 4282 @ 3 @ 1

7.25.6 Preventive measures for work likely to create dirt

As long as assemblies are open, the following measures must be carefully taken:

• Drive vehicles slowly into the work area.

• Open walls, windows and doors only when absolutely necessary.

• Ventilators and compressed air can only be used if they do not raise any dust.

• Set up workbenches in rooms separate from the switchgear whenever possible.

• Do not drill, file, scrape, sand, grind, brush or weld anything.

• If such work needs to be conducted on an assembly, shavings and residuals must be simultaneously
vacuumed out. Use the vacuum designed for cleaning the gas compartments.

• Conduct required reworking on interior parts outside the chamber whenever possible. If this isn't
possible, use special preventive measures like coverings or vacuuming to ensure that no foreign
particles remain in the assembly.

Pos : 9.38.10 /01 BETR IEBSANLEITUN GEN/7 Allgem eine Hi nweis e und Anw eisungen/M odule/7.26 Sauberk eit auf der Baustelle/7.26.7 Verantw ortllicher für Sauberk eit und Ordnung @ 0\m od_1331549460812_18.docx @ 4286 @ 3 @ 1

7.25.7 Person responsible for cleanliness and tidiness

It is appropriate to name a responsible person who will maintain the cleanliness of the assembly area for the
period of installation. The person's name should be identifiable at the site.

Appendix: Form "Person responsible for cleanliness and order".

Pos : 9.38.11 /10 Sonstiges/01 Kopi ervorl agen / Seitenumbr üc he/-------------Seitenumbr uc h----------------------- @ 4\mod_1338380864624_0.docx @ 18855 @ @ 1

7-346
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 9.39.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.27 Ents orgung von H oc hs pannungsschaltg eräten und Anl agen/7.27 Ents orgung von H oc hspannungsschaltger äten und Anl agen 00 - Übersc hrift @ 14\mod_1362126097325_18.doc x @ 99650 @ 2 @ 1

7.26 Disposing of high-voltage switching devices and systems

Pos : 9.39.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/7 Allgemei ne Hinw eise und Anw eis ungen/M odul e/7.27 Ents orgung von H oc hs pannungsschaltg eräten und Anl agen/7.27 Ents orgung von H oc hspannungsschaltger äten und Anl agen 01b -mit Isoli erflüssigkeit ( 8DQ1, 8DN 96) @ 25\m od_1391582636207_18.docx @ 227950 @ @ 1

Basic information:

Safety notices [ 0.2]

The switchgear is an environmentally sustainable product, consisting mostly of reusable materials.

In its delivered state, it contains no dangerous substances or preparations as defined by the current Chemicals
Act in force in Germany.

It must be noted, however, that dangerous substances may form if operating the switchgear with SF6. In this
case, please implement the appropriate measures described in the chapters on operation and maintenance.

The amounts in the following tables relate to an 8DQ1 cable feeder bay (approx. 17300 kg).

Disposal procedure:

• Lubricants must be removed first.

Lubricants Disposal instructions kg

SF6 Clean and reuse 800
Insulation fluid In grading capacitors on an aromatic hydrocarbon 21
base, non-halogen, PCB/PCT free (polychlorinated
bipheyls/polychlorinated terphenyls)
Filter material After use contains dangerous components, see 14
also chapter on maintenance

• A company specializing in the disposal of hazardous waste must be employed to dispose of the
insulation fluid and the filter material.

• The materials to be disposed of should as far as possible be sorted and separated. Materials with a
content of less than 1% are not counted.

Materials Disposal instructions kg

Aluminium Recycle through scrap merchant 7000
Iron Recycle through scrap merchant 6000
Copper Recycle through scrap merchant 1500
Plastic Industrial waste similar to domestic waste, thermal 750
recycling if appropriate
Rubber Industrial waste similar to domestic waste 800
Electronics, contactors, insulated Recycle through electronics waste disposal 250
cables, motors company

7-347
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions
Due to the long service life of the switchgear, the original instructions for disposal post-decommissioning may
be no longer valid, or country-specific laws may allow for other means of disposal.
Local customer support offices will be able to answer any questions concerning disposal.

7-348
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions
Pos : 10.1 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/Abbildungsverz eic hnis/1 Abbil dungsverz eic hnis - 01 Ü berschrift @ 25\m od_1395923922272_18.docx @ 235850 @ @ 1

List of Figures
Pos : 10.2 /01 BETRIEBSAN LEITUNGEN/Abbildungsverz eic hnis/2 Abbil dungsverz eic hnis - 02 Aufbau @ 25\m od_1395924442085_0.docx @ 235890 @ @ 1

Fig. 1-1 Break-Make operation with automatic reclosing (to IEC / VDE / ANSI) ................................... 1-31
Fig. 1-2 SF6 Data – terms ...................................................................................................................... 1-42
Fig. 1-3 Nameplate of a bay with circuit-breaker (example).................................................................. 1-48
Fig. 1-4 Nameplate of a current transformer (example) ........................................................................ 1-49
Fig. 1-5 Nameplate of a voltage transformer (example) ........................................................................ 1-50
Fig. 1-6 Nameplate for a RC divider (example) ..................................................................................... 1-50
Fig. 1-7 GIS circuit breaker P2 I variant, total weight 10150 kg ............................................................ 1-51
Fig. 1-8 GIS circuit breaker P2 L variant, total weight 10450 kg ........................................................... 1-52
Fig. 1-9 GIS ciruit breaker P2 U variant, total weight 10750 kg ............................................................ 1-52
Fig. 1-10 Disconnector and earthing switch modules, each with one bushing, one disconnector
and one or two earthing switches, approx. 960 kg (without motor, without linkage) ............... 1-53
Fig. 1-11 Current transformer with reducer casing 390 kg, without reducer casing 280 kg.................... 1-53
Fig. 1-12 Current transformer, with external core, single-pole, 150 – 700kg .......................................... 1-53
Fig. 1-13 Voltage transformer, 460 kg ..................................................................................................... 1-53
Fig. 1-14 RC-voltage divider, 260 kg ....................................................................................................... 1-54
Fig. 1-15 Cable connection module, without bushing 190 kg ................................................................. 1-54
Fig. 1-16 Cowl without bushing, 60 kg .................................................................................................... 1-54
Fig. 1-17 Extension module with 1 bushing............................................................................................. 1-54
Fig. 1-18 Connection module T/L module with one bushing ................................................................... 1-55
Fig. 1-19 Connection module T/L module with one bushing, 200 kg ...................................................... 1-55
Fig. 1-20 Busbar vacant bay without bushing, 360 kg ............................................................................ 1-55
Fig. 1-21 Busbar inner bay without bushing, 360 kg ............................................................................... 1-55
Fig. 1-22 Busbar end bay without bushing, without tie-rod compensation, 265 kg ................................. 1-55
Fig. 1-23 Busbar end bay without bushing, with tie-rod compensation, 370 kg ...................................... 1-56
Fig. 1-24 Rotary flange, 120 kg (single-pole) .......................................................................................... 1-56
Fig. 1-25 Reducer module, 110 kg .......................................................................................................... 1-56
Fig. 1-26 Expansion joint without bushing ............................................................................................... 1-56
Fig. 1-27 Expansion joint without bushing ............................................................................................... 1-56
Fig. 1-28 Overhead line termination module (adapter housing without outdoor bushing), 190 kg ......... 1-57
Fig. 1-29 Overhead line termination module (adapter housing without outdoor bushing),
190 kg (single-pole) .................................................................................................................. 1-57
Fig. 1-30 Overhead line termination module (adapter housing without outdoor bushing),
200 kg (single-pole) .................................................................................................................. 1-57
Fig. 1-31 Transformer connection module without bushing, 340 kg ....................................................... 1-57
Fig. 1-32 Surge Arrester .......................................................................................................................... 1-58
Fig. 2-1 Circuit-breaker control cabinet with electrical control .............................................................. 2-66
Fig. 2-2 Plug connectors in the CB control cabinet at the local control cabinet .................................... 2-67
Fig. 2-3 Plug connectors on the rear of the CB control cabinet at the CB drive cabinets ..................... 2-67
Fig. 2-4 Density monitor ........................................................................................................................ 2-70
Fig. 2-5 Viewport without/with cover ...................................................................................................... 2-71
Fig. 2-6 Viewport with camera set ......................................................................................................... 2-72
Figure 2-7 Arcing detection system ........................................................................................................... 2-73
Fig. 2-8 Coupler assembly type 1.1....................................................................................................... 2-74
Fig. 2-9 Partial discharge adapter for coupler type 1.1 ......................................................................... 2-75
Fig. 2-10 Identifying partial discharges.................................................................................................... 2-76
Figure 2-11 Voltage test adapter for type 1.1 sensor .................................................................................. 2-76
Fig. 2-12 VFT adapter ............................................................................................................................. 2-77
Fig. 2-13 DC adapter ............................................................................................................................... 2-77
7-349
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions
Fig. 2-14 Partial discharge sensor assembly type 1.2 ............................................................................ 2-78
Fig. 2-15 Configuration of Sensgear™ connectivity device .................................................................... 2-79
Fig. 2-16 Three pole circuit breaker GIS ................................................................................................. 2-81
Fig. 2-17 Circuit-breaker-pole, Type P3 (with closing resistor), I variant ................................................ 2-82
Fig. 2-18 Circuit breaker pole, L variant .................................................................................................. 2-83
Fig. 2-19 Circuit-breaker-pole, Type P3 (with closing resistor), U variant ............................................... 2-84
Fig. 2-20 Switching system ..................................................................................................................... 2-85
Fig. 2-21 Schematics of opening operation ............................................................................................. 2-86
Fig. 2-22 Double-break interrupter head with closing resistor (shown in part)........................................ 2-87
Fig. 2-23 Closing sequence ..................................................................................................................... 2-88
Fig. 2-24 Opening sequence ................................................................................................................... 2-89
Fig. 2-25 Spring-stored-energy mechanism, view of the charging mechanism ...................................... 2-91
Fig. 2-26 Function diagram of the spring-stored energy mechanism ...................................................... 2-92
Fig. 2-27 Disconnector ............................................................................................................................ 2-94
Fig. 2-28 Outgoing feeder disconnector with two earthing switches ....................................................... 2-95
Fig. 2-29 Outgoing feeder disconnector for 1 1/2 circuit-breaker arrangement
with one earthing switch ........................................................................................................... 2-96
Fig. 2-30 Busbar disconnector for connection of busbar 2 in a switchgear with a duplicate bus............ 2-97
Fig. 2-31 Busbar disconnector for connection of busbar 1 in a switchgear with a duplicate bus............ 2-97
Fig. 2-32 Conducting path section with moving contact (OPEN state) ................................................... 2-98
Fig. 2-33 Conducting path section with fixed contact and preliminary contact system ........................... 2-99
Fig. 2-34 Moving contact and preliminary contact system .................................................................... 2-100
Fig. 2-35 Conducting path section with fixed contact and commutating-current contact system ......... 2-101
Fig. 2-36 Moving contact and commutating-current contact system ..................................................... 2-102
Fig. 2-37 Bearings of the drive shaft ..................................................................................................... 2-103
Fig. 2-38 Triple-pole coupled drive shafts ............................................................................................. 2-104
Fig. 2-39 High-speed Earthing switches, indoor substations ................................................................ 2-105
Fig. 2-40 Design of the high-speed earthing switch (example) ............................................................. 2-106
Fig. 2-41 High-speed earthing switch, insulated ................................................................................... 2-107
Fig. 2-42 Spring-snap mechanism in switching position OPEN ............................................................ 2-108
Fig. 2-43 Simplified representation of the spring-snap mechanism in dead-centre position. ............... 2-109
Fig. 2-44 Work-in-progress earthing switch .......................................................................................... 2-111
Fig. 2-45 Design of the work-in-progress earthing switch (example) .................................................... 2-112
Fig. 2-46 Earthing switch, insulated (partial view) ................................................................................. 2-113
Fig. 2-47 Drive ....................................................................................................................................... 2-114
Fig. 2-48 Motor drive for high speed earthing switch ............................................................................ 2-115
Fig. 2-49 Motor drive for disconnectors and work-in-progress earthing switches ................................. 2-115
Fig. 2-50 Motor drive for disconnector and work-in-progress earthing switch (without cover plate) ..... 2-116
Fig. 2-51 High-speed earthing switch motor drive ................................................................................. 2-117
Fig. 2-52 Current transformer ................................................................................................................ 2-120
Fig. 2-53 Current transformer for installation in outgoing lines ............................................................. 2-121
Fig. 2-54 Internal view of a single-pole current transformer (example) ................................................. 2-122
Fig. 2-55 Possible short-circuit and insulation (principal) ...................................................................... 2-123
Fig. 2-56 Terminal box, open ................................................................................................................ 2-123
Fig. 2-57 Current transformer ................................................................................................................ 2-124
Fig. 2-58 Internal view of a current transformer (example) ................................................................... 2-125
Fig. 2-59 Terminal box, open ................................................................................................................ 2-126
Fig. 2-60 Terminal designations to IEC 61869 of a current transformer with
three secondary windings (each secondary winding with its own core) ................................ 2-127

7-350
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
General considerations and instructions
Fig. 2-61 Identification of CT mounting position referred to the circuit-breaker to IEC ......................... 2-127
Fig. 2-62 Terminal designation to IEC 61869 of a current transformer with
secondary winding tap (ratios entered) .................................................................................. 2-128
Fig. 2-63 Voltage transformer without integrated insulating section. .................................................... 2-130
Fig. 2-64 Voltage transformer without integrated insulating section. .................................................... 2-131
Fig. 2-65 Voltage transformer with integrated insulating section (manual drive) .................................. 2-131
Fig. 2-66 Voltage transformer with integrated insulating section (motor drive) ..................................... 2-132
Fig. 2-67 Terminal box, cover removed................................................................................................. 2-133
Fig. 2-68 Terminal designations of a voltage transformer with one
secondary winding with tap according to IEC 61869 ............................................................. 2-134
Fig. 2-70 Section of a RC devider ......................................................................................................... 2-137
Fig. 2-71 Design of the expansion joints ............................................................................................... 2-140
Fig. 2-72 Fastening point of a tie-rod; ................................................................................................... 2-140
Fig. 2-73 Subjections of the expansion joints ........................................................................................ 2-141
Fig. 2-74 Expansion joint module .......................................................................................................... 2-141
Fig. 2-75 Axial expansion joint module.................................................................................................. 2-142
Fig. 2-76 Inner bay version .................................................................................................................... 2-144
Fig. 2-77 Vacant bay version with facilities for connection.................................................................... 2-145
Fig. 2-78 Long end-bay version ............................................................................................................. 2-145
Fig. 2-79 Short end-bay version ............................................................................................................ 2-146
Fig. 2-80 Corner ball-type assembly with flexible connection (plan view) ............................................. 2-146
Fig. 2-81 Busbar connection module..................................................................................................... 2-147
Fig. 2-82 Sliding expansion joint module............................................................................................... 2-147
Fig. 2-83 Tie-rod (example) ................................................................................................................... 2-148
Fig. 2-84 Overhead connection module ................................................................................................ 2-149
Fig. 2-85 Overhead connection module ................................................................................................ 2-150
Fig. 2-87 Transformer termination (example) ........................................................................................ 2-153
Fig. 2-88 Transformer termination module ............................................................................................ 2-154
Fig. 2-89 Cover designs (examples) ..................................................................................................... 2-156
Fig. 2-90 Parts of a gastight and pressure-resistant joint prior to being bolted together ...................... 2-157
Fig. 2-91 Bushings ................................................................................................................................. 2-158
Fig. 2-92 Solid conductor connection .................................................................................................... 2-159
Fig. 2-93 Sliding contact ........................................................................................................................ 2-160
Fig. 2-94 Sliding contact for disconnector conductor joint..................................................................... 2-161
Fig. 2-95 Flexible connection (example) ............................................................................................... 2-162
Fig. 3-1 Welding the PE sheeting ........................................................................................................ 3-167
Fig. 3-2 Package with signs and labeling (example) ........................................................................... 3-171
Fig. 3-3 Label on shipping assembly (example) .................................................................................. 3-172
Fig. 3-4 Center of gravity marking on shipping unit (example)............................................................ 3-174
Fig. 3-5 Informational signs on sealed packaging ............................................................................... 3-189
Fig. 4-1 Centering pins ........................................................................................................................ 4-207
Fig. 4-2 Fitting bolts ............................................................................................................................. 4-207
Fig. 5-1 Operating regulations for the operation of the switchgear ..................................................... 5-221
Fig. 5-2 Hand crank and cordless screwdriver with friction clutch (for 2 to 3 Nm) .............................. 5-227
Fig. 5-3 Drive with cover for manual operation and electric locking .................................................... 5-228
Fig. 5-4 Charging the closing spring using a tool ................................................................................ 5-231
Fig. 5-5 Charging the closing spring by means of a special key with extended handle ...................... 5-232
Fig. 6-1 Drive with cover for manual operation and electric locking .................................................... 6-248
Fig. 6-2 Mechanical blocking device ................................................................................................... 6-248

7-351
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021
 r General considerations and instructions
Fig. 6-3 Example of securing with a padlock ....................................................................................... 6-249
Fig. 6-4 Max. permissible number of interruptions as a function of the breaking current. .................. 6-256
Fig. 7-1 Connecting the gas cylinder with SF6 filling device and safety valve .................................... 7-265
Fig. 7-2 Flange treatment of metallically bare surfaces of flanges and covers ................................... 7-278
Fig. 7-3 Indicator foil on torque limiter ................................................................................................. 7-282
Fig. 7-4 Auxiliary switch ....................................................................................................................... 7-284
Fig. 7-5 AMP plug ................................................................................................................................ 7-284
Fig. 7-6 Inspection of the dampers ...................................................................................................... 7-285
Fig. 7-7 Latching block ........................................................................................................................ 7-285
Fig. 7-8 Timing diagram for forming and main test with alternating voltage ....................................... 7-300
Fig. 7-9 Opened tins with filter material ............................................................................................... 7-304
Fig. 7-10 Rupture disc assembly ........................................................................................................... 7-308
Fig. 7-11 Circuit-breaker - OPEN and CLOSE ...................................................................................... 7-321
Fig. 7-12 Circuit-breaker, Operating sequence CO ............................................................................... 7-322
Fig. 7-13 Circuit-breaker, Operating sequence O - 0,3 s - CO.............................................................. 7-322
Fig. 7-14 Work-in-progress earthing switch - CLOSE and OPEN ......................................................... 7-322
Fig. 7-15 High-speed earthing switch - CLOSE and OPEN .................................................................. 7-323
Fig. 7-16 Pressure-temperature diagram for different gas densities (SF6). .......................................... 7-325
Fig. 7-17 Fastening elements for general use ....................................................................................... 7-328
Fig. 7-18 An example of the strength class (here 8.8) shown on hexagon bolts .................................. 7-329
Fig. 7-19 An example of the strength class (e.g. 10.9) shown in cheese-head bolts
with hexagon sockets ............................................................................................................. 7-329
Fig. 7-20 Identification of strength class on studs ................................................................................. 7-329
Fig. 7-21 Metal EMC gland with metric threads .................................................................................... 7-331
Fig. 7-22 Tightening torques for metal EMC cable glands with metric threads..................................... 7-331
Fig. 7-23 Metal cable gland with metric threads or Panzergewinde (reinforced) threads ..................... 7-332
Fig. 7-24 Tightening torques for metal cable glands with metric threads .............................................. 7-332
Fig. 7-25 Tightening torques for metal cable glands with Panzergewinde (reinforced) threads ........... 7-333
Fig. 7-26 Plastic cable gland with metric threads or Panzergewinde (reinforced) threads ................... 7-334
Fig. 7-27 Tightening torques for plastic cable glands with metric threads ............................................ 7-334
Fig. 7-28 Tightening torques for plastic cable glands with Panzergewinde (reinforced) threads.......... 7-335
Fig. 7-29 Locking tabs ........................................................................................................................... 7-335
Fig. 7-30 SF6 warning sign..................................................................................................................... 7-338

7-352
Restricted, © Siemens Energy, 2021